H12vxcvxcv

8/21/2019 H12vxcvxcv

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/h12vxcvxcv 1/537



Printday: 2007-01-27

JLZ040412.xls

I tem

1

2

3

4

7, 7-2

8

12

14

15

16

18

19

Descript ion

Information

RANGE 4 HOT PLATES+OVEN

COFFEE MACHINE M-2

UNIVERSAL MACHINE KU 2-4E

REFRIGERATOR 300L

WATER BOILER 151

DISHWASHER WT38

COFFEE MACHINE

IRONING BOARD WALL MOUNTED

MICROWAVE OVEN

TILTABLE FRYING TABLE

REFRIGERATOR 113L

WASHER-EXTRACTOR

Model No.

7BTOE2M44

CQFS22MM

540101

MR-300

BE3M

WT38M

HD7448

620135

RE-R40SM

168032S

ER45M

EW402F60

File

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13



O

S

•

O

2

^

^

^



LOiÂMT

Exclusive

Sales

of

B ] E l e c t r o l u x Marine Equipment

How to contact us...

Loipart AB

P.O. Box 694

S-441 IBAIingsås

SWEDEN

Phone: +46 322 66 83 60

Telefax: +46 322 63 77 47



LMPA

CUSTOMER INFO RM ATIO N February 20 05

Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux

Professional Marine Division on 1^' of Novem ber 200 3. As a result Loipart AB gained

World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry

Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.

Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of

Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine

equipment. This means that al l customers, both past, present and future, have the

convenience of a one in-house availabil i ty for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine

products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision

stores.

In order to help our Customers we have an After Sales Organization placed in

Alingsås to whom you are always welcome with Technical Questions and Problems.

You can reach the After Sales People on the following Addresses:

Manager

Jan-Oiof Gustafsson

Tel :

+46-322-66 83 68

Fax:+46-322-66 83 99

E-mail: ian-olof.qustafsson(S)lolpart.se

Joe O'Kane

Tel : +46-322-66 83 79

Fax:+46-322-66 83 99

E-mail: ioe.o kan e^loipa rt.se

Stefan Engelbrektsson

Tel : +46-322-66 83 89

Fax:+46-322-66 83 99

E-mail: stefan.enqelbrektsson@loipart .se

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



^ 3 M ssr^^M M J^wA

CUSTOMER INFO RM ATIO N February 20 05

Loipart AB took over the marine sales and project organisation of Electrolux

Professional M arine Division o n 1^' of Novem ber 200 3. As a result Loipart AB ga ined

World exclusivity and became the sole supplier of Electrolux Food and Laundry

Marine appliances and all Spare Parts for these.

Loipart Ltd, with over 25 years of experience, is the largest turnkey supplier of

Catering areas in the World and Electrolux the largest manufacturer of Marine

equipment. This means that al l customers, both past, present and future, have the

convenience of a one in-house availabil i ty for all Electrolux Food and Laundry Marine

products and Spare Parts, as well as Loipart turnkey Galleys, Pantries and Provision

stores.

To strengthen our After Sales Service in USA we have founded a new group

com pany , Loipart LLC, based in Ft Laude rdale, USA. Loipart LLC provides the same

service as Loipart AB in Sweden but is focusing on our American based customers.

For fastest possible service, p lease assign al l Marine Spare Part enquir ies

and Purchase Orders to your contact person according to the l ist below.

The enquiries and orders can be sent by fax or e-mail:

Loipart LLC

Morten Math iesen

T el : +1-954-522-8377

Fax: +1-954 522 8376

E-mail: aeneralmaiKaioipartl lc.com

Area responsibil i ty: USA

LOIPART AB

Br i t t -Mar ie A lmberg

Tel : +46-322-66 83 62

Fax: +46-322-66 83 99

E-mai l : br i t t -marie.almberqgi ioipart .se

Area responsibil i ty: Norway, Denmark and Finland



B a n k i n f o r m a t i o n

For Loipart AB

Bank: Nordea Bank Sweden AB

P.O Box 340

SE-441 27 Alingsås

Sweden

For Loipart LLC

Bank: HSBC Bank USA

1600 SE 17th Str.

Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33316

I n te rna t iona l Paym ents :

Account No: 3050 17 04019

IBAN account No:

SE55 3000 0000 0305 0170 4019

Swift Code: NDEASESS

Al l Payments:

Acc. No. 156717573

Swift Code: MRMDUS33

Domest ic Payments:

Postgirot: 111192-1

Bankgirot: 5693-8442

Notice:

Please make sure that the invoice number is

transferred as a reference with your

payment.

No withdrawals for bank charges outside

Sweden are accepted.

For more information, please contact:

For USA

For Rest of Tlie World



i

R

P

O

^

C

"

m

O

l

E

S

t

ø

P

O

^

®

W

•

^

ö

O

l

w

i

D



H Electrolux

Ranges,

electric

, ^ » H ^ H H H J H / - ^ *

• \ f

^ \ i

ä ( ^^c

M o d e l 7 B T S E 2 M 4 0

/ff iü

7ilSE

^.s

-'^

^9p ^S| { llp ^m ^ 9 ^ B

• S T AI N L E S S S T E E L E X E C U T I O N

• C O M P A C T D E S I G N - L A RG E

CAPACITY ON A SMALL SURFACE

• A D JU S TA B L E F L A N G E D F E E T

• I N C L U D I N G F R O N T H A N D R AIL

A N D R O L L I N G R A C K

• S T O R A G E C A B I N E T O R O V E N F O R

2 / 1 G N P A N S W I T H N O N - T I L T

G U I D E S F O R S A F E T Y

• M E E T S T H E R E Q U I R E M E N T S O F

V D E / C E

• T W O S IZ E S , S E V E N M O D E L S

• IPX 4

• 9 8 % R E C Y CL A B L E

BY

W E I G H T

These ranges are made entirely of AISI 304

stainless steel with a pressed, one piece top with

sealed hot plates to meet the highest hygiene

standards. Stainless steel control panel with

splash proteCTion to control knob entry points.

Thermostatic plate control with a 6 posit ion

rotary switch for accurate temperature control.

M onobloc models and top units

are

mounted on

height adjustable feet.

The models with oven are provided with a

thermally insulated cooking chamber, m ade in

stainless steel, with 3 pairs of non-tilting run

ners. Thermally insulated, double-walled oven

door mounted on a spring hinge. Stainless steel

h a n d l e . A m p l e s i z e d o v e n d i m e n s i o n s

530x650x300 mm with grid shelf in chromed

steel with integrated rolling protection. Heat

ing is by means of 2 in dependent incoloy ele



RA N G E S , E LE CT RIC

M o d e l 7 B T S E 2 M 4 0 , 7 B T S E 2 M 4 4

48.

•

f

1 ' 1

y

o o o o

^

J

— 6C

4

1 C

^

^

®

593

&

O

- 1 1 2 U .

700

700

M o d e l 7 B T O E 2 M 4 0 , 7 B T O E 2 M 4 4

48

^ " • • • • • < ~ l ^ w * • • •

;-»:-l

oo oooo

u

1

604

593

®'

O

- 1 1 2

700

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm

M o de l 7 B T O E 3 M 4 0 , 7B T O E 3 M 4 4

[

®

48

O O

1

Ü

'

o o o o o o

1

954

^

^

4 8

I 5 9 3

7 0 0

700

M o d e l 1 6 8 2 0 6 M

1. Elear ical conner t ion

2. Rolling rack

3.

Front hand rail

4.

Storage cabinet 680x640x420 mm

(models 16 81 13, 16 82 20 only)

5.

Oven 4.7 kW

(not models 16 81 13, 16 82 20)

Specifications

593

®'

O

o

o

1 1 2

o

700

700

M o d e l

Hotplates

0 2 3 0 m m

2.6 kW

0 1 5 5

mm

Oven

4 .7 k W

Voltage V*

Loading

kW

M a x amp s

in phase

Weight kgs

net

gross

Sh ip p in g

volume

m»

Side view, all models:

H75|

j30

2 0

850

1 5 0

' - 0

52.

^

ff

540

58

1

.55

M . ,

^0

- 1 1 0 8 —



C€

PR 700

-

CUCINE ELETTRICHE

INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE

- ELECTRIC COOKERS

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

-

ELEKTROHERDE

INSTALLATION, GEBRAUCH UND WAR TUNG

, - FOURNEAUX ELECTRIQUES

' INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN

- COCINAS ELECTRICAS

INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO

- ELEKTRISCHE FORNUIZEN

<

INSTRUCTIES VOORINSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK

EN

ONDERHOUD

- SPIS, EL

INSTRUKTIONER FÖR INSTALLATION OCH BRUK

- ELKOMFURER

INSTALLATION, BRUG OG VED LIGEHOLDELSE

Pag.

Page

Seite

Page

Pag.

Pagina

Sidan

Sida

5

9

13

17

21

25

29

33



DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITA

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA

VialeTreviso 15

33170 PORDENONE

Dichiara sotto la propria autorita che le macchine appartenenti a

questa docum entazione, descritta nella targhetta di identif cazio -

ne, sono conforme alle seguenti disposizioni legislative:

- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)

- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)

- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)

- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)

- Approval: VDE

Data: Pordenone 02.03lrt«(98

Nome: Piettt

skbile Stabilimento)

DECLARATIONE OF CONFORMITY

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL SPA

VialeTreviso 15

33170 PORDENONE

Declares on own authority that the machine present in this

documentation, described

in

the identification p late, conforms to

the legislative directions of the directive:

- European Directive 73/23/CEE (L.V.D.)

- European Directive 89/336/CEE (E.M.C.)

- European Directive 93/68/CEE (Amendment)

- European Directive 90/396/CEE (Gas Directive)

- A pproval: VDE

Date: Pordenone 02

Name: Pie

(Rdä|46frsabne Stabilimento)



(iC) SCHEMI Dl INSTALLAZIONE

e ) INSTALLATION DIAGRAM

O INSTALLATIONSPLAN

^

SCHEMAS D'INSTALLATION

I D ESQUEMA PARA LA INSTALACION

C:)^:)

INSTALLATIESCHEMA

€ 3 INSTALLATIONSRITNING

^ INSTALLATIONSDIAGRAM

O ESQUEMAS DE INSTALAQAO

^ ZXEAIArPAMMATA EfKATAZTAEHZ



I T

1

n

•

=H

— II

1 1

© ©

0 ©

7 0 0

8

b H

iL

^ p w

. ' " 4 . 4 5 0 Jlfijj.

00

350

f 1

^ ~

0 0 0

-© © ©

@@ @@ @@ @ ©

©hsrr

Q

54°

1

I

I



I. MAIN FEATURES

1. DESCRIPTION OF APPLIANCE

This booklet describes a number of appliance models.

For more detailed information about the model in your posses

sion, refer to "Technical Data" table.

2. TABLE TECH NICAL DATA

Installation drawing (see fig. 1)

I - Power supply cord entry

MO0EI.$

POWER SUPPLY

VOLTAGE (VOLT)

FREQUENCY (Hz)

MAXIMUM POWER

COOKING TOP (Kw)

MAXIMUM POWER OVEN

FORNO (Kw)

MAXIMUM POWER

(Kw)

POWER SUPPLY CABLE

SECTION (mm)

PLATES (1 .5Kw)- (Nr )

PLATES (2,6 Kw)

-

(Nr.)

I S »

top

230 3-

400 3N

50/60

5,2

5,2

4x1.5

5x1,5

2

1øp

230 3-

400 3N

50/60

9,3

9,3

4x2,5

5x1,5

1

3

1 »

cflblrwt

230 3-

400 3N

50/60

9,3

9,3

4x2,5

5x1,5

1

3

in va

cabinet

230 3-

400 3N

50/60

14,5

14,5

4x10

5x1,5

1

5

•t . ov*n

230 3-

400 3 N

50/60

9,3

4,95

14,25

4x10

5x2,5

1

3

t M

«1 , tmmti

MarfiM

400 3-

440 3-

50/60

9,3

4,95

14,26

4x2,5

4x2,5

1

3

1 M t f 2

•t. ovmt

Uartn«

400 3-

440 3-

50/60

14,5

4,95

19,45

4x4

4x4

1

5

3. PRECAUTIONS

• Before installing or using the appliance, carefully read this

instructions booklet, in as much as it contains important informa

tion concerning the safety, operation and maintenance of the

appliance. o.

• Keep this instructions booklet in a safe place for future consul

tation by other users or purchasers in the event that the appliance

is resold.

Important; Installation and m aintenance of tine aDOliance

Do not wash the appliance with water jets.

• Do not use products containing chlorine (bleach, hydrochloric

acid etc.) even diluted, to clean steel surfaces.

• Do not use corrosive substances (i.e. muriatic acid) to clean the

floor under the appliance.

• For more information, refer to the chapter on

"Care and

maintenance".

4. SAFEGUARDING THE

ENVIRONMENT

4.1. Packaging

• All the packaging materials used are environmentally friendly.

They may be stored at no risk or burnt at

an

authorised incineration plant. P lastic materials suitable for recycling are marked with

the following symbols:

/ \ polyethylene : external wrapping film, instructions

PE booklet bag and gas injectors bag

/ \

polypropylene:

top packaging panels and straps

PP

/ \ expanded polystyrene: protective surround elements

PS

4.2. Use

• The appliance has been designed and perfected under labora

tory testing conditions to offer exceptional levels of performance.

However, to minimise energy consumption (electricity, gas and

wa ter) , we recommend tuming the appliance off

when

not in use

for long periods and not using it, for example, with the door open

as this may impair

the

oven's performance. We also recommend

preheating the appliance immediately prior to use.

4.3.

Cleaning

• To minimise the emission of pollutants Into the environment, we

recommend cleaning the appliance (externally and , where nec

essary, internally) with products which are at least 90% biode

gradable.



rr INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLÄfiÖTsj

1.

POSITIONING

• Place the appliance under Its extraction hood to insure the

removal of all vapors generated whilst the appliance is working.

• Adjust the height and level of each cabinet by regulating the

adjustable feet.

• Whenever the appliance is to be placed near external or

dividing walls, kitchen furniture etc., it is recommended that

these be made of uninflammable m aterials; if this is not the

case,

then the same must

be

covered with

un inflammable heat resistant

materials. Close attention must be paid to fire prevention laws

and standards.

• Carefully peel off the plastic covering from the external panel,

if some of the glue remains attached it can be easily removed

using a suitable solvent.

• Close the holes on the side of the appliance by means of the

plugs supplied.

1.1 ASSEMBLY APPLIANCES (fig. 2)

• Remove the spacers from the holes "A" and "B".

• Provisionally set side by side the appliances. Level the height

of the appliances and then separate them.

• Apply

a thin

adhesive tape

"C"

on

the edge of

the

upper top that

goes alongside.

• Apply on the upper side of the top a seam "D" of sealant (c.r.

059611).

• Set side by side the appliances, fastening them through the

holes "A" and "B" with screws M5x20. Fasten them by means of

nuts and washers.

• Clean the sealant

in

eccess with a special spatule and remove

the adhesive tape.

2. ELECTRIC CONN ECTION

• Before carrying out the electric connection, make sure that the

voltage and frequency rated on the appliance data plate

conform to those of the mains supply.

• To accede to the main terminal board you just need to remove

the lower panel of the oven.

• The power supply cable must be flexible and of a type m atching

at least

the

qualities of

a

rubber-type cable H 05RN-F

and

it must

be protected by a stiff plastic pipe.

The cable shall be connected to the main terminal board accor

ding to the instructions of the wiring diagram attached to the

appliance and then fastened by means of a cable clamp.

• The appliance shall be connected to the mains through a

suitable automatic circuit breaker that leaves a gap of at least

3mm between its contacts.

• The m aximum leakage current is 1 mA/kW.

• The appliance must be earthed. To this purpose, inside the

appliance, near the main terminal board, there is a screw

marked with the symbol + to which must be connected the

earth wire.

The appliance shall be included in a correctly dimensioned

equipotential. The connection is carried out by means of a screw

marked with

the

symbol

"^, which is

located

near

the

front left leg.

The manufacturer declines any liability in case of no respect

of this safety rule.

2.1 SAFETY DEVICE

The appliance is equipped with a safety device having automatic

reset, which cuts in whenever the temperature exceeds the

maximum limit as set at factory and it interrupts the power supply

to the resistors.

If the safety device cuts in, it will be necessary to ask for an

authorized technician to eliminate the cause.



III. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

This appliance is intended for industrial

use,

and must only

be used by trained staff.

1.

INTRODUCTION

This appliance should be used only for cooking foodstuffs and it

shall not be used for other purposes.

• Our appliances have been designed and optimised by m eans

of laboratory tests to guarantee high levels of performance and

efficiency. However, to save energy (electricity, gas and water)

avoid using the appliance under no-load conditions or conditions

that impair optimal operation (e.g. with the doors/lids open).

Also, when possible, pre-heat the appliance before use.

Warning:

during operation the cooking tops become very hot.

2.

HOW TO USE THE COOKING TOP

• All plates have a temperature limiting device, which interrupts

the power supply whenever the temperature reaches 450 °C.

The temperature limiting device reset is carried out automa tically.

• In order to ensure correct use and energy saving, you must

observe the following:

- use pots and pans with a flat bottom and a diameter not smaller

than the one of the hot plates;

- turn on the plate only after having positioned the utensil on top;

- do not leave the plates on with no pots or when the pot on top

is empty.

- do not spill cold liquids on the hot plates.

2.1 SWITCHING ON THE COOKING TOP (fig. 3)

• Switch on the main switch installed ahead of the appliance.

• Turn control knob "A" of the desired plate so that the Index on

the front panel points towards one of the six available positions,

bearing in mind that position 1 corresponds to minimum power

and that position "6" corresponds to maximum power.

The green pilot lamp lights on to Indicate that the appliance is

live.

•

In

orderte adjust the plates heat, first set the knobs

on

position

"6"; once the maximum temperature or the boiling point has

been reached, bring the knob on a lower setting.

2.2 SWITCHING OFF

• Turn the appliance control knobs on "off' position.



3. HOW TO USE THE OVEN

4. CLEANING AND SERVICING

The resistor operating system is controlled by a four-positions

selector, whereas the temperature inside the chamber is control

led by a thermostat.

The selector enables to choose the type of heating by switching

on the most appropriate heating elements:

Note:

"off" position

"appliance on" position

upper and lower heating elements

lower resistor

upper resistors

All cooking processes must be carried out with the oven door

closed.

3.1 TURNING ON THE OVEN (fig. 4)

• Turn selector knob "C" for resistor control on one of the

operating positions.

The green pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the appliance is live.

• Turn thermostat knob "D" to the setting corresponding to the

desired cooking temperature which ranges between 140 and

320 °C. The yellow pilot lamp lights on to indicate that the

resistors are on. Its turning off indicates that the set temperature

has been reached.

Before proceeding with any cleaning or maintenance opera

tions, make sure that the power supply is disconnected at the

mains.

• To reduce the emission of harmful subtances into the

atmosphere, clean the appliance (externally, and internally when

necessary) with products featuring over 90% biodegradability.

• C lean the stainless steel surfaces daily with warm water

and

a

neutral soap, rinse thoroughly and dry carefully.

The cleaning of the said surfaces should never be effectuated

using aggressive detergents, common wire wool, brushes or

similar implements.

• Clean the plates with a damp cloth, then turn them on for a few

minutes as to let them dry quickly; finally lubricate them with a

thin layer of alimentary oil.

• If the appliance is not going to be used for

an

extended period

then the following precautions should be observed:

- Disconnect the power supply.

- Apply a protective film of Vaseline oil on the stainless steel

surfaces.

- Make sure that the premises is aired regularly.

CAUTION

•

Do not wash

the appliance

with

direct or

high

pressure w ater

jets.

• For

the cleaning of the

appliance

do

not

use

products containing

chlorine, bleach, chloric acid etc. even if diluted.

• Do not use corrosive substances such as hydrochloric acid

when cleaning the pavement surrounding the appliance.

• Do not spray cold liquids onto the hot plates.

• When scrapping the appliance, onbserve all regulations

governing waste displosal in the country of installation.

• Our appliances are m anufactured using more than 90

%

metal

(stainless steel, iron, aluminium, galvanaised sheet metal) and

therefore these may be recycled

in

conventioani waste recovery

sites in compliance with current standards in the country of

installation.

• Render the appliance completely inoperative by removing the

power cable and any other closure device (where fitted) to avoid

the risk of children being trapped inside.

4.1 SUGGESTIONS

It is advisable to periodically check the appliance (at least once

a year). To this end we advise you to obtain a maintenance

contract.



H] E lectrolux

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO

" MARINE" - ELECTRIC COOKER

CUCINE ELETTRICHE "MARINE"

PR700

Factory PNC

Model

Ref.

9731

168023

168024

168025

168026

RCF/E2M0

a

RCF/E2M4

b

RCVF/E3M0 c

RCVF/E3M4

d

Page

1,2

1,2

1,3

1,3

4 hot

piates,

400 V

4 hot piates, 440 V

6 hot piates, 400 V

6 hot piates, 440 V

Pag. 1 Main view

2 Electric component

Vista generale

Componentielettrici







El ect r i c cookers

C u c i n e e l e t t r i c h e

P N C

Ref. PNC Ref.

i æ 0 2 3 a

168024 b

P o s

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

32

33

33

34

C o d e

004244

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

054111

054113

004266

0A5459

*

*

053339

004586

004584

005369

*

059044

*

004253

004254

025020

004255

050766

052725

058613

054144

005962

*

*

*

054112

168025 c

168026 d

D e s c r i z i o n e

Pagina 1: Vista gen erale

Grigl ia

Traversa mobi le L 370

Ghlera

Traversa mobi le L 350

Traversa f issa

Traversa 1,5 m

Co l onn i na

Ripiano 6 piastre

Ripiano 4 piastre

Tappo

Guarnizione tappo

Supporto corrimano

Guarnizione laterale forno

Gu i da

Magnete

Cerniera port ina

Corr imano 700 mm

Corrimano 1050 mm

Perno

Manig l ia

Porta

Manig l ia

Supporto scrocco

Mol la

Chiusura forno

Cruscot to

Porta

Grigl ia

Cont roporta

Cern i e ra

Copr icern iera

Morset t iera

Suola

Piedino 3/4" Marine

Fianco Sx

Fianco Dx

Fianco destro

Guarnizione superiore forno

D e s c r i p t i o n

Page 1: Main view

Grate

Crosspiece

Ring nut

Crosspiece

Crosspiece

Crosspiece

Co l um n

Top panel

Top panel

P lug

Gasket

Support

Gasket

Runner

Magnet

Hinge

Handra i l

Handra i l

Pin

Hand l e

Door

Handle

Support

Spr ing

Fastening

Control panel

Door

Grate

Inner door

Hinge

Hinge cover

Junct ion box

Bottom

Foot, Marine

Left panel

Libretto d'uso

Side panel

Gasket mm.596

R e f . / N o t e s

c d /

c d /

c d /

a b /

c d

c d

a b /

c d /

c d

c d

c d

a b /

c d /

art . 516842400

art . 516841100

art . 516842300

art . 516841900

art . 516842100

art . 516841200

art . 870822403

art . 870822304

art . 546811800

art . 546811600

art . 516836200

art . 517856500

art . 517856600

art . 508888200

art . 514886600

art . 516840800

art . 521884601

art .0521884501

art .502883302



Electric cookers

Cucineelettriche

PNC

i æ 0 2 3

i æ 0 2 4

Ref.

a

b

PNC

168025

168026

Ref.

c

d

Pos Code Descrizione

Description

Ref.

/ Notes

55

56

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

051907

004552

004558

059257

004269

052099

059238

005370

005011

004274

004270

004271

053816

025245

005010

004268

053342

010227

005377

Pagina 2: Parti elettriche

Molla per piastra

Cruscotto

Cruscotto

Indice manopola

Limitatore di temperatura

Termostato

Commutatore

Resistenza di caduta

Lampada gialla tonda

Manopola

Manopola x termostato

Manopola

Guarnizione per manopola

Molla

Lampada verde tonda

Commutatore

Molla

Guarnizione

Resistenza forno

Page 2: Electric com ponent

Spring, tor plate

Control panel

Control panel

Pointer

Thermostat

Thermostat

Change over switch

Heating

Lamp

Knob

Knob for thermostat

Knob

Gasket, for knob

Spring

Lamp

Change over switch

Spring

Gasket

Heating element

a b

c d

b d



R1 2

/^

/i——ram—

j - m - , U ö ]

\

R I 1 /^

I

\

2 3 4

y

H I J L B I r-%"'

\

pJzL . j

B2

' fp p i

P3P: P:

\

R1 4

/^

'^^

/ i — r a m — I \

7

I

^ R13 \

f\

— rmu i— I

\

Me],

^J^

y

_, B4

p J t i

l l 2 34

KU

1t1

=3 P' Pi

V

EQUI POTENT I EL

LII.2L3 " POT. AUSGLEICH

440V~ 3 50/50HZ

14. 25KW 21A

LAMPADE 440V

PIASTRE 440V

B7

POS.

0

1

BB

^

^

1

A

•

•

•

•

2

B

•

3 | 4

C

•

•

6

D

•

•

7

E

•

•

8

F

•

•

9

G

•

•

•

•

B U B 5

POS.

0

5

5

4

3

2

1

5

P3

\\Z

PI

•

•

•

•

3 | 4

P2

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

R 12 / ^ " ^

/ j — ( n o — 1

N

i

/

^B ,y |

1

JL.

P I ^ i B2

ii|j

41]

\

y

V

=3p pa

_F

»-{D

R 1 4 / ^

/|—ram—I

y

1

4 , R13 \

/ | — n a n — • \

y

5ll 2 3 4 5

B3 r_L_i_ _i B4

Pi PI p;

*_F

H l

\

R15

/ I — r a m —

V

R15 \

/ | — r a m — I \

Melj

X

B5

p •>.

. " , B5

pj p'

MDy

\

440V- 3 50/60H2

14.25KW 21A

MA

B7

B 1 * B 6

R1*R15

H U H 2

F l

F2

MORSETTIERA ALIMENTAZI ONE

BORNE D'AL I MENTATION

MAIN TERMINAL BOARD

ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN

COMMUTATORE FORNO

SELECTEUR FOUR

COMMUTATOR OVEN

WÄHLER BAKHOFEN

COMMUTATORE

SELECTEUR

COMMUTATOR

WÄHLER

RES ISTENZE

RESIETANCES

RESISTANCES

HE IZKORPER

LAMPADA SEGNALAZIONE

LAMPE TEMOIN

PILOT LIGHT

SIGNALLAMPE

TERMOSTATO

THERMOSTAT

THERMOSTAT

THERMOSTAT

LIMITATORE DI TEMPERATURA

THERMOSTAT DE SECURITE

TEMPERATURE LIMITING THERMOSTAT

TEMPERATUR BEGRENZER

Mod.:ELECTRIC COOKER PR700 F r o m

s . n .

602847700



o

r

.

1

-

T

^

.

J

^

—

J

k

=

i



LOiPART

Coffee machines, manual/automatic

• STAINLESS STEEL

• EASYTOUSE

• N OZZLE EASILY REM OVABLE FOR

CLEANING

• DURABLE EN AME LLED HOT

PLATE WITH ROLLING RACK

M ade of high poUshed stainless steel plate.

Available in manua l or in autom atic version.

They are equipped with one respeaiveiy two

hotplates.

Brews according

to

the flow through princ i



C O F F E E M A C H I N E S , M A N U A L / A U T O M A T I C

Scale 1:10

Dimensions mm

1 .

Hot plate

2. Upper hot plate (models FS22M M and FS22AM only)

3. Water fdling with cover (manual models only)

4. Water co nne ai on, delivered with 1 meter rubber hose 1/2" (automatic models only)

5. Electrical connection, 1.5 meter cord with earthed plug type Schuko5

6. Rolling rack

Specifications

M o d e l

C Q F S l l M M

C Q F S 2 2 M M

C Q A I M

C Q F S 2 2 A M

N o . of jugs

supplied

1

2

1

2

Water feeding

manual

automatic

Ex tra h o t

keeping plate

-

X

-

X

Capacity

c u p s/h

1 5 0

Voltage

2 3 0 1 - 5 0 / 6 0

or 115 1-60

Lo a d in g k W

2.3

2.4

2.3

2.4

M a x a mp s

in phase

2 3 0 V

1 0

U 5 V

20

Weight kgs

net

7.3

gross

8

Sh ip p in g

v o lu me m^

0 . 1 3 0



A TASTE OF THE FUTURE

Manual

c o F F E E

QUEEN;

COFFEE QUEEN

M-1,

M-2, DM-2, DM-4

OFFICE TERMOS

SE

Svenska

GB

English



Innehåll / Table of co ntents

1.

Installation och igangsättning / Installation and start

2.

Bryggning av kaffe / Brewing of coffee

3. Skotselråd / M aintenance

4.

Viktigt

4. Important

5. Kontroi l /Ätgärd

5. Possible solution

6. Sprängskiss - Exploded view

7. Reservdelsförteckning

7. Sparepartlist

3 - 5

6 - 7

8 - 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

8. Elschema / Electrical diagram



8. Elschem a / Electrical diagram


Office

M l

M2

DM2

DM4

17

18

19

20

21

Garanti och Service



1. Installation och igangsättning / Installation and start

Placera maskinen./ Placing m achine.

'-'^-^C£:^j

1 .Placera m askinen på ett plant vattentätt underlag. SE

Locate the machine on a flat level and waterproof surface. GB

Elektrisk koppling / Electrical coupling

2.

OBS SE

Detta galler endast

M-1,

M-2 och O ffice. Ans lut stickproppen till ett separat jordat väg guttag.

230 V, 10 ampe re.

OBS

Detta galler enda st DM m askiner.

Anslut kaffebryggaren till ett 3-fas uttag

Maskinen skall installeras av en behörig elektriker

Bryggaren är

ej

om kopplingsbar

och

får endast installeras till einätet med den spanning

som är markerad på bryggaren och ska ll utföras av behö rig elektriker. Fast installation.

En huvudbrytare skall mon teras fore ma skinen, med mer an 3 mm kontaktgap.

CAUTION GB



1. Installation och igangsättning / Installation and start

Kontrollera värme plattor/ Hotplate function

II = ovre värm eplatta

II = upper hotplate

I = nedre värmep latta

I = lower hotplate

S.Koppia på m anöverbrytare; I for nedre värm e

plattor och II for ovre värmeplattor.

Kontrollera att lam pom a i l<napparna tänds och

att plattorna blir varm a. Koppla sedan ifrån-

manöverbrytama

I

och II.

SE

Tum o n control switches placed on the machines

left and the right side. (I and II).

Ensure that the lamps tum on and that the hot

plates get w arm.

Tum off

control

switches

I

and II.

GB

Bryggning m ed endast vatten / Brewing with water only.

Görförsta bryggningarna med endast vatten.

(For att rensa och tylla upp vattensystemet).

1. S attfilterhållaren på plats utan filter och kaffe.

Lyft upp locket och fyll på färskt kranvatten.SE

Do the first brewings with water o nly .

(To clean an d filling up water system ).

1.

Place filter holder without filter

and

coffee.

2. Lift up the co ver and fill the ma chine with

fresh tap water. G B



1.

Installation och igangsättning / Installation and start

Bryggning med endast vatten/ Brewing with water only.

Stall kannan på plattan under filterhållaren. SE

Vänta

i

2 minuter

så att

systemet avluftas.

Koppia

på

manöverbrytare

I

for

bryggning.

Bryggindikatorlampan

skall nu

tändas

och

vattnet

skall börja rinna ner

i

kannan.

Bryggningen tar

cirka 6

minuter

f fV 'f l il in llliiir^ 1lilirrrP;Ti|pii

I = nedre värmeplatta

for bryggning

'äÖ*'-*'^"

A"



2. Bryggning av l<affe / Brewing of coffee.

r

2.1.

Placera ett 90mm filter i filterhållaren. SE

Place

a

90mm filter

in

the filter

hoder.

GB

2.2.

Hall i en portion kaffe - 100/ 125 gram

s.k.restaurangmalning (malning mellan kokoch

brygg).

Bred ut kaffet jämnt

i filtret.

SE

Add coffee , restaurant / catering grounded coffee).

Make

sure that the

coffee

is

evenly

spread.

GB

2.3.

Sattfilterhållaren på plats. SE

Place

the filter hoder. GB



2 . B r y g g n i n g a v k a f f e / B r e w i n g o f c o f f e e .

2.5.

Stall kanna n under fiiterhållaren och sa tt på

locket. SE

Place the pot under the

filter holde r and close the

cover. GB

Koppla på m anöverbrytare I for bryggning.

SE

I = for bryggning

I = for b rewing

Turn on control switch I for brewing. GB

Under bryggningen (6 min)

lyser kontrollampan.

2.6.

Om Ni vill varmhålla en kanna o ch sa mtidigt

brygga en ny:

Placera kannan som skall varmhållas på den

ovre varm hållningsplattan. Koppla på

manöverbrytare

II. SE

II

=

ovre värm eplatta

II

=

upper hotplate

OB S Detta galler endast modellerna M-2,

DM-4

• - - , /

If

a

second b rewing is necessary, keep the

first pot at the required temperature by

placing on the upper hot plate.

Turn on control switch

II .

GB



3. Skotsel råd Maintenance

/y^\

Fore varje bryggning . SE

Skölj kannan.

Before each brewing. GB

Rinse the decanter.

OBS SE

Maskinen får ej överspolas

eller nedsänkas i vatten.

y

• ^

( ^

CAUTION

GB

The machine should not be

Subm erged in water orWash ed in a

dishwasher

Varje dag. SE

Diska kannan och filterhållaren me d

rengöringsmedel for kaffemaskiner.

Torka rent spridarmunstycket och området runt

detsamma.samtvärmehällen.

Använd endast en mjuk trasa och flytande

rengöringsmedel so m inte repar.



3. Skotse l råd /Main tenance.

Varje vecka. SE

Each week. GB

Rengöring

Hall 50 ml rengöringsmedel / avkalkningsmedel for

kaffemaskiner

i

en kanna och fyll den med kallt vatten.

Hall sedan blandningen av vatten och

rengöringsmedel i maskinen och genomfor en

bryggning utan pappersfilter och kaffe i filterhållaren.

Efter detta maste minst 3 bryggningar ske med enbart

rent vatten for att skölja bort alia rester av

rengöringsmedlet.

Regelbunden användning av rengöringsmedelför

kaffebryggare reducerar uppbyggnaden av kalk dar

detta ä rett problem.

Kontrollera att halen i spridarmunstycket ej är

blockerade av kalk.

Skruva bort spridarmunstycket och rengör halen vid

behov.

Vid anslutning

till

va tten med hög kalkhalt

rekommenderas att ett kalkfilter monteras fore

maskinen.

Vid utvändig rengöring använd mjuk trasa och

flytande rengöringsmedel som inte repar.

Descaling and cleaning.

Pour 50 ml descaling / cleaning solution in a pot

and fill it up with cold

water.

Pour the mixture in the machine and proceed with

a brewing without a filterpaper or coffee.

Rinse by brewing at least 3 times with clean water

so that the particles from descaling solution

disappear.

Regular descaling/cleaning will ensure optimum

brewing performance and a longer life of the

machine.

Check that the spray nozzle is unblocked.

Dismount and clean if necesserily.

In areas with high level lime problem, a

descaling filter should be m ounted.

Surface cleaning. Use a soft rag and liquid

solution that does not scratch.

; i \

Om du ska diska glaskannan i en diskmaskin.

SE

Tag av locket och placera glaska nnan upp och ned i

diskmaskinen.



4.

Viktigt.

Viktigt

Gör

inte

ingrepp

i

bryggaren. Felaktiga åtgarder

kan leda til

personskador

och

funktionsfel.

Bryggaren bor

stå på

ett plant

underlag

for

att den

skall

arbeta

tillfredsställande.

Bryggaren skall

placeras

på

ett vattentätt

underlag så

a tt eventuellt utiäckande

vatten

blir synligt.

Se til

att

det

inte bildas veck

på

anslutningsslangen när

bryggaren

skjuts

på

plats.

Bryggarens tillopps och W S-anslu tning skall kontrolleras

regelbundet.

Kontrollera att inte någonläcka haruppstått i samband med installationen.

Vattenanslutningenkanalltidinnebäravissriskförläckageoavsettsäkerhetsutrustning.

Lämna

inte bryggaren

helt

utan tillsyn

när

den

är

igång. Stang vattenkranen då maskinen

inte

används.

Vid alia ingrepp I bryggaren maste denna göras spänningslös t. ex. genom att stickproppen tas ur

vägguttaget, detta galler

M-1,

M-2, Office

termos. Vid

arbete

med

DM-2, DM-4, maste

arbetsbrytaren slås av och låsas.

Allt installationsarbete maste utföras av behörig personal.

VARNING

For att undvika skada på glaskannan eller

att den på annat olämpligt satt görs obrukbar

Tvätta noggrant

före

användning.

Värm inte upp rengöringsmedel i kannan

Rengör inte med material som kan orsaka repor

eller sprickor

i

glaskannan.

Varmhåll aldrig glaskannan

på spis,

värmehäll eller liknande.

Undvik att

stöta i

kannan mot hart material.

Kassera kannor

som

har

en

spricka, är repad

eller uppvärmd tom.

Servera inte kaffe

i

riktning mot

en

levande.

Bär aldrig två glaskannor i en och samma hand.



4 . I m p o r t a n t .

Important.

Do not make any alterations to the ma chine. Such m easures m ay cause personal injury and the

machine to

fail.

The machine should stand on a flat surface so that it will func tion properly.

The machine should be placed on a water-proof surface so that any leakage is easily noticeab le,

make su re there is no bend age on the conne ction tube whe n ma chine is pushed into its place.

The tube conn ections should be regularly

checked.

Make sure that no leakage has occu rred in

connection w ith installation.

Do not leave the machine u nattended while using. Close water connection when not using

machine.

The machine m ust be disconnected from e lectrical supply before any maintenance.

This applies to single-phase current m achines. Before any m aintenance disconnect the plug from

the wall socket.

Before any maintenance w ith double-machines: Tum off the hea dswitch andlock it.

All maintenance and Installations must be done of an authorized pe rsonel.

WARNING

TO AVOID BREAK AGE

AND INJURY

DO NOT BOIL LIQUIDS IN PO T

DO NOT CLEAN WITH MATERIALS THAT SCRATCH.

DO NOT USE ON RANGE TOP

OF

ANY KIND.

DO NOT BUMP

DISCARD IF CRACKED , SCHRATCHED, OR HEATED EMPTY.

DO NOT POUR TOWARDS PEOPLE .

DO NOT CARRY TWO DECANTERS IN ONE HAND.

WASH B EFORE USING.



5. Kontroll/Atgärd.

Symptom Kontroll/Atgärd.

(Siffror i parantes hänvisartill detaljnunnmer

1

sprängskissen.)

A. B rytaren () tänds inte.

1. Kontrollera anslutningen tili vägguttaget/arbetsbrytaren.

2. Kontrollera säkringen tili väggutaget/arbetsbrytaren

(10 amp).

3. Kontrollera om värmeplattan biir

varm,

om så är fallet

byt brytare

4.

Kontrollera anslutningen till brytare

B. Värmeplattan blir ej varm

fastän brytaren tänds.

1.

Kontrollera anslutningen tili elementet

2.

Trasigt element, om så är fallet byt ut det.

C. Bryggaren ångar kraftigt.

1.

Maskinen

kan

vara i behov

av

avkalkning.

2.

Spridarmunstycket kan vara igensatt.

3. Veck på slangen ?

4.

Tilloppet till bryggelementet kan vara igensatt.

D. Byggindikatorlampan

tänds inte, bryggaren börjar

ej att brygga.

1.

Överhettningsskyddet har löst ut. Aterställes

med knappen på densamma. Orsak se punkt C.

2.

Kontrollera m ikrobrytaren.

3. Kontrollera fiottören .

E. Bryggindikatorlampan tänds,

men bryggaren börjar ej att brygga.

1. Kontrollera anslutningen till bryggelementet

2.

Bryggelementet kan vara trasigt.



5. Possible solutions.

Fault Possible Solution

(Number in brackets refer to the exploded view)

A. Switch does not light. 1. Check plug connection to wall socket.

2.

Check fuse in

plug.

3. Check if hot plate becomes

warm,

if so

replace switch.

B. Hot plate does not become

warm although switch is lit.

1.

Check connection to elem ent.

2.

If element defective, replace.

C. Brewer omits excess steam.

1.

Machine may require descaling.

2.

Spray nozzel may need unblocking.

3. Hose, may be bent?

4.

Inlet to boiler may be blocked. Descale.

machine - if boiler still defective - replace.

D. Brewing lamp does not

light, machine w ill not brew.

1. Trip-switch has activated - reset with button.

For possible fault / solution see C.

2.

Check microswicth.

3. Check float.

E. Brewing lamp is lit but

machine will not brew.

1. Check connection to boler.

2.

Boiler unit may need replacing.



6 . Sprängsk iss / Exp loded View

M1,

M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos



7 . Reservde ls fö r t eckn ing . M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office termos

Benämning

Värmehällstallrik

Värmehäliselement

Termos vac 1,9 liter

Lock

med sil

Strömställare enkel

Strömställare dubbel

Brygg ndikator

Plasttank

Spridarmunstycke

Bryggelementkpl .

Backventil

Överhettnlngsskydd

Kallvattenslang

Hetvattenslang

Brytpinne

Flottör

Mikrobrytare

Fot

Nätsladd

inkl.

plint

Nätsladd

Serveringskanna

Lock, serverkanna

Filterhållare/rostfri

Bestaun,

nr.

120811

160101

1103256 Office

1204041

160801-04

160802-04

160804-03

120400

120427

120501

120612

160212-03

150502

150504

180170

120402

160821

1203202

160522

160523

110303

110402

1102016

Detalj.nr.

1

2

3

4

5

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

18

20

20

21

22

23

IVI1

( a n

0

4

0

M2

al de

2

2

-

1

0

4

0

DIVI2

laljer)

2

2

-

2

2

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

0

1

2

2

2

DM4

4

4

-

2

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

0

1

2

2

2

Office

termos

.

-

-

-

-

1

Funktlonsbeskrivning

Kaffebryggare för manuell vattenpåfyllning.

I tanken finns en flottör som aktiverar en mikrobrytare när vatten fylls på.

Mikrobrytaren aktiverar i sin tur bryggelementet och bryggningen startar.



7. Spare parts l ist.

M1, M2, DM2, DM4, Office term os

Description

Hot plate

Hot plate heater

Thermos vac 1,9

litr.

Cover and strainer

Main switch single

Main switch double

Brewing lamp

Plastic tank

Spray nozzle

Boiler compl.

Non return valve

Trip switch

Cold water hose

Hot water hose

Pin

Float

Micro switch

Feet

Connection lead

Connection lead

Glass decanter

Lid, glass decanter

Filter holder/stainless

Art. no.

120811

160101

1103256

of f ice

1204041

160801 - 04

160802-04

160804-03

120400

120427

120501

120612

160212 - 03

150502

150504

180170

120402

160821

1203202

160522

160523

110303

110402

1102016

Detai l no.

1

2

3

4

5

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

18

20

20

21

22

23

IVI1

( a m

0

4

0

IVI2

ount

2

2

-

1

0

4

0

D M 2

ler uni'

2

2

-

2

2

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

0

1

2

2

2

DIVI4

)

4

4

-

2

0

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

0

1

2

2

2

Off ice

t e r m o s

.

-

-

-

-

1

Instructions

Coffee machine for manual water filling.

In the tank there is a float which activates a microswitch when water is

filled.

Microswitch activates element unit and brewing starts.



8. Elschema/ Electr ical diagram

230 V-v-

OFFICE

B1 H uvudbrytare/brytare for elem ent E1

B2 Mikrobrytare for eleme nt E2

B3 Aut.

Överhettningsskydd for element

E2

84 Man. Överhettningsskydd for ele

ment E2

B1 Main switch/switch for elemen t E1

B2 Microswitch for eleme nt E2

B3 Au t. High limit for element E2

B4 Ma n. High limit for element E2

51 Lamp for switch B1

52 Lamp for element E2



8 . E l s c h e m a / E l e c t r i c a l d i a g r a m

230 V -

SI

rr

Q O-

B? B3

El

(b ^

S2(X)E2'

B4

77

M-1

B1 Hu vudbrytare/brytare for eleme nt E1


B3 Aut. Ö verhettningsskydd for element E2

B4

Man.

Överhettningsskydd for element E2

51 Signallampa for brytare B1

52 Signallampa for element E 2

M-1

B1 Main switch/switch for element

E1

B2 Microswitch for elemen t E2

B3 Aut. High limit for element E2

B4 Ma n. High limit for eleme nt E2


8. Elschema/ Elect r ical d iagram



o &

SI

0 &

S2

230 Vô-

Q G 0 -

B3 B4

I

E l P E2

S3(X)E3i

4

0—ef

rTtn

BS

M-2

B1 H uvudbrytare/brytare for element E1

82 Brytare for element E2

B3 Mikrobrytare for elemen t E3

B4 Aut.

Överhettningsskydd for element E3

B5 Man. Överhettningsskydd for elemen t E3


5 2 Signallampa for brytare B2

M-2

B1 Main switch/switch for eleme nt E1

B2 Switch for elemen t E2

B3 Microswitch for element E3

B4 Au t. High limit for elemen t E3

B5 M an. High limit for eleme nt E3



8. Elschema/ Elect r ical d iagram



s 8 -

B l

-<g)

1

SI

rn'O

E l

B 2

<^

B 3

S 2 ( X ) B 2

B 4

// // /

B l

// //"/

S I

o o I o

B2 B3

B l

S2 (X) Eac

<5

B 4

DM-2

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E 1 -E 2


B3 Au t. Overhettningsskydd for elemen t E2

B4 Ma n. Overhettningsskydd for element E2


DM-2

B l Main switch/switch for eleme nt E1

E2

B2 Microswitch for elemen t E2

B3 Aut.

H igh limit for elemen t E2

B4 M an. High limit for elemen t E2

8. Elschema/ Electr ical diagram



B l

SI

B 2

S2

R 8 -

S e -

N o -

B 3

l E l P E 2

B 4

S3 (X) E3t

•c

é *—m 1|

BS

fTTTI

B l

SI

B 2

S2

n ^

l ~J ^9 O-

B 3 3 4

i B l E E 2

S3 CO ES'

%3

^rrn

« o—m i|

B 5

DM-4

B1 Huvudbrytare/brytare for element E1

82 Brytare for element E2

B3 Mikrobrytare for element E3

B4A ut. Överhettningsskydd for elemen t E3

B5 Man . Överhettningsskydd for element E3



DM-4

B1 Main switch/switch for elem ent E1

B2 Switch for eleme nt E2

B3 Microswitch for eleme nt E3

B4 Aut. High limit for eleme nt E3

B5 M an. High limit for element E3





COFFEE QUEEN

M-l, M-2, DM-2, DM-4

OFFICE

Galler endast Sverige / Sweden only

Garantibestämmelser

2 års garanti på

delar.

Gällerförbristfälligheter i konstruktion, m aterial eller tillverkning.

For att garantin skall galla förutsättes att skötselinstruktionerna har följts, att skälig

aktsamhet har lakttagits och att felanmälan har gjorts utan dröjsmal, samt att berörd

utrustning inte använts i aw aktan på service om risk finns att skadan eller bristen

skulle förvärras.

Garantin omfattar inte förbrukningsartiklar

som

glas,

normalt underhall som

rensning av silar och

filter,

fel på grund av föroreningar, kalk eller fel spanning,

tryck eller justering av vattenmängd.

Garantin omfattar ej heller följdskador som orsakats avfel på eller felaktig hantering

av apparaten.

Garantin upphör att galla efter reparation eller liknande ingrepp av foretag annat an

av oss rekommenderat.

Office Queen Termos

2 års garanti lämnas på felaktiga delar insända till Coffee Queen AB .

FOR SERVICE

C O F F E E

QUEEN

F S W E D E N

FOR SERVICE

Väniigen kontakta din aterförsäljare Please contact your retail dealer

c



=

L

—

A

j

.

—

^

I

„

Ö

c

^

n

k

o

=

^

^

m

^

?

^

^

^



Driving ynitsi

stationary l i igh-base casing

cont inuous electronic

speed control

automat ic of f -swi tch according

to DIN ES regulations

driving device for

at tachments in f ront

pe r fo rm ance : 80 0 W a t t

llL '

stationary casing

2 working speeds

pulse

two driving devices for

at tachments in f ront and on top ;

pe r fo rm ance ; 60 0 W a t t

. 1



Krefft Großküchentechnik GmbH

Ersatzteilliste Kernstück KU 2 -4 E

Spare Part List Motor Unit KU 2-4 E

Liste de Pieces Détachées Noyau de Base KU 2-4 E

230 V, Art.Nr. 541103,

1/N/PE

50 Hz

Pos.

Item

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Art. Nr.

Art. No.

No.d'

article

840082

840294

840103

840094

840099

840100

840098

840085

840101

840090

840091

840298

840096

840083

840299

840088

840092

840295

O.Abb.

840313

840143

102162

840977

840114

840093

840105

840104

840081

840327

840034

840617

840150

Benennung

Denomination

Denomination

Sechskantwelle / Hexagon shaft / Arbre hexagonal

Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover / Couvre - engrenage

Dichtung für Getriebedeckel / Gasket for gear cover / Joint p. couvre - engrenage

Radialdichtring / Radial gasket / Bague d' étanchéité radiale

Sicherungsring / Safety ring / Circlip extérieur

Nilosring / Nilosring / Bague

Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement ä billes

Stirnrad / Cylinder gear / Roue dentée

Paßfeder / Feather key / Clavette parallele

Distanzbuchse / D istance shell / Douille d'écartement

Zweilochmutter / Round nut with holes / Ecrou ä deux trous

Ritzel komplett / Pinion shaft assembly / Pignon compl.

Kugellager/ Ball bearing / Roulement ä billes

Ritzelwelle / Pinion shaft / Arbre de pignon

Resitex - Zahnrad / Fibre

gear/

Roue dentée compl.

Scheibe / Disc / Disque

Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal

Getriebegehäuse / Gear housing / BoTte å vitesse

Getriebe komplett / Gear

compl.

/ Couvre compl.

Bimetall - Temperaturschalter

Sechskantschraube / Hexagon screw / Vis hexagonale # M 5 x 18 DIN 933

Fächerscheibe / Toothed Washer / Rondelle # A 5,3 DIN 6798

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis å tete cylindrique #

M 5x 12 DIN 84 A2

Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille

Scheibe / Flat Washer / Disque

Filzstück / Felt piece / P iece de feutre

Dichtung für Getriebedeckel oben / Gasket for gear cover, upper /

Joint p. couvre - engrenage, dessus

Getriebedeckel oben / Gear cover, upper / Couvre-engrenage, dessus

Motor

kpl.

/ Motor

compl.

/ M oteur

compl.,

230 V, 0,8 kW

Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque / A 5,3 x 14 A2

Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw / Vis ä tete

cylindrique ä six pans creux# M 5 x 25 DIN 912

Befestigungsleiste / Fastening element / Element de fixation

Preisgruppe

Price Group

Clé des prIx

15

12

01

11

01

01

08

16

00

02

02

21

08

13

13

00

00

21

auf Anfrage

08

00

00

00

00

00

03

01

13

36

00

01

01




Ersatzteilliste Ke rnstück KU 2-4 E



230 V,

Art.Nr.

541103,

1/N/PE

50 Hz

Pos.

Item

Pos.

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

Art. Nr.

Art. No.

No.d'

article

840991

840977

840316

840161

840315

840141

840140

840783

840034

840037

840011

840320

840053

840051

840177

840321

840016

840986

840323

840322

840324

840965

102151

840319

840317

840031

840029

840125

Benennung

Denomination

Denomination

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis ä tete cylindrique #

M 5x 20 DIN 84

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis ä tete cylindrique #

M 5 x 1 2 DIN 84 A2

Schutzkappe für

Ü-Schalter

(Pos 109) / Protecting cap / # (ab J an. 2002)

Potiachse (Einzelteil aus Pos 88) /

Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre

Überstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V /

Interrupteur å maximum 4 A 230 V / (ab

Jan.

2003)

Isolierung / Insulating material / Isolement phonique

Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 125

Zylinder - Blechschraube / # 2,9 x 9,5 DIN 7971

Unterlegscheibe / Pot wheel shaft / Arbre de la potentiometre /#

A

5,3x14

A2

Gummifuß / Rubber cushion / Amortisseur caoutchouc

Bodenplatte / Base plate / Plaque de base

Netzanschlußleitung (3 x 0,75mm') / Connecting cable /

Cable d' alimentation

Knickschutztülle / Cable guard / Tuyau de protection p. cab les

Zugentlastunsschelle / Clip / Collier p. cables

Haltemutter / Nut / Ecrou de fixation

Kernstückgehäuse / Housing / Carter

Traggriff / Handle / Poignée

Linsen-Blechschraube/Parker screw/Ecrou #B 4,2x16 DIN

7981

A2

Dichtung für Motorentlüftung / Gasket / Joint

Motorentlüftung / Venting for motor /

Trägerwinkel für Steuerplatine / Holding device for control system /

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis å tete cylindrique #

M 4 x 25 DIN

84

A2

Fächerscheibe/Toothed Washer/Rondelle # A4 ,3 DIN 6798 A2

Steuerplatine MS-1 / Control system /

Störmelder "Übertemperatur" / Operational monitoring system for motor /

Zylinderstift mit Kreuzschlitz / Toothed Washer / Rondelle

Linsensenkschraube / Oval countersunk screw / Vis å tete fraisée bombée

Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant / Cylinder socket head cap screw /

Vis ä tete cylindrique å six pans creux # M 5 x 14 DIN 912 A2

Preisgruppe

Price Group

Clé des prix

00

00

02

02

13

05

00

00

00

01

08

09

02

05

04

22

18

01

02

17

01

00

00

25

18

08

01

01




Ersatzteilliste Kernstück KU 2-4 E



230 V, Art.Nr. 541103, 1/N/PE 50 Hz

Pos.

Item

Pos.

83

84

85

86

87

88

cAbb

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

Art. Nr.

Art. No.

No.d'

article

840134

150167

840040

840135

840136

840318

840332

840137

840300

840109

840046

840139

840286

840035

840043

840034

840027

840973

840978

Benennung

Denomination

Denomination

Zentriemng für Potiachse / Centering / Bague de centrage

Knebel / Knob / Manette

Stützfuß / Supporting foot / Pied de support

Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 DIN 125

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis å tete cylindrlque #

M 5x 14 DIN 84

Elektronikplatine ROS 55 / Electronic control / Regulation électronique

Isolierplatte zwischen Platine und Motor / Isulation between electronik control

and motor/ Isolement p. Regulation électronique

Steckerleiste / Female multipoint connector /

Douille connecteur multibroche

Kernstückunterteil mit Gewicht / S ode with weight / S ocle avec poids

Zylinderschraube mit Schlitz / Bolt screw / Vis ä tete cylindrlque #

M 3x 1 8 DIN 84 A2

Überstromschutzschalter 4 A, 230 V / Overload breaker 4 A 230 V #

Interrupteur ä maximum 4 A 230 V (bis Jan. 2003)

Platinenstütze / Standard / Bras - tréteau

Zwischenplatte / Plate / Plaque intermédiaire

Scheibe / Disc / Disque /

Bundbuchse / Liner / Douille

Unterlegscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 5,3 x 14 A2

Gewindebolzen / Threaded bolt / Boulon fileté

Sechskantmutter / Hexagon nut / Ecrou hexagonal # M 3 DIN 934 A2

Fächerscheibe / Disc / Disque # A 3,2 DIN 6798 A2

Preisgruppe

Price Group

Clé des prix

02

02

04

00

00

28

02

12

42

00

13

02

05

00

00

00

00

00

00



Ersatzteill iste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103



Ersatzteilliste KU 2-4 E, 230 V, AN 540103



.

=

k

C

=

A

o

m

r

V

n

f

>

>

I

c

—

p

L

?

^



gLOiPAMT

Exclusive

Sales

of

H E l e c t r o l u x

Marine Equipment

Refrigerators & Freezers, M R /M F

This range of refrigerators and freezers in

tended for storage of refrigerated and frozen

food is specially developed for marine use.

D E S I G N

• Reliable, easy to clean and durable con

struction.

• E xterior and interior are made of stainless

steel quality AISI 304.

• Hygie nic top cover

is

standard (not m od

els M R / M F 1 2 0) .

• Fitted wi th fan forced air circulation.

• CFC and HC FC free R40 4a refrigerant

and 60 mm thick polyurethane insulation.

EASY TO INSTALL

• Removable refrigeration unit evaporator,

condenser, compressor) located on the top of

the cabinet (models 30 0 ,40 0 , and 550

only).

• Reversible door equipped with lockable

handle and easy removable magnetic door

gasket.

EASY TO USE

• GN adapted.

9 Clean cooler air conduc ted through an

special cold air filter bui lt in to the

base

of the

cabinet is reducing the compressor running

time and saving power.

• Refrigerators fitted wi th an autom atic

defrost and automatic melt water evapora

tion.

Freezers fitted with a fast and efficient a uto

matic hot gas defrost and frame heater.

9 Thermostatically controlled temperature,

micro processed digital thermostat-thermo

REFRIGERATORS & F RE E ZE R S M R /M F 1 2 0 , 3 0 0 , 400, 550



Scale

1:20

Dimensions mm

M O D E L S M R / M F 3 0 0 , 4 0 0

AND 550:

1 0 0

mm

free space necessary

for ventilation

and

service

wy/////////2Æ

• 7 5 0

-

- 5 6 0 -

]

^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

Detail

of

marine foot

1. Control panel

2. Electrical connection,

2 m

cord with plug included

3.

Adjustable marine feet (+50/-10)

The unit

is to be

levelled

and

bolted

to

deck.

Specifications

-

refrigerators (operating temperature:

+2° to

+8°C)

M o d e l

Capacity

litres

W ire

shelves

incl.

Refrigerant Voltage V*

Power

k W

Fuse, slow

A

D ime n sio n s mm

A

B

C

Weight kgs

net

gross

Sh ip p in g

v o lu me m^

R EF R IGER ATOR S & FR EE Z ER S M R /M F 120, 300 , 400 , 550



M O D E L S M R / M F 1 2 0 :

Detail of marine foot

760

1. Control panel

2 .

Electrical connection, 2 m cord with plug included

3 .

Adjustable marine feet (+60/-0)

The unit is to be levelled and bolted to deck.

Operating temperature:

refrigerators 2° to +8°C

freezers -18° to-25°C

Specifications

M o d e l

M R - 1 2 0

M F - 1 2 0

Type of cabinet

refrigerator

freezer

Capacity

litres

1 2 0

W ire

shelves

incl.

2

Refrigerant

R404A

Voltage V*

2 30

1-50/60

Power

k W

0.3

0.4

Fuse, slow

A

1 0

W e i g ht ^ s

net

7 3

gross

92

Sh ip p in g

volume m^

0 . 7 1 0

' available in 115

1

-60, other voltages available on request

REFRIGERATORS & FREE ZERS M R/M F 1 20, 300 , 400 , 550



REV 06/2003



REV 06/2003



^

^ lUMiiB ' N M B I J M B ' H I ^ Jjggf fggg jgg^ g

Before

use and

installation

Receiving

the

goods

Installation

Start-up

Use

Use SM D12 control unit

Malfunction codes

Cleaning by the user

Malfunction

Guarantee

3

3

3

4

4

5

6

6

7

8

PRODUCT INFORMATION

-

TUOTETIEDOT

Type

of

unit

/

Tyypi

Serial number

/

Valmistusnumero

Place

and

date

of

purchase

/

Ostopaikka

ja

-aika

REV 06/2003



I ^pf' J^gjgj^j^ß^ ^ ^ ^ ^gß"

PLEASE READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THESE INSTRUCTIONS FOR FURTHER USE AND OTHER USERS.

FOLLOWING THESE INSTRUCTIONS CONTRIBUTES PRO PERAND LONGTERM

FUNCTION OF THE UNIT FOR MAXIMUM EFFICIENCY AND MINIMUM SERVICE

AND REPAIR COSTS.

FOR GUARANTEE, SEE PAGE 8.

THESE INSTRUCTIONS APPLY TO UNITS MR, MF AND MRF 2/2

Examine the unit before accepting the delivery.

In case of any dam age, please note the waybill and report

to yourfonwarder and supplier immediately.

Guarantee does not cover damages due to transportation.

Unpack the unit at sight.

Remove the protection films on outer surfaces of the unit.

Cabinet shall be fixed to a deck through the three

0 9 mm bolting holes existing in the flange of each

adjustable stainless steel feet. If necessary feet can be

welded to a deck.

Feet can be adjusted after bolt-mounting.

Ü

REV 06/2003



Should the unit still be cold when taken in, humidity will condensate

on its surface In wintertime.

Do not plug on the unit until it has dried

and reached the room temperature.

Protect the cabinet from direct sunlight and other objects radiating heat,

such as

owen,

radiator etc.

The ambient temperature must not rise above +32°C or fall below +5°C.

Ensure the voltage and frequency band is fitted with the cabinet and

connect the unit to earthed socket protected with a 10 amp. fuse.

Let the cabinet stay on its final place for 2 hours before f :, "

starting-up. The time is needed for the machinery l-, \

\

lubrication oil to run into the oil compartment o f ^ i — | ' . - '

compressor. \.^.. j

Clean the unit thoroughly before start-up with m ild

\ '..' '

dish washing solution or other suitable detergent.

\

/

Do not use scouring powder.

Unpack the shelf package and set the shelves in place. L I ' ' p

Do not add any products until the unit has reached ^'\~'

the required operation temperature.

1 i

Cold Line Marine cabinets are made for storage of chilled and frozen food.

REV 06/2003



1 4

* 1 ^ * , . *

, SMD12 1 ^

1.

Electronic thermostat and thermometer

with automatic functions preset at the

factory

2.

Display

3. Info menu button and alarm reset button

4.

Tem perature set button

5. PLUS-button

6. Main switch and MINUS-button

/ ; 7 \

^1 ,•^1

t

r

LJL

SMD12

-1*1—1

?S

I

1

r^

A

0

^

START-UP AND STANDBY

Push the main button 6, and the display shows three parallel

dashes - - for 3 seconds.

Pushing the button 6 will start up the unit or put it into standby.

Standby STATUS gives an OFF-indication on display.

To disconnect the unit unplug the cabinet.

TEMPERATURE ADJUSTIMENT

During normal operation, the display shows the inside

temperature of the counter.

Tem peratu re adjustm ent range for chiller is + 2° C...+15° C

and for freezer - 25° C...+ 5° C.

Pushing the button 4 wil l indicate the temperature set value.

Should you want to increase the temperature, first push the

R E V 0 6 / 2 0 0 3



^ 8 ^ ^ ^ ^ ' ' jiii|l|ffl'*ffl J É S ^

S S B ^ fSS3& I

if the unit fails to work properly, there will be an audible alarm signal and

an alarm flashing on the display. Push button 3 to stop alarm signa l.

If the display shows:

E1,

there is fault in the temperature sensor. Call for service.

E2, there is a fault in the defrost sensor. The unit will work, but there is no

temperature reading displayed. Defrosting takes place as programmed.

Call for service.

E3, there is a fault in the condenser sensor. Call for service.

Hi,

the inside temperature of the cabinet is too high.

LO, the inside temperature of the cabinet is too low.

CLN,

it is time to clean the condenser

filter.

For cleaning instructions

see this page.

Turn the power OFF and unplug the unit from power.

Clean the cabinet

with

a moist cloth with detergent.

Never use running water to clean the cabinet.

Clean stainless steel surfaces with m ild water

blended dishwashing solution or other suitable

detergent. Do not use scouring powder.

\

Clean the gasket with mild water blended dishwashing j

solution or other suitable detergent. Do not use sharp

instruments or solvent of any kind.

, ^

REV 06/2003

I ^^ s ^ ^ ^^^B ji^^y

j^CT'*'^

^ ^ P ^ ^ ik ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 3 ^ ^ k



The unit does n ot start

Make sure the operation switch (page 5, button 6) is on .

Check the plug connection.

Check the fuse.

The unit does n ot reach the required temperature o r does n ot chill at all

Make sure the operation swith (page 5, button 6) is on and the signal

lamp is illuminated.

Check the plug connection.

Check the fuse.

Check the thermostat settings (page 5)

Check the condenser filter (page 6)

Provide free a ir circulation under and above the cabinet.

For control unit malfunction codes, see page 6.

REV 06/2003



^ iBniiik ^ r ^ ^ J É i i B I I

This guarantee is valid for 12 months from the date of purchase and shall

apply to possible failures in materials or workmanship.

The quarantee is valid only when the unit is used solely for purposes,

stated in this manual.

The quarantee expires if the unit is being used against installation, use

and m aintenance m anual.

All units are supplied under our terms and conditions of

sale,

a copy of

which may be obtained upon request.

The quarantee does not apply to

defects caused

by

faulty installation

defects due to ignoring maintenance a nd cleaning by the user

defects caused by natural wear

defects caused

by

improper use

of

the

unit

settings,

repairs

o r

spare

parts

due

to negligence,

non attention

or not following these

installation,

use a nd maintenance

instructions

The manufacturer Skycold Oy or his selling agents is not at any time or any

circumtances liable for direct or indirect losses of resulting effects caused

by an unfit of badly mantained unit.

Skycold Oy reserves the right to make any changes or improvements

without prior notice.

REV 06/2003



p w y ' ' l ^ B y I M 8 8 B M

^ ^ ^ M k

B B M B W

^^S if l f lj l ^W ^ i ^ g gpi i ' ' BHHBMjd mgB ^ ^ ^ [ l yBgi ''

Part.no

SP4000

Marine Cabinet Arctic C old Line MR-300

Cooling unit MR, 230V 50/60 Hz

- 1

Part.no

SP4200

Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz ~1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4010

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-3

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan

Condenser, plastic fan shrouds

Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display

Temp, control sensor

Defrost temp, sensor

Condensing temp, sensor

Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Capillartube

Condensate tube

Mains cable and plug

Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracl<et

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gaslcet

Condenser filter

Kompressori

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhallin

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen siipi

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhaiiin

Säätö- ja ohjausyksikl^ö

Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Lauhtumisanturi

Pisaranerotin

Kuivain

Huoltoventtiili

Kapillaari

Haihdutusputki

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Lauhduttimen suodatin

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

ML60TG

STVF100

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W

CF21

0 200, sucking, angle 26°

h=110, d=100, Lmax 445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30 g

1/4"

0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5

3

m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P1359,

775 x823 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4210

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI

072-3

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Capillartube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser filter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

ML60TR

STVF 100 115V 082059103

VNP 10/38 W 115V

CF21


h=110, d=100, Lm ax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30

g

1/4"

0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5

3

m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P1359,

775 x823 mm

10x246x470 mm

Part.no

SP4300

•Marine Cabin et A rctic Cold Line IVIF-300

Cooling unit IVIF, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

Part.no

SP4400

C o o l i n g u n i t MF, 115V 60 Hz -1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4260

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4270

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4310

SP4340

MA1071-3

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-3

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan

Condenser, plast ic fan shrouds

Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display



Condens ing temp, sensor

Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil lar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Defrost solenoid valve

Coil for solenoid valve

Magnetic door switch

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marini. leg

Door c;asl<et

Condenser f i l ter

Kompress e r i

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhall in

Lauhdutinpuhalt imen suojus

Lauhdutinpuhalt imen si ipi

Höyryst in

Höyryst inpuhall in

Säätö- ja ohjausyl<sikkö

Näyttö

Lämpöti la-antur i

Sulatusantur i

Lauhtumisantur i

Pisaranerot in

Kuivain

Huoltoventt i i l i

Kapil laar i

Haihdutusputki

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Sulatuksen magneett iventt i i l i

Magneett iventt i i l in kela

Magneett i ovikytkin

Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven ved in

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovit i iviste

Lauhdutt imen suodatin

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

MP12FG

STVF 100

VNP 10-20 /5 63, 10 /38 W

C F 2 1


h = 1 1 0 , d = 1 0 0 , L m a x 4 4 5

CN52B3

SSD90C65E-C

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 5500 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

EVR3, 3032F 1206

EVR 3 230V IP67 018Z6 732

230 V

230 V S IL+CUF, L=3700mm

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P I 359 , 775 x82 3 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4330

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4540

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4320

SP4350

MAI 071-6

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-3

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil lar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp




Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser f i l ter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

MP12FR

STVF 100

VNP 10/38 W 115V

C F 2 1


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

C N 2 B 2

S S D 9 0 C 6 5 U - C 1 1 5 V

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150, 3/8"

30 g

1/4"

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

E V R 3 , 0 3 2 F 1 2 0 6

EVR 3 115V 60Hz lP67 018Z 6710

115V


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P I

359,

7 7 5 x 8 2 3 m m

10x246x470 mm

Part.no

SP4000

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MR-400

Cooling unit iUR, 230V 50/60 Hz -

1

Part.no

SP4200

Cooling unit MR, 115V 60 Hz -1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4010

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MA1070

M M 1 3 7

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-2

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan b lade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter dr ier

Service valve

Capii iar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser f i l ter

Kompressori

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhall ln


Lauhdutlnpuhalt imen si ipi

Höyryst in

Höyryst inpuhall ln

Säätö - ja oh jausyks ikkö

Näyttö


Sulatusantur i

Lauhtumisantur i

Pisaranerot ln

Kuivain

Huoltoventt i i l i

Kapll laar i

Haihdutusputki

Veri^kojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatln

Oven ved in

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovit i lviste


Electrolux

LU-VE

E L C O

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fennod

ML60TG

STVF 100

VNP 10-20 / 563 , 10 /38 W

C F 2 1

0 200, suck ing , ang le 26°

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x1033 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4210

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA I 072-2

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan



Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capii iar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gaske t

Condenser f i l ter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

ML60TR

STVF 100 115V 082059103

VNP 10/38 W 115V

C F 2 1


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x1033 mm

10x246x470 mm

Part.no

SP4300

IViarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line IVIF-400

Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1

Part.no

SP4400

Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4260

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4270

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4310

SP4340

MAI 071-2

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-2

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil lar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp




Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser f i l ter

Kompres se r i

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhall ln


Lauhdutinpuhalt imen sl ipi

Höyryst in


Säätö- ja ohjausyksikkö

Näyttö


Sulatusantur i

Lauhtumisantur i

Pisaranerot in

Kuivain

Huoltoventt i i l i

Kapil laar i

Haihdutusputki

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja




Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven ved in

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovit i iviste

Lauhdut t imen suodat in

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

MP12FG

STVF 100

V N P 1 0 - 2 0 / 5 6 3 , 1 0 / 3 8 W

C F 2 1


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C65E-C

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 5500 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

EVR3, 3032F1206

E V R 3 2 3 0 V I P 67 0 1 8 Z 6 7 3 2

230 V


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x1033 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4330

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4540

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4320

SP4350

MAI 071-5

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-2

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan



Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil lar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp



Magnetic d oor sw/itch

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gaske t

Condenser f i l ter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

M P 1 2 F R

S T V F 1 0 0

VNP 10/38 W 115V

C F 2 1


h = 1 1 0 , d = 1 0 0 , L m a x 4 4 5

CN2B2

S S D 9 0 C 6 5 U - C 1 1 5 V

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 5500 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

EVR3, 032F 1206

EV R3 115V 60HZIP 67 018Z 6710

1I5V


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, A IS I304

P I 359 , 775 x1033 mm

10x246x470 mm

Part.no

SP4000

IVIarine Cabinet Arc tic Cold Line MR-550

Cooiing unit MR, 230V 50/60 H]

: ~1

Part.no

SP4200

Cooling unit MR, HSV 60 Hz -1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4010

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display

Temp, æntrol sensor



Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Caplllartube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracl<et

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser filter

Kompressen

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhallin

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen suojus

Lauhdutinpuhaltimen slip

Höyrystln

Höyrystinpuhallin

Säätö- ja ohjausyksil<kö

Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Lauhtumisanturi

Pisaranerotin

Kuivain

Huoltoventtilll

Kapillaari

Haihdutusputki

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Lauhduttimen suodatin

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

ML60TG

STVF 100

VNP 10-20/563, 10/38W

CF21


h=110,

d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30 g

1/4"

0 1,24mm, L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5

3

m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

PI359, 775 x1343 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4210

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Caplllartube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser filter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

ML60TR

STVF 100 115V 082059103

VNP 10/38 W 115V

CF21


h=110, d=100, Lmax4 45

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30 g

1/4"

01,24mm , L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5

3

m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

10x246x470 mm

Part.no

SP4300

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line M F-550

Cooling unit MF, 230V 50/60 Hz - 1

Part.no

SP4400

Cooling unit MF, 115V 60 Hz ~1

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4260

SP4020

SP4030

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4070

SP4270

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4310

SP4340

MAI 071-1

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil l i i r tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp




Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser f i l ter

Kompressen

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutinpuhall in

Lauhdut inpuha lt imen suo jus

Lauhdutinpuhalt imen si ipi

Höyryst in


Säätö - ja oh jausyks ikkö

Näyttö


Sulatusantur i

Lauhtumisantur i

Pisaranerot in

Kuivain

Huoltoventt i i l i

Kapil laar i

Haihdutusputki

Verkkojohto

Vedonpo is ta ja




Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven ved in

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovit i iviste


Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

MP12FG

S T V F 1 0 0

V N P 1 0 - 2 0 / 5 6 3 , 1 0 / 3 8 W

CF 21


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C65E-C

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3 /8"

30 g

1/4"

0 1 , 2 4 m m , L = 5 5 0 0 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

E V R 3 , 3 0 3 2 F 1 2 0 6

E V R 3 2 3 0 V I P 6 7 0 1 8 Z 6 7 3 2

230 V


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P I359, 775 x1343 mm

10x246x470 mm

SP4330

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4540

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4280

SP4170

SP4180

SP4190

SP4290

SP4320

SP4350

MAI 071-4

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

MA1138

Compressor

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumula to r

Filter drier

Service valve

Capil lar tube

Condensate tube


Mains cable clamp




Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Condenser f i l ter

Electrolux

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Danfoss

Danfoss

MP12FR

S T V F 1 0 0

VNP 10/38 W 115V

C F 2 1


h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

S S D 9 0 C 6 5 U - C 1 1 5 V

S M D 1 2 R U

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

3 0 x 1 5 0 , 3 / 8 "

30 g

1/4"

0 1,24mm, L = 5500 m

0 1/4"

3G1,5 3 m

KK-4

E V R 3 , 0 3 2 F 1 2 0 6

E V R 3 1 1 5 V 6 0 H z l P 6 7 0 1 8 Z 67 1 0

115V


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, A IS I304

P I 359 , 775 x1343 mm

10x246x470 mm

m

Part.no

SP4450

SP4290

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line M RC-300

Central cooling unit M

Solenoid valve

RC,

230V 50/60 Hz -1

Magneettiventtiiii

Danfoss EVR3, 032F1206

Part.no

SP4550

SP4290

Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

Solenoid vaive Danfoss EV R3, 032F 1206

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4310

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP4560

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-3


Sliut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Grid sheif

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasi<et

Magneettiventtiiiin l eia

Paiioventtiili

Palloventtiiii

Imupalnesäädln

Suiatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Höyrystin

Höyrystlnpuhaiiin

Säätö- ja ohjausyl<slkkö

Näyttö

Lämpötlla-anturi

Sulatusanturl

Verkkojohto

Vedonpolstaja

Lankahyiiy

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Femnod

EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

GB C6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

230 V /1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

AiSI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AiSI304

P1359,

775 x823 mm

SP4320

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-3

Coil for solenoid vaive

Shut vaive

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Grid sheif

Sheif bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

1 1 5 V / 1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AiSI304

P1359,

775 x823 mm

Part.no

SP4500

SP4290

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-300


Solenoid valve

FC,

230V 50/60 Hz -1

Magneetti venttiili Danfoss EVR3, 032F1206

Part.no

SP4600

SP4290

Central cooling unit lUFC, 115V 60 Hz - 1

Solenoid valve Danfoss EVR 3, 032F 1206

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4310

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP4560

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1071-3

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-3


Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Magneettlventtiilin kela

Palloventtiili

Palloventtiili

Imupainesäädin

Sulatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallin

Säätö-ja ohjausyksikkö

Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusantuh

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

ân foss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

l.ae

Fermod

Fermod

EVR 3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

GB C6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP12 1/2", 034L0023

400

W

230V/160 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5

3

m

KK-4

230 V SIL+CUF, L=3700mm

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x823 mm

SP4320

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1071-6

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI

072-3


Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

EVR 3 115V60HZIP67, 018Z6710

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

1 1 5 V /1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x823 mm

m

Part.no

SP4450

SP4290

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-400


Solenoid valve

RC, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

IVIagneettiventtiili Danfoss

EVR3, 032F1206

Part.no

SP4550

SP4290

Central cooling unit

IMRC,

115V 60 Hz ~1

Solenoid valve Danfoss EV R3, 032F 1206

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4310

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP4560

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-2


Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




IVIains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracl<et

Door Handle

Door Hinge

iViarine leg

Door gasket

IVIagneettiventtiiiin l<ela

Palloventtiili

Palloventtiiii

Imupainesäädin

Suiatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallin

Säätö- ja ohjausyl<sil<kö

Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

SäätöjalKa

Ovitiiviste

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

EVR3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

GB C6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

2 3 0 V /1 6 0 W

h=110,d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x10 33 mm

SP4320

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

iVIA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-2

Coii for solenoid valve

Shut vaive

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

115V 60Hz 1P67,018Z 6710

GBC 6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

115V/160W

h=110, d=100, Lmax4 45

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x1033 mm

Part.no

SP4500

SP4290

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-400


Solenoid valve

FC, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

MagneettI venttiili

Danfoss

EVR3, 032F1206

Part.no

SP4600

SP4290

Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz ~1


http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4310

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP4560

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1071-2

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-2


Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Magneettiventtillin kela

Palloventtiili

Palloventtiili

Imupalnesäädin

Sulatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallln


Näyttö

Lämpötlla-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahyl y

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

EVR 3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400

W

2 3 0 V /1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

230VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISi304

P1359, 775 x1033 mm

SP4320

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 071-5

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI

072-2


Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

EVR 3 115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC 10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP1 2 1/2", 034L0023

400W

115V/160W

h=110,

d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4

115VSIL+CUF, L=4100mm

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2"

round,

AISI304

PI 359, 775 x103 3 mm

m

Part.no

SP4450

SP4290

SP4310

Marine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MRC-500

Central cooling unit IM

Solenoid valve


RC, 230V 50/60 Hz -1

Magneettiventtllli

Magneettiventtiilin kela

Danfoss

Danfoss

EVR3 , 032F 1206

EVR 3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

Part.no

SP4550

SP4290

SP4320

Central cooling unit MRC, 115V 60 Hz ~1

Solenoid valve Danfoss EV R3, 032F 1206

Coil for solenoid valve Danfoss 115V60HzlP67, 018Z6710

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP45':-0

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA1072-1

Shut vjlve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasl<et

Palloventtiili

Palloventtiill

Imupainesäädin

Sulatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallin


Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturl

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Lankahyl y

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

GB C6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8" ,009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

2 3 0 V /1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100, Lmax 445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K2aC2

3G1,5 3m

K K ^

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MA I 072-1

Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Mains cable clamp

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

115V/160W

h=110, d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

K K ^

AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

P1359, 775 x1343 mm

Part.no

SP4500

SP4290

SP4310

IVIarine Cabinet Arctic Cold Line MFC-550

Central cooling unit IV

Solenoid valve


FC,

230V 50/60 Hz ~1

Magneetti venttiili

Magneettiventtiilin kela

Danfoss

Danfoss

EVR3, 032F1206

EVR 3 230V IP67, 018Z6732

Part.no

SP4600

SP4290

SP4320

Central cooling unit MFC, 115V 60 Hz -1


Coil for solenoid valve Danfoss

EVR 3 115V60H2IP67, 018Z6710

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4390

SP4560

SP4060

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MA1071-1

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display


Defrost

temp,

sensor


Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Palloventtiili

Palloventtiili

Imupainesäädin

Sulatusvastus

Haihdutusvastus

Hoyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallin


Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Verkkojohto

Vedonpoistaja

Ovenkarmivastus

Lankahylly

Hyllynkannatin

Oven vedin

Oven sarana

Säätöjalka

Ovitiiviste

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

GB C6 S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP1 2 1/2", 034L0023

400 W

2 3 0 V /1 6 0 W

h=110, d=100,Lmax445

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x134 3 mm

SP4360

SP4370

SP4380

SP4410

SP4570

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4180

SP4190

MAI 071-4

MAI 070

MA1137

SP8010

SP8020

SP8030

MAI 072-1

Shut valve

Shut valve

Suction regulator

Tubular heater

Condensation heater

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display


Defrost

temp,

sensor


Mains cable clamp

Frame heater

Grid shelf

Shelf bracket

Door Handle

Door Hinge

Marine leg

Door gasket

Danfoss

Danfoss

Danfoss

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Fermod

Fermod

GBC6S 1/4", 009G5020

GBC10S3/8", 009G5021

KVP 12 1/2", 034L0023

400W

1 1 5 V /1 6 0 W

h=110,d=100, Lmax445

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

3G1,5 3m

KK-4


AISI 304

Type 571

Type 402

2" round, AISI304

PI 359, 775 x1343 mm

^ I I 4 ¥ C I I § ^ § I € I T

Spare parts - Arctic Coid Line IVIarine IVIR-120

Rev 09 2003

Part.no

SP4760

SP4580

Cooling unit MNCL, 230V 50/60 Hz ~1

Compressor R Kompressori Electrolux IVIL40TG

Part.no

SP4470

SP4210

Cooling unit MNCL, 11SV 60 Hz

Compressor

- 1

Electrolux ML60TR

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/

http://part.no/



SP4430

SP4440

SP4460

SP4070

SP4080

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4660

SP4490

SP4510

SP4520

SP4190

SP8010

S10001

S10006

SI0002

SI 0007

SI 0004

S11004

SI0003

047310

047300

SP5530

mIeOOl

LM1302

SP8030

Condenser

Condenser fan

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Capiliartube

Condensate tube

Connection cable 3x1,0 2,5 m

Chassis plug standard

Mains cable clamp

Door handle

Hinge upper left frame

Hinge upper right frame

Hinge lower left frame

Hinge lower right frame

Hinge upper door

Hinge lower door

Hinge bushing

Door right hinged

Door left hinged

Gasket, door D4

Shelf bracl<et

Grid shelf

Marine leg

Lauhdutin

Lauhdutlnpuhallin

Höyrystin

Höyrystinpuhallin

Säätö- / ohjausyksikkö

Näyttö

Lämpötila-anturi

Sulatusanturi

Lauhtumlsanturi

Pisaranerotin

Kulvain

Huoltoventtiili

Kapillaari

Haihdutusputki

Kojeliitosjohto 3x1,0 2,5 m

Kojeliitin, runko, uros

Vedonpoistaja

Oven vedin

Sarana ylös vasen karmiin

Sarana ylös oikea karmiin

Sarana alas vasen karmiin

Sarana alas oikea karmiin

Sarana ylös oveen

Sarana alas oveen

Saranaholkki

Ovi oikea

Ovi vasen

Tiiviste, ovi 04

Hyllynkannatin

Lankahyl y

Säätöjalka

LU-VE

MVL

ECO

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

PK-Cables

Primo

STFT 14121

QLZ06/0018-2524

CL180-6mm

CN52B3

SSD90C30E

SIVID12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30 g

1/4"

0 1,0 mm, L = 2870 mm

0 1/4"

27904-2,5M-801

488-191

KK-4

Type 571

135950

GN1/1

2" round, AISI304

SP4220

SP4230

SP4040

SP4050

SP4060

SP4240

SP4250

SP4090

SP4100

SP4110

SP4120

SP4130

SP4140

SP4150

SP4160

SP4170

SP4190

SP8010

S10001

S10006

S10002

S10007

S10004

S11004

S10003

047310

047300

mIeOOl

Ll\/I1302

SP8030

Condenser

Condenser fan


Condenser fan blade

Evaporator

Evaporator fan

Control unit

Display




Accumulator

Filter drier

Service valve

Capiliartube

Condensate tube

Mains cable clamp

Door handle

Hinge upper left frame

Hinge upper right frame

Hinge lower left frame

Hinge lower right frame

Hinge upper door

Hinge lower door

Hinge bushing

Door right hinged

Door left hinged

Shelf bracket

Grid shelf

Marine leg

LU-VE

ELCO

LU-VE

Centaur

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

Lae

STVF 100 115V 082059103

VN P

10/38

W 115V

C F 2 1


h=110, d=100, Lmax44 5

CN2B2

SSD90C30U

SMD12RU

ST1K20C1

ST1K20C2

ST1K20C3

30x150,3/8"

30 g

1/4"

0

1,24mm,

L = 4000 m

0 1/4"

KK-4

Type 571

GN1/1

2" round, AISI304



NM

-NnHW

]d

Y

3

r

i

/

\

^

L

S

S

,

Y

1

\

/

1

J

6

7

5

f

p

•

i

^

m—

9

i

[

1

1

N

12N

r

]

3D

p

r

•

^

=

J

k



=

J

k

=

J

V

.

J

k

<

=

A

.

=

ü

m

m

\

J

^

=

A

C

=

C

=

=

V

.

4

i

a

M

i

™

'

"

^

g

LOiPART



Water boilers, electric

M odel BE3M

• SEMI-AUTOMATIC

• STAINLESS STEE L EXE CUTION

• THERMOSTAT CONTROL

• SAFETY CUT-OUT

• N ON DRIP TAP

• WATER FEE D ARM WITH VALVE

AS STANDARD

All water boUers are constructed of heavy

gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces i n

a polished finish. Th e water fittings are of

chrom ium plated brass.

Large bore draw-olf

tap,

water level gauge,

overflow, water inlet conne ction as well as a

dom e cover are

fitted

as standard.

The boilers are intended for moun ting d i

rectly on cou nter or bench top. Alternative

ly they may be installed on wall or floor,

subject to specially designed brackets re

W ATER B OIL ER S , E L E C TR IC

Scale 1:10

Dimensions mm



Dimensions mm

Bullkhead brackets

(optional extra)

1. Gauge glass

2. Wa ter inlet valve

3. Water connection 15 mm

4. Water tap

5. Thermostat

6. Pilot lamp

7. Cable entry

8. Overflow 0 22 mm

9. Suggested securing (not included)

1 0 . Bulkhead brackets (optional extra)

M o d e l

B E 2 M

B E 3 M

B E 4 M

B E 5 M

A

335

4 2 0

5 0 0

5 7 0

MANUAL

Water boilers BE



Introduction

The Burshaw range of water boilers are manufactured

from top quality 304 stainless s teel. All models are fit

ted with a thermostat enabling the customer to deter

mine the required temperature. In addition they are also

fitted with an automatic cut-out.

Loading and capacity

Model

BE2

BE3

BE4

BE5

Litres

10

15

20

25

Voltage

230V

230V

230V

230V

Hz

50

50

50

50

kW

3.0

3.0

3.0

3.0

Warning

This appliance must be earthed

All boiler are supplied complete with 13

amp.

cable and

should be plugged into a suitable 13 amp. supply. In the

event of damage to the main

lead,

the supply cord should

only be fitted by an authorized service agent.

Water inlet and valve (where applicable) should be con

nected to a

suitable

cold

water supply

fitted with an

iso

lating stopcock.

Model

BE8

BE10

BE12

Litres

36

45

55

Voltage

230V

380/440V

230V

Hz

50

50-60

50

M/V

6.0

6.0

6.0

Warning

This appliance must be earthed

Model

BE10

must be wired by a qualified electrician

using flexible conduit to 30 amp. supply via a safety

isolating switch w ith a contact gap of at least 3.0 mm in

all poles. Precautions should be taken during installa

tion regarding the leakage of current.

Maintenance

The efficiency of any water boiler can be impaired if

scale is allowed to build up. Ensure that the scale

deposits are removed periodically from the inside of

the boiler and tap by using a descaling agent. At the

end of a working day the inner and outer surfaces of

the boiler

and

lid should be wiped dry to avoid the

build up of scale.

Please note that the manufacturers guarantee will

be void If faults arise due to the excessive build

up of scale.

Safety

It is dangerous to drape towels or teacloths over

the boiler obstructing the vent hole

in

the boiler

lid.

Care should be taken when removing the lid to

avoid possible injury

from

steam.

This appliance should never be cleaned with a

water jet.

Operating instruction

1. First assuring that the draw off tap is in the OFF

position.

Fill the boiler

with

cold water

to

the level, indi

cated on the front of the boler. DO NOT OVER

FILL.

2.

Switch on the eletrical supply after filling.

3. Turn the thermostat control knob in a clockwise

direction to the maximum setting. When the

water boils turn the control knob in an

anti

clockwise direction to the desired retaining

Installation instruction



*=?

^ ^

75

t

0

< 0 292 >

I

T

140

1. Gauge glass

2. Water inlet valve

3. Water connection 15 mm

4. Water tap

5. Thermostat

6. Pilot lamp

7. Cable entry

8. Overflow 0 22 mm

9. Suggested securing

(not included)

Dimensions mm

Model

BE2M

BE3M

BE4M

BE5M

A

335

420

500

570



Wiring diagram

W

I

R

N

D

A

M

O

B

1

M

O

5

1



M

A

V

lY

_OC

<

XnC

V

—

1C

C

D

t

_

L

f

O

e

<

•

i

i

L

3

0

UT

1

5

U

1

—

<

n

KO

^

Q

?Z

<

X

C

H

>

•

m

<

CL

Vm

d

i

d

XÜ

V

a

3

4

3

5

6



(^ a

8 1 ' t . / o . O (S

COMA

GROUP

BURSHAW

Q>0>L£es

•3r.'Yl

MANUAL AND SEMI AUTOMATIC

EXPLODED PARTS DIAGRAM

DV/G,NO

D A T E

Bg}4ttf ISSUE &

ORAWtJ GK



BURSHAW

Item No. Bo iler Spares List ( Serial No.400000-t-) Qty

Code

1/2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Lid Knob w ith finger plate

Boiler Lid with l<nob (10-25 litre)

Pilot Light (Red) 15mm Diameter

Tap Top Assembly for Standard Tap

Tap S pring (included in part 5)

Washer for Tap (Neoprene)

Standard Tap body

Back Nut

Tap Fibre Washer

Standard Tap Com plete (parts

5

-10)

Safety cut-out (included in pa rt 13)

Push button cutout (Used on

1

lOv boilers)

Element 3kw

with

Cut-Out

Silicone washer for element

Fibre washer for element

Element Nut (included in 13)

Thermostat 3kw

Thermostat 6kw

Thermostat Knob

Relay

(Used on

special voHages only)

Feed

Arm Elbow

Feed Arm Tube

Feed Arm Valve

Water Feed Assembly (Parts 9,10,20,21,22)

Overflow

itting

22mm coupling

Overflow washer 3/4 in BSP

Back Nut 3/4 in BSP

Overflow assembly (parts 23,24,25)

Special Tap for guage glass (parts 5-10)

Gauge glass assembly 10 litre (parts 28,29,30)




Gauge glass tube

1 M808

1 L713A

1 L750A

1 L730

1 N/A

1 M823

1 N/A

2 L731

1 L732

1 SB001

1 M822

1 M820

1 L722

1 M802

1 M802A

1 N/A

1 L716

1 M779

1 M781

D224A

1 L758

1 L756

1 L755

1 SB004

1 L769A

1 L771

1 L770

1 SB013

1 SB002

1 SB700A

1 SB701A

1 SB702A

1 SB703A

1 L753A

4

^

*

"

"

«

'

-



2

=

A

=

A

.

O

C

c

=

A

c

=

A

-

^

«

S

W

-

^

d O o V ^ ^ ^ ^ ^

^3 aar Æw KB ^W

B8B

^W



Dishwasher W T 38

M o d e l W T 3 8

with stand 16 94 66

M o d e l W T 3 8

• HIG H CAPACITY

•

EASY

C L E A N I N G

• F O U R W A SH P R O G R AM M E S

• S U P E R B D I S H W A S H I N G R E S U L T

W T 3 8

is

a c o m p a c t , f ro n t l o a d i n g m a c h i n e

f o r u n d e r c o u n t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a h i g h

capacityprovidingeff icient dishwashing. Th e

large wash ch amb er can take tableware up to

a h e i g h t o f 3 0 c m a n d G a s t r o N o r m s iz es . T h e

c o n t i n u o u s w a s h c a n b e c h os e n . T h e r o t a ti n g

wash and r inse arms contr ib ute towards eff i

c i e n t d i s h w a s h i n g w i t h a p e r fe c t r e s u l t. T h e

f inal r inse only star ts when the correct tem

p e r a t u r e h a s b e e n r e a c h e d .

DISHWASHER, WT 38

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm



820 850

1 0 ± 1 0

7 5 0 -1 0 0 0 '

1. Water connection hose

L = 1 . 0 m , I S O - G 3 / 4 B

2. Inlet for detergent and rinse aid

hoses

3. Equipotential screw (earth screw)

4.

Elear ical conneaion, 1 .5 m cord

included

5.

Drain oudet 0 18 mm int .

6. Working top, depth=620 mm,

possible to remove if necessary

by under counter installation

7. M arine legs

(If necessary to fix machine to a

counter, simple arrangements -not

a part of delivery- are sufficient.)

Detail of marine leg

for dishwasher

Specification:

Water consumpt ion 1/rack 3.3

Recomm ended water hardness max 5 dH°

Recomm ended water pressure (flow) 30 0-60 0 KPa

Rinse water temperatur 80 -85°C

Pump output 0 ,75 kW

Soun d level < 66 dB

Specification

M o d e l

W T 3 8

P N C

502 346

5 0 2 0 1 9

D ra in

p u m p

X

Voltage

4 4 0 3 - 6 0

4 0 0 3 - 5 0

* M a x .

amps in

phase

11.6

12.7

Lo a d in g k W

Rinse

water

heater

6

Ta n k

2.0

Total

6.85

W o rk in g

cydesis

Prog.

1

90

Prog.

2

1 2 0

Prog.

3

2 4 0

Capacity

racks/hour

Prog.

1

33

Prog.

2

20

Prog.

3

12

Weight kgs

net

68

gross

75

Sh ip p in g

volume

m3

0.470

' Other voltages available on request

GB

DE

NL

U N D E R C O U N T E R D I S H W A S H E R

INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

U N T E R B A U G E S C H I R R S P Ü L E R

INSTALLATION, BEDIENUNG UND W ARTUNG

T A F E L M O D E L V A A T W A S M A C H I N E

Page 3

Seite 19

Pag.

3 5



[sTl

DK

Fl

NO

M F R

IT

Æ ii ES

PT

GR

INSTALLATIE, GEBRUIK EN ONDE RHOUD

G O L V D I S K M A S K I N

INSTALLATION, HANDHAVANDE OCH UNDERHALL

I N D B Y G N I N G S O P V A S K E M A S K I N E

INSTALLATION, DRIFT OG VEDLIGEHOLDELSE

A S T I A N P E S U K O N E

ASENN US, KÄYTTÖ JA HUOLTO

I N N E B Y G D O P P V A S K M A S K I N

MONTERING, BRUK OG VEDLIKEHOLD

L A V E - V A I S S E L L E

INSTALLATION, EMPLOI ET ENTRETIEN

L A V A S T O V I G L I E S O T T O T A V O L O

INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE

L A V A V A J I L L A S E M P O T R A B L E

INSTALACION, USO Y MANTENIMIENTO

M Ä Q U I N A D E L A V A R L O I Q A D E E N C A S T R A R

INSTAU\gÄO, UTILIZAQÄO E MANUTENQÄO

n A Y N T H P I O

n i A T Q N

EfKATAITAIH , XPH ZH KAI ZYN TH PH IH

Sid 53

Side 69

Sivu 85

Side 101

Page 117

Pag. 133

Pag. 149

Pag. 165

I E X . 181

GB CONTENTS

A GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS Pag. 4

A1 HANDLING Pag. 4



A2 UNPACKING Pag. 4

A3 DISPOSAL Pag. 4

A4 TECHNICAL DATA Pag. 5

B INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON Pag. 8

B1 WATER CONNECTION Pag. 8

\ )

B2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION Pag. 8

B3 WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL Pag. 9

B4 DETERGE NT/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND SETTINGS Pag. 10

85 SETTING THE DISPENSERS Pag. 11

86 MAINTENANCE Pag. 12

C INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER Pag. 13

C I STARTING Pag. 13

C2 WASH CYCLES Pag. 14

C3 OPERATION ...Pag. 14

C4 END OF WOR K AND DAILY CLEANING Pag. 15

C5 UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER WITH

INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER Pag. 16

C6 WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE CONTROL PANEL Pag. 17

D TROUBLESHOOTING Pag. 18

M m

m

GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING

CAREFULLY READ THE INSTALLATION, OPERA

TING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Lift the appliance using a lift truck, remove the base

and position the appliance



BEFORE INSTALLING THIS APPLIANCE. INCOR

RECT INSTALLATION, ADAPTATIONS OR ALTER

NATIONS COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO

PROPERTY OR INJURY TO PERSONS. MALICIOUS

DAMAGE, DAMAGE DUE TO NEGLIGENCE, OR TO

FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH INSTRUCTIONS AND

REGULATIONS, OR TO INCORRECT CONNEC

TIONS OR UNAUTHORISED TAMPERING INVALI

DATE ANY WARRANTY AND RELIEVE THE

MANUFACTURER OF ALL LIABILITY.

lü

2.

Carefully read this instructions booklet, as it con

tains important advice for safe installation, opera

tion and m aintenance.

Keep this booklet to hand in a safe place for future

reference by other operators.

Installation should be carried out by qualified

engineers, in accordance with current regula

tions and with the manufacturer's instructions.

3. The appliance should only be used by persons spe

cifically trained in this operation.

4.

Switch off the appliance in the event of failure or

malfunctioning.

Only have the appliance repaired by a service centre

authorised by the manufacturer and ask for original

spare parts.

Rgure2

where it is to be installed.

RgureS

Remove the protective film and ensure that the packa

ging material is disposed of correctly in compliance

with the regulations in force in the country where the

product is to be used.

A1 HANDLING

Use suitable means to move the appliance: a lift truck

or fork pallet trucks (the forks should reach more than

halfway beneath the appliance).

A2 UNPACKING

,.;;'>

^

m

y^^j^

A3 DISPOSAL

All the packaging materials are environment friendly.

They may be kept without danger, recycled or burned

in a special waste incineration plant. Recyclable plastic

compo nents are mari<ed as follows :

6

PE

polyethylene

polypropyl

ene

polystyrene

foam

external wrapping

film.

Instruction bag .

top packaging panels,

straps

protective surround ele

ments.

Wood and cardboard components may be disposed of

A4 TECHNICAL DATA

MODEL

Supply voltage:

- convert ible to

- single-phase version

- USPH version

V

V

V

V

LS6/ET5

400. . . 415-3N-

220.. .240- 3~

220. . .2401N~

400...440- 3~

WT37/WT38

400. . .415-3N~

220. . .240-3~

220. . . 2401N-

400., .440- 3~



Frequency

Max. power input

Boiler heating elements

Tank heating elements

Water supply press, for atmospheric boiler

versions

Wafer supply press, for pressure boiler versions

Water supply temperature

Water supply hardness for models w ithout

incorporated continuous w ater softener

Electric conductivity of water for models without

incorporated continuous w ater softener

Water supply hardness for models with

incorporated water softener

Concentration of chlorides in water

Rinse cycle water consum ption

Boiler capacity

Tank capacity

Standard cycle time with water supply at 50°C

Legal noise level Leq

Protection rating

Net weight for models without incorporated

continuous water softener

Net weight for models with incorporated


Power supply cable

Hz

kW

kW

kW

kPa[bar]

kPa [bar]

°C

°fH/°dH/°cH

nS/cm

" iWdWcH

ppm

1

1

1

sec.

dB(A)

kg

kg

5 0 o 6 0

6.85/9.05(*)-9.85/12.05(*)

6.0-9.0

2,2

50...700 [0.5.,.7]

200...300 [2...3]

50

14/8/10 max

< 4 0 0

40/22,4/28 max

< 2 0

3.8

12

2 3

90-120-240

<65

IPX4

68

71

H07RN-F

(*) = If activated by software, coincidence of tank and boiler heating elements.

5 0 0 6 0

5.35/7.55{*)-6.85/9.05(*)

4.5-6.0

2.2

50...700 [0.5...71

200.. .30Ö[2.. .3]

50

14/8/10 max

< 4 0 0

40/22,4/28 max

< 2 0

3.8

12

2 3

90-120-240/120-180-300/300-420-600

<65

IPX4

68

71

H07RN-F

Tabel 1

5.35 WW

6.85 kW

7.55 kW

9.05 kW

9.85 kW

12.05 kW

4 0 0 . .4 1 5 V3 N

C

5x2.5

5x2.5

5X4

5X4

5X4

5X4

S

1 6 A3 P+N

1 6 A3 P+N

2 SA3 P+N

32A 3P4-N

32A 3P+N

32A 3P+N

400...440V 3

C

4x2.5

4x2.5

4x2.5

4x4

4x4

4x4

S

1 6 A3 P

1 6 A 3 P

16A 3P

20A 3P

2 0 A 3 P

20A 3P

220. . .240V3

C

4x4

4x4

4x6

4x8

4x8

4x8

S

2GA3P

2 0 A3 P

3 2 A3 P

3 2 A3 P

3 2 A3 P

3 2 A3 P

220. . .240V1N

C

3x6

3x6

3x10

3x10

3x10

3x10

S

30A 1P+N

40A 1P+N

4 0 A1 P+N

5 0 A1 P+N

5 0 A1 P+N

5 0 A1 P+N

C = Power supply cable

8 = On/Oft switch



Figure 4 Installation diagram for models without incorporated continuous w ater softener

Legend Figure 4

A - Water inlet pipe with 0 3/4" G fittings

C - Outlet pipe øl 40 mm (^) - øi 20 mm (*).

R | - Power supply

® S - Pipe inlet for detergents



vi)

Figure 5 Installation diagram for mod els with incorporated continuous water softener

Legend Figure 5

A

- Wate r inlet pipe with ø 3/4" G fittings

C - Outlet pipe øi 40 mm

{^)

- øi 20 mm (*).

I - Power supply

S - Pipe inlet for detergents

Q - Unipotential screw

C^) - Only for model with free-fall drainage

B INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE INSTALLER/MAINTENANCE PERSON

Install a disconnecting switch with a capacity at

least equal to that given in the technical data table ,

a 30mA residual current circuit breaker and an

overcurrent device (magnetothermal cut-out with

- On the model with drain pump:

position the outlet pipe at a height anyw here between

750 and 1000 mm from the floor.

Check that about 4 litres of water flow out of the outlet



manual reset or fuse) between,the appliance and

the mains power outlet.

RATING PLATE

The rating plate contains identification and technical

data and is located on the right-hand side panel of the

appliance (Figure 6).

(..0,:

Figure 6

B1 WATER CONNECTION

• Position the dishwasher and level the appliance by

turning the relative height-adjustable feet

(Figure 6).

• Connect the appliance water supply pipe "A"

(Figure 4) to the mains, fitting a cut-pff coci<, the

fil

ter provided and a pressure gauge between the

appliance and the mains (Figure 7).

f Figure 7

pipe during the rinse cycle.

B2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

Figure 8

CAUTION

THE EARTH AND ELECTRICAL CON

NECTIONS SHOULD BE IN COMPLI

ANCE WITH NATIONAL REGULATIONS.

• Before carrying out the electrical conn ection, check

that the voltage and frequency on the appliance

rating plate correspond to those of the mains elec

tricity supply.

• The earth wire at the terminal end must be longer

(max. 20 mm ) than the phase wires.

• Connect the earth wire of the power supply cable to

an efficient earth clamp. The appliance must also

be included in a unipotential system, the connec

tion being made through the screw "Q" (Figure 4)

marked with the symbol

"'^".

The unipotential wire

must have a cross section of 10 mm ^.

Power supply 400...415V 3N (standard

configuration)

Power supp ly 400...440V 3

Connections provided for energy control

This appliance Is designed for an externa l energy

con

sumption con trol.



Figure 10

Open the power supply terminal board and insert the

jumpers provided as follows: one jumper between te rmi

nals 2 and 4 and another between terminals 4 and 6.

Using a suitable power supply cable (see technical data

table), connect the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5

and the earth wire to the terminal 4r.

Power supply 220...230V 3

Figure 11

Open the power supply tenninäl board and insert the

jumpe rs provided as follows: one Jumper between term i

nals 1 and 2, one between terminals 3 and 4 and

another between terminals 5 and 6. Using a suitable

power supply cable (see technical data table), connect

the three phases to terminals 1, 3 and 5 and the earth

wire to the terminal ^ .

Power supply 220...230V 1N

A

Figure 13

Connect the energy peak controller across terminals 11

and 12.

CAUTION

A normally open (n.o.) contact of the

controller must be connected across

terminals 11 and 12. When this contact

closes the boiler heating elements are

disconnected. Using the dishwasher in

these conditions may increase the cycle

time.

Safety devices

• An automatic reset thermoam perometric protective

device incorporated in the windings of the electric

pump cuts off the electricity supply in the case of

malfunctioning.

• In the event of water mains failure, a device pre

vents water in the boiler from returning Into the

mains.

• An overflow pipe, connected to the drainage outlet,

maintains the water in the tank at a constant level.

• On models with a drain pump, a supplementary

level control device activates if the main level

con

trol device is faulty.

Failure to comply with safety rules and regulations

relieves the manufacturer of all liability.

B3 WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE

CONTROL PANEL

A1 NO WATER

Check that the cock is open.

Checl< for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and

the overflow aperture.

Connections for automatic detergent dispenser

(Figure 14)

C1..C8 CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE

[E1..E8| CALL THE SERVICE CENTRE



- The appliance continues to operate, but approp

riate checl<s by a technician are rec omm ended.

F21..F22 CALL TH E SERVICE CENTRE

B4 DETERGEN T/RINSE-AID DISPENSERS AND

SETTINGS

If the appliance is connected to a water softener or

osmotic device, contact the detergent supplier for a

.^specific product.

^ „i'eristaltic dispensers (rinse-aid and detergent) require

periodic maintenance. The internal hose of the rinse-

aid dispenser should undergo periodic maintenance

(at least once or twice a year).

r l | i l . Dishwasher with incorporated detergent dis-

l l i '

penser pump (Figure 14).

Pump "R" dispenses about 0.9 g/s of detergent. When

the appliance Is filled with water for the first time In the

day, it dispenses about 48 g of detergent in 50 sec,

thereby providing a concentration of 2 g/l. Pump "R"

dispenses about 8 g in 8 sec. at each cycle.

Dispenser operating time may be changed, following

the instructions given in the n ext paragraph.

Insert the hose provided in the kit into the detergent

container.

2. Dishwas hers with incorpo rated peristaltic

rinse-aid dispenser pump (Figure i 4).

Pump "S" dispenses about 0.1 g/s of rinse-aid. It dis

penses 0.4 g In 4 sec. at each rinse.

Dispenser operating time may be changed, following

the instructions given in the next paragraph,

insert the hose provided in the kit into the rinse-aid

container (in the versions without Incorporated rinse-

aid dispenser only).

3. Dishwashers with incorporated rinse-aid

diaphragm dispenser pum p (Figure 14).

Pump 'T " is installed in appliances with pressure

boi

ler.

Figure 14

There is a ready-made impression

"N"

to be perforated

(0 8 mm) for positioning the detergent concentration

measuring sensor.

Inside the tank there is a hole "P" (0 10 mm) closed

with a plug, which may be used for mounting a liquid

detergent injector.

The Ecotemp versions have a hole "N" ( 0 22 mm) clo

sed with a plug. The sensor and liquid detergent injec

tor should be installed without prejudicing the

watertlghtness of the appliance.

Electrical connections for automatic detergent and

rinse-aid dispensers

Terminals are available on the power supply terminal

board for the electrical connection of external dispen

sers worthing at 220...240 V. Max. power 30 VA.

the wash cycle (see paragraph "Setting the dispen- Display of programming mode:

sers").

Initial amount of detergent:



Figure 16

• Connect the

rinse-aid dispenser

between termi

nals 8 and 9. These connection points are live

during filling of the tank and at the end of the rinse

cycle for a set time (see "setting the dispensers"

paragraph).

MANUAL A CTIVATION

Whenever the detergent containers are replaced, it

may be necessary to activate the dispensers manually

in order to fill the hoses and eliminate any air.

Simultaneously press the buttons, as shown in the

figures below. If necessary, repeat this operation

several times.

DETERGENT DISPENSER DISPENSER RINSE-AID

In the appliances with pressure boiler, the diaphragm

dispenser pump may be manually activated by pres

sing screw "D " (Figure 14).

B5 SETTING THE DISPENSERS

1) Peristaltic dispensers

All operations should be carried out with the appliance

switched on, the door open and no cycle selected.

LEGEND

• ^ Increase

^ Decrease

C* n

J

.^ L

Setting the activation time:

^ ^

^

Initial amount of rjnse-aid:


Amount of detergent during the cy cle:


Amount of rinse-aid during the cycle:


the detergent dispenser only ope

rates during filling electrovalve operation for res

toring the boiler level; terminals 7-9 of the main

terminal board are powered at the same time.

- if r j? r r 5 / the rinseâid dispe nse r only opera

tes during filling electrovalve operation for resto

ring the boiler level; terminals 8-9 of the main

Close the water supply cock.

Completely drain the tank.

Remove and carefully clean the filters.

Completely drain the incorporated dispenser

hoses, removing them from the containers. Repeat

the procedure described in the paragraph "Manual

activation"

at least 3 times.

Completely drain the boiler by simultaneously pres



terminal board are powered at the same time .

- if ' ' ff «r Sc* the r inse-aid dispen ser only opera

tes during wash pump operation; terminals 8-9 of

the main terminal board are powered at the same

time.

For connections, see the wiring diagram.

Example :

Supposing that an external detergent dispenser has

been connected with a tank concentration measuring

êns or, a standard setting could be as follows:

d ln:Q the dispenser is not activated during filling of

the tanlc.

dEt: '8 1

the dispenser is activated during wash

, pump operation and, thanks to the concentration

measured by the conduction sensor, the correct

amount of detergent is dispensed-

2) Rinse-aid d iaphragm dispenser

' Ä *

To ehange the dispensed amount, turn *(D- on screw

"D " accordingly (Figure 14).

Suggestion: to check the effectiveness of the rinse-

aid,

look at frsshjy washed glasses against the light.

Drops of water remaining on the glass indicate an

insufficient amount while streaks indicate an excess.

sing the buttons as shown in the figure.

; 1 ^ I 1

• ^ M

^

hjji

^

A buzzer indicates completion of drainage.

• Spread a thin film of Vaseline oil over all the stain

less steel surfaces.

Preventive maintenance

The preventive maintenance call may be activated

(see sen/ice manuals).

Upon reaching the set number of cycles (e.g. 20000),

appears on the display.

Ain

This message advises calling a qualified technician for

a general check-up of the state of the appliance.

Chang ing the detergent/rinse-aid type

If changing to a different detergent/r inse-aid type

(even one by the same manufacturer), you must rinse

the suction and pressure hoses with fresh water before

•ponnecting the new detergent/rinse-aid container,

bthenwise, the mixing of different types of detergent/

rinse-aid will cause crystallisation, which may result In

a breakdown of the dosing pump. Failure to observe

this condition will invalidate the guarantee and product

^|iability.

c INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USER

Our appliances have been studied an d optimised to give high performance. Th is appliance must b e used exclusively

for the purpose for which it has been designed, i.e. for washing disheis with water and specific detergents. Any other

use is to be considered improper.

This appliance does not carry out the rinse cycle should there be no supply water; it stops all functions with an error

message

"A1"

(also see "Warning m essages").



(,::)

_^__

_ _ ^ I E § .

• Carry out a couple of cycles without dishes to flush out any industrial grease which has remained in the

tanl< and piping.

• Avoid washing decorated dishes.

• Do not allow silvenware to come into contact with other metals.

• Do not allow food to dry on the dishes.

• Remove large food scraps from the dishes to prevent clogging the filters.

• Pre-wash the dishes by spraying them with cold or lukewarm water, without using any detergent.

• Use automatic dispensers for the detergent.

• If ther e is no autom atic dispenser, pour a non-foaming detergent into the tanl< when the water has reached

the washing temperature.

CONTROL PANEL

LEGEND:

A = on/off

B = drain/self-cleaning cycle

K = display

D = "tank" indicator light

E = "boiler" indicator light

J = wash cycle 1

H = wa sh cycle 2

F = wash cycle 5

Figure 17

Th e

temperature

sh own on the display is that of

the

boiler if the indicator light

"E"

is on or of

the

tank if

the

light

"D "

is

on . The

tank

temperature

is displayed during the

wash

cycle and the boiler

temperature

du ring the rinse cycle.

CI STARTING

• Open the water supply cock.

• Switch on at the mains.

For atmospheric versions only:

Warning, this dishwasher does the first tank filling

through several consecutive hot rinse cycles, while the

To display the boiler temperature during heating of the

tanl(,

open the door and press the button "J"

(Figure 17).

- Cycle

III

For very dirty dishes: press button "F' (Figure 17) (see

table of times).



C2 WASH CYCLES

The wash cycle includes one wash with hot water and

detergent (min 55 °C or min 150 °F for Marine USPH

versions) and one rinse with hot water and rinse-aid

(min 82 °C or m in 180 °F for M arine US PH version s).

Table of times

Standard cycle time with supply water at 50 °G.

LS6 / ET5 / W T37

WT38M

WT38MED

lai

90"

120"

300"

\m

120"

180"

420"

m

240"

300'

600"

A device lengthens the cycle time if the water in the

Îboiler has not reached the minimum temperature for

correct rinsing.

The cycle times and the temperature may be persona

lised (e.g. increase of the rinse time and temperature).

The cycle times should only be set by a specialised

technician.

C3 OPERATION

The filling and heating stage has finished when the dis

play shows the tank temperature:

The appliance is then ready for use:

• Open the door.

• Pour the required amoun t of detergent into the tanl<

I (in mode ls without automatic dispenser).

• Insert the rack containing the dirty dishes.

Close the door and select the suitable w ash cycle;

the corresponding indicator light comes on and the

wash cycle starts:

•- Cy cle I

n .

u IS

Only for m odels with incorporated water softener

if the salt container is empty, the message SRL

displayed at the start of the cycle. Place the salt in the

special container, following the instructions given in

the section "Undercounter dishwasher with incorpora

ted continuous water softener".

To stop the wash cycle, just press the selected

cycle button or open the door.

To continue the w ash cycle, just press the selected

cycle button or close the door. The cycle starts

again from where it stopped.

At the end of the wash, the dishwasher emits a

series of beeps and "END" blinks on the display:

, END] % [

Open the door and remove the rack containing the

clean dishes.

WARNING

The appliance w ill not remove burnt food deposits

from dishes. Dishes with burnt-on food deposits

should be cleaned mechanically/chemically (for

example, pre-wash under running water) before

putting them in the dishwasher.

Change the w ater in the tank at least twice a day.

Type of racks and loading

Rgure lS

END

Figure 20

Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"

(Figure 17).



BLUE rack for glasses: the glasses should be pla

ced upside down.

Figure 21

• YELLOW container for cutlery: insert 15 items, with

the handles pointing downwards, in ea ch container.

• Available as accesso ries: dividers for glasses and

rack for dishes with maximum diameter of 320 mm .

Note: if only one type of dish rack is to be used, it is

advisable to choose the GRE EN rack.

C4 END OF WORK AND DAILY CLEANING

The appliance Is designed to carry out an automatic

cleaning cycle to help flush out any residues and to

guarantee greater health and hygiene:

• Open the door and take out the rack containing the

clean dishes.

• Remove the tank filters and the overflow "W".

Figure 22

• Close the door.

• Select the drain cycle by pressing button "B"

(Figure 17).

Switch off at the mains.

Close the water supply cock.

Replace the filters and the overflow.

Remove the top and bottom jets "P and I , unscre

wing the ring nut "H" .

Figure 23

Unscrew plugs "L" from the rinse jets and clean

using a water spray. Do not use sharp implements

to clean the nozzle holes, which could othen/vlse be

damaged.

Remove filters "C" and "D" and clean them under a

water spray.

Remove the filter "Z" and clean away any remained

food in order to avoid blocking the draining system.

Figure

24

Upon completion of cleaning operations, replace the

parts removed previously.

Cleaning the exterior surfaces

C5 UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER WITH

INCORPORATED CO NTINUOUS WATER

SOFTENER

These models have a continuous softener in the

dishwasher water circuit. By means of special resins,

this device removes the calcareous substances from

the feed water, supplying decalcified water for

washing.

Pour approx. 1.5 kg of coarse salt [NaCO in container

"A" (an amount sufficient to fill the salt container up to

the rim) using the special funnel supplied (Figure 26).



For the continuous softener to work properly the resins

must be regenerated periodically, with frequency

depending on the hardness of the water and the num

ber of wash cycles carried out.

Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous

softener does not require machine stops for regenera

ting the resins.

Salt container

,^The water can only be softened if there is salt in the

^special container. The salt container must be filled

" when the dishwasher is used for the first time and

whenever the message SR L 0 is displayed at the

start of a wash cycle.

No

salt in the container

If the message

SRL Q

is displayed at the start of a

wash cycle, it means that the salt container is empty.

Wash cycles can be started just the sam e, even if the

display signals no salt; in which case the water used

for washing is not softened.

A

IMPORTANT:

Open the salt container only when the

message 5 RL 0 is displayed. Opening

the cap when the message

SR L

0 is

not displayed can cause spilling of the

saline solution and compromise correct

machine operation.

How to fill the sa lt container

:f

Switch off the dishwasher by pressing button "A"

(Figure 17).

iß« Unscrew cap "A" (Figure 25) of the salt container,

turning it anticlockwise.

A

Figure 26

IMPORTANT:

only salt may be placed in the salt con

tainer. Do not introduce any other chem

ical substances such as detergent, rinse

aid or descaling agent, since these

would inevitably damage the appliance.

Such damage invalidates any warranty

and relieves the manufacturer of all lia

bility.

• Remove any traces of salt from the filling hole, the

container thread and the closing cap seal.

• Refit the cap of container °A°, turning it clockwise

and m aking sure it Is tight.

A

IMPORTANT:

The message

SRL 0

may appear for

several wash cycles even after topping-

lip the salt, as the salt must circulate in

the entire system. Correct operation of

the dishwasher is not, however, affec

ted.

The salt container always has water in it, therefore it is

normal if water comes out during filling.

Rinse-aid container

In undercounter models with incorporated continuous

water softener, the rinse-aid container is located in the

front panel of the appliance (Figure 27).

How to fill the rinse-aid co ntainer

• Unscrew cap "B" (Figu re 27 ) turning it anticlockwise.

» Pour the rinse-aid

in

container

"B" up to

the rim.

A

IMPORTANT:

Only introduce rinse-aid in the rinse-aid

container. Do not introduce other chemi

cal substances such as detergent,



d

descaling agent or salt, since these

would inevitably damage the appliance.

Such damage invalidates any warranty

and relieves the Manufacturer of all lia

bility.

• Refit the cap of container "B", turning it clockwise

and m aking sure it is tight.

C6 WARNING MESSAGES DISPLAYED ON THE

CONTROL PANEL

AI NO WATER

Check that the cock is open

Check that the water inlet filter is clean

Check the minimum mains pressure (not less than

50 kPa)

Check that the overflow pipe is inserted (for

appliances without drain pump only)

B1 INEFFICIENT DRAINAGE

Check if the overflow has been remo ved.

Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and


B2 TANK WATER LEVEL TOO HIGH

Check for obstruction on the waste outlet pipe and


|C1..C8| CALL THE SERVICE CENT RE

(É1..E8|

CALL THE SERVICE CENT RE

- The appliance continues to operate, but approp

riate checks by a technician are recomm ended.

ifi

l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platform

Electrolux Professional



SERVICE MANUAL

m o

I,.

o TANK

o BaLER

E

S

I-

PJO,

PTANK

^

0

BOILER

0 00

0

0

o TANK

.

« o

BOILER

RI

0

0

Q

CONTENTS: This document contains the instruction to change parameter settings of electronic

board by m eans of user interface.

EDITION:

0 3. 20 0 6

H:

ll6Ct/I*olllX

EFS -

Dishwashing

Systems

Platform EleCtPOniC Oi shW aS tier

Electrolux Professional S E R V I C E M A N U A L

INDEX

1. KEYBOARDS 3



Si l

1.1 HOOD TYPÉ Style 3

1.2 UNDER COUNT ER Style 4

2. MANUAL ACTIVATION OF DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DISPENSERS 5

2.1 Detergent Dispenser Activation 5

2.2 Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation 5

3. RINSE PUMP MANUAL ACTIVATION 5

4.

DETERGENT AND RINSE AID DOSAGE 6

f ") utn

General Parameters 6

5. COUNTERS 8

un t

Counters 8

I I I 6 . TEMPERATURE SETTING 9

Factory Parameters 8

7. CYCLE SETTING 11

CYCLE DIAGRAM

&. 3 / Cyc le 1 Parameters 13

Cycle 2 Parameters 13

Cycle 3 Parameters 13

dffi Drain/Cleaning Cycle Parameters 13

8. OTHER PARAMETERS 14

aP n

Dishwashing Parameters 14

*" O n Read Only Parameters 14

n J. P Comm unication and HACCP Parameters 14

r c f

'-ru

Configuration Parameters 15

r

u

Parameters for automatic hood type dishwashers 16

9. SPECIAL FEATURES 17

9.1 RESIN REGENERATION CYCLE 17

9.2 MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH DOOR/HOOD LOCK DEVICE 17

9.3 DETERGENT AND RINSE AID LEVEL SENSORS ACTIVATION 17

ELI

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS -

Dishwashing Systems Platfonn

E lectrolux P rofessional

Electronic Dishwasher

SERVICE MANUAL

1 . K E Y B O A R DS



(

')

1.1 . HOOD TYP E Style

10]

10]

Fig.

1.1

(^

Detergent dispenser (^«y

Manual

Activation.

S Ø

Q

dIEtl dB ti

5 ® S ^

S ® ®

^R,:

1 ^ Cl

R,

Fig. 1.2

Rinse Aid Dispenser

Manual Activation.

O

Fig. 1.3

Rinse Pump

Manual Activation

(used to EMPTY BOILERi)

IQ

M S _ M

0

SETTING MODES:

To enter into one setting mode

(Fig.

1.4,

Fig.

1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the

appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not

simultaneously pressure of the two keys.

Ä

fflB

r r

o

u c *1

Fig. 1.4

Enter into General Parameters

(l-iold down buttons for all least

five seconds).

ran

fflr

o

o

ppr"

Fig. 1.5

Enter into Factory Parameters

(Hold down buttons for at least

five seconds).

lu o

0

E l ect r o l u x

E FS Dishwashing Systems Platfoim



SERVICE IVIANUAL

1.2. UN DE RCOUN TE R Style



C

o.

V

Q

0 dEh

TANK

O BOILER

O.

m

$

- • >

J

Fig.1.1

Detergent dispenser

Manu al Act ivat ion

Q B S (TflTTsTJ® S ^ a

gp

<^

^

^ ^ ^

o TANK

O BOILER

.

S 0 ffl a

Fig.1.2

Rinse Aid Dispensér

Manua l Act ivat ion

Flg.1.3

RJnse Pump

Manual Act ivat ion

(used

to

EMPTY BOILER)

SETTING MODES:

To enter into one setting mode (Fig.1,4, Fig.1.5) the appliance should be in stand-by: switch on the

appliance, no cycles selected. Is useful keep door open to avoid start cycle in case of not

simultaneously pressure of the two keys.

p

H S[S£r,

OTANK

O BOILER

P

0.

S 0

Fig. 1.4

Enter into General Parameters

(Hold down buttons for at least five

seconds).

r OTANK

i , o BOILER

O

Q

Fig.1.5

Enter Into Factory Parameters

(Hold down buttons for at least five

seconds).

o]

rara

§

P o TANK

O O BOILER

0 ® 0 0

Fig.1.6

Next Parameter Family

OR

Increase Parameter Value

E l e c t r o l u x


E l e c t r o l u x P r o f e s s i o n a l

Electronic D ishwasher

SERVICE MANUAL

2.

M A N U A L A CT IV A TIO N O F D E T E RG E N T A N D RE V SE A ID

D I S P E N S E R S

When replacing detergents may be necessary activate the dispensers to fill hoses.



2.1.

Detergent Dispenser Activation

. iüi

oEt o

Switch on the dishwasher.

Press and hold down CYCLE_2 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the detergent dispenser

starts work for 20 sec.

H © 0

B

m

2.2.

Rinse Aid Dispenser Activation

rs i ,o


Press and hold dovm CYCLE_1 and CYCLE INFINITE keys, after two Tjeep' the rinse a id dispenser

starts work for 40 sec.

3. RIN S E P U M P M A N U A L A CTIV A TIO N

Use this fimcrion to empty the boiler (if the dishwasher is not to be used for a long time, for maintenance operation: ex. before replacing

main board).


Close the door and press and hold down DRAIN and CYCLE INFIN ITE keys. A buzzer signal indicates the

rinse pump activation and the display shows three blinkinglines. Three beeps indicate the cycle end.

raraiQ

m

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platfoim

E lectrolux Professional


SERVICE MANUAL

4.

D E TE R G E N T AND R IN S E AID DOS AGE

bl

this

paragraph is explained

how to

set

the

working time for the detergent and rinse aid dispenseis.



For each dispenser there are two parameters: the initial time and the time during cycle execution.

Cfn

Sym.

d In

r in

d£t

rR ,

General Parameters

P ar am eter Des cr i pt i on

Initial Detergent Dosage (during filling tank)

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage (starts when tank filled)

Detergent Dosage During C ycle E xecut ion (during wash phase)

Rinse Aid Dosage During Cycle E xecut ion (when refi ll ing boi ler)

Unit

[s]

ts]

[8]

[s]

Min

0

0

0

0

Max

2 4 0

1 8 0

182(*)

62(»)

Factory

Defaolt

90

10

8

4

How change the duration:

• Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher,

• Enter into the USER SETTING mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_1 keys for at least five seconds the display

shows u f t (Fig.3.1);

• Press CYCLE_IN FINITE. The display shows alternatively the symbol

a

i t and the duration in seconds (Fig.3.2 and 3.3);

N OTE : If User Interface

v.3.00

tank led is on if value correspond to factoiy default (Default

1,

HOOD

TYPE).

•

Use CYCLE_1

key to decrease the duration and CYCLE_2 key

to

increase (Fig.3.3);

• After settled the duration press CYCLE _IN FIN rrE key to store value, th e display shows the next parameter (Fig.3.4) and the

corresponding

yahie

(Fig.3.5);

• In the same way is possible to change the other duration; when fmished switch OFF and switch ON.

Dim

ÜEn

Fig.3.1

Enter Into User Mode

(press for 5 sec).

1

m n

In

D

Fig.

3.2

Initial detergent dosage

Ö10

i n OS

lU o

Fig.

3.3

Change durat ion.

SØS

m

0

Fig.

3.4

Initial rinse aid dosage

0.

S

^ v :

0

a s s

Fig.

3.5

Change durat ion

ä]

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

(*) N ote for external dispens ers:

. If

dBt: 18 I

the detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUM P is being activated; at the same time voltage

is supplied between connectors LI7-LI9 (main terminal box);



. If dEk: iSi

. If r/ ? «r S /

the detergent dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated to re-fill boiler level; at the

same tiine voltage

is

supplied between connectors LI7-L I5 (main terminal box);

the rinse aid dispenser works when LOADING EV is being activated

to

re-fill bo iler level; at

the

same

time voltage is supplied

between

connectors Llj -L ls (main terminal box);

the rinse aid disp enser works when WASHING PU M P is heing activated; at the same time v

supplied between connectors LI j-L ls (main terminal box);

. If » -/?«; S ?

-

For electrical connections refer to electric diagram -

s:

lectrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

5.

C OU N T E R S

This Parameter Family collects cycle counters and water consumption counters.

For water consumption counters a flow meter must be installed. See

rPi,

(calibratioii parameter) into o r n section (§ Other Parameters).



i i i

il

Cnb Counters

Sym. Parameter Description

U n i t M i n

M a x

Fact o ry

Default

£^ <^ £• Cycles performed counter.

«• 3« . symbol and two num bers blink consecutiv ely. The cycle number is

obtained by joining the two nvmibers. Ex. L

"U

-> means

100 42 cycles executed.

f

* ^ j .

Cycle counter (resettable).

This counter is sknilar to but is resettable by user (see

»" S t

parameter

below).

ffnr

Water Consumption.

(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).

CountsU l of water consumption.

[m ' ]

Water Consumption.

(only for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener).

Counts l i t res of water consumption.

The total consumption is given by adding n o c [m ^Ja nd t [1] values.

ra

Water Consumption: resettable counter, [present up to software version 3.12]

Counts the l i tres of water and is reset table by user (s ee ' ' 5t parameter below).

[1]

• S t Reset resettable counters: C an dL > c

To reset put 1 this parameter, switch off and then on again:

c"c

and t < t

will show zero. Note that C J C is used to count cycles for t

n>

> message

(see next parameter, Oc J ) .

nu H

Store thousand of cvcles after that i. n» > message appears on display.

E x. If this parameter is set t led to 20, «. ° ' > message appears when

C J

C

reach 20.000 cycles.

(^C O

Drain/Clean ing cycles performed.

Similar to rar hut counts Cleaning Cycles. .

^

r

y N umbers of cycles that can be made after a regeneration cycle (only for

dishwashers with non-continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin - 20

regeneration

cycle.].

ff^P

Regeneration cycle counter (only for water softener dishwashe r)

[See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water

softener]. nr E

only counts efficient regeneration cycles, i.e. those carried

out with salt in the special container (only for dishwashers with incorporated

continuous water softener)

,- ff C Counter of regeneration cycles done without salt in the special container, (only

for dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener) [See paragraph 9.4

Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].

EG IO S S G

uc

Oo

n\

E l e c t r o l u x

EF S

- Dishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

6. TEMPERATURE SETTING

In this paragraph

is

explained how

to

change temperature thresholds and all parameters related o boiler and tank.



i )

f/?r

Sym.

btl

htH

bH ,

Factory Parameters

Parameter Description

Boiler Temperature: THRESHOLD.

When boiler temperature reaches this value, heaters switch

off.

Boiler Temperature HISTE RE SIS, (represent dead band).

Heater switch on if boiler temperature is below:

b t l • bkH

Boiler Temperature: HIGH LIM IT.

When boiler temperature reaches this value

t t

alarm appears.

Put 0 to disable

t t

alarm.

Unit

[°C]

[°C]

[°C]

Min

45

2

0

Max

95

1 0

98

Factory

Default

78

2

96

bio

Boiler Temperature: LOW LIMIT.

During boiler warm-up, temperature must increase at least

O L

O °C otherwise

t

3

warning appears.

[°C]

[°C]

^ P

_

Tank Filling Tmieout.

If fiUiiig time is longer than kr >. ^H i alarm appears.

Put

0

to disable n

<

alarm.

[min]

10

bfl

bRJ

bP

bSt

bkd

kkl

kkH

kH ,

Put 0 to disable C

3

warning.

Boi ler Fi l l ing Timeout

If filling time is longer than

bFi,R

t

alarm appears.

Put 0 to disable

fl

« alarm.

Boi ler Temperature Adjust

Boiler Priority (enable boiler wait function)

0 = d i s a b l e d

l = e n a b l e d

Booster Funct ion

Overheat gap over Boiler Temperature Threshold

Boiler temperature negative differential: when the dishwasher is in standby,

boiler threshold becomes:

(Used to save ener^ during machine inact ivi ty by keeping boi ler water at a

lower temperature).

Tub Temperature: THRESHOLD

When tank temperature reaches this value, heater switch

off

Tub Temperature: HISTE RE SIS, (represent dead band).

Heater switch on iftank temperature is below: C

C 1 . CCn

Tank Temperature: HIGH LIM IT.

When tank temperature reaches this value

t j

alarm appears.

Put 0 to disable «.

J

alarm.

[min]

[°C]

-

PC]

r c ]

:[°C]

PC]

PC]

0

0

0

0

0

40

2

0

42

7

1

15

2 0

85

30

95

5

4

1

2

0

63

5

75

j . Q Tank Temperature: LOW LIMIT.

During tank warm-up, temperature must increase at least Dt O °C otherwise

c c warning appears.

Put 0

to disable C C warning.

10

42 20

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS ^ Dishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

To

modify thresholds do the following:

• Switch OFF and switch ON the dishwasher;

• Enter into the FACTORY SE TTIN G mode by pressing and hold down ON/OFF and CYCLE_2 keys for at least

five

seconds (Fig,5.1);

• PressCYCLEINFINTFE.

The

display showsaltemativelythesymbol o t t (Fig.5.2) and

the

corresponding value » Q (Fig.5.3);

• Use

CYCLE_1

key to decrease

the

value

and

CYCLE_2 key

to

mcrease (Fig.4.3);



• Press

CYCLE

INFITE key

to

confirm. The display

shows the next

parameter (Fig.4.4) and the corresponding

value

(Fig.4.5);

• In the

same way

is possible to change

the

other parameters; when

finished

switch

OFF

and switch ON.

rao

0 00

PR[

o

0®0

n i

btr"

o

O

Fig.

5.1

Factory setting mode

000

^

n

D j

Fig.

5.5

Change value & Store

yd

Fig.

5.2

Boiler temp, threshold

0

reshol

'oH ,

00

•~j.

Fig.

5.6

Tank temp. High limit.

SOS

(O o

m

&Sfor

00

Fig.5.3


m

fQ-;

Fig.

5.7


000

htH

n

m

la

Fig.

5.4

Boiler Temp Hysteresis

^

^^s

—^ bu

o o

o. g ^

At the end the display will show again 'FAC and by pressing CYCLE_2 key (Fig.4.9) is possible to change cycle duration (see next

paragraph).

fflØØ

ff^ro

. o

D

Fig.

5.9

Factory setting mode

m m

000

FR[

o

S

[ ^ i:

Flg.

5.10

Next Family

a

B

Fig.

5.11

Cycle 1 Family: ENTER

ij ^

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

7. CYCLE SETTIN G

In this paragraph is explained how to change cycle phases duration (see Tab.l next page).

• Switch on the dishwash er;



Ö

• Enter into the FACTOR Y SE TTIN G mode: press and hold down ON /OFF and CYCLE _2 keys for at least 5 seconds (Fig.5.1);

• Press CYCLE_2 key to select CYCLE _1 parameters.

• Press CYCLE _IN FIN rrE. The display shows al ternat ively the symbol (Fig.5.2) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.3);

• Use CYCLÉ_1 key to mcrease the value and CYCLE_2 key to decrease (Fig.5.3);

• Press CYCt.E _lN FIN lTE key to confirm. The display shows the next parameter (Fig.5.4) and the corresponding value (Fig.5.5);

• In the same way is possible to change the other parameters;

p a B

FRC

°

Fig.

6.1

Factory sett ing mode.

Ö ]

1

R g.

6.5

Ctiange value & Store.

m

0 SSS SQS

fSf

m

tn<'

o

rasa

ass.

r ^

Lr,

0

1°

« o

a

m

Fig.6.2

Select next class.

Fig.

6.3

Cycle

1

Family; ENTER

Fig.

6.4

Wasti du rat ion [min].

Q^D

Sh i

BS

Cs's

Fig.

6.6

VVash duration [sec].

m

n

m

Fig.

6.7

Change value & Store.

After settled all parameters referring Cycle 1, by pressing CYCLE_2 key is possible to change the Cycle 2 parameters (Fig.5.8,5.9) and so

on.

O O O

ru*

a ® Q

Q

FIg.

6.8

Cycle

1

Parame ters.

m n

®'

Flg.

6.9

Cycle 2 Parameters: ENTER

O O O

i nS

\

HØS

Fig.

6.10

VVash duration [m in].

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonn



SER VICE IVIANUAL

CYCLE DIAGRAM

CYCLE TYME



( ')

WASH

< »•

IPR Ln S h

Pfi

DETERGENT

PRE RINSE

Pr

RINSE

•* - ^ — > •

r 1

> COLD RINSE

er

DRAIN

->i

RINSE PAUSE:

PR

FINAL

PAUSE

FP

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

Ti/ /

Syrn.

Cycle 1 P aram eters


Unit

Min

Max

Factory

Defoult



Lni

ShI

PR 1

Pr i

r , 1

er \

dr 1

FPI

L'iB

Sym.

InE

S h ?

PRS

Prd

r ,?

cri

drS

fPS

Ti/J

Sym.

In3

S h i

PR3

Pr 3

r ,3

cr3

dr3

Wash Phase Long

Wash Phase Short

Pause

Pre-rinse Duration

Rinse Phase Duration

Cold Rinse Phase Duration

Drain

Final Pause at End of Cycle

Cycle 2 P arame ters


Wash Phase Long

Wash Phase Short

Pause

Pre-rinse Duration

Rinse Phase Durat ion


Drain

Final Pause at E nd of Cycle

Cycle 3 Param eters


Wash Phase Long

Wash Phase Short

Pause

Pre-rinse Duration

Rinse Phase Durat ion


Drain

[min]

W

[s]

M

[s]

W

W

W

Unit

[min]

[s]

[s]

[s]

[s]

[s]

[s]

w

Unit

[min]

W

[s]

[s]

[s]

w

[s]

0

1

0

0

10

0

0

0

Min

0

1

0

0

10

0

0

0

Min

0

1

0

0

10

0

0

20

60

20

30

45

50

40

60

Max

20

60

20

30

45

50

40

60

Max

20

60

20

30

45

50

40

0

35

4

0

16

0

16

0

Factory

Defoult

0

45

4

0

16

0

16

0

Factory

Default

1

40

4

0

16

0

16

S]

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

8.

OTHER PARAMETERS

dPR

Dishwashing Parameters



Sym.

IPff

di^

Pdr

rPR

r f

r ,t

PPL

CdE

IE

IH5

HE

?HS

Parameter D escription

Initial Pause before start washing

(for

ALL cycles)

Delay

for the 2°

wash pump

(PW

only)

Act ive

a

drain phase

at

th e

end

of washing phase.

Duration

of

pause after rinse cycle (valid

for

dishwashers with door/hood

lock device)

[See par. 9.2

M edical l ine dishwasher with door/hood lock

device].

Celsius/Falffenheit selection

0 .= Celsius

1

=

F a h r e n h e i t

Rinse Temperature Display.

Enable rinse temperature probe (if installed).

0 = during rinse phase the display shows boiler temperature;

1

=

during rinse phase

the

display shows rinse temperature;

Pulse Per Li tre.

This parameter must be settled in according to flow meter installed

[present up

to

software versio n

3.121.

N u m b er

of

wash c ycles perforraable without detergent (only fi?r

dishwashers with external detergent level sensor

- par. 9.2.1

Detergent

and rinse

aid

level sensors activation)

[i£S: 1]

ftessure sensor threshold [present up to software version

2 , 1 ] .

Pressuie sensor histeresis

I

[present

up to

software version,2.11 ] .

Pressure sensor threshold 2 [present up to software version 2,11],

Pressuie sensor histeresis 2 [present up to software version 2.1 i].

Unit

[s]

[s]

[s]

[s]

-

-

[p/1]

-

-

-

-

-

M m

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

.0

0

Max

10

10

40

60

•

1

255

5

255

255

255

255

Factory

Default

0

3

0

0

0

0

0

S

1 4 0

SO

1 4 0

SO

Note: f£> ir, f^3^ Ci. r , cHji paratneters emulates a two

levels

pressure switch, keep in mind diat value doesn't correspond to a

physical quantity.

c o n

Sym.

rEl

r t S

flfr

* " 0 »

»

Read Only Parameters

Param eter Description Unit

M ain Board Firmware Release

Water softener board software version, (only

for

dishwashers with

incorporated continuous water softener).

Active column: indicates through which

of the two

cont inuous water

softener columns boiler filling

is

being carried out:

0 =

column

A and 1 =

column

B

(only

for

dishwashers with incorporated continuous water

softener).

When V

n

>

<

message appears,

the

parameter value becomes

3.

After maintenance, to clear

•

message, insert

0.

WhenT

fl

alarm appears, the machine is

frozen

and this parameter is

3 .

Min Max r. » ^

Default

,-

-

-

-

H]

Electrolux

EFS -

Dishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE IVIANUAL

11

= Machines with incorporated continuous water

softener that communicate with LK485 board

16 =

HACCP printer

8N1)

32

= MODEM GSM DAAS 8N1)

33

= MODEM GSM DAAS 8E1)

48

= Hyper Terminal 8N1)

Hdr

Address.



Prn

bt

bH

kk

kH

CFÜ

This parameter specifies

the

address

of the

appliance into

the

'HACCP_network'.

Works only

if

'HAGCP networic' is selected (see above parameter).

Print parameter table.

HACCP 'Basic' (printer)

Boiler temperature: high limit.


Boiler temperature: gap below high limit.

HACCP'Basic'(printer)

Tank temperature: high limit.


Tank temperature: gap below high limit

Configuration Parameters

-

-

ra

[°C]

PC]

[°C]

0

0

45

0

35

0

255

1

95

20

75

20

1

1

90

10

«8

10

Sym.

Parameter

Description

Unit

Min

Max

Factory

Default

k P Dishwasher Model:

b = HOOD TYPE & XJNDERCGUNTER

1 = POTWASHER

2

= AUTOMATIC POT WASHER

3 =

MEDICAL LINE DISHWASHER WITH LOCK DOOR/HOOD

DEVICE

hn

,

Boiler type:

0 =

ATMOSPHERIC BOILER

1

= PRESSURE BOILER

2 =

EXTERNAL BOILER

doO Door type:

0

= AUTOMATIC

HOOD

1 = MANUAL HOOD

2 = ;FRONT LOADIHG

3

= POT

WASHER

(4 Fl Defmlt mode] (see Default tables):

1

= HOOD TYPE

2

= POT WASHER

3

= UNDEECOUNTER

^ ^£ Solid State Relay (TRIAC).

0 = not enabled;

1 = SOFT START enabled;

3

=

SLOW SOFT START enabled

(works only on boards with Solid State Relay).

Jj

t

BoilerA'ank heating swap:

*

0 =

boiler heaters and tank heater can work simultaneously;

1 = swap enabled: tank heating starts only boiler temperature is

reached;

(Note: disablmg this fimction changes

the

global electrical power

of

appliance; before enabling this fimction check available power, supply cable

section, fuses in according to User Manual).

a:

l e c t r o l u x

E FS - Dishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

See parameter

*"

c t (family r o O) to check fhe software version

installed in the board.

.

C Enable "regeneration cycle" key (only for dishwashers with non-continuous

water softener) [See paragraph 9.1 resin regeneration

cycle].

f^lf ALARMS ENABLE

0 = alarms disabled (to disable also warnings see o

i.

O and C«. O);



1 = alarms enabled;

If this fimction s disabled, faults can be detected so display do not shows

any

alarm code.

/?/?c

frO

SrU

bPo

Ai r gap with float level sensor noimally closed (the level sensor is closed

when the boi ler is empty). E.g. the boiler level sensor for machines with

incorporated continuous water softener.

Forced start

of a

resin regeneration cycle (only

for

dishwashers with

incorporated continuous water softener). [See paragraph 9.4 Dishwashers

with incorporated contmuous water softenerl.

M ax. rinse water hardness (only for dishwashers with inc orporated

continuous water softener). After modifying, disconnect and reconnect the „ ^

machine's main power supply by means of the main switch. [See paragraph

9.4 Dishwashers with incorporated continuous water softener].

B oi ler heat ing control .

Defines the max. permissible temperature difference during boiler heating in °C

a time interval of 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

0

0

4

25

1

2

1 4

80

0

0

10

50

dbG Parameters for automatic hoo d type dishw ashers

Sym.

t 1

t

^

t

3

b H

t

S

k

5

RL.

Ikh

Ikh


D E L A Y _ K 1

Time (during hood lifting) within which

S3 "

must return to die rest position.

H O O D _ T O U T

T I M E O U T

-

max. time allowed for complete hood opening/closing.

D E L A Y _ K 1 _ S 3

During hood lowering, firstly

S3 "

must cut in and then after a time

t 3

.the bottom limit switch S3.

D E L A Y _ K

Time within which K and

K'

must be both closed or both open.

D E L A Y _ S 3

Time during ho od l i ft ing within w hich the bottom l imit switch must return

to the rest position..

D EL A Y _ S5

Time during hood lowering within which the top limit switch must return

to

the rest position.

Displays the last alarm code relative to automatic hood type dishwashers.

Parameter only, valid for hood type models.

Hood hfting motor absorption threshold.

(50 units correspond to a current of approx. 1 ampere).

Paiametro val ido solo per cappott ine.

Soglia limite di assorbimento del mptore di sollevamento della cappotta

(50 Unitä corrispondono ad una corrente di circa un ampere).

Unit

0 . 1 s

0 . 1 s

0 . 1 s

0 .1 5

0 . 1 s

0 . 1 s

-

-

-

Min

0.0 s .

0.0 s .

0.0 s .

0.0 s .

0 .0 s .

0.0 s .

-

0

0

Max

2 0 . 0 s

2 0 .0 s

2 0 .0 s

2 0 .0 s

2 0 .0 s

2 0 .0 s

-

2 5 0

2 5 0

Factory

Default

IS

200

IS

10

20

20

-

100

100

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS -




SERVICE MANUAL

9. SPECIAL FEATURES

9 . 1 R E S I N R E G E N E R A T I O N C Y C L E



o TANK

O BOILER

O

f - - ,1

The regeneration cycle is activated by pressing the button shown in the

figure,

for at least 5 seconds.

For

this

key to be enabled parameter

<

C (in family

i. r u)

must be set

to

1.

At this point you can enter the number of

wash

cycles that can be performed after

each

regeneration: parameter

< t 3

in the

counters family

L nt. if ft." is

set to zero the counter

is

disabled, otherwise after the preset number

of

cycles the

message <* c u is displayed to confinn that regeneration is possible (this is an Infonnatlon-pniy message vi/lth no effect on

operation of the appliance,

so you

can continue to use the dishwasher). The message is cleared when the regeneration cyd e is

terminated.

The number of regeneration cycles performed can be checked by consulting the parameter

HfC

in the

t H e

family of

counter;.

When there are just 15 cycles remaining before the next regeneration cycle, at the end of the wash cyde the display shows the

messages 1 0 followed by « 5 , at the end ofthe next wash cycle the display shows C O O and • « , and so forth, i.e. the

display informs the user of

the

number of

wash

cycles still available before resin regeneration is required.

Before starting the regeneration cyde remove the siphon spillway.

CAUTION: if the regeneration cycle is acddentally s tarted, it can be switched off by pressing the button shown in the figure, for

at least

5

seconds.

The hardness of

the

water

exiting

the softener

can

vary between 3°H - 10 "fH /1.7 °dH - 5.6 "dH

/

2.1 °cH - 7 °cH.

9 . 2 M E D I C A L L I N E D I S H W A S H E R W I T H D O O K / H O O D L O C K D E V I C E

The medical line dishwasher with door/hood lock device has a device that prevents door/hood opening for the entire duration of

the work cy de.

For the door/hood lock to be active, the parameter (in the r ^ u family) must be set to .3.

The dishwasher door/hood is locked at the start of a wash cycle and is released at the end of the final pause after rinse. The

wash compartment

can

be accessed

by stopping

the work cycle in progress, as the locking device is thus disabled.

A

pause

at the end of inse can be set by means of

the

par am eter '' family). This parameter is common to all

3 wash cydes. The inse water temperature is displayed during this pause. Another fina l pause in the cyde can be set by setting

the parameters f' (,r re ,rr 3_ During the final pause the display shows the time remaining for completion of

the

cycle.

The door/hood lock device will be deactivated a t the end of the final

p^^seifPifP?fP3l

For coH'ect performance of the wash cycle the pause at the end of inse and the final pause must assume the default values

(see Prog 032 - 034 - 035).

E i l G C t F O l u X

EFS


EleCtrOnJC Di sh Was he P

Electrolux Professional SERVICE MANUAL

9 4 DISHWASHER WITH INCORPORATED CONTINUOUS WATER SOFTENER

Dishwashers with Incorporated continuous water softener have a continuous softener in the water circuit. By means of special

resins, this device removes the calcareous substances from the feed water, supplying decalcified water for washing.

To activate the continuous water softener, set the parameter (in the H Pfamily) to the value

3

or the value / / if the



«li

water softener board is connected to the LK485 board.

For the continuous softener to work properly the resins must be regenerated periodically with a frequency depending on the

hardness of the inlet water, the number of wash cycles carried out and the max. hardness set with the parameter

5

f"

u

(in the

[F u family).

Unlike conventional water softeners, this continuous softener does not require machine stops for regenerating the resins.

To regenerate the resins

it is

necessary to put kitchen salt in the special co ntainer located in the dishwash er.

In particular, the salt container must be filled when the dishwasher Is used for the first time and whenever the message

is displayed at the start of a wash cycle. The salt container holds up to 1.5 kg of salt.

IMPORTANT: The message may appear for several wash cycles even after topping-up the salt, as the salt must

circulate in the entire sy stem . Connect operation of the dishwasher is no t, however, affected.

The number

of

regeneration cycles performed

can be

checked

by

consulting

the

parameter

Of C in the i.

fit family

of

counters.

o r

f

only counts regeneration cycles carried out with the salt container ad equately

f i l led;

there is another counter,

r E

5 (in the

Cn t family) that indicates the number of regeneration cycles do ne without salt.

If the parameter

JfU

Is

se t

to

the value

i

u ,

according

to

the fadory setting, the water softener outlet water hardness can

vary between 3°lH -10 °fH / 1.7 "dH - 5.6 " dH

/

2.1 °cH - 7 "cH.

Maximum outlet water hardness can

be

modified

by

setting the

Sr t /

value. The ou tlet water hardnes s can

be

modified from

the

value

of

4° AH

to

14° fH .

N B :

To save the aew water hardness value, in addition to the normal parameter modification and saving operations it is necessary to

disconnect and reconnect the machme's main power supply by means of

th e

main switch on the external board.

Water so ftener operation can be checked by fo rcing t:he regeneration of res ins, without waiting

f or t:he outlet wate r hardnes s to reach the set max. value 3 û .

To do this, wait for the water softener to finish previous resin washing or regeneration operations and se t the parameter

frü

( C f u family) to ' for regenerating column A or to ? for regenerating column B.

Switch the machine

off

and on again

so

that

it

carries out complete regeneration

of

the set column.

If

previous resin washing

or

regeneration operations were not

completed,

the manual request for regeneration is not canried out.

It is possible to check which column is being used for boiler filling by querying the parameter

flflf

(<• oo family): i f RUC = 0

column 'A° is used, if

RRC

=1 column "B" is used.

The number of litres used by the machine can be checked by querying the parameters nnc (m3) and

i

(litres). To calculate the

totaln umb erof l itres used by the machine, add the n nc andX values.

N B : In machines with incorporated continuous water softener, tank filling cannot be carried out through overflowing (btF=0) hot

only by means of successive rinse cycles (btF=75). Therefore the btF parameter must be set to 75.

Electrolux

EFS



Eleetronic Dishwasher

SERVICE MANUAL

1 0 .

MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATION

When receivmg an eleetronic board (spare part) may

be

necessary to configure it in according to the machine where has to

be

replaced.

1. With the machine CODE enter into the following table and read die corresponding Prog, number;

2.

Follow the instructions reported into the corresponding Prog.XXX sheet (next pages).

3.

With the machine CODE ind he Layout number in Par.

12.2

- Connectors layout.



1 0 . 1 .

C O D E - > P r o g . TABLE

MODEL

WT4

WT4B

Wr4D

WT4DB

IWT46

m4G

I/VT4DG

WT4WS1

I/VT4BWS

l«T4DWS1

1/VT4BDWS

I/VT4D60

LS5/1

LS5/1 DP

LS5/1WS

LS5/1WSDP

LS5/3

LS5/3

DP

LS5/3WS

.S5/3WSDP

LS5/3WSDPD

LB5G

LB5GDP

LS5/1DP60

LS5/1DPAUS

LS6EP

LS6EP/DD

LS6EA/DD

LS6EA/DD/DP

CODE

400007

400008

400009

400015

400016

400017

400018

400019

400027

400028

400029

400042

400100

400102

400103

400110

400112

400113

400114

400115

400117

400118

400119

400124

400125

S02003

502004

502005

502006

Prog.

021

020

021

020

020

022

022

024

012

024

012

021

021

021

024

024

020

020

012

012

012

022

022

021

036

013

013

Oi l

O i l

Layout

11

8

11

8

8

8

8

11

8

11

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

11

11

8

8

8

8

MODEL

LS6EA/60

WT38DD

WT37

WT38

WT 37/4.5

WT 38/4.5

I/VT37/UK

WT38C

WT38C60

I/VT38CUK

WT38/4.5NW

WT

38/UK

WT37J60

WT37J50

LS6AH240U

m-30H208U

WT30H240U

WT30H208DU

i;\rr30H240DU

Wt30H208RU

I/VT30H240RU

LS6H208DU

LS6AH208U

WT 38/60

WT38/M60

WT38MED

LS6H240DU

1:S6H208RU

LS6H240RU

CODE

502041

502110

502111

502112

502117

502118

502122

502125

502126

502127

502129

502217

502218

502219

502312

502313

502314

502315

502316

502317

502318

502319

502320

502321

502322

502323

502325

502326

502327

Prog.

o i l

046

046

046

046

046

046

033

033

033

046

046

046

046

027

031

031

031

031

031

031

027

027

046

015

014

027

027

027

Layout

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

8

9

8

9

9

9

m

Electrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

MODELLS6EAH

LS6MCD

LU7PDP

LU7ADP

CODES02S23

502524

503020

503021

Prog.

011

033

040

041

Layout

8

8

9

9

MODELI/VT60UKCW

LS 12 AU

LS12UKDPCW

ECOTEMP12SW

CODE

504162

504163

504164

504165

Prog.

001

004

001

001

Layout

1

1

1



lftn U40PDP

IOTU40ADP

LS 10

LS14EA

LS 10 UK DP

ET12E

-S

10/60HZ

LS10CW

LS

10

INS

HT 1200 ins DEK

LS14EA/INS

LS ION

LS

10

D P

LS 10 H D

LS14EA/AU

LS14EA/60

LS 10 UK1

LS 10 UK3

LS 12 INS

LS 12

LS

12

D P

LS 12

60Hz

LS12CW

HT 1200 DEK

L S 1 4 E A / A S I A

LS14EA/G

I/VT60DP

IWT60

iflfreocw

l/VT 60 UK

DP

CW INS

I/VT60INS

lVr60CWINS

m 60 AU C W

IWT60AUN

503023 :

503024

504100

504101

504102

504104

504105

504107

504108

504109

504110

504111

504114

504115

504116

504117

504118

504119

504120

504121

504122

504125

504128

504129

504131

504133

504134

504135

504136

504137

504138

504139

504140

504141

040

047

002

001

002

003

002

002

002

001

001

002

002

008

004

001

002

002

001

001

001

001

001

001

009

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

004

004

9

9

1

4

lOTeSEBI

I/VT65EBIA

WT65EIA

WTeSEÖO

WT65EB60

WT 60

U/400

WT 60

U/440

WT65EBIDG

WT65EBASIA

WT65EIM50

WT65EIM60

WT 60 MX 220/60

LS 12 CW INS

LS14ADP/G

WT65MED

WT65EJ50

WT65EJ60

LS14AH240U

WT65H208U

WT65H240U

LS12ASIACW

WT60ASIACW

LS 12 ASIANS

WT60ASIANB

LS14H208DU

LS14AH208U

LS14H240DU

LS14H208RU

LS14H240BU

WT65H208DU

Wr65H240DU

WT65H208RU

WT65H240RU

WT65M208U

504166

504167

504168

504169

504170

504171

504172

504173

504174

504175

504176

504177

504178

504179

504180

504183

504186

504187

504188

504189

504190

504191

504192

504193

504194

504195

504196

504197

504198

504199

504200

504201

504202

504203

001

004

004

001

001

006

006

001

009

006

006

001

001

001

010

001

001

028

028

028

009

009

00?

009

028

028

028

028

028

028

028

028

028

035

4

4

1

1

4

4

4

2

2

1

1

4

4

1

1

3

3

3

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

12

Electrolux

EFS -




SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL

l«T65ROW

LS14R0W

LS9P

LS9P DD

LS9A U K

CODE

504219

504220

505022

505033

505034

Prog.

052

052

019

019

018

Layout

6

6

6

6

6

MODEL

UC5/1DP

UC5/1WSDP

LD5DP

LD5

FL 620EP

CODE

690010

690011

690013

690014

698003

Prog.

021

024

020

020

013

Layout

11

11

8

8

8



LS9P6Ö

I/VT55P

lflrr55P6

LS9ADGi

OT55ADG1

LS9PAUS

WT55PM50

WT55PM60

PPW1M

PPW1 M U K

PPW1 60 Hz

PPW1 MH

PPW2M

PPW2 M UK

PPW2

60 Hz

PPW2V

m'SSO

M

l/\n"830

M UK

IVT830 60HZ

WT850M

WT850 M UK

WT850 60 Hz

I/VT850V

WT830 M H

m"830EA

WT850EA

I/VT830EAG

WT850EAG

IWT830M208U

OT830M240U

I/VT830H208U

WT830H240U

WT850M208U

505035

505038

505039

505041

505042

505043

505044

505045

506010

506011

506012

506013

506014

506015

506016

506017

506018

506019

506020

506022

506023

506024

506025

506026

506215

506216

506217

506218

506029

506030

506031

506032

506033

019

019

019

018

018

019

019

019

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

017

017

017

017

037

037

037

037

037

6

6

6

6

6

6

13

13

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

5

5

5

5

3

3

3

3

3

ET5EDG

LV6EP

H3300

H2500

H3500

ET5EDCW

LV6EADPWS

HT1200WS

HT1200IWS

FL620ADPWS

H1310SANA

H1510SANA

LV1200IWS

HT900P

LV900P

LD900

LU700PDP

LU700ADP

PWlOp

M

PW200M

PW20Ö

V

PW100MH

LV100M

LV200M

HT 1200

HT 1000

HT 1000 INS

HT 1200 INS

HT 1200 DP

ET12EIG

ET12EI

LV1000

LV1200INS

698004

698006

698007

698008

698009

698010

698011

698012

698013

698014

698016

698017

698018

698022

698023

698024

698033

698034

698040

698041

698042

698043

698044

698045

698050

698051

698052

698053

698055

698056

698057

698059

698060

023

013

029

019

001

016

048

042

042

048

030

010

042

019

019

019

040

047

005

005

005

005

005

005

001

002

002

001

001

026

025

002

001

8

8

8

6

4

8

8

4

4

8

8

4

4

6

6

6

9

9

7

7

7

7

7

7

4

4

1

4

1

3

1

4

4

Electrolux


Electrolux Professiphal


SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL

EtSÉDF

LS10INSDP

LS 10 INS

LS 10

LS

10/fiera

CODE

698090

S36220

S37858

S39968

S42549

Prag.

049

002

002

002

002

Layout

8

MODEL

HT1200

LS12UK/3CW

LS 12 G W

l/VT 60 CW

LS 12 GW

CODE

S47B9i

S47BJI

S47C1Z

S47C6B

S47CCS

Prog.

001

001

001

001

001

Layout



A l

LS 10 INS

LS 10

HT 1000

LS 10 G W

LS

10

G W

LS

10

C W

LS 10 GW

LS10CW

LS

10

G W

LS

10

C W

LS

10

C W

LS

10

G W

LS 10 G W

LS

10

G W

LS10UK1

LS

10

C W

HT1200

IWT60CW1NS

HT1000

WT60/9

wreora

WT60/9

WT60 INS

WT60 INS

WT60CW

LS 12 H D

HT1200

LS 12 CW INS

l/VT 60 AU CW

IWT60INS

WT60INS

OT60NINS

m " 60/60HZ D P

S43062

S43327

S475CH

S47APN

S47CF5

S470U4

S47DU7

S47DUA

S47DUF

S47E17

S47E2C

S47E2H

S47E2M

S47E2R

S47E50

S47E6M

S46002

S46880

S4734M

S47539

S4756Ö

S4756P

S47SGJ

S475GY

S476HA

S4775E

S4777U

S477BM

S477JR

S477M1

S477M1

S477MB

S477QB

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

002

001

001

002

001

001

001

001

001

001

007

001

001

004

001

001

001

001

WT 60

WT 60 GW

WT 60/9

WT 60/9

WT60

LS 12 GW

LS 12 CW

WT 60 giappone

l/VT 60

giappone

WT 60 giappone

WT 60 giappone

LS12CVV

HT1200

WT 60 giappone

WT 60 giappone

LS 12 G W

LS 12CW

HT1200

HT1200

ECOTEMP12

WT 60/9 INS

HT1200

LS 12 INS

WT60/60HZ

LS

12/fiera

WT60/60HZ

WT

60

N

LS12GW

LS

12

INS

LS 12

DP

G W

LS12CW

LS12CW

WT 60 GW INS

S47CCY

S47CEA

S47CEH

S47CEI

S47CKD

D04713

S34369

334377

S34378

S35178

S35179

335246

335330

336384

336385

336846

336847

339964

344)472

340785

341170

341185

342032

342170

342550

S42617

343119

343488

343563

343734

343806

343830

S44421

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

003

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

Electrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

MODEL

ECOTEMP 12 SW

ECOTEMP12 SW

WT60CWINS

WT60

LS12CW

CODE

S47CVG

S47CVH

S47D9Y

S47DCA

S47DE0

Prog.

001

001

001

001

001

Layout



m

LS 12 CW

i/vreo

l«T60

OT60

PPW1 MH

PPW1 MH

1/VT850M

PPW2M

PPW2M

PPW2M

PPW2M

WT850M

PPW2M

S47DMM

S47DSK

S47DWC

S47DWD

S47C37

S47DE1

843016

S44099

S44399

S45958

S47BW4

S47CFG

S47CZ1

001

001

001

001

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

005

äl

l e c t r o l u x

EFS


Electrolux ProfesBional


SERVICE MANUAL

10.2.

PROGRAMMING SHEETS



L S 1 2 - L S 1 4 / W T 6 0 - 6 5

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Prog. 001

Switch OFF and then switch ON the m achine.

[F Ü

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters .

Hood Type like

wotting cycles. 1

b o f

0

Atmospheric boiler.

aO O 1

M anual Hood.

tir u 1

Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c Ü

(for this appUanpe SOFT START is NOT possible).

h ^ k

« Tank heater works only if b oiler temperature reached.

ok r

15 E nable filiing tank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

LE S

U

Deteig entlevel switches not enabled.

M • J SelectiiserintB rfacehoodtypemodel(upto version

3.11

set to ').

«* C U Regeneration cycle disabled.

nL f 1

Alarms

enabled.

Switch OFF and the n switch ON the m achine.

Modify Factory parameters:

FR[

Factory para me ters family

ok L

«o Boiler Temperature Threshold.


äl

l e c t r o l u x

EFS



Eleetronic Dishwasher

SERVICE MANUAL

LS10

1.

2.

Prog. 002

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.

[F C

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters:



t

' 5

3.

4.

5.

6.

tap u

Hood Type like working cycles. 1

O O

(

U

Atmospheric boiler.

do O

t

M anual Hood.

i

Default values for Hood Type models. 1

t r c U

(for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O • t I Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

a t '

« 5 Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

LES a Detergent level switches not enabled. 1

U t

s Select userin terfacehood typem odel(up to version

3.11

set to f ) . 1

r C u Regeneration cycle disabled.

RLr i

Alarms

enabled. 1


IVIodify Factory parameters:

FRC Factory para me ters family

O t t . 7 O B oiler Temperature Threshold.

Modify Cycle parameters:

Ca }

Cycle 1

Sh 1

V 5 Short Wash Phase [s]

f i / c *

Cycle 2

t «IC* / Long Wash Phase [min]

S h e *

HÜ

Short Wash Phase [s]


H:

l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

E C 0 T E M P 1 2

1.

2.

Prog. 00 3


CFü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters:



3.

4.

5.

tijP Ü

Hood Type like woiking cycles.

bo ) U

Atmospheric boiler.

a O O i

M anual Hood.

Or L 1


t r c n

(for

this

appliance SOFT START

is NOT

possible).

O . .

c

u B oiler

heaters

and tank heater work simultaneously. .

hb ^ 0

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

t c S U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U « " Select

user

interface hood

type model

(up to version

3.11

sei to ') .

r E U

Regeneration cycle disabled.

Alarms

enabled.

1



f R[ Factory para me ters family

O C L O 5 B oiler Temperature Threshold.

bRJ 2

9oiler Temperature Adjust 1


a]

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

L S 1 2 A U / W T 6 0 - 6 5 A U

1.

2.

Prog. 0 0 4

Switch

OFF

and then switch

ON

the machine.

[fO Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:



m

3.

4.

5.

6.

k jP Ü Hood Type like workiiig cycles.

O O • U Atmospheric boiler.

doQ U

Automatic Hood.

tSr u 1 Default

values

for Hood

Type

inodels.

t r c

Ü (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O _ t 1 Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

atr » S Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

t c 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

Select user interface hood

type

model (up to version

3.11

set

to

' ) • 1

cE U Regeneration cycle disabled.

n t C 1 Alarms enabled.


M odify Factory parameters:

F R[

Factory param eters family

u

c

L IO B oiler Temperature Threshold.

M odify

the

other parameters:

Ti? r Cycle 1

FP } S Final Pause [s]

f i / c ' Cycle 2

fP? i Final Pause [s]

t i J i C y c l e s

PP 3 2

Final Pause [s]

dPR Dishwashing param eters family.

« P / ? 2 Initial Pause

Switch OFF and then switch

ON

the machine.

a]

l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

PW

1

- 2 / W T830

•-

850

1.

2.

Prog. 005


r f u E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters:



^ i ^

3.

4.

5.

t :IP

bo 1

doo

dfi

trc

b.t

btP

L ES

Ut

rE

Rir

/

a

2

?

n

u

Q

Q

3

0

\

Pot Washer.

Atmospheric boiler.

Front loading f imction.

Default values for Pot Washer models.

(for Ais appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

Tank heater

works

only if boiler temperature reach ed.

The

tank

is

filled into the traditional way.

Detergent level switches n ot enabled.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to ') .


Alarms enabled.



PRE

Factory parameters family

bt T 18

B oiler Temperature Threshold.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machi ne.

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE iVIANUAL

WT60 - 65 USPH

Prog.

006


t f C Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:



küp

ho

1

doo

dFL

tre

b.t

bkf

LES

tl 1

U

1

rE

RLr

n

u

n

u

1

(

1

•

ü

i

75

n

u

S

n

u

1

Hood Type like working cycles.

Atmospheric boi ler.

M anual Hood.



Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

E nable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

Detergent level switches not enabled.

Select user interface hood type model (up to version

3.11

set to ()


Alarms enabled.



f R[ Factory parameters family

bkt

18


Modify the cycle parameters:

Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.

Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr c 'S

Drain [s]

C a? Enter into Cycle 2 parameters family.

Rinse Phase Diiration [s]

dr ^

c ' S Drain [s]

f i/ 3 Enter into Cycle 3 parameters family.

<" f j c S Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr 3 ? S

Drain [s]

Select Fahrenheit:

dPR Enter into Dishwashing parameter family.

[ f

Select Fahrenheit degrees.

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim



SERVICE MANUAL

LS12HD

Prag.

007


[Fu Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters:



k J

tHP

bo (

doo

dFL

krc

b^k

bkF

LES

Ui

rE

RLr

0

Q

1

1

n

u

/

75

Ü

3

n

1

Hood

Type

like working cycles.

Atmospheric boiler.

M anual Hood.



Tank

heater

works

only if boiler temperature reached.

Enable

filling

ank by

means

of rinsing cycles.


Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <) •


Alarms enabled.



Cd I Enter into Cycle 1 parameters family.

Pf I CU

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr

}

3 S

Drain [s]

ri/?

Enter into Cycle 2 parameters family.

Pr ^

^Ü Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr ^

35

Drain [s]

r i / 3 Enter into Cycle 3 parameters family.

Pf 3

cO

Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr 3

3S Drain [s]


E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoiin



SERVICE MANUAL

LS10HD

1.

2.

Prog. 008


[fü

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters:



3.

4.

5.

tjP Q Hood Type like woiking cycles.

O O • u Atmospheric boiler.

do O 1 M anual Hood.

arL 1 Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c Ü (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

0 _ C 1 Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

at > « 5 Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

L E J U


Select user interface

hood type

model (up to

version

3.11 set to •). 1

r E U Regeneration cycle disabled.

n t *"

I

Alanns enabled.



CÜ 1 E nter into Cycle

1

parameters family.

5h 1

f 5 Short

Wash

Phase [s]

Pr i SQ Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr 1 3B Drain [s]

[

^c *

E nter into Cycle 2 para me ters family.

I, n 1 1

Long Wash Phase [min]

5

A»

C*

W

" Short Wash Phase [s]

Pe c Cu Pre-rinse Duration [s]

dr^ 3B Drain [s]


s:

l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

L S 1 2 - 1 4 / W T 6 0 - 6 5 A S I A

1.

2.

Prog. 0 0 9

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine

r y u E nter into CFG parameter

family

and set the following parameters.



3.

4.

5.

c jr u

Hood

Type like

working cycles.

f> 0 r U Atmospheric boiler.

do O 1

M anual Hood.

QF U

}


t r c 0


Ö _ C < Tankheaterw orksonly if boiler temperature reached.

t J C r » 5 Enable filling tank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

LES Ü

Detergent level switches not

enabled.

1

U < J

Select user

interface

hood type model

(up to version

3.11

set

to

»).

»* C U Regeneration cycle disabled.

Alarms

enabled.

1



f R[ Factory para me ters family

Boiler Temperature

Threshold.

1

hP 0

B oiler Priority Disabled


a]

l e c t r o l u x


E lectrolux Professiomd


SERVICE MANUAL

WT65MED

1 .

2 .


Prog. 010

Cf ü

E nter into CFG parame ter family and set the fpilowing par am eters :



m

3 .

4 .

5 .

t j ' Ü

Hood Type like worlcing cycles.

O O <

U

Atmospheri c boiler.

do o U

Automatic Hood.

art,

« D efault values for Hood Type mode ls.

t r c Ü

(for this appl iance SOFT START is N OT possible).

0 _ C 1 Tank healer works only i f boi ler temperature reached.

bb f

7 5 Enable fi l ling tank by means of r insing cycles.

L

t

S U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1 J

S e l e c t u s e r i n te r & c e h o o d t y p e m o d e l ( u p t o

version 3.11

set to <).

»* C U Regeneration cycle disabled.

nu f 1

Alarms enabled.



f RC Factory param eters family

btT 3D

B oiler Tempe ratur« Threshold.

bH , U

Disable boiler high Tempera ture alarm ( L c ).

bn u

U

Boi ler Temperature Adjust

bS k Q

Booster Funct ion.

k k L

5 5 T u b T em p erat u re; T H R ESH O L D .

t« . S5 Tank high Temperature l imi t


L

i^ / Cycle

1

parameters family.

t o «

C


5 h »

3B


r i 1 3 J


dr 1 HO

Drain [s]

fP I

« 5 Final Pause [s]

r if c* Cycle 2 para me ters family.

H:

l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

WT65MED

6.

Set other parameters.

}P R H Initia l Pause [s]


Prog.

010



LS6 6000W ATM

1.

2.

3.

Prog.

011


CPU E nter into CFG parame ter family and se t the following param eters.

t jP U

Hood type like working cycles.

0 0 < u Atmospheric boiler.

aO O c

Front loading.

O r t

3

Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c 1

SOFT START ENAB LED.

0 _ t * Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached,

hk r

»5 Enable

filling

ank by

means

of

rinsing

cycles.

t c S

U


0 1

3

Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemo del(npto version

3.11

set to •)•

r c

U


W t r « Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON

the

m achine.

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

LS5WS / WT4WS TRIPHASE

1 .

2.

Prog. 012


[F O

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eter s.

t j r u




<-x

l:«|

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

OO

t U Atmospheric boiler.

Front loading door type. 1

or u J Default values for Undereounter models.

t r c

} SOFT START ENABLED.

O - t f Tank heater

works


hk r

» 5 Enable

filling ank by means

of

rinsing

cycles.

LES 0

Detergent level

switches not

enabled. 1

Select user interface for LSS (np to version 3.11 set to 5 ) . i

re ( Regeneration cycle enabled.

RL

r

/

ALARMS

ENAB LED.


iVlodify Factory parameters:

F

R[

E nter Into FAC param eter family.

b t L O J B oiler Temperature Threshold.

On u

C Boiler

Temperature

Adjust.

bSk d B ooster Function. 1


[Ü 3

Cycle 3 para me ters family.

L

n

J 1 Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh 3

V u Short Wash Phase [s]


Modify Detergent dosage:

uE n

E nter into GE n param eter family.

d lO tu Initial Detergent Dosage [s].

r

in

5 Initial

Rinse Aid

Dosage

[s].

[n t Counters

r t 3 t u Number ofcycles allowed before regeneration.

H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS


Electrolvix Professional


SERVICE MANUAL

LS6 PRESS

1.

2.

Prog. 0 1 3


C fu

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters .




: 1

3.

4.

5.

bo t 1

Pressurehoiler.

Front loading. 1

Or^ 3


t r c i

SOFT

START

ENAB LED.

0 _ t 1 T an k h ea te r works only i f boiler ternperature reached.

hh r

u The tank is filled into the traditional way.

I f 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled. 1

U «

3

ACTIVE function disabled (up to versio n 3.11 s et t o o ) .

r C

u


nL f

« Alarms enabled.



f

/?L E nter into FAG param eter family and cha nge boiler threshold.

O C i . So



E l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE MANUAL

WT38MED

1.

2.


Prog. 014

CFü E nter into CFG parame ter family and set the following parameters.

Hood

Type


ho 1 U

Atmospheric boiler.



3.

4.

5.

tSOQ

C Front loading.


t r c

1

SOFT START EN ABLED.

Q _ t 1 Tank heater works only if boi ler temperature reached.

bt r » S Enable filling ank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

L

c

5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

u « 8 ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version

3.11

set to U ).

r

E U Regeneration cycle disa bled

flir

/ Alarms enabled.



fR [ E nter into FAC param eter family and cha nge boiler threshold.

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

bH , 0 Disable boiler high Temperature alarm ( t ? ).

bRJ U

Boiler

Temperature

Adjust

bjit U B ooster function not needed.

be d

tu During stand-by boiler

is

kept at lower

emperature

han Temperature Threshold.

k t[

5 S

Tub

Temperature Threshold.

Tank high Temperature limit.


f y / Cycle 1 parameters family.

L

n i

V Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh

i

ID Short Wash Phase [s]

r

< i 3 S Rüise Phase Duration [s]

dr

1 V u Drain [s]

FP 1 IS Final Pause at End of Cycle

r i/c* Cycle 2 para me ters family.

L

fIC

5 Long Wash Phsise [min]

S]

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE IVIANUAL

WT30 USPH

1.

2.


Prog. 0 1 5

[P L

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

c 3r

u Hood

Type like

working cycles.

OO 1

u Atmospheric boiler.



3.

4.

5.

do O C

Front loading.

Default

values

for Undercounter models.

t r c Ü


O .. t ( Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reach ed.

at r

( s E nable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

t t 5

U

Detergent

level

switches not enabled.

U i a

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version

3.11

set to U).

r E

U Regeneration

cycle

disabled.

n

{

/• » Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON the machin e.


PRÜ E nter into FAC param eter family and change boiler threshold.


hk a 3

During stand-by boiler is kept at

lower

temperature than Tem perature Threshold.

b 5 1 u Booster Function not necessary.

ttl SB

Tank Temperature Threshold.

High lim it for tank temperature.


r i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.

in } 1


Sh t S S


Rinse

Phase

Duration [s]

dr 1 HS

Drain [s]

FP 1

V Final Pause [s]

f i/c* Cycle 2 para me ters family.

th e

C* Long Wash

Phase

[min]

Sh^ ? C*

Short Wash Phase

[s]

Electrolux

EFS -




SERVICE MANUAL

WT30 USPH

dr n Drain parameters family.

id f

30

Initial Drain

Phase

Duration

[s]

dPR Set other parameters.

iP R

5

Initia l Pause

[s]

Prog.

015



6.

[ F i Fahrenheit.


m

m

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfonii



SERVICE MANUAL

ECOTEMP 5

1.

2.


Prog. 016

[F u E nter into CFG parame ter family and set the following par am eters .

t 3r u Hood Type


O O

(

u

Atmospheric boiler.

doO c

Front loading.



3.

4.

5.

dFi

3


t r e 1

SOFT START EN ABLE D.

O « C U Tank

and

boiler

heaters

work sim ultaneously.

ht F

» 5 Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

LCJ

U


U /

a

ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version

3.11

set to u ) .

r E

U Regeneration cycle disabled.

n j .

»" « Alarms enabled.

witch OFF and then switch ON the machi ne.


F R[

E nter into FAC param eter family and chang e boiler threshold.

bt L

1 • B oiler Temperature Threshold.

bt d 3

During stand-by boiler

is kept

at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.


CiS 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.

t

n « « Long Wash Phase [min]

5 ^

/

ID

Short

Wash Phase

[s]

r » / c ' S Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr j HD

Drain [s]

FP 1

V Final Pause [s]

r

i/c*


t n

C*

? Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh? i ?


r iC C J


dr ^

V u Drain [s]

F

P c" V Final Pause [s]

B]

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing Systems Platfonn



SERVICE MANUAL

WT830E A / WT850E A

1.

2.


Prog. 0 1 7

f f G E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following pa ram eters .

tap S Automatic Pot Washer.

O O ( U Atmospheric boiler.



3.

4.

5.

a O O 3

Automatic Pot Washer

Qr^ C

DefavUt values

for

Hood Type

models.

t» * C t? (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

0 _ C « Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

b t r U The tank is filled into the traditional way.

LE S

Ü Detergent level switches not enabled.

HI Q

U 1 J SelectuserinterfacehoodtypemodB l(upto version

3.11

set tc

r E U Regeneration cycle disabled,

n t <* » Alarms enabled.


Modify the cycle parameter:

Cii 1 Cycle 1 parameters family.

t n • C Long Wash Phase [min]

S ^ /

i 3


FP 1 5 Final Pause [s]

r ^ ? Cycle 2 param eters family.

L nc 5 Long Wash Phase [min]

S h ? c" s

Short Wash

Phase [s]

fP S

5 Final Pause [s]

r y 3 Cycle 3 para me ters family.

U n 3 8 Long Wash Phase [min]

5h 3

^3 Short Wash Phase [s]

FP 3 3 F inal Pause [s]


. ' ) .

H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platfonn



SERVICE MANUAL

LS9 / WT 55 ATM

1.

2.

Prog. 0 1 8


[fü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

t iP 0

Hood Type like workiiig cycles. 1



3.

4.

5.

6.

b o

« U Atmosphericboüer.

aO Q

( Manual Hood.

o f t 1 Default values for Hood Type models.

t r c Q

(for

this


is NOT

possible).

0 _ t • Tank heater works only if b oiler temperature reached.

O f r 7 5 Enable

filling

ank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

t t

5 u Detergent level

switches

not enabled.

U 1 "

Select user interface hood type model (up to version

3.11

set to «).

re U

Regeneration

cycle

disabled.

nur 1

Alarms enabled.



F

RL Enter Into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

bt C 3?


B oiler Temperature Adjust 1

B ooster Function. 1


C

if c* Cycle 2 param eters family.

5 ^ ^ 5 5

Short Wash

Phase [s]

CUB Cycle 3 param eters family.

L n3 H


dP R Set other param eters.

iP R

5 hiitial Pause [s]


a]

l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

LS9 / WT55 PRE SS

1.

2.

Prog. 0 1 9


[F ü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eter s.

t jP u Hood Type like working cycles.



3.

4.

5.

6.

ho 1 1 Pressure boiler.

aO O

<

M anual Hood.

dF L ( Default values for Hood Type models. 1

t r C fl (for this appüance SOFT START is NOT possible).

0 _ t « Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

ok r u The tank is filled uito the traditional way.

i f 5

Q


enabled.

1

U i 3 Select user interlace hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to <)•

r C U Regeneration cycle disabled.

n v I* (

Alarms

enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON th e machi ne.


FR[

E nter into FAC parame ter family and change boiler threshold.

hkc o V B oiler Temperature Threshold.

an u U B oiler Temperature Adjust.

o 5 t / B ooster Function.


f i j? Cycle 2 para me ters family.

S h e *

S 5 Short Wash Phase [s]

r ÜB Cycle 3 para me ters family.

i nB

V Long

Wash

Phase [min]


H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE MANUAL

LS5 / WT 4 PRE S

1.

2.

Prog. 020

Switch OFF and then switch ON th e machine.

CPU

E nter into CFG paramete r family and set the following param eters.

k jP Ü Hood

Type like

woridng cycles.

O O

< 1 Pressure boiler.



3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

OO Q C Front loading door type.

Default

values

for Undercounter models. 1

t r c 1 SOFT

START

ENAB LED.

0 _ C ( Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

Ok r u The tank is

filled

nto the traditional way.

LB S U Detergent level

switches

not enabled. 1

U 1 IJ Selectuserinterfacewitfaoutdisplay (up to version 3.1 Is et

to

' ) •

»" C u Regeneration cycle enabled.

RL r Q ALARMS NOT ENABLED.


M odify Factory param eters:

FRC

E nter into FAG param eter family.

hk

U

8 i B oiler Temperature Threshold.

bR J 3 B oiler Temperature Adjust 1

O 5 1 C Booster Function.


ÜÜ3


L ItJ 1 Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh 3 V u Short Wash Phase [s]

Switch OFF and th en switch ON the m achine.

M odify Detergent do sag e:

u f n E nter into GE n param eter family.

din ISS Initial Detergent Dosage. 1

f i n u hiitial Rinse Aid Dosage.

dE k

18 ^

Detergent dispenser

works when LOAD

SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

rR , SI Rinse Aid dispenser

works

when

LOAD

SOLENOID

VALVE

in activated. 1

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE MANUAL

LS5 /

WT

4 PRE S M ONO

1.

2.

Prog. 021


[ Fu E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

tap Q Hood Type like working cycles. 1

b o » « Pressure boiler.



rnn

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

doO c Front loading door type.

Qp L 3 Default values for Undercounter models.

br C u (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O . . C « Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reach ed.

lit r u The tank is filled mto the traditional way.

L C 5

U

Detergent

level

switches not enabled.

Selectuserinterfacewithoutdisplay(upto

version

3.11 set to •)• 1

»* C U Regeneration

cycle

disabled.

Ri r n ALARMS NOT

EN ABLED.



P HE E nter into FAC param eter family.

O t t 8 C Boiler Temperature Threshold

On u 3 B oiler Temperature Adjtjst

o 5 t c

B ooster Function.


CUB


Lo j 1 Long Wash Phase [min]

5h3 * / S Short Wash Phase [s]



uE n E nter into GE n parameter family.

d In

/ o 5

Initial Detergent Dosage.

<* /»I

u

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.

dE t i8S Detergent dispenser works when LOAD SOLENOID VALVE in activated.

r / ? « Si Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLEN OID VALVE in activated.

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

LB5G/WT4G

1.

2.

Prog. 022


r P u E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

Hood Type

like working cycles. 1

bo < U

Atmospheric boiler.

aO Q C

Front loading door type.



3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

dFL 3

Default

values for Undercounter

models. 1

k rc Ü


Q _ e / Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

at • 0

The tank is filled nto the traditional way.

V f 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1 <J

Select user interface for LSS (up to version

3.11

s et to <)•

f t


Ri r '

ALARM S ENAB LED.



f-RC

E nter into FAC param eter family.

bti as

B oiler Temperature

Threshold.

1

On U U

B oiler Temperature Adjust.

O S C

c

B ooster Function.


t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

V » 1 J 1 L on g

Wash

Phase [min]

5h3 HQ




uE n

E nter into GEn parameter family.

d in lu

Initial Detergent Dosage [s].

r

In

S Initial Rinse Aid Dosage [s].


E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

i f

5

U

I

rE

Rir

U Detergent level switches not enabled.

O ACTIVE

fifflction

disabled (up to version

3.11

set to V ).


i ALARMS EN ABLED.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.



LS5WS / WT4WS MONO

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Prog. 024


[F Ü


U Hood Type like working

cycles.

1

O O

• u Atmospheric boiler.

doO c Front loading door type.

drL 3 Default values for Undercounter models.

t r c 0 (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

f ) _ C / Tank heater

works


at r

J

s Enable filling

tank by means

of rinsing cycles.

L E J U Detergent level switches not enabled.

SelectuserinterfaceforLSS (op to

version

3.11 s et to J ) . 1

»*

C » Regeneration cycle enabled.

Ri r i ALARMS ENABLED.



FR[ E nter into FAG para me ter family.

hk C 83 B oiler Temperature Threshold.

hR d C B oiler Temperature Adjust.

O 5 1

c

B ooster Function.


r y 3 Cycle 3 para me ters family.

L tl 3

« Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh 3 V u Short

Wash

Phase [s]

R]

Electrolux

EFS

- Dishwashing Systenis Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

LS12 ECOTEMP (EUROPE)

1.

2.


Prog. 025

r F u E nter into CFG parameter family and set the following pa ramete rs.

tjP Ü

Hood

Type


O O ( u Atmospheric boiler.



3.

4.

5.

aO Q

f M anual Hood.

tS r u i


krc 0

(for

this


is NOT

possible).

O _ ^

0

Tank and boiler heaters work simultaneously.

bk ^

7 5 T he

tank is filled nto the

traditional way.

t C 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

M « " Select user interface hood type model (up to version

3.11

set to

r E 0


Ri r 1

ALARMS EN ABLED.


iVIodify Factory parameters:

f /? r E nter into FAC param eter family.


an u U



h.

MJ

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

L S 1 2 E C 0 T E M P U K

1.

2.

Prog. 026

Switcli OFF and tlien switch ON the m achine.

r f u E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

k jP Ü Hood Type like

working cycles.

hot u

Atmospheric boiler.



3.

4.

5.

6.

do O 1

M anual Hood.

dr i 1

Default

values

for

Hood Type

models.

t r C 0

(ibr this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

i r . t / Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

at r u


t. C 5 u Detergent level switches not enabled.

tf 1 3 Select user interface hood type model (op to version

3.11

set to <).

C C U


fli.

r

/

ALARMS

ENABLED.



F fff E nter into FAG param eter family.

b t t

Q t B oiler Temperature Threshold.

hn u U



ca t

Cycle 1 parameters family.

dr

u

Drain [s]

r y ? Cycle 2 parameters family.

dr d D

Drain[s]

CUB

Cycle 3 param eters family.

dr 3 Ü

Drain [s]

dr n Drain para me ters family.

jd^ 3u

Initial Drain Phase Dutation [s]

dP ^

Set other parame ters.

Pd ^ JÜ

Drain Phase Duration at

the

end of washing phase, [s]


Electrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

LS6AH

1.

2.

Prog. 027


[F ü

E nter into CFG parame ter family and set the following param eters.

bjP Ü Hood Type like working cycles.

b o • U Atmospheric boiler.

tSQO c Front loading door type.



3.

4.

5.

dfl 3

Default

values for Undercounter

models. 1

t r c 1 SOFT START EN ABLE D.

ö _ t • Tank heater

works

only i f boiler temperature reached.

o t r « 5 Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles,

U C 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U ) J Selectiiserinterfacehoodtypemodel(upto version 3.11 set to i) ,


/ ? t r / ALARMS ENABLED.



F

RC E nter into FAC param eter family.

bk'C S V B oiler Temperature Threshold.

On u U B oiler Temperature Adjust

ok a 3 During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

i k C ^8


k k H C* mSTE RE SlS of Tank Temperature.


r H 1 Cycle

1

parameters family.

t n

» »

Long Wash

Phase [min]

5 ^ » / 3B Short Wash

Phase

[s]

FP 1 V Final Pause [s]

f i/c* Cycle 2 para me ters family.

L nc c Long Wash Phase [min]

S ^ c "

3B

Short

Wash

Phase [s]

f P? H Final Pause [s]

H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

LS14AH/WT65H

1.

2.

Prog. 028


[F ü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.


D O (

U

Atmospheric boiler.

1 M anual Hood. 1



3.

4.

5.

default

values

for Hood

Type

models. 1

t r c Ü

(for

this


is NOT

possible).

Ö _ C 1 Tankheater works only if boiler temperature reached.

ob r

7 5 Enable filling ank by means of rinsing cycles.

t c S

0


U « J Select user interface hood type model (up to version

3.11

set to •) .

r C u


Rir i ALARMS

EN ABLED.



F RC

E nter into FAC param eter family.

hh L.

8H


On u U

B oiler Temperature Adjust

t k L a 8


tk H

C* HISTERE SIS of Tank Temperature.


[

y ' Cycle 1 param eters family.

Sh 1 31


PR 1 3

Pause [s]

FP i

V Final Pause [s]

r i/c* Cycle 2 param eters family.

ShE Hh


fP^ H

Final Pause [s]

r i f 5 Cycle 3 parame ters family.

Sh 3 3S


H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwa^hing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

H3300

1.

2.

Prog.

029


[F ü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

U Hood Type like working cycles. 1

b o « u Atmospheric boiler.

do O c Front loading.



3.

or ^ 3 Default

values


t r c 1 SOFT START EN ABLE D.

0 _ C »

Tank

heater

works

only if boiler temperature reach ed.

at r ( 5 Enable filling ank

by

means of rinsing cycles.

t c 5


u 1 8

ACTIVE

fimction

disabled (up

o

version 3.11 s et oU).


nL f 1 Alarms enabled.


the

machine.

m

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

H131

OS ANA

1.

2.


Prog. 030

' f S E nter into CFG para me ter family and set the following param eters.

Hood Type

like

working cycles.

OO

i

u

Atmospheric boiler.

aO Q

C Front loading.




3.

4.

5.

t r c t


O « t 1 Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

btr f S Enable filling tank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

L C S U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U /

a

AC nV E function disabled

{up

to version 3.11 set t o o ) .

r

E U Regeneration cycle disabled.

n t

r

1 Alarms enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON th e m achine.


f R[ E nter into FAC param eter family and cha nge boiler threshold.

act. Sfu Öoiler

Tempeiatin^ Threshold.

0 Disable boiler high Temperature alarm (

t

C*).

bRJ U B oiler Temperature Adjust

B ooster function not needed.

oka iu

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Tem peratuie Threshold.

kh'Z

S 5 Tub Tem perature Threshold.

k

n 1

o 5

Tank high

Temperature lim it


[^ 1 Cycle 1 parame ters family.

i n }

V Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh

Iu Short Wash Phase [s]

r 1 1 3 5 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr 1 V u Drain [s]

fP I

( 5 Final Pause at End of Cycle

r f/c* Cycle 2 param eters family.

t i c a


E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

WT30H

1.

2.

Prog. 031


t F G E nter into CFG param eter family and se t the following param eter s.

t i / P Ü Hood Type like working cycles. 1

GtO f U Atmospheric boiler.

do O c Front loading door type.

or u 3 Default values for Undercounter models.



3.

4.

5.

hr C

/ SOFT START EN ABLE D.

D _

c /

Tank

heater

works


O t r

t S Enable filling tank

by means

of rinsing cycles.

L

t

S U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U / O ACTIVE function disabled (up to versi on

3.11

set to U ).

r f u Regeneration cycle disabled.

m r ALARMS

ENABLED.



f f?r E nter into FAC param eter family.

bt'C 8H B oiler Temperature Threshold.

h nu U B oiler Temperature Adjust.


is kept

at lower temperature than Temperature

Threshold.

1

Tank Temperature

Threshold.

1

ttH e* fflSTE RE SIS of Tank Temperature.

IVIodify th e cycle pa ram ete rs:

CHI Cycle 1 parameters family.

t. n » 1 lx)ng Wash Phase [min]

5h 1 3B

Short Wash Phase

[s]

FP 1 V Final Pause [s]

r i/c" Cycle 2 para me ters family.

L nC c Long Wash Phase [min]

5h? 3B Short Wash Phase [s]

fP^

V

Final Pause

[s]

[Ü 3 Cycle 3 para me ters family.

m

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

WT38 MED

Prog.

032


r P u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

bo (

do o

J M edical line dishwasher with lock door/hood device.

U Atmospheric boiler.

C Front loading.



dFL

tre

b.t

bkf

LES

II I

u

(

rE

HLr

3

Default

values

for Undercounler models.

/ SOFT START EN ABLED.

/ Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

• S Enable filling ank by means of rinsing cycles.


3 ACTFVE function disabled (np to

version 3.11

s et

o

U).


( Alarms enabled.



F R[ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

btl

bH ,

bHJ

bSt

btd

ktl

).

Boiler Temperature Threshold.

U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm (1 .

U Boiler

Temperature

Adjust.

u B ooster fiinction not needed.

( 0 During stand-by boiler is kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

Tub Temperature Threshold.

BS Tank high Temperature lim it

Modily the cycle parameters:

Cycle

1

parameters family.

t o t

3 Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh I 3 S Short Wash Phase [s]

f / ? } S Pause [s]

r , } 3S Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

t

Vfl Drain [s]

EP i SÜ Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

-




SERVICE MANUAL

WT38

MED

Prog.

032

C

3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

t n J o Long

Wash Phase

[min]

5 ^ . 3 . 3 5 Short

Wash

Phase [s]

PR 3 S Pause [s]

r ,3

35 Rinse Phase Duration [s] 1

dr3 V G Drain [s]



6 .

FP 3

BÜ

Final

Pause

at

End

of Cycle [s].

dP R Set other parameters.

rPR VS Duration ofpaus e after the rinse cycle [s]. 1


' ^

LS6MCD

1.

2.

3.

Prog.

033


the

machine.

CFÜ E nter into CFG parameter family and set the following param eters.

tUP U

Hood

Type


ho 1 U Atmospheric boiler.

aO O C

Front loading.

dfl 3 De&ult

values


t r C « SOFT START EN ABLED.

Ö

_ C «

Tank heater works only if boi ler temperature reached.

ac>

»5

Enable

filling

ank by means of rinsing cycles.

1. C 5 « Detergent level switches enabled.

u > " Select user inter&ce hood

type model

(up to version

3.11

set to <).

«" C

Q

Regeneration

cycle

disabled.

nu f t Alarms

enabled.


äl

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

WT30M

1.

2.


Prog. 034

'.fü

E nter into CFG para me ter family and set the following para me ters.

M edical line dishwasher

with

lock door/hood device.

OO « u Atmospheric boiler.

aO Q }

M anual Hood.



3.

4.

5.

O r t r Default values for Hood

Type

models.

b r c

Q


D« c » Tank heater works only i f boiler temperature reached.

b

fr

r

» 5 Enable

filling ank by means

of rinsing cycles.

L t 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

il

•

8

ACTIVE function disabled (up to version 3.11 set to U ) .

(• C

U


nL f 1

Alarms enabled.



FR C E nter into FAC param eter family and cha nge boiler threshold.

bb C S S


bH

U Disable boiler high Temperature alarm

((U

t ).

3oiler Temperature A djust

bS t

u

B ooster function not needed.

be a

f

U Dimng stand-by boiler

is

kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold.

k hL

S 5

Tub

Tem perature Threshold.

kn 1

o 5 Tank high Temperature limit.


C a 1 Cycle 1 param eters family.

i O « J Long Wash Phase [min]

5 ^ 1 if 5 Short Wash Phase [s]

PR i

5 Pause [s]


dr 1

V C Drain [s]

FP

«

BS

FinalPauseatEndofCyclels].

H]

l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE MANUAL

WT30M Prog. 034

[i^3

Cycle 3 param eters family.

L o3 8


5h 3 3S


PR 3

5 Pause[s]

r

t3 3 J


dr 3 *^ Ü

Drain [s]



H

6 .

FP 3

8Q

Final Pause at

End

of Cycle [s].

dPfl Set other param eters.

rP R

V5 Duration of pause after the rinse cycle [s]. 1

f F / Fahrenheit


i

WT65M

1 .

2 .

Prog.


r f

u

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para mete rs.

k^P 3

M edical line dishwasher with lock door/hood devi ce.

O O 1 U Atmospheric boiler.

do O 1

Front loading.

o r t 3

Default values for Undercpunter m odels.

t r c

1


0 _

t

/ Tank heater

works


at r

« 5 Enable filling ank by means of rinsing cycles.

LES U


U »

3


type


3.11

set

to

•) .

re U


RLr }

Alarms enabled.

035

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS


E lectrolilx Professional


SERVICE MANUAL

WT65M

5 .

Prog. 035


f i/ ' Cycle

1

parameters family.

t o • 3 Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh 1 35 Short Wash Phase [s]

PR 1 S Pause [s]


[s]

1



6 .

dr

1

V f l Drain [s]

FP ( fifl Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

r y ?

Cycle 2

parameters family.

L i e

• Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh^

3 S Short Wash Phase [s]

P f l c * 5 Pause [8]

C iC 35 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

or C Hu

Drain [s]

fPl?

BO

Final Pause

at

End

of Cycle[s].

r i /3 Cycle

3

param eters family.

L fl 3 8 Long Wash Phase [min]

5h3 35 . Short Wash Phase [s]

PR 3 5 Pause [s]

r i3 35 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr3 HQ Drain [s]

fP3 BÜ Final Pause at End of Cycle [s].

dPR Set other parame ters.

rPR H5 Duration of pause after

the

rinse cycle [s]. 1

i, r t Fahrenheit

Switch OFF and then switch

ON

the machine.

Electrolux

EFS

-


Electrolux ProfesBional


SERVICE MANUAL

LS5/1DPAUS

1.

2.

Prog. 036


[Fu E nter into CFG para me ter family and set the following param eter s.

U

Hood Type like working

cycles.

1

O O » / Pressure boiler.

do O C

Front

loading door type.

1



3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

or i, 3

Default

values

for Undercoanter models.

fcrc 0 (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

O-k 1

Tank heater

works only

if bo iler temperature reached.

at r u

The tank is filled into the traditional way.

LE5 U


enabled.

1

Select user interface for LS5 (up to version 3.1 Is et to J ) . 1

r C u


Ri r U

ALARMS

NOT

ENABLED.



PR[ E nter into FAC param eter family.

b c L S t Boiler Temperature Thresholi

3

B oiler Temperature Adjust 1

Booster

FunctiotL

1


[ a3

Cy de 3 parame ters family.

U O 3 1

Long Wash

Phase [min]

Sh 3 HÜ




uE n E nter into GE n param eter family.

d in

/5S Initial Detergent Dosage. 1

r

l O

u

Initial Rinse Aid Dosage.

dE t 8E

Detergent dispenser

works

when LOAD SOLEN OID VALVE in activated.

rR 1 S 1

Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLEN OID VALVE in activated.

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE iVIANUAL

PW1-PW2

/

WT830 -WT850 USA

Prog.

037

1.


f fC

Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

kHP

bo

f

doo

i

0

S

Pot Washer.

Atmospheric bo iler.

Front loading function.



dFL

trc

b.k

bkF

LES

U

rE

RLr

E

Ü

/

n

u

Q

5

n

u

\

Default

values

for

Pot

Washer models,




Detergent level switches hot enabled.


type


3.11

set

to

').


Alarms enabled.

3. Switch OFF and then switch ON the machine.


f S L Enter into FAC parameter family.

bkl

biii

bRJ

ktl

k k H

B H

B oiler Temperature threshold.

38 Boiler Temperature high

limit.

U

B oiler Temperature Adjust

7

0

Tub Tem perature Threshold.

C* fflSTERESIS

of

Tank Temperature.

9Ü

Tank high Temperature limit.

5.


CHI Cycle 1 parameters family.

5/T/

r

, I

fP}

S 3

Long Wash

Phase

[min]

Short Wash

Phase

[s]


Final

Pause

at

End

of Cycle [s].

rif?


In?


E l e c t r o l u x

EFS —




SERVICE MANUAL

WT30C (Café Line)

1.

2.

Prog. 038


CFü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

kiSP Ü


iiO f U

Atmospheric boiler.

do O C

Front loading door type.

or u 3




m >

3.

4.

5.

t r c j


h^ k

1

Tank heater

works

only if bo iler temperature reached.

ok F

7 5 Enable filling tank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

LE S

1 Detergent level switches enabled. 1

U f " Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(ap to version

3.11

sett» <).

I*

C

Q


/ ? t

r

/ ALARMS EN ABLED.



F /? r E nter into FAC param eter family.

b k l

SW B oiler Temperature

Threshold.

1

B oiler Temperature Adjust. 1

ok a J

During stand-by boiler is kept at lower teinperature than Temperature Threshold.

k k Z S S


k k H

C* HISTERE SIS of Tank Temperature.


r i / » Cycle 1 parameters family.

L O 1

« Long Wash Phase [min]

S h

/

3B

Short

Wash

Phase [s]

FP }

V FmalPause[s]

L H P

Cycle 2 par am eter s family.

un c c


Sh^

3B

Short Wash

Phase [s]

F P?

V Final Pause [s]

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Oishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

WT38PM 50 / WT38PM 60

1.

2.


Prog. 039

[F ü

E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters.

t a " U

Hood Type l ike working cycles.

bo 1

1 Pressure boi ler.

doo ^

Front loading .



3.

4.

5.

3

Default values for Undercoun ter mode ls.

h r c Ü

(for this appl iance SOFT START is N OT possible).

0 _ t • Tank heater works only i f boi ler temperature reached.

a t r

1 5 E nable fi l ling tank by means of r insing cycles.

L c 5 u Detergent level switches not enabled.

i / »

8

ACTIVE funct ion disabled (up to version 3.11 s e t t o U ) .

»*

C u Regeneration cycle disabled.

n L <* ( Alarms enabled.



PRC E nter into FAC param eter family and chan ge boiler threshold

b t c 30

Boi ler Temperature Threshold.

a t a tu

During stand-by boiler is kept at löwer temperature than Tempe rature Threshold.

O S (T u B ooster Funct ion not necessary.

11U OS

Tank Tempe rature Threshold.

c n •

8 J

High Umit for tank tempera ture.

M odily the cycle param eters:

[ i/ / Cycle 1 parameters family.

in t 1

Long Wash Ptase [min]

S ^ / ? £ * Sh o rt Was h Ph ase [s]


dr 1

V G D ra in [s]

FP 1 H

Final Pause [s]

[

i/ c' Cycle 2 param eters family.

L nc c

Long Wash Phase [niin]

H]

Electrolux

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platfonn



SERVICE MANUAL

WT38PM50 / WT38PM60

6.

Prog. 039

drn

Drain parameters family.

tO r

3u Initi al Dram Phase Dura tion [s]

dPf^ Set other parameters.

iP B

5 Initia l Pause [s]




LU7P / LU700P / WTU40P

1.

2.

3.

4.

Prog. 040


Cfu E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters .

U Hood

Type


O O

( 1 Pressure boiler.

OQ O C

Front loading.

t

Default

values

for

Hood Type

models. 1

t r c 3

SLOW SOFT START EN ABLED

Tank heater works only if bo iler temperature

reached.

1

at r U


LES Ü Detergent level switches not enabled. 1

U 1 a

ACTIVE ftmction disabled (up to version 3.U set t o " ) .

r C


Alarms

enabled.

i



f HZ E nter into FAC param eter family and chan ge boiler threshold.

hh'C 8H

B oiler Temperature threshold.

U

B oiler Temperature Adjust. 1

O S t 1 B ooster Function.

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

LU7A

1.

2.

Prog. 041


[F ü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following par am ete rs.

Hood Type like working

cycles,

1

ho i u Atmospheric boiler.

Front loading. 1

Default values for Hood Type models. 1

krc 3

SLOW SOFT

START

ENABLED



3.

4.

5.

6.

0 _ C » Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles. 1

L t 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U « " Selectuserinterfacehoodtypemodel(iipto version

3.11

set to •) .

f t U Regeneration cycle disabled.

HL f r Alarms enabled.



F R[

E nter into FAG para me ter family and chang e boiler threshold.

U L L O t B oiler Temperature Threshold.

U B oiler Temperature Adjust. 1

a DC 1 B ooster Function.


[ )iS


t O c ( Long

Wash Phase

[min]

Sh ^ ID Short Wash Phase [s]

L H3 Cycle 3 para me ters family.

i n3 H

Long

Wash Phase

[min]


E l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE IVIANUAL

LS14WS/WT65WS

1.

2.

Prog. 042


[F ü

E nter into CFG para me ter family and set the following param eter s.

Hood Type like

working cycles. 1

O O ( U Atmospheric boiler.

t

Manual

Hood.

1

Or

1.

I


t r

C 0

(for

this

appliance SOFT

START is NOT

possible).



3.

4.

5.

6.

O « C • Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

ok r

( S Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

L

c

5 U Detergent level switches

not

enabled.

u • 3 Selectuseri nterfacehood typemo del(up to version

3.11

set to ') .

re 0

Regeneration

cycle

disabled (only for dishwashers wi th non-continuous water softener).

n t .

I"

» Alarms enabled.

1

Air gap with float evel sensor normally

closed.

1



FRC Factory para me ters family

O c L 18

B oiler Temperature Threshold

Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:

W r

P

E nter into Wf

P

parameter family and set the following parameters.

Sc r J

Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.


WT65MEDWS

1.

2.

Prog. 043


CFu E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters:

tjP

U

Hood Type like

working cycles.

OO 1 Ö

Atmospheric boiler.

E l e c t r o l u x

EF S - Dishwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE iVIANUAL

WT65MEDWS

4 .

Prog.

043


FRC Factory parameters family

hbl. 3U Boile r Temperature Threshold.

U Disable boiler high Temperature alanti ( t C*). 1

On U

U Boiler Temperature Ad jus t

0 Booster Function. 1

t k [ 5 5

Tub Temperature: THRESH OLD.



5 .

tH t s s Tank high Temperature lim it


[ ^ ' Cycle 1 parameters family.

i O f C Long Wash Phase [mm ]

5 ^

/ 3^

Short

Wash

Phase

[s]

f t 1 3 5 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

1 V u Drain [s]

FP I 15 Fin al Pause [s]

L i/c" Cycle 2 parameters family.

1 1 C * 3 Long Wash Phase [min]

5h ? 3? Short Wash Phase [s]

r ,S 35 Rinse

Phase

Duration [s] 1

dr

S V u Drain [s]

PP ? 15 Fin al Pause [s]

Cii3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

Ln 3 5 Long Wash Phase [min ]

5h 3

3 S Short Wash Phase [s]

r i3 35 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr

3 V O Drain [s]

fP3 ( 3 Fin al Pause [s] 1

dr n Drain/Cleaning Cycle Paramete rs.

drt

1 Drain withou t cleaning cycle.

Set other parameters. |

IP R V hiit ial Pause [s]

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS -Di shwash ing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

LS6WS

Prog.

044


[fO


küp

bo 1

doo

dFL

n

u

Q

E

3

Undercounter like working cycles.

Atmospheric boiler.

Front

loading.

Default values for Undercounter mo dels.



tre

b.k

htf

LES

U 1

rE

RLr

nno

i

1

«

75

Q

3

n

u

1

1

1t

SOFT START E NAB LED.


Enable filling ank by means of rinsmg cycles.


Select user interface hood type model (up to version 3.11 set to »)•

Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with non-continuous water softener).

Alarms enabled.

Air

gap

with float level sensor normally closed.

Modify Communication and HACGP parameters:

HEP

Enter into

^ t . P


5f.

S Dishwasher

with

incorpotated continuous w ater softener.


WT38MEDWS

1.

2.

Prog.

045


EPÜ


Under counter

like

working cycles.

1

O O J U Atmospheric boiler.

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

WT38MEDWS

4 .


FRC E nter into FAC param eter family and cha nge boiler threshold.

Prog. 045

,

O c t

30 B oiler Temperature Threshold.

Disable boiler

high

Temperature alarm (

t c

). 1

U B oiler Temperature Adjust. 1

bS k

Q B ooster function not needed. 1

hi d

ID


is

kept at lower temperature than Temperature Threshold. 1



ill

5 .

6 .

tt'u

5 5 Tub Temperature Threshold.

kH ,

S5 tan k high Temperature

limit.

1


r if / Cycle

1

parameters family.

i

n

1 V Long Wash Phase [min]

Sh 1 IÜ Short Wash Phase [s]

r , / 35 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr 1

Ht ]

Drain [s]

f-P

1 IS Final

Pause

at E nd of Cycle

u^ ^


L OC a Long Wash Phase [min]

5h^ 10 Short Wash Phase [s]

r tC J 5 Rinse Phase Duration [s]

dr^ Hp Drain [s]

FP c

t S Final Pause at End of Cycle

T i f J Cycle 3 param eters family.

Ln 3

3 Long

Wash Phase

[min]

5h 3

10 Short

Wash

Phase [s]

r ,3 BS Rinse Phase Duration [s]

df 3 V Ö Drain [s]

f

P3

« 5 Final

Pause

at

End

of Cycle

Modify Communication and HACCP parameters:

W r

P

E nter into

HC

P


S t ' ' 3 Dishwasher with incorporated continuous water softener.

H:

Electrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

FL620 /

LV6

/ WT30 600 0W

ATM

1.

2.

Prog. 0 46


[fü


t

3 r

U

Hood

Type

like woridng cycles.

D O (

u

Atmospheric boiler.

do O c

Front loading.

df l

3

Default

values


k rc }




3.

Tank heater

works

only if b oiler temperature

reached.

1

Istr

7 5 Enable filling ank by means of

rinsing

cycles.

t C 5 U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U (

8

ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version 3.11 s et to U) .

C

c

U Regeneration cycle disab led

n i ,

<* (

Alarms

enabled.

Switch OFF and then switch ON th e m achine.

LU700 A / WTU40A

1.

2.

Prog. 047


[F u E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters .

t j r u


D O »

U

Atmospheric boiler.

(SO O c

Front loading.

dF L

1

Default

values

for Hood

Type

models. 1

t r c 3

SLOW SOFT START ENABLED

0 _

t

1

Tank

heater

works

only ifboiler temperature reached.

bk F

75 E nable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles. 1

LE S U


H:

l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

LU700A / W TU40A

6 .

Prog.

047

C

i/c* Cycle 2 parame ters family.

L nC i Long Wash Phase [min]

S ^ C * / " S hort Wash Phase [s]

C ^3


L n3 V Long Wash Phase [min]




FL620W S / LV6WS / WT38WS

1.

2.

3.

Prog. 048

Switch OFF and then switch ON the mac hine.

[F u E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following para me ters.

U Undercounter like working cycles. 1

O O f U Atmospheric boiler.

doO t Front loading.

dPL 3

Default

values


t r c i SOFT START EN ABLED.

0 _ C 1 Tank heater works only if boiler temperature reached.

bk r

» 5 Enable

filling

ank

by

means of

rinsing

cycles.

L c S U Detergent level switches not enabled.

U 1 a ACTIVE function disabled (up to

version

3.11 set to " ) .

C

f*l

re U Regeneration cycle disabled (only for dishwashers with noh-continuous water softener).

nL <" • Alarms enabled.

Air gap with

float

evel sensor normally closed. 1

iVIodify Communication and HACCP parameters:

Wf ? E nter into

H CP


SEr 3 Dishwasher with

incorporated continuous

water

softener. 1

Electrolux

EFS -D ishwa shing Systems Platform



SERVICE IVIANUAL

ET5EDF

1.

2.

Prog. 049


[fü E nter into CFG param eter family and set the following param eters .

U Hood Type like working cycles. 1

bo < U Atmospheric boiler.

da O

C Front loading.

dr ^ 3

Defeult

values


t e c

t SOFT START ENAB LED.



3.

4.

h ^

t

1 Tank heater works only ifboiler temperature reached.

li t

• 7 5 Enable filling tank by means of rinsing cycles.

u Detergent level switches not

enabled.

1

U < 8 ACTIVE fimction disabled (up to version

3-11

set to U).


nL f

1 Alarms enabled.



f i/ / Cyd e 1 parameters family.

In t 1 Long Wash Phase [min] 1

5 h / 5 Short Wash Phase [s]

Rinse Phase Duration [s] 1

dr 1 3u Drain [s]

FP t V Final Pause [s]

f i/ c" Cycle 2 par am eter s family.

Long Wash Phase

[min]

1

S h ^ 3 5 Short Wash

Phase

[s]


[s]

1

dr^ 3Ü Drain [s]

f P c * *^ Final Pause [s]

t i / 3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

t. nS 1


5 ^ . 3 3

i


H]

l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfotm



SERVICE MANUAL

ET5EDF

6.

7.

Prog. 049


u f n E nter into GEn parameter family.

dE k

18 I Detergent dispenser works when WASHING PUMP in activated.

Rinse Aid dispenser works when LOAD SOLEN OID VALVE in activated. 1




8 »

ET12EIF

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


Prog. 050

[F u


k^P u Hood Type like working cycles.

b o « U Atmospheric boiler.

do O

1 M anual Hood.

dr L Default values for Hood Type models.

k r

C Ü (for this appliance SOFT START is NOT possible).

fa_t

« Tank heater works only if boiler tem perature reached-

bk f

75 The tank is filled i nto the traditional way.

LC D


il 1 8 ACTIVE function disabled (op to version

3.11

set to U ) .

f E U

Regeneration

cycle

disabled.

Rl r

j ALARMS ENAB LED.



FR[ E nter into FAG param eter family.

bk l

80


oiler Temperature Adjust.


[ ^ 1

Cycle

1

parameters family.

L n I » Long Wash Phase [min]

m

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS -




SER VICE IVIANUAL

ET12EIF

Prog.

050

[^3 Cycle 3 parameters family.

t

»1 i f 1

Long

Wash

Phase [min]

Sh 3 3 1

Short

Wash Phase [s]

r 13 Cu

Rinse

Phase

Duration

[s]

dr3 P u Drain

[s]

fP3 H Fina l Pause

[s]

bk

3 o S

Boil er temperature[°C]



"^zJ

6.

7.

8.



üEn Enter into GEn parameter family.

dE t 18 1 Detergent dispenser works when WA SHIN G PUMP in activated.

r f ?

» 5 / Rinse Ai d dispenser works when LO AD SOLEN OID VAL VE in activated-


WT37LEV/9

1.

2.

Prog.

051


f f u Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

t j r

u

Hood Type


b o

» U

Atmospheric boiler.

do O c Front loading.

dfL 3

Default

values


1

t r c 1


Q _

C / Tank

heater

works

only if boiler emperaturereached.

ok

r 1 5

Enable filling ank

by

means of rinsing cycles.

J.

t S 1

Detergent level switehes enabled.

u

' "

Select user

interlace hood

type


3.11

set to

' ) .

r C

u


E l e c t r o l u x

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platfomi



SERVICE MANUAL

L14ROW/WT65ROW Prog.

052


ufü Enter into CFG parameter family and set the following parameters.

tiSP

bo (

doo

dfl

krc

n

u

1

}

1

n

u

Hood

Type like

working cycles.

Pressure boiler.

M anual Hood.

Default

values

for Hood Type models.




3.

b.k

bkP

LE5

rE

Rir

1

Ü

n

u

3

Q

1

Tank heater works only if boi ler temperature reached.

The tank

is

filled

into

the traditional way.

Detergent level switches not eiâbled

Selectuser interface hood type model (op oversioD3.il setto ')


Alarms enabled.



E R[ Enter into FAC parameter family and change boiler threshold.

bkl

bRJ

bP

bSk

SV

Q

n

u

1

B oiler Temperature Threshold

Boiler Temperature Adjust

Boiler Priority Disabled.

Booster Function.


r a Cycle 2 parameters family.

f i / 3

S ^ C *

5 5

Short

Wash

Phase [s]


i n j

*? Long Wash Phase [min]


s:

lectrolux


Electrolitx Professional


SERVICE MANUAL

1 1 .

DEFAULT VALUES

'"w^

Default 1 - Hood Type

ON/OFF +

CYCLE1 keys

ON/OFF

+

CYCLE2 keys

Gi n -^

Cnt

i

din:

r In:

dit:

rR,:

33

10

a

V

i

f y r

ci /c

>st

nfa

drn

nr£

r f S

i

Fflr

->

f y /

->

f y ?

->

f y j

^

drn

-^

«^Pfl

->

ron

->

« f p

->

f f C dbH,

i

bkli

btU:

bH ,2

bio:

bfl

2

bFiJ:

bP :

bSki

bkd:

kklz

7 0

^

9B

1

5

y

/

^

0

BB

i

L n h

Sh h

PRh

Pr h

r , h

cf h

dr h

fPh

a

35

y

a

IB

Q

IB

n

u

i

InS-

S/t?.-

PRiz

Pr S:

r

,S:

crSz

drS:

fPS:

Q

ys

y

Q

IB

a

IB

n

i

Ln3:

5h3-

P»3z

PrJz

r ,3z

Cr3z

driz

fP3z

bk3z

1

H O

y

0

IB

a

IB

0

Ü

i

Idrz

fdrz

drkz

H D

BD

s

i

IPRz

dLHz

Pdrz

rPRz

f Fz

r ,kz

PPLz

CdEz

0

3

a

Q

D

Q

a

5

;

rEL

r t S

flff

f/?/;

f S

PBI

i

Birz

Rdrz

Prnz

bk

z

bH z

kk z

kH z

1

1

1

<

9 0

in

BB

ID

i

kHPz

bo iz

dooz

dFLz

krez

b.kz

bkFz

LBBz

di

z

rE z

a

a

1

S

1

75

fl

3

a

^

t tz

k Sz

k

3z

k Hz

k Bz

k Bz

RL.z

Ikhz

IS

? Ö0

IS

IQ

â

a

laa

http://versiod3.il/

http://versiod3.il/



kkHz

kH ,:

kia:

kFL:

s

75

1

EQ

RLrz

RR Bz

frCz

BrUz

bPoz

1

fl

D

SD

DOC. N O.

5956.446.06 ©Copyright 2005

by


P.76/93

Electrolux

EFS -


Electrolux ProfeBsional


SERVICE MANUAL

B H

Default

2 - POT

WASHER

ON/OFF

+

CYCLEl keys

ON/OFF

+

CYCLE2 keys

C?«r

:nt

i

fRL

- > •

^ ^

' ^

ra?

->

r y j

-^

drn

->

dPR

->

ron

->•

« f p

->

CFG

\

dbL

i

d

tni^nn

r

In: IB

dEkz

Iß

rR,z

1

i

f y r

c

i/c

r S t

r f y

nrE

rES

i

b t l r

b t « r

bH

,1

hLo:

hf i

z

hRd:

bP :

faSt.'

bkd:

kklz

tkHz

tH ,:

ti o:

IB

S

9S

/

5

H

1

0

SB

S

75

/

i

i

n h

PR i:

Pr

h

r

, 1-

cr

/ -

dr

h

PP

h

?

3H

H

0

?fl

0

a

i

inSl

PB^z

Pr

S:

r

,Sz

crSz

drdz

PPSz

5

0

3D

D

0

i

Ln3z

5h3z

PB3z

Pr3z

r

,3z

cr3z

dr3z

FP3z

bk3z

a

3H

Q

eo

Q

BO

0

0

i

tdrz

HO

fdrz

BO

i

iPBz

dl dz

Pdr:

rPBz

[

fz

r

,kz

PPLz

[dEz

e

3

0

n

u

0

0

n

u

S

i

rEL

r i s

BCC

[RI 1

z a

fSi

i

SErz

Rdrz

Prnz

bk

z

bH

z

kk

z

kH

z

1

1

I

SO

to

BB

10

i

kUPz

bo

iz

dooz

dF L

z

krcz

b.kz

bkFz

LE5z

Ul z

rE

Z

RLrz

RRÜZ

FrOz

1

0

S

-

0

1

15

0

3

0

I

0

0

i

k

Iz

k ?.-

t 3z

k

Hz

k 5z

k Bz

RL.z

Ikhz

15

300

15

10

30

30

0

100



tFL:

H O

SrUz

bPoz

10

50

DOC.

N O.

5956.446.06 ©Copyright 2005 by Electrolu x Pro fessional

P.77/93

a]

Electrolux

EFS - Dishwashmg Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

Default 3 - UNDERCOUNTÉR

ON/OFF +

CYCLE1 keys

ON/OFF +

CYCLE2 keys

Cfn ^

Cnt

i

d In:

r in:

dEk:

rf\,:

5 0

/Ö

a

H

i

r y f

cHc

rSk

nEH

drn

nrE

rES

i

FRC

->

ry. '

->

cn^

->

CÜ3

->

drn

->

dPf\

->

ron —>

MCP

-»

f f C i^bC

i

fatr.-

btWr

fato.-

bfiz

bRJ:

bP :

bStr

bkd:

kklz

tkH:

kH ,:

an

5

S B

1

5

a

^

3

B3

5

75

i

Ln il

5h

h

Pr tz

r , Iz

er Iz

dr iz

fP

iz

i

10

a

IB

0

30

0

i

Ln^z

5h^z

PBSz

Pr Bz

r

,dz

crdz

drdz

fPSz

1

V

a

IB

a

3a

a

i

Ln3z

Sh3z

PR3z

Pr3z

r ,3z

cr3z

dr3z

FP3z

bk3z

3

a

IB

a

3a

a

0

;

idrz

3a

Fdrz

60

i

iPRz

dLHz

Pdrz

rPRz

c Fz

r ,kz

PPLZ

CdEz

a

3

n

u

n

u

a

a

a

s

i

rEL

ri S

RCC

[RI t

c 8

F?l

i

S f r -

Rdrz

Prnz

bk z

bH

z

kk z

kH z

1

i

1

90

ta

BB

10

i

kUPz

bo iZ

dooz

dFlz

krcz

b.kz

bkFz

LE5z

Ui z

rE z

RLrz

RR Bz

a

a

'

1

t

1

15

0

3

0

/

n

u

i

k iz

k

Bz

k 3z

k Hz

k

5r

k Bz

RL.z

ikhz

15

eao

/5

10

so

so

0

100



kioz

kFL.'

/

^Q

FrDz

SrUz

bPoz

a

la

5 0

DOC. NO. 5956.446.06

©Copyright 2005 by Electrolux Professional

P.78/93

81

lectrolux

EFS

- Dishwashing

Systems

Platfonn



SERVICE IVIANUAL

1 2. U SE R IN T E R F AC E A N D M A IN B O AR D CO N N E C T O R S

12 .1 MAIN MALF UNCTIO NS NOT DUE TO THE MAIN BOARD

The display sliows CL O Sf with door/hood closed

No cycle sterts

A cycle fails to s tart

After replacing the main board only the Z "' cycle starts

Cycle time longer than that foreseen

Noisy wash pump (only on HT and PP versions)

Check door/hood micro/sensor

Checic the user interface buttons (have they remained

pressed? etc)

Is a user interface button extension missing?

The main board is still configured for L;S5/WT4.

Does the boiler work?

Is the feed water at 50°C?

Check the current for single phase during operation.



12 .2 CON NE CT ORS LAY OUT

LAYOUT 1

LS14/WT65(6-9kW)

lODooipniotigEiiDiii

CN5

9 1 f 1

rnotmiigiiaiiai

CNt

17 1

f

U l

2)

•i

U)

1

f

:

Q

o

IMlO'JOODOShlMODÖOC

CN5 m

IGl

iooi iiiDinigiKiBiieaBiiBWiiiiDiiDsieisai

CN ?

I

C N 3 i : "

, , C N 1 5

n rö_T

I '1^ I 1

T

CN8

C N I O C N 1 2 C N l l .

DDJIW

D

[WWW DtHJiWlflO WO M I H I 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 M M ^ ^^

"nEz

ewe

IE

C N I O

rr-. .v I 3|

cNia

lO M ao i leioDiooiDi mgiuiDgiioiiiKiBini looaisiioaoooniioiuiiiiogi

T H

CNU

S

B B

W'G^^

. . ; 0

ttöEDODHOfMM

\Z . r:.CIs|:l-&V::...:i.:;::t

i u y u u i M J m j w

K E Y

m

Electrolux


Electrolux Profess ional


SERVICE MANUAL

LAYOUT 2

WT65 MARINE

I H O « t i l l O t o e o m

CN5

H T

T T

go gute D D D P CDI

CNl

E_

CN2

iggi

I g g ISO

H I D i n g l

O D O i l

g) I lODDDDDODDDI

3

CN3

10

H

CN l 5

1

•i

t^

3

'o 'WMMWMmW

CN5 CNl

"W&^MlnöIfllMlMf3iH^

CN3

CN15

ICt

TI

o

flflB

0

O o

o / ^

O O O



1

3

M

CN8 CNl 2

lilDOD^WDDJI'iM lODaJllIHliDDnmiMlHli DDDODDi M M Oa Dc qi

I sil

CNS

rogggjSHI

n r

N12

> n DD to IS 0 1 C D 030111

o

DcD Di DD D I P D I M M

12

CN1 6

fl 1

(lAMAAMMM

LAYOUT 3 EC0TEM P12 UK / LS14AH - WT 65H /P W USA

I OD 00 OD DO 00 OB DD DO 1100 OD OD OD CH 001

CN 5

CNl

9~r

TM

iggi iggoiDDOSigODIDIOaDI I O D O O O O I D O D I

CN2

CN3 T CN15

1 10

r r i 6 — n

1:l

1

Ul

o [HliODOOlliMMIOOflffjr

CNS

CNl

"IWW liWfll llM M fr^

CN3

CN15

ICl

II

CN8

CN12

M DOfkQWIDIHlPlDOlHtlMiOOOOiDMObOl-DOOOOQa M M ODDctn

flSB

O

o

IkOOjDDDIlHiaiMM

Electrolux

EFS

-

Dishwasliing Systems Platform

Rlectrolux Professional


SERVICE MANUAL

UY0UT4

LS14/WT65(10.5kW)

I g g 9 0 g ]a o O D m 0 9 n I l im o i g g 0 9 O l i a iI

CN 5

CN1

b I I

lll7

CN2

I

10000 nDnagoaoaDiPcm

IOOOOOD OOOIK

CN 3

CN15

n ffö T { 'te 1 1

L

O MOtOODflRtPODflQffar

CN5

CNl

"WWIDMIKWMM"

tn i :

g£ CN3

CN15

IC l

TI

o

o

SSB

O

o o

o 0

0 o



r

>J

C N a C N I O

CN12 CN11

a o o W a n j r w f i O D f e i i io b Q i o D a D i f l i H i iM i ii D D O D D D I M M O D i H n

°

131

CNe

IT

CN 0

t i

I

CN12

lO Vrø rø rø l

lODOQOOOQODI

nm 8080(1000 O D O B

001100

O D 80

00

OB O B O B O D 00

00601

na

NU

o

-MiaDOQIMOnHTM,

| g ; | CNI6 -.4::il

fiMMMffiilM

LAYOUTS WT830EA/WT850EA

i m 19 00 00 00 OD DI 031

C N 5

9 1 1 1

IS ] CD 03 OD 00 001

-CNl

\I

: .M

iggttggOOODOIOOOOOOODOOl lODDOSOOOOl

CN2

f- . CN3 :-- :

,.CN15

miLMMM~n

1

u

1

:

o eolDOOOlBtPOOflflMr

CN5

C N I : E V " :

I W M Di o

Ü i i l i f fü iM"

CN3

CNlSi

ICl

T I

CN7

CNB

O

CNIQ CNl 2

ÖQJllMI

CNl I

D D D D I

DQJn

o

sLtLa

o

MlOOOOllMOfMM;

n:

IE

rw^W

o: nn

12

1

CNI6"

1 1

E l e c t r o l u x



Elec t ron i c D i shwasher

S E R V I C E M A N U A L

v ; ^

LAYOUT6 LS9/WT55

I O D O D O D a s o s g S D o s 1 1 Ol O d o c o O B c m

CN5

H

CNl

CN2

H i l I OD æ a 0 0 OD w o n m i CO I I C I DD o g OD U D I

CN3

1 0

I 1 1

C N 1 5

t

C N 5

CNl Bf CN3 CN15

IC1

TI

o

o

l a i i ^ G

o

o



Clvl6 CNl 2

O M ODD JPI M QM lPlO DDJ iraDD OOf QcQIHIi DDODOflj M fflHDOM fl "

3

C N 8

I ID O D D O I I

m

N 1 2

I OD DD og BD as 00 80 SO

o

MliMflliniMl IMl-fli"

<g I C N 1 6

n

lUlAAilMAAMJi

LAYOUT? PW1/PW2

100 DO Q) 00 Q] 00 00 091 10009 SO BOD] OS I

CN5

9 I I lll7

CNl CN2

1001 ISJODDDOQGOOOOOODOOl igDOOQSSDDOl

CN3

n w T

I I

C N l 5

L

r

wi f l l oDuUJFMoIaW

C N S

CNl

lW'IH OllUDDDDiÖliFiiBW~ö

Si CN3 CN15

ICl

TI

C N 8 C N l 2

l a f l K r o a D D o r o m o D j T i a n i a D D o r o i H i

C N l

I

(WluyjlMlLMHlMLE

O

O

o

o

o

O

o

o

MDIOODDiM

mU

' i t 91

E E

12

12 a CNl6

~J1

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfoim



SERVICE M ANUAL

LAYOUTS}

LS5-WT4 / LS6-WT37-WT38

T E J

^ T

imiQtiiiBSieiiiDgai IIISIUEÜOKIOII

CN5

T W

CNl

CN2

lESi iiiiiiiciaositDiiagggtiigtiîiiiaiiai

CN3 CNl 5

'

1 10

I i t e I II

1

• :

:

1

U l

o lH l iD O O O lO » , l M O O O M r t lW ( f fl D i lD 0 f lD r D t l l{ H 1 0 = l I iM

CN 5 CNl I I CN3 CN15

3

• =

"

ICI

TI

f

0



: i

I S K

3

CN 7

CN8 CN12 CN11 CM9

O woD wiD iurø iioow iiiooa oo :« «] oQoooos (uraaDo^

o

IL

,

CN7 1 CNa ,

I s»

m

am IB I im aoa i

1—r

N12

naroiaaDBWiB

E T

12

C N l I CN9 ,

aromaacinanmuiicn iogti>niia<Di

IL

LAYOUT 9

LS6

MARINE / LS6AH -

W T 3 0 H

T E J

-w

o o

>iiao36BiaB30{iCBdai 19301(31 a bi aa i

CN5

u

CNl

ICH iQCiisiiinaiiiiiaDiitgaiiiiigiiiK

CN Z CN3 CN15

JfföT

I

'l|5

I

1'

L

r

L

ö~mMfälHMTflöwr

CN5

CNl

•lHHhi[ililQölHM lHliW~ ö

CN3

CN15

ICl

O

,, :

GN8

:•.•' ,.• : : ; C N 1 2 '••••

O I H P a a t D B n i H l D i

P O O

O D

D i

O J l i l M I O n M n o

Electrolux




SER VICE IVIANUAL

f i i i

LAYOUT 10

WTSeiDE

'U

'W

e

o o

ivBogsa&iiBDaaDsaDt imiiDEi)taiiiBii ]i

CNl

I I lll7

mil iBiiC9B3i)iiiDaomeaGB[ iflDomooQiB

CN 2

I II C N 3 T C N 1 5

I t T T

I 1te I ti

*

J

:l

1

önM lITDlFM flTQW'

CNS

CNl

" W M O a D O D l Ä M B f r ö

CNIS

ICl



j

i

:l

CN S

C M 1 2

C N l l

IMrø iflflmrWHDIfcdGiflllQDDinMIliflll DOO DB j M jMjOOlWri o

T

, CIM8

I DB DB 83 IB

I

CNIZ

nm

NIt

imsii i iDii iaDisi lOinsjtgiaciKiiESQiaii i i i

LAYOUT n LS5 /1-W T4/1

^

iCBoaiDiiBEQninisix iisEiinii&iioiiai

C N 5

C N l

I I lliT

II

poiti tcDiaaicisjoiiBiiffCSt lesaiiouiiai

CN2 I CN3 CNIS

lo:

it e I |i

13

o M l D D D O K J m D D O M T

CNS

CNl

TWW M IolrøffofSiffT

CN3

CN15

iCl

CN12 CN ll CN9

O MOniHnMDMnMinniHllMilDaeilBlIHllMll

flODDOD»

MiMOOttOl

o

• I l i

EJ:

IL

Electrolux




SERViCE iVIANUAL

.

O

LAYOUT 12

W T 6 5 M

iilBgDilggaigiloODgOl

i

go

o g og

Kl

im IKK

CN5

n z z n

CNt

CN2

I Hl II I HH ] tg ug 19 n ID as OD I IOE 01 gt im CD I

CN3

' 1 10 I

CNI5

nas IV

'WMWMmW

C N 5

CNl

"TOföimuraMMfrö

CN3

CN15

ICl

TI

O

o

o

aa.B°o

o

o

O

[ 0 J

O



CN8

CN12 CNIt

D f l i f l l H l I W i D f lO O D O n

M M I1 M L2 .

1 5t

. CNfl _,

IDDIUiDllCI

l i

I 9i

C N l 2

l o o a o E t o g c D a i c g a i i i

ET

Tlä

CNt I

ggjggagggOCagoDDtlCCcpi

o

M OiDDOSHiBM M

12 i CM b I li 11

MMJUUliUlMJlU

LAYOUT 13 WT55P M50/WT5 5PM60

i m G o c g c o c g u o D O K i gg g gi ia i n ii io D O i

C N 5 CNl

3 I 1 1

r-f

igoi iggooogiootiioogoigoiiiiDgooDoggDi

C N 2

CN3

CN l 5

WÖT

Æ I ij

C N 5 CNl

I W M M I T f l H M M f F ö

CN3

C N I 5

ICl

T I

C N 8 C N l 2

D D J T P D D J I P i D D D J I T O O D D Q l O l H ]

M |

O D D B D O j

M W

O I W l

°

Hl?©

o

3

O

o

MffåiiMLMlå.

I l

1 3|

12 I CN16 T

a]

Electrolux




SERVICE MANUAL

1 3.

A LA RM M E S SA GE S A N D T R OU B L E S H OO T IN G

A Alarms that stop

the

dishwasher

n

Ä

W

Want of water

Is the water cock open?

Does

the

water load solenoid

valve

work?

Is the water feed flow a min. of 5 1/min?

Is the water inlet filter clean?

Is the

load solenoid

valve filter

clean?



Is the overflow inserted?

Is the main board (ATM -PRES) CN2 connector correctly positioned?

Do the tank/boiler pressure switches work properly?

B Alarms tha t don't stop

the

di shwasher

Drain not efficient

Has the overflow

been

removed?

Is the water drain blocked?

Is the drain pump blocked?

Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?

Is there a constriction in the drain tube?

Is the pump breather pipe returning o the tank clogged or constricted?

Does the tank pressure switch work properly?

Is Üiere a hole m the drain tube (only for versions with drain pump)?

Overflow alarm

Is tlie water drain blocked?

Are the air trap and tank pressure switch clean?

Does the tank pressure switch work properly?

Is the load solenoid vah/e blocked? (El - LOAD_EV)

Is the load solenoid valve relay stuck? (RL8 - LOAD EV)

E l e c t r o l u x


Electrolux ProfeBsional


SERVICE MANUAL

C Alarm s that stop the functioning and suggest to call the service

r

f

[

,'

?

3

Boiler temperature rise too fast

Does the boiler level sensorworfc properly? The bo iler could be empty.

Are non-original power resistances Installed?

Boiler temperature too higii

Has the boiler temperature been changed {bkC - Increased above 90°C)?

Has the software alarm value been modifieid (bW i)?

Does the boiler level sensor work properly?

Is the boiler relay stuck (see RL2, RL3, RL4)?

Tank temperature too high



f

f

[

[

[

«^

S

g

7

B

is the feed wa ter above 60°C?

Has the software alarm value been modified {bH <)?

Is the rinse water temperature too high?

Is the tank relay stuck (RL5 - TUB HEAT)?

Tanic temperature sensor out of order

is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT1)?

Is the temperature sensor connector correctly inse rted?

Tank temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature sensor short-circuited (NT1)?

Boiler temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature sensor broken or disconnected (NT2)?

Is the temperature sens or connector correctly inserted?

Boiler temperature sensor out of order

Is the temperature se nsor short-circuited {NT2)?

During rinse phase boiler doesn't empty

Are the rinse arms clogged?

Does the rinse pump work correctly?

Is there w ater in the level sensor tube?

m

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS




SERVICE MANUAL

C l

—

Alarm codes for automatic hood type dishwashers

When the alarm L 3 appears, to facilitate fault-finding another parameter providing a more detailed indication has been

introduced.

The parameter is n L and is found in the u family.

The possible cause of the anomaly can be found (see table below) according to the value of the parameter n L .

With pot

washers

the cause that generated a

a

type alarm can also be found.

E.g.: With an automatic hood type the alami f 9 appears.

Access the parameter n

u

in the

db u

family.

Hi. ^ a => the top limit

switch

could be disconnected or intenrupted.



fî.

Hood

S 1 :

D00R_C1.0SE

FC_DW Choexä

CLOSE]

S5: FC_UP\ »»MOPao

Appears with hood closed if the top

limit switch (FC_UP) cuts:in.

Pot Washer

Appears with h ood closed, if:

- the bottom limit

switch

(S3) returns to the rest

position;

- the top limit

switch

(S5) cuts in ;

-

S3"

does not cut

in.

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Dishwashing Systems Platfomi



SERVICE MANUAL

RL.

5

RL.B

(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted? ).

TIMEOUT- The t ime taken for hood l i f t ing was

more than the t ime f ixed by param eter t ^^ :

a) che ck that the m otor wori<s.

The hood is open but the bottom limit switch

(FC_DW) has cut in.

Appears If the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in during

lifting.

On installatton this alarm can occur due to incon^ct

sequence o f the phases: invert the two phases on the

power supply terminal board.

TIMEOUT- The t ime taken for l i ft ing was more than the

t ime f ixed by parameter t c*.

Check cone ct operat ion of the:

a) m otor (thermal protection N 7);

b) top limit switch (S5 and S5').

Appears with hood fully ope n, if:

- the limit switch (35) returns to the rest position;

- the bottom limit switch (S3) cuts in;

- S3 " cuts in.



BL.l

Bi. 8

RL ^9

RL. iü

RL.

il

Appears if with hood fully open the "door

closed"

m icroswitch cuts in.

During lowering, the top l imit switch (FC_UP)

has not returned to the rest position.

The limit switch must return to the rest position

within a time given by parame ter t - fi:

a) check that the motor wori<s;

b) (Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted? ).

Appears if the top limit switch (FC_UP) cuts in

during lowering.

(Polarity/motor rotation direction inverted? ).

TIMEOUT- The t ime taken for hood closing

Appears if with hood fully open the "door clos ed'

microswitch cuts in.

- 85 could be disconnected.

b 3

During the initial lowering phase the top limit switch

(S5) mu st return to the rest posit ion wifhin a t ime given

by the parameter t . 6 othenwise the alarm t» 3

appears.

- S5 could be stuck.

- S3 ' could be disconnected.

On installat ion, this alarm can occur due to incorrect

sequence of the phases: invert the two phases o n the

powersupply terminal board.

Appears if the bottom limit switch S3 cuts in before 53°

during lowering.

b 3

Appears if the top limit switch (S5) cuts in during

lowering.

On installat ion, this alarm can occur d ue to incorrect

sequence of the pha ses: invert the two phases on the

power supply terminal board.

TIMEOUT- The t ime taken for towering was more than

E l e c t r o l u x

EFS - Disliwashing Systems Platform



SERVICE MANUAL

/?L. iH

/ ? t . ? ö

ni.E r

Limit

switch

combination not allowed:

top limit switch (FC_UP) and bottom limit

switch (FC_DW) activated at the same time

During lifting, the cun^nt absorbed by the

lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see

parameter ikh):

a) excessive mechanical force during lifting.

During

lowering,

the cuaent absorbed by the

lifting motor has exceeded the threshold (see

parameter

\kh):

Limit switch combination not allowed.

Appears If one of the following

combinations occurs:

- top limit switch (S5) and bottom limit

switch

(S3) both

activated

(S3 and

S5 could be discornected);

- top limit switch S5 and S3" both cut in;

- bottom limit switch (S3) cut in but not S3 ".



Bi. SS

Ri. s 3

Hi.iHBi.

SS

a) excessive mechanical force during

lowering.

The hood should be stopped but the card

detects a high current absorption by the lifting

motor:

a) the relay RL18/RL19 could be stuck;

b) feeder connector CN32 could be

disconnected.

SJ

E l e c t r o l u x




SERVICE MANUAL

D Alarms that d on't stop the functioning, b ut suggest to call the service

£ t

E

?

Communication error

Is the connection Ijetween main tward and control panel correct? Are the connectors conectly

connected?

Are connector contacts clean?

Tank temperature low

Does the tank heating element work properly?

Are the connectors conectly connected?

Are the dishwasher feed voltage and current correct?

Is the relay RL5 on the boa rd disconnected o r faulty?

Boiler temperature low



i 3

Does/do the boiler heating element/s work properly?

Are the connectors correctly connected?

Does the possible remote control switch connected to the heating element work correctly?

Is there pow er at the remote control sw itch Input terminals?

Does relay RL2 on the board work properly?

CAUTION:

IF THERE IS A MALFUNCTION ON RELAY RL2 AND THE BOILER HEATING

ELEMENTS ARE FED BY MEANS OF A REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH, THE BOARD DOES

NOT HAVE TO BE REPLACED; JUST MOVE THE BOILER HEATING ELEMENT CONNECTOR

TO ONE OF THE TWO FREE POSITIONS ON THE BOARD.

CAUTION:

WHEN ONE BRANCH OF THE HEATING ELEMENT DOES NOT WORK AND THE

OTHER TWO CONTINUE TO FUNCTION, ON REACHING THE SET TEMPERATURE VALUE,

ALARM 3 DISAPPEARS AND REAPPEARS IN THE SUBSEQUENT R INSE PHASE. THIS ALSO

OCCURS WH EN A PHASE IS MISSING.

Electrolux

EF S - Dishwashing Systems Platform

E l e c t r o l i r x P r o f e s s i o n a l


SERVICE MANUAL

E Alarms that stop the dishwasher for models with incorporated


(.f)

p?i

f??

Water softener operation errors

This alarm appears in case of malfunctioning in the continuous water softener.

Communication errors between the mother board and

softener board

This alarm appears in case of problems in communication between the mother board and water softener

board; check the connection between mother board connector Jl and water softener connector ST8.

To facilitate the finding of faults signalled by alarm .an othe r parameter providing a more detailed indication of the possible cause of



malfimctipn has been introduced in the

<"

O O family (see table below).

f?i i

F^l ^

P^t

3

f?',

'-i

F^l 3

Water softener conductivity sensor short-circuit

Two or more water softener conductivity sensors are short-circuited. Check the connections between the

water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.

Water softener conductivity sensors open

One or mote water softener conductivity sensors are disconnected. Check the connections between the

water softener board and sensors, replacing the connection wiring if necessary.

Resin temperature sensor malfunction

Replace the watersoftener electronic board.

Water softener electronic board malfunction

Replace the water softener electronic board.

Salt water filling malfunction

The salt water container in the water softener was not completely filled within the set max. filling time.

M ake sure;

- the water cock is open

^ the water filling solenoid valve works correctly

- the salt container solenoid valve works correctly

- the feed water pressure is at least 50 kPa / 0.5 bar

- the water inlet filter is clean

m

E l e c t r o l u x


E lectroltix Professional


SERVICE IVIANUAL

1 4. LIS T O F P A R AM E T E R S F O R S U B S E Q U E N T V E R SIO N S

The

parameters listed below, even if present inside the software,

caimot be

used in appliances currently in production.

Fam ily u t O :

• parameter n t

a

. value e ^ f t

: iS3

Family

S t .



iil

1

B]

Electrolux

ELECTROLUX PROFESSIONAL

CATALOGO PARTI Dl RICAMBIO

SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE

LAVASTOVIGLIE SOTTOTAVOLO

UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER

WT37 / WT38

C o d e

Type

Ref.

PRESSIONE

Page



502019 WT38PM50 t

502346 WT38PM60 s

2 3 5 6

2 3 5 6

ATMOSFERICA

502007 WT38TDE

502008

502020

502029

502110

502111

502112

502117

502118

502122

502125

5021 i26

502127

502129

502217

502218

502219

502321

502322

502323

502347

WT38/M50

WT37LEV/9

WT38M50/4

WT38DD

WT37

WT38

WT37/4.5

WT38/4.5

WT37UK

WT38C

WT38C60

WT38CUK

V\n"38/4.5NW

WT38UK

WT37J60

WT37J50

W T 3 8 / 6 0

W T 3 8 /M 6 0

WT38 MED

WT38M60/4

u

q

a

b

c

d

e

f

V

X

y

a1

g

n

o

h

k

m

r

2 3

46

2346

2346

2 34 6

2346

2 3 46

2 3 46

2346

2346

2 3 46

2 3 46

2346

2346

2346

2346

2346

2346

2 3 46

2346

23 4 6

2346



•a





461

465



464

T3

' Cablaggio/Wiring hardness: 590

523

504



51

, /^, i^

L a v a s t o v i g l i e s o t t o t a v o t o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o u n t e r d i s h w a s l i e r W T 3 7 / V V T 3 8

Pos

101

101

101

102

102

103

103

104

105

106

108

108

11 0 ;

110

111

11 1 :

C o d e

046407

049393

0L0118

049906

0L0105

049907

0L0106

049911

OL0532

0L0533

0L0187

0L0534

048813

0L0717

048814

0L0718

Descr i z i one

Pagina 2: Vista generale

Piedinp regolabile

Piedino regolabile

Plede a rullo

Pannello laterale; sx

Pannello laterale; sx

Pannello laterale; dx

Pannello laterale; dx

Pannello frontale

Femio porta

Tappo

Porta elux

Porta

Ass. Leva DX

Ass.

Leva DX

Ass. Leva SX

Ass.

Leva SX

Descr i p t i on

Page 2: Main view

Adjustable foot

Adjustable foot

Roller

Side p anel; left

Side p anel; left

Side panel; right

Side panel; right

Front panel

Door catch

Plug

Door

Door

Assembly Lever right

Assembly Lever right

Assembly Lever left

Assembly Lever left

Ref. / Notes

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m ,n,ö,p,u,a1

Up to ser. nr.: 2 44

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m

,n,o,p,u,a1

From ser. nr.: 245

k,l,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,x,y

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr.: 24 5

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr.: 245

P

P

not for" p"

P

Up to ser. nr.: 526

From ser. nr.: 527

Up to ser. nr.: 526

From ser. nr.: 527



• D

112

113

114 :

114

114

114

115

116

116

116

117

117

117

118

119

119

119

119

120

120

121

122

123

124

124

048812

048815

049871

0L0115

0L0109

0L0476

049872

049929

0L0108

0L0107

049875

0L0104

0L0535

047511

049493

0L0516

048466 ;

0L0516

049930

0L0113

049931

0L0114

0E5559

049932

049892

Bronzina

Molla Porta

Schienale

Schienale

Schienale

Schienale

Traverslno

Coperchio

Coperchio

Coperchio

Protezione superiore



Piolino

Ass. supporto Cesto sx

Ass. supporto Cestp

Ass.

supporto Cesto dx

Ass. supporto Cesto

Profile adesivo 15x3

Profi lo adesivo

Velcro Autoad. Maschio su vasca

Pannello di rinforzo

Guarnizione

Guarnizione; cornice vasca

Guarnizione; cornice vasca

Bushing

Door spring

Rear panel

Rear panel

Rear panel

Rear panel

Lower rear cover

Top panel

Top panel

Top panel

Upper protection

Upper protection

Upper protection

Pin

Support; for basket

Support; for basket

Support; for basket

Support; for basket

Gasket

Gasket

Stik

Insulation

Gasket

Gasket door

Gasket door

not for "s,t,u"

Up to ser. nr.: 244

not for"s, t ,u"

From ser. nr.: 245

s,t

u,v,x,y

Up to ser. nr.: 244

Up to ser. nr.: 244

Not for "a l"

From ser. nr.: 245

a l

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr. : 245

P

Up to ser. nr.: 413

Fromser. nr. : 414

Up to ser. nr.: 413

Froms er. nr. : 414

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr.: 245

k,i,p,q,r,s,t

From ser. nr.: 245

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,n,o,u,v,x,y,a1

k,l,q,r,s,t

L a v a s t o v i g li e s o t t o t a v o l o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o u nt e r d i s h w a s h e r W t 3 7 / W T 3 8

P o s

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

212

213

214

214

214

214

215

C o d e

045768

048325

049828

046596

049894

046799

048326

048324

048323

048842

046257

048844

0L0690

048939

0L0527

049877

Descr i z i one

Tubo Gomma 45x55

Coll.

Asp. S caf ico

Guarnlz. Tappo Ter. Sc.

Tappo Terminale Sc.

OR 4*110 Asp Sc.

OR Troppo Pleno

Ghlera collettore Asp. Sc.

Filtro Asp. Pompa

Troppo pleno

Troppo pleno

Tubo 42x52

Pompa scarico

Pompa scarico

Pompa scarico

Pompa scarico

Manicotto asp. scarico

Descr i p t i on

Hose

Drain manifold

Gasket

Plug;

for manifold

0 Ring

0 Ring

Ring nut; for m anifold

Flter; for pump

Overflow pipe

Overflow pipe

Hose

Drain pump

Drain pump

Drain pump

Drain pump

Coupl ing; drain

Ref. / N ote s

b,d,f,n,o,u

a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,SiV,x,y,a1

a,c,e,gil,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 -50hz

Up

to ser. nr.: 518

a,c,e,g,l,m,p,q,t,v,y,a1 - 50tiz

From ser. nr.: 519

h,k,r,s,x

- 60fiz

Up to ser. nr.: 520

t i ,k, r,s,x-60t iz

From ser. nr.: 52 1

a,c,e,g,h,k,m,p,r,s,v,x,y,a1



-a

216

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

228

229

230

231

232

233

235

235

301

301

049933

049878

049856

049878

049445

049934

049470

OL0078

049908

049935

049936

047578

046878

048853

049268

068642

046946

048822

OL0095

049625

0L0697

Tubo Scarico

Tubo Scarico

Tubo Scarico

Tubo Scarico

Fasc.Torro 16-27/9

Raccordo coll. tubo marine

Tubo Pvc

Supporte Filtro

Ass.

Filtro Va sca

Supporte Centr. Flltri

Supp.

Ant. Flltri

Fascetta 26-38 9MM

Fascetta 28-50

Nasello per vasca

Dado ES.M14X1,5

OR 3062;

2,62X15,54

Fase. Torro. W2

8-12/7,5

1VP

Ass tubo Lavagglo

Ass tubo Lavagglo

Pagina 4: Circuito jdr aullc o/A tm.

Pompa perist. Brl l lantante

Pompa perist. Brlllantante

Drain pipe

Drain pipe

Drain pipe

Drain pipe

Cl ip

Connect ion

Pipe

Filter s upport

tank f i l ter

Support; filters

Support; filters

Hose clamp 26-38

Hose clamp 38-50

Spigot; air relief

Nut; M14x1,5

0 Ring

Hose clamp 8-12

Hose

Hose

Page 4: Hydraulic circuit / Atm.

Pump; rinse aid

Pump; rinse aid

k,l,q,r

s,t

b,d,f,n,o,u

a,c,e,g,h,m,p,v,x,y,a1

a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1

a,c,e,g,fi,m,p,v,x,y,a1



Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr.: 245

not for "s,t"

n o t f o r " u , a r

Up to ser. nr.: 521

n o t fo r "u ,a 1 "

From ser. nr.: 5 22

Lavastov i g l i e

s o t t o t a v o l o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o u n t er d i s h w a s h e r W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

Pos

311

311

311

311

311

311

312

312

313

314

314

316

316

318

318

319

320

320

321

Code

049965

O U 102

049612

OLI100

049813

OL1101

049260

083406

0L0481

049880

OL1108

049289

0L0365

049628

0L0098

049287

049772

0L0367

049773

Descr i z i one

Pompa rise. 200V 50Hz



Pompa r ise. 220V 60H z


Pompa r ise. 440V 60H z

Condensatore per pompa rise.

Condensatore per pompa rise.

Tubo bri l lantante (blu)

Manieotto asp. Risciaquo

lUlanicottoasp. Risciaquo

Raccordo 3 vie d.27

Raccordo 3 vie d.27

Trappola D'aria; boiler

Trappöla

D'aria;

boiler

Tubo EPDM 25.5x32

Fascetta ElastiCa

Fascetta Cobra

tubo 26x37

Descr i p t i on

Rinse pump

Rinse pump

Rinse pump

Rinse pump

Rinse pump

Rinse pump

Capacitor

Capacitor

Rinse aid pipe (blue)

Coupling; rins

Coup ling; rins

Connect ion 3 way; diam 27-12

Connect ion 3 way; diam 27-12

Air trap; boyler

Air trap; boyler

Hose; diam 25

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Hose

Ref . / N o t e s

0 - Up to ser.

nr.:

607

0-From ser. nr.: 608

h,x - Up to ser.

nr.:

607

h,x - From se r. nr.: 608

k,r - Up to se r. nr.: 607

k,r - From s er. nr.: 608

6,3pF -

k,r,n,o

5,0(jF-a,b,c,d,e,f,g,m,p,

u,v,y,h,x,a1

Up to ser. nr.: 607

From ser. nr.: 608

Up to ser. nr.: 329

From ser. nr.: 330

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr.: 245

Up to ser. nr.: 329

From ser. nr.: 330

Up to ser. nr.: 244



321

322

323

324

325

326

326

327

328

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

343

OL0117

046878

048824

048126

048531

048823

0L0110

047578

049459

049481

049828

049460

049480

048290

048716

0L0598

048714

048632

048401

048330

048236

048979

048820

048819

049452

0L0121

tubo 26x37

Fascetta a vite 35 -50

Ghiera Supp. Getti Sup.

Fascet ta a vite 13- 20

Tubo EPDM 12x19.5

Guarnizione Supp. GettI Sup.

Guamizlone Supp. GettI Sup.

Fascetta 26-38

A i r G a p s t d

Air Gap UK

Guamizlone per AG

OR per Ghiera AG

Gtiiera per A.G.

Remo risciaquo

Ass. Portagett i Rise.

Ass. Getti Lavavaggio

Tappo Getti rise.

Rondella di Fermo Lavaggio

Mozzo per Ge tti Lav.

Ghiera Fiss. Supp. Getti

Guarnizione LS7 e 8

Seger

Parzializzatore

Sup p. Getti Inf.

Elettrovalvola; 5,5 l/min

Elettrovalvola; 5,5

l/min

Hose

Hose clamp 35-50

Ring nut

Hose clamp 13-20

Hose

Gasket

Gasket

Hose clamp 26-38

Air gap

Air gap; WRC

Gasket

0 Ring

Ring nut

Pin; for rinse jets

Rinse jet

Washing arms assembly

Plug

Lock washer

Hub

Ring nut

Gasket

C-Clamp

Flow reducer

Jets support; lower

El.valve; 5,5 l/min

El.valve; 5,5

l/min

From ser. nr.: 245

Up to ser. nr.: 244

From ser. nr:: 245

a,b,c,d,e,h,l,k,

m,n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1

f.g.p.y

f,g - Up to ser. nr.: 237

f g - From ser. nr.: 238

Up to ser. nr.: 427

l i »

L a v a s t o v i g l i e s o t t o t a v o l o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o u n t e r d i s h w a s h e r W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

Pos

357

358

359

360

361

362

364

365

368

369

370

370

371

372

373

379

380

381

C o d e

049543

049541

072457

068121

048834

049201

048883

049881

048531

072393

048531

049379

0L0349

049419

049418

072457

068121

049650

Descr i z i one

Ni pp l o3 / 4G

Valvola antif lusso

Raccordo 3/4X3/4MM OT

Filtro acqua 3/4

Ass.filtro 3/4 G

Guamizione; diam 3/4

Tubo 5x12 gomma

Pressostato

Tubo EPDM 12x19.5

Tubo EPDM 4x7.4

Tubo EPDM 12x19.5

Tubo gomma 11.5x19.5 WRC

Assieme tappo

Tubo; interno, pompa det.

Tubo; interno, pompa brill.

Raccordo

Assieme fi l tro acqua

Parzializzatore 16 l/min

Descr i p t i on

Nipple

Valve

Nipple

Filter

Filter

Gasket; diam 3/4

Hose; 5x12

Pressure switch

Hose

Hose

Hose

Hose; WRC

Plug assembly

Hose; internal, del. Punfip

Hose;internal, rin. aid pump

Nipple

Assembly f i lter

Hydraulic shutter 16 l/min

R e f . / N o t e s

k,l,q,r

k,l,q,r

k,l,q,r

k,l,q,r

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,p,u,v,x,y,a1

a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,m,j3,uv,x,y,a1 :

a,b,c,d,e,h,k;l,m,

n,o,q,r,u,v,x,a1

f.g.p-y

n,o

n,o

n,o - Up to ser. nr.: 427



• ' )

"'}

I

._ /

• o

382

382

383

383

383

384

384

385

385

385

386

386

386

387

387

388

389

390

402

403

408

409

049510

072457

049508

0L0477

0L0477

0L0318

0L0570

049473

0L0479

0L0479

0LO17O

049650

049650

0L0537

0L0423

0L0602

0L0528

0L0529

049360

0L0696

0L0734

048447

Nipplo ottone 3/4"

Nipplo ottone 3/4"

Portagomma

Portagomma

Portagomma

Elettrovalvola

Elettrovalvola

Nipplo ottone 3/4"- 3/8"



Parzializzatore 5.5 l/min

Parzializzatore 10 l/min

Parzializzatore 10

t/min

Elettrovalvola

Elettrovalvola

Connettore elettrovalvola

Sénsoré di l ivello detergente

Sensore dl livello brillantante

Pagina 5: CIrculto Idraulico / Press

Tubo mandata; rigido

Pompa perist. Detergente

Boller a pressione

Isolante per boiler

Brass nipple 3/4"

Brass nipple 3/4°

Fitting

Fitting

Fitting

Electric valve

Electric valve

Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8"

Brass nipple 3/4"- 3/8"

Brass nipple 3/4"-3/8°

Hydraulic shutter 5.5 l/min



Electric valve

Electric valve

Electric valve connector

Detergent f loat switch

Rinse aid float switch

Page 5: Hydraulic circuit / Pres.

Delivery hose; rigid

Pump; detergent

Boiler

Insulation; for boiler


n,o - From ser. nr.: 428


n,0 - From ser. nr.: 428

P,v,x,y





P.v,x,y

P


v,x,y

P.v,y

x

P.v,x,y

u,v,x,y

u,v,x,y

only for "s,t"

Jlk

L a v a s t o v i g l i e s o t t o t a v o l o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o un t e r d i s h w a s he r W t 3 7 / W T 3 8

Pos

445

446

450

451

452

461

462

464

465

466

467

471

472

473

474

475

476

C o d e

048816

049801

048308

068642

049268

048834

049201

049904

049881

048195

049332

0L0349

049419

049026

046946

048883

ÖL0094

Descr i z i one

Ass.Tubo alimentazione

Iniettore De t. AISI304

Trappola d'aria per pressost.

OR 2062x15.54

Dado M14X1.5

Ass.f i ltro 3/4 G

Guarnizione; diam 3/4

Tubo

Pressostato

Raccordo 3 vie

Valvola DVGW

Assieme tappo

Tubo; interno, pompa det.

Portagomma Brill.

Fase. Torro W 2

8-12/7,5

IVP

Tubo gomma 5X12

Dosatore idraulico

Descr i p t i on

Pipe;

straight + 90 degr, 2100mm

Iniection spigot

Air trap

0 Ring

Nut; Ml 4x1,5

Filter

Gasket; diam 3/4

Hose

Pressure switch

Connect ion 3 way; diam 1 2

Solenoid valve

Plug assembly

Hose; internal, det. Pump

Rubber holder

Hose clamp 8-12

Hose; 5x12

Dispenser; for rinse aid

Ref. / Notes



T3

501

501

501

501

501

501

501

502

503

504

504

505

505

505

505

506

506

507

508

049897

0L0279

0L0047

0L0552

OL0726

0L0538

0L0726

002670

049621

049937

0L0539

0L0032

0L1116

0L0681

0L0281

049883

0L0540

048888

048736

Pagina 6: Componenti elettrici

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Interfaccia utente

Prolunga pulsante

Sénsore reed

Assieme cruscotto E.lux

Assieme cruscotto

Membrana adesiva

Membrana adesiva

Membrana adesiva

Membrana adesiva

Trasform. 80VA 400. .440/230V

Trasform. 30VA 180/254V

Relé

Contattore K209

Page 6: Electrical components

User Interface

User Interface

User Interface

User Interface

User Interface

User Interface

User Interface

Extension

Sensor

Control panel

Control panel

Stick membrane

Stick membrane

Stick membrane

Stick membrane

Transform. 80VA 400. .440/230V

Transform. 30VA 180/254V

Relay; 230v, 2 cont, step 5

Contactor; 200V, 50/60H2, 25A

Up to ser. nr.: 317

From ser. nr.: 318

Up to ser. nr.: 330

From

ser.nr.:

331

Up to ser. nr.: 421

not for "p"

From ser. nr.: 422

Up to ser. nr.: 523

not for "p"

From ser. nr.: 524

p - From ser. nr.: 422

Up to ser. nr.: 523

p - From ser. nr.: 524

not for "p"

P

Not for "m,p,u,v,x,y,a1"

Electrolux

a l

u,v,x,y - Cafe Line

m,p - Medical Line

k,l,q,r,s,t

P

k,l,q,r,s,t

k,r,s

L a v a s t o v i g li e s o t t o t a v o l o W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

U n d e r c o u n te r d i s h w a s h e r W T 3 7 / W T 3 8

Pos

513

514

514

515

516

518

519

519

519

519

519

520

520

521

521

522

522

:

523

524

526

C o d e

048990

049580

0L0366

046376

049643

0E5037

049898

049992

049899

049900

0L0343

067898

046376

067899

0L0280

049884

049643

049939

049940

049901

Descr i z i one

Res. Vasca

2.2kW-400V

Supp Sensore NTC

Supp Sensore

OR 2037

Sensore NTC

OR 6225

Res. Flangiata 6kW 230V

Res. Flangiata 9kW 230V

Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 230V

Res.

Flangiata 6kW 254V

Res. Flangiata 4.5kW 200V

OR 2025-1,78X6,07

OR 2037

Premistoppa

Prennistoppa

Sonda di Temperatura

Sonda di Temperatura

Guamizione DX Crusc. El.

Guamizione SX Crusc. El.

Filtro indutt ivb-cap.; monofase

Descr i p t i on

Heating element; 400V,

2,2kW

Support; sensor

Support; sensor

0 Ring 2037

Sensor

O-Ring

Heating element 6kW 230V

Heating element 9.0kW 230V


Heat ing element 6kW 254V


0 Ring

0 Ring

Stuff ing box

Stuffing box

Temp, sound

Temp, sound

Gasket right

Gasket left

filter; single phase

Ref. / Notes

l,q,t

Up to ser. nr.: 329

From ser. nr.: 330

a,b,c,f,g,h,l,m,p,q,t,y

u,v,x

d,e,a1

k,r,s

n,o

Up to ser. nr.: 317

From to ser. nr.: 318

Up to ser. nr.: 317


Up to ser. nr.: 317


a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,



x>

527

528

529

590

590

590

590

590

0L0542

0L0543

0L0544

0L0049

0L0050

0L0465

0L0545

0L0530

Elet t romagnete

Guarnizione elet t romagnete

Guamizione cruscot to

Cabiaggio

Cablaggio

Cabiaggio

Cablaggio agglunt ivo

Cabiaggio agglunt ivo

Electromagnet

Electromagnet gasket

Control panel gasket

Wiring hardness

Wiring hardness

Wiring hardness

Addit ional wiring harness

Addit ional wiring harness

m,n,o,p,u,v,x,y,a1

P

P

P

notfor"l,k,q,r,s,t"

l,k,q,r,s,t

Up to ser. nr.: 237

l,k,q,r,s,t

f rom ser. nr. : 238

P

u,v,x,y

o

o

C

2

:

2

:

2

:

O

C

C

^—

«

r

rC

C

Z„

0

:

x

C

J

cr

o

C

D

C

>

r

—

L

U

C

C

.

—

i

£

_

J

2

:

0e

j

i

n

I

H

f

1

0

C

f

^

'

^

00t

n

h

l

n

r

1

i

n

C

C

^

c

L

Q

-

?

•

t

rL

_

r

0

r

>

X

_

j

^

i

U

)

O

iV

iC

D

M

l

(

1

e

n

I

H

L

J

^

it

n

I

1

r1

—

1

f

1

C

T

i

n

Cr

~

^

LC—

i

r

e

n

V

7

h

-

z

—

C

•

a

n

II

H

f

T

H

:

^

Xr

x

L

_

•

u

o

:

2

L

r

D

c

c

Q

—

c

C

L

Q

-

Q

.

-

T7

"

-

•

V

c

r

1

—

.

^

1

—

•2I

•)

1

r

c

C

C

Tf^

o

CL

J

,

—

i

n

r

h

t

at

2

:

r

f

^

1

—

(



1



» I M l H I » 1 , 1

' I ' I

«I — 5006 263 00 2/3

I

I I

" - I M I i l I I 1 1 1 . . - n -

I n I ^ ' -I n I II I II I i> . 1 II I m

> I ' ) I . 1 1 • . I I-

P.

m

xi>>

RINSE AID

DISPENSER

MAX. 30 VA

é

E T E R G E N T

D I S P E N S E R

M A X . 3 0 V A

. ENERGY

MANftGHENT

SWITCH

L

THREE PHASE WITHOUT

NEUTRAL CONNECTION



M

400- 440 V 50 /60 Hz

iL

" I - J T - i v I — r e -

I » ~r-

' I - « -

O



I

•

^

^

n

I

.

V

=

å

.

r

^

^

^

J

Philips HD7448 Coffee Maker



Spec ial features:

Good value for money. The Philips HD 7448 makes good hot coffee

quickly and easily. Translucent water reservoir. The distinctive water

reservoir looks good a nd improves visibility of the wa ter leve l. Wa ter

level indicator on jug . Markings on the jug ensure that you use the e xact

amou nt of water that you n eed .

Technical specifications:

Brewing tim e: 7 m inutes for the full jug .

Capacity: Holds

1.31.

Makes from 10-15 cups

HD7448, HD7446





t i I I

4—6

1

^ - V^

4—6

I



ENGLISH 6

DEUTSCH 13

FRANCAIS 20

NEDERLANDS 27

ESPANOL

34

ITALIAN0 4 I



PORTUGUES 48

NORSK

55

SYENSKA6i

SUOMI 67

DANSK 73

EAAHNIKA 79

TÜRKQE 87

I m p o r t a n t

Read these instructions for use carefully before using the appliance and

save them for future reference.

Check if the voltage indicated on the appliance corresponds to

the local mains voltage before you connect the appliance.

Do not use the appliance if the mains

co rd ,

the plug or the

appliance itself is damaged.

If the mains cord is damaged, it must be replaced by Philips, a

service centre authorised by Philips or similarly qualified persons

in ord er t o avoid a hazard.

Do not place the appliance on a hot surface and prevent the

mains cord from coming into contact with hot surfaces.



Keep the appliance and its cord out of the reach of children. Do

not let the mains cord hang over the edge of the table or

w o rk to p on wh ich the appliance is standing.

Never immerse the appliance in water or any other l iquid.

Unplug the appliance before cleaning it and if problems occur

during brewing.

Preparing for use

Clean the jug and the filter holder (see chapter 'Cleaning').

Put the appliance on a flat and stable surface.

Put the plug in an earthed wall socket.

E N G L I S H

I Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).

The light goes on (HD7448 only).

Let the appliance run until the water tank is completely empty.

Switch the appliance off when all the water is in the jug.

Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you

start brewing coffee.

Using the appl iance

Brewing coffee



Op en the lid (fig. 2) .

Fill the water tank fresh cold with water (fig. 5).

The graduations on the left are for large cups (120 ml).

The graduations on the right are fo r small cups (80 m l).

Close the lid.

Place the jug on the hotplate.

Make sure you place the jug properly on the hotplate.

•

If you don't place the jug properly on the hotplate, the drip stop will

prevent the coffee fronn flowing into the jug and the filter may overflow

as a

result.

8 E N G L I S H

For snnall cups: use one level measuring spoon o f ground coffee fo r

each cup.

Close the lid.

LjJ Switch the appliance on by pressing the on/off switch (fig. 4).

The light goes on (HD7448 only).

W hen all the water has passed through the filter, you can

remove the jug from the appliance.

Switch the appliance off after use.

Let the appliance cool down for at least 3 minutes before you

start brewing coffee again.



3 Remove the filter holder and throw the paper filter away.

If you have used the permanent filter, empty and rinse it.

C leaning

Always unplug the appliance before you start cleaning it.

Never immerse the appliance in water.

I Clean the outside of the appliance w ith a moist cloth.

Detach the filter holder.

Clean the jug and the removable filter holder in hot wa ter with

E N G L I S H

- 4 or 5 times a year if you are using hard water.

Turn to your local water board for infomnation about the water

hardness in your area.

Fill the w ate r tank w ith w hite vinegar. D o no t pu t a fi l ter and

ground coffee in the filter holder.

Let the appliance complete two brewing cycles.

See chapter 'Using the appliance'. Let the appliance cool dow n before

you start the second run.

K J L e t

the appliance complete two more brewing cycles with fresh,

cold water to remove all vinegar residues.



I You can also use an appro pria te liquid descaler. In this case,

follow the instructions on the package of the descaler.

Do not use a descaling powder.

Clean the separate parts (see chapter 'Cleaning').

Accessories

You can order a new jug from your Philips dealer or a Philips

service centre under type number HD7983/70 (white) or

HD7983/20 (black).

You can order a permanent filter from your Philips dealer or a

Philips service centre under reference number 4822 48050 479

(permanent nylon coffee filter).

1 0 E N G L I S H

Guarantee & serv ice

If you need information or if you have a p rob lem , please visit the Philips

website at

www.philips.com

or contact the Philips Customer Care

Centre in your country (you will find its phone num ber in the

worldwide guarantee leaflet). If there is no Customer Care Centre in

your country, turn to your local Philips dealer or contact the Service

Departm en t o f Philips Domestic Appliances and Personal Care BV.

http://www.philips.com/





T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

E NG LIS H I I

P r o b l e m

The appliance doesn't work.

Solut ion

Check if

- the appliance is plumed in,

- the voltage indicated on the

appliance corresponds to the local

mains voltage.

- the appliance is switched on.

- in all other cases, contact the Philips

Customer Care Centre.



Water leaks out of the appliance.

The appliance takes a long t im e to

brew coffee.

The appliance produces a lot of noise

and steam d uring the brewing process.

Check if:

- the water tank has not been fil led

beyond the M A X level.

- in all other cases, contact the Philips

Customer Care Centre.

Descale the appliance (see chapter

'Descaling').

Check if

- the w ate r tank has been f il led w ith

CO L D wa t e r

2 E N G L I S H

P r o b l e m

Solut ion

The coffee is to o w ea k

- the opening in the bo ttom of the

filter h olde r isn't clogged.

- th e right size o f pape r filter has been

used.

- the paper filter isn't torn .

Check if:

- the right proport ion of coffee to

water has been used.

- the pape r filter hasn't collapsed.

- the right size o f pap er filter has been



The coffee doesn't taste good.

The coffee isn't hot enough.

used.

D on 't leave the jug w ith coffee o n th e

hotplate too long, especially not if it

only contains a small amount of coffee.

Check if:

- the jug has been properly placed on

the hotplate.

- the hotplate and the jug are clean

(see chapter 'Cleaning').

W e advise you to brew mo re than

thre e cups of coffee to ensure that th e

^

O

l

=

^

C

^

-

_

M

*

L

^

^

^

a

K

f

e

L

S

V

^

^

k

^

_

d



O

B

2

l

3

=

j

.

=

=

e

n

,

—

A

c

=A

c

=

S] E l e c t r o l u x

Ironing boards,

wall mounted/free-standing



'\

Model

62 05 72

Model 62 Ol 35

WALL M OUN TED:

• SPACE SAVING

• FOLD-UP EXE CUTION

• ADJUSTABLE HE IGHT

Th e wall mo unted i roning board is easily Th e robust, free-standing ironin g board is

adjustable in ergonomically right working

height. W hen not in use, the board can be

folded up in up-right position with m inimal

space need.

easily adjustable in ergonomically right

working height. The board is provided

with fold-away iron tray and can be

completed with a sleeve board included in

I R O N I N G B O A RD S, W ALL M O U N T E D / F RE E - ST A N D IN G

1590

Scale

1:20

Dimensions mm

max 900



\

<\

• ja_

Ironing board, wall mounted, model 62 01 35

Specification

Model

6 2 0 1 3 5

62 05 72

Execution

wall mounted

free-standing

Weight kgs

net

9

gross

1 0

Shipping

volume m^

0.050

0.080

Ironing board, f iree-standing, model 62 05 72

Ironing board, wall mounted, installation:

6 Hote di a=o6

=

A

•

=

=

A

^

O

l

=

^

i

3

.

^

k

£

>

u



o

•

o

>

2

c

=

A

,

—

k

A

c

m

o

m

4

^

c

M

LOiPART

Exclusive

Sales

of

8 ] E l e c t r o l u x

Marine Equipment

M icrowave oven RE -R40 SM



M odel RE-R40SM

• STEEL CONSTRUCTION

• UNIFORM HEATING

• DIGITAL DISPLAY WITH TIM E R

• CONTROL BUTTONS

The RE -R40SM is a domest ic type ofmicro

wave oven.

The revolutionary space saving design of

"rou nd" microwave oven features an exterior

diameter that is 1 0 % smaller than other ones

The oven provides 'quick thawing', 'auto

cooking', 'manua l cooking', 'convenient cook

ing' and 'deodorization by one-touch' in

ability.

Standard supply includes 1.7 m cable with

M IC RO WA VE O V E N R E -R 40 S M

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm

O O O O [E B Ö Io Q O Q Q

320

1.

Electrical conne rtion, 1.7 m cable

with earthed plug included



Specification

M o d e l

R E - R 4 0 S M

Capacity

krs

27

D ime n sio n s mm

A

422

B

437

C

3 2 0

Voltage

2 3 0 1

-60

M icrowave

power kW

0.7

Power consumption

at fill power

kW

1.1

Fuse

A

10

Weight kgs

net

13.5

gross

15

Sh ip p in g

volume m '

0.080

Ins t ruc t ion & Operat ion Manual



Microwave Oven

RE-R40S/RE-R40SIV

- PREPARATION -

I . Su gg es t ion s for the safety.

1.

Please don't take out the plug by plucking out the cord.

Don't touch the plug with wet hands.

- / ' .

2.

Don't put the candle-light and the light of a

cigarette on the microwave oven. Don't

install the microwave oven near the heat

machines.

3. Please don't operate the vacant microwave oven



except "DEODORIZATION".

4.

Don't operate the thick peel of the fruit

and the bottle with a cap.

5. Don't hold the food and the container

right after cook ing. Please use the

gloves from the burns.

m i

8. Please don't lay the bowl including water,

medicine and metal.

9. Please don't use and preserve the

inflamm able spray and material around the

microwave oven.

• ^ S '

10.

Please don't wrap the food with paper.

'^^^



II . In t roduct ion

Window

Interior light

Exhaust pipe

Operating board

^

Ä ' i

Rotation dish Spindle

Door opening safety device

Handle

Rotation base

/



~ ^ ^ ^ V ^ t = - - ^ Ä .

* Installation of the components:

Insert the "rotation base" inside of oven and put the

rotation dish on the "rotation dish".

III. Instal lat ion

Please l<eep tiie space as per tiie be iow . _ ___ , - " "

20Cm..

' 4 5 C m

10Cm

OPERATION -

<

The kinds of usable bowls >

I. The Usable Bowls.

Hea t-resisting Glass Hea t-resisting Plastic(120°C) Cera mics

i-'i

J ^ ^ ^

* ' sa ^ ' "

•K:^

II.

The below bowls needs caution.

1. Usual glass. — Only for warming wa ter and milk lightly.

2. Usual plastic. — Only for warming the cold food lightly.



3. Paper dish and paper bowl. ~~ Only for warming the water slightly.

^j^.-i

III.

The below bowls are prohibited.

The bowl including gold and silver line

. - « * J L .J* S

Metal bowls.

^ ^ Æ ^ O ^

dkf^

'f

<Control Panel>

Cancel

For cancel cooking

Lief in te l l igence ~

For sterilizing the baby

bottle and steaming towel

Deodor iza t ion ~

For removing the smell

inside of ovens.

For setting the cooking time

( 1 M I N :

For setting the

present time



w ar ming ~

For warming cooked r ice

stew, steaming eggs.

Thaw ing ~

For thawing meat,

the fowls, and fishes.

T ime ~

This button is used

together with the button

" 1M IN" when setting

the present time.

Indicat ion ~

The progress of

cooking is indicated.

S T A R T / + 3 0 S E C . ~

For warming beverages.

In order to set the p resent t ime. ~ Opera t ion: ex) ln order to 10:25

TIME

Press " t ime" once .

IM IN

Press " IMIN" lOt imes and se t 10 .



TIME

IMIN

Press " t ime" once .

I I P res s " I M IN " 2 5 ti m e s a n d s e t 2 5.

H Press " t i m e" once .

TIME

'«W'

må

T ime was set .

I ) L ight warming(For warming food l ight ly )

* If you want to w arm one(1) cup of coffee, ~

1. After insert the coffee,

2,

Press the button "START"

Whenever you press the

button "START", SOseconds

is add ed.

3. If you want to ca ncel the warm ing,

press the button "CANCEL"

S ' l A R l / t S O S h C .

CANCEF.

s M B ' "'

k r

l i ) WA R MIN G



* If you want to warm cooked rice.

1.

After insert the cooked rice.

2.

Press "1.COOKED RICE" once

and select No. 1 .

1. Cooked ne e 2 Stew 3. Steam ed e ggs

3. It starts automatically after 2 seconds.

I l l ) STERILIZING

vm

A }

IV ) THAWING.

* If you m elt the meat, 30 0g

1.

After inserting

the

meat

.S'S

2. Press the button "THAWING" 2

times

and

select SOOg.

100g is

added every press.

THA WING

^ "

3.

It

starts automatically after 2 seconds

4. If the bell is ringing 10 times during thawing, open the door and turn over the meat

5. Close the door and press the "START"

START/+30SEC.



V I )

For

se t t ing

the

cook ing t ime.

* If you want to warm the food for 2 minutes and 30 seconds

1.

Insert the

food.

2. Please press the button "1MIN"

twice and press the button

" . "10SEC"3 t imes .

3. Press the "STAR T". START/+30SEC.

1IVIIN 10SEC " ~

fej

B

3

=

-

^

4

^

c



=

A

c

V

=

5

b

r

s

c

V

Tilting frying tables

• STURDY AN D HEAVY DUTY

DESIGN



• CAST IRON PAN

• THERMAL-INSULATED

• HIGH CAPACITY

• EASY TO M AINTAIN AND TO

CLEAN

• 4 DIFFERE N T SIZES

The frying pan, made of cast iron, is care-

fiilly designed for a perfect frying result.

The casing is thermal-insulated and has a

polished stainless steel exterior. The coun

ter-balanced lid is en tirely made of polished

stainless steel.

Powerfiil, embedded heating elements and

a thermostat control provide an even and

rapidly reached surface temperature up to

3 00°C .

TILTING FRYING TABLES

Dimensions mm

Scale 1:20

[ S B

,50

=0 -

H75

1. Thermostat control

2. Pilot lamp

3. Cable entry for power loading

4. Foundation frame, optional extras

- not included

5. Floor gully, optional extras

- not included

J

Installation



Steel foundation to be welded to deck as per measures.

To be in level in all direa ion s and in h eight. Top of foundation to be at least 5 mm

over fit floor to avoid seepage. Fill the found ation frame if possible to reduce risk of

fiirther seepage.

B olting holes (4 pes. 0 10) are symmetrically posit ioned.

e

t

^

— a —

—

c

—

4

«

1

\

•

M

Dimensions mm

a*

3 2 0

3 7 0

b*

255

3 0 5

C

278

328

d

1 8 0

2 0 0

e

37

52

dim . a and b correspond to dim . G and K

on installation drawing

Dimensions mm

M o d e l

16 80 32S

16 80 33S

A

6 3 0

8 7 0

B

5 5 0

c

3 0 0

D

1 6 0 0

E

8 7 0

F

2 0 0

3 0 0

G

3 2 0

H

3 0 0

4 0 0

I*

1 5 0

J

75

K

255

L

6 3 0

M

65

Handbok

Käsikirja

Håndbok

Håndbog

Handbook



S E ;

Sida. 4-6,7-9

(FU

Sivu. 4-6 10-12

( N O ) Side. 4-6,13-15

( D K ) Side. 4-6, 16-18

GB^

Page 4-6,19-21



Model

168032

168033

168034

168035

630

870

1170

870

550

700

700

700

300

1600

1650

200

300

450

300

320

370

H

300

400

550

400

150

210

75

175

K

255

305

630

M

65

780 110

Model

167800

167801

a

320

370

b

254

304

c

278

328

d

180

200

e

37

52



15

1.

Termostat

2.

Signallampa

3. Kabelintag, effektledning. Ledning uppdrages 0,75

m. over färdigt golv.

4.

Jngjutningsfundament (Tillbehör, ingår ej i leveran

sen.)

5. Golvgrop (Tillbehör, ingår ej i leveransen.)

1.

Termostat

2. Signallampe

3. Kabelindgang, effektledning. Ledning ophænges

0,75 m over færdigt gulv.

4. Indstøbningsfundam ent (tilbehør, indgår ikke i le

verancen.)

5. Gulvafløb (tilbehør, indgår ikke i leverancen.)

®

1.

Termostaatti

2.

Merkkivalo

3. Kaapeliliitäntä, tehonsyöttökaapeli. Kaapeli vede-

tään 0,75

m

valmiin lattian yläpuolelle.

4. Valujalusta (Lisävaruste, ei sisälly toimitukseen)

5. Lattiakaivo (Lisävaruste, ei sisälly toimitukseen)

1.

Thermostat

2.

Signal lamp

3. Cable access point, power cable. The cable is

drawn 0.75 m over a finished floor.

4. Base for cementing into place (Accessory, not in

eluded).

5. Recessed floor drain (Accessory, not included).

1.

Termostat



2.

Signallampe

3. Kabelinngang, effektledning. Ledning trekkes opp

0,75 m. over ferdig gulv.

4. Innstøpningsfundament (tllleggsutstyr, ikke del av

leveransen).

5. Gulvgrop (tilleggsutstyr, ikke del av leveransen).

Elschema

Sähkökaavio

Elskjema

16 80 32

Ledningsdiagram

Wiring diagram

L3 12 LI

A. Kontaktor

B. Element

C. Termostat

D. SIgnallampa

E. Transformator

F. Säkring

®

A. Kontaktori

B. Lampöelementti

C. Termostaatti

D. Merkkivalo

E. Muuntaja

F. Sulake

NO)

A. Kontaktor

B. Element

C. Termostat

D. Signallampe



16 80 33

16 80 34

16 80 35

©

% T T O

L3 12 LI

E. Transformator

F. Sikring

A. Kontaktor

B. Varmeelement

C. Termostat

D. Signallampe

E. Transformator

F. Sikring

(GB)

A. Contactor

B. Heating element

C. Thermostat

D. Signal lamp

SE

Tekniska specifikationer

Modeli

Stekyta (mm)

Stekpannans djup (mm)

Max fasström (A)

Effekt (kW)

Vikt (kg)

Ansiutningsspånning 1680320801 (V, Hz)

Anslutningsspänning 1680320501 (V, Hz)

Kapslingsklass

168032

500x450

60

10

5,5

165

400 3-50

440 3-60

IPX4

168033

700x560

90

16

10,0

180

168034

1000x560

90

25

14,0

200

168035

700x560

180

16

10,0

190

Alimanna anvisningar

Om foreskrifter i detta och utrustningens övriga do

kument inte föijs, kan dess säkerhet äventyras och

Fore uppställning

Rengör ingjutningsramen från betongrester. Rensa de fyra

skruvhålen med en MIO gängtapp.



leverantörens garanti- och produktansvar upphöra.

• Lås noggrant föreskrifterna i detta dokument, efter

som det inneliåller viktiga säke rtietsupplysningar be-

träffande installation, driftssäkerhet, användning och

underfiåll av

Produkten.

Förvara handlingen så att den

är tillgänglig for alia användare.

• Installation och testkörning maste göras av en for

andamålet utbildad tekniker och enligt tillverkarens

instruktioner. Se Installationsanvisning.

• Installation av

produkten,

såval som dess anslutning-

ar, skall utföras enligt gallande normer och foreskrif

ter.

• All service, underhall samt reparation skall ske av

en for andam ålet utbildad tekniker. Endast originalre-

servdelar får användas vid utbyte. Se Reservdelska-

talog*.

• Handhavande och skötsel skall enbart ske av

på

den-

Uppställning

Tag bort emballaget.

God luftcirkulation är viktig runt stekbordet. Placera

stekbordet enligt

fig.1.

Stall stekbordet plant.

Montera och drag åt de med brickor försedda fäst-

skruvarna.

Aviägsna skyddsplasten försiktigt. Eventuella limres-

ter aviägsnas med ett lämpligt lösningsmedel.

Stekhällen är

vid

leverans rostskyddsbehandlad m ed

rostskyddsolja. Rengör

hallen,

samt övriga delar och

tillbehör med varmt vatten och ett neutralt disk/ren-

göringsmedel. Skö lj därefter noga.

Justering av lutning

• Kontrollera att stekbordet är plant.

• Lutning i sidled justeras med två insexskruvar. Dessa

är placerade undertill på upphängningsbalken som

hal

• Kontrollera att nätet är förberett, eller kan belastas

med den aktuella strömmen och att det år försett med

ordentlig skyddsjordning.

• Såvåi effekt- som manöverström skall vara avsäkra-

de.

Säkringen skall ha tillräcklig märkström for att

kunna leverera erforderlig kraft

til

stekbordet.

• Stekbordet bor anslutas till einätet over en allpolig

brytare (leverantörens rekomm endation), med vilken

ström-tillförseln till stekbordets effekt- och manover-

ledning kan brytas.

• Stekbordet är försett med en yttre ekvipotential jord-

klämma, som finns placerad på baksidan av pelaren.

Tillbehör

Modell Benämning

16 78 00 Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 32

16 78 01 Ingjutningsram till modeil 16 80 33, -34, -35

GGS 460 Golvbrunn tili stengolv

GGM 460 Golvbrunn tili massagolv

GGP 460 Golvbrunn tili plastmatta

Bruksanvisning

Användningsomrade

Höga temperaturer Bordets stekande yta kan med ter

mostaten regleras steglöst från 100°C upp till 300°C. V id

dessa höga temperaturer skall stekspade användas vid

narkontakt med den stekande maträtten.

Eldslåga Stektillsatser med låg flammpunkt kan inne-

båra att eldslåga uppstår. Använd alltid godkända stektill

satser. Om eldslåga uppstår minimerar m an syretillförel-

sen genom att stänga locket. Är inte detta tillräckligt

stang

er man av stekbordet och täcker springorna mellan

hal

len,

locket och pipen med en brandfilt. Vid detta släck-

ningsarbete skall skyddshandskar med handledskrage

användas.

Obs Vid ovanstående

tillbud:

Använd aldrig vatten.

Tekniska data

En dataskylt med stekbordets tekniska uppgifter finns pla

cerad på pelarens nedersta vänstra de (fig.3).

Om utrustningen inte används

Om utrustningen inte skall användas under längre tid

mäste följande instruktioner följas:

• Bryt effekt- och manöverströmmen tili Stekbordet, ge

nom huvudströmbrytaren eller i anläggningens cen

tral.

• Rengör Stekbordet och alia tillbehör.

• Lät locket stå öppet så att luft kan cirkulera i utrymmet



stekbordet är avsett att användas tili matlagning i alia

typer av storkök. Något annat användningsomrade an

matlagning är ej tillåtet. Stekbordet får ej användas som

fritös.

Produktbeskrivning

stekbordet har jämn stektemperatur over heia stekytan,

stor kapacitet, arbetsbesparande, god ekonomi, och är

stjäipbart.

Stekpannan är tillverkad av förstklassigt gjutjärn. Stek

bordets yttersidor, pelare samt lock är tillverkad av sllpad

rostfri plat. Stekbordet

är

omsorgsfullt

värmeisolerat.

Lock

et är uppfällbart och väl balanserat.

Regieringsorganen utgörs av kombinerad b rytare och ter

mostat i kombination med en kontakter. Kontaktorn är

pla

cerad i pelaren.

En signallampa indikerar når ström är

tillslagen.

Med ter

mostaten regleras varmen på stekytan steglöst från 100°C

och på så satt hindra att mögel och dålig lukt utveck-

las.

Instekning

Stek in stekbordet. Använd därvid ett tunt lager matolja.

Användning (fig.2)

• sta ll in termostatvredet (1.) på önskat läge. Signal-

lampan (2.) tands.

• Prova med en Ilten mängd stekfett att stekbordet har

rått temperatur. Vid behov ändras termostatlaget. Var

noga med att ha s tekytan i horisontalläge.

• Stekbordet är klart att användas.

• Skrapa vid behov stekbordet under stekningen, t.ex.

fore ny påfyllning.

• Vid avslutad stekning stall termostatvredet (1.) på läge

0. Signallampan (2.) slocknar.

OBS Vattenstråle får ej riktas direkt mot kontroll-

panelen eller dess n ärhet. Vatten i kontakt med spän-

ningsförande delar medför direkt livsfara. Låt aldrig

vatten komma i kontakt med uppvärmd stekbords-

hall.

Detta kan

leda till

sprickor

i

gjutgodset

med

kort

slutning som följd.

Finns i anläggningen mer an ett stekbord till förfogande

bör dessa delas upp mellan kött och fisk, for att slippa

arbetsam och tidsödande rengöring. Finns bara ett bord

maste en noggrann rengöring göras mellan dessa

matsorter, annars kan de ta smak av varandra.

Övriga dokument:

Reservdelskatalog (medlevereras ej)

EG-försäkran (medlevereras ej)

Serviceanvisning

Fel,

orsak, åtgard

Ojämn stekning

1. Stekbordet är

ej

plant.

• Följ instruktionerna 'justering av lutning' i installa-

tionsanvisningen.

Tag varsamt bort isoleringen som ligger under bot

tenplåten och spara denna.

7. Under isoleringen ligger pressplåtar som har till upp-

gift att hålla elementen på plats.

Lossa elledningarna, som kommer fram ur pressplåt-

ens hål, vid kopplingslådan. Obs Spara steatitpår-

lorna till de nya elementen. Lyft bort och renskrapa

pressplåten (pressplåtarna).

8. Under pressplåten ligger

en

keramisk fiberplatta som

ej går att återanvånda. Rensa ren stekpannan från

denna och kasta den. Ny isolerplatta från leverantö-

rens reservdelslager bör beställas tilisammans med

elementen.

9. Lyft bort elementen. Obs Glimmerbrickorna som år

placerade

vid

avslutningen av elementet skall återan-

våndas. Renborsta elementsparen.

10.

Kontrollera att rätt elementspänning erhållits. Elemen

ten monteras enligt iläggningsschemat.

I

vissa

fall

kan

elementen behöva justeras m ed cirka plus m inus tre

parlor.

Är spiralen for lang krossar man lampligt antal parlor.

Spiralen fjädrar då tillbaka av egen kraft och blir kor-

tare.

Är spiralen for kort lossar man åndsteatiten och kom -

pletterar med parlor från de gamla elementen.

Obs

1

Glöm ej glimmerbrickorna.

Elementåndarna forses med de sparade pårlorna och

anpassas till kopplingsbultarna. Obs I Var noggrann



2.

Fastbrånda matrester.

• Se bruksanvisning: Rengöring.

Ojämn eller svag varme

1.

Defekta säkringar

2.

Defekta elledningar

3. Element fungerar ej

• Kontrollera att pressplåtarna ligger an mot

elemen-

ten och att inte skruvarna lossnat.

• Följ Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av element'.

4. Termostat fungerar ej

• Följ Serviceinstruktionerna 'byte av elem ent.

Serviceinstruktioner

Byte av element

Vid byte och beställning av element las forst punkt 8.

1.

Tilise att stekbordet är avstängt.

vid fastdragningen tili kopplingsbultarna.

11.

Omvand återmontering sker.

Obs I Drag ej åt pressplåtarna for kraftigt. Risk fore

ligger då att e lementparlorna spricker.

Byte av termostat

• Tilise att stekbordet är avstängt.

• Bryt effekt- och manöverledningen till stekbordet.

• Lossa termostatvredet och bakomvarande frontplåt.

Skruva loss termos taten. Tag bort elledningarna och

drag fram termostaten endast någon bulblängd. Klipp

av kånseltråden så nåra termostathuset som möjligt.

Linda, ögia och tejpa fast kånseltråden ordentligt kring

den

nya

termostatens bulb så att kånseltråden går att

an Vanda som dragtråd.

• Tippa stekpannan till max. Lossa luckan i stekbor

dets bottenplåt och den lilla isoleringsbiten, så att ter-

mostatbulben blir synlig. Lossa bulben och drag fö r-

®

Tekniset tiedot

Malli

Paistopinta (mm)

Paistinpannun syvyys (mm)

Maks. vaihevirta (A)

Teho (kW)

Paino (kg)

Liitäntäjännite 1680320801 (V, Hz)

Liitäntäjännite 1680320501 (V, Hz)

Suojausluokka

168032

500x450

60

10

5,5

165

400 3-50

440 3-60

IPX4

168033

700x560

90

16

10,0

180

168034

1000x560

90

25

14,0

200

168035

700x560

180

16

10,0

190

Yleiset ohjeet

Jos tässä oh jeessa ja tuotteen muissa asiakirjoissa

annettuja määräyksiä ei noudateta, saattaa sen tur-

vallisuus vaarantua ja toimittajan takuu- ja tuote-

Ennen asennusta

Puhdista valukehys be tonijäänteistä. Puhdista kaikki nel-

jä ruuvinreikää MIO-kierretapilla.

Asennus



vastuu lakata olemasta vo imassa.

• Lue huolellisesti tässä asiakirjassa annetut määräyk-

set, koska niihin sisältyy tuotteen asennusta, käyttö-

turvallJsuutta, käyttöä ja huoltoa koskevia tärkeitä

turvaohjeita. Säilytä asiakirja niin, että se on kaik-

kien käyttäjien saatavilia.

• Tuotteen asennus ja koekäyttö on annettava siihen

koulutetun asentajan suoritettavaksi valmistajan

ohjeiden mukaisesti. Katso alia olevat ohjeet sekä

Asennusohje.

• Tuotteen asennus, samoin kuin sen llitännät, on su-

oritettava soveltuvan standardin ja määräysten mu

kaisesti.

• Kaikki tuotteen huolto-, kunnossapito- ja korjaustyöt

on annettava siihen koulutetun asentajan suoritetta-

viksi.

Tuotteeseen saa vaihtaa vain alkuperäisiä va-

raosia. Katso Huolto-ohje* ja Varaosaluettelo*.

• Tätä tuotetta saa käyttää ja huoltaa vain siihen kou-

Poista pakkaus.

Huolehdi siitä, että ilma pääsee kiertämään esteettä

paistinpannun ym pärillä. Sijoita paistinpannu kuvan 1

mukaisesti.

Aseta paistinpannu vaakasuoraan.

Asenna ja kiristä aluslevyillä varustetut kiinnitysruu-

vit.

Poista suojamuovi varovasti. Mahdolliset liimajäänte-

et poistetaan sopivalla liuotteella.

Paistolevyt toimitetaan ruosteenestoöljyllä ruostesu-

ojattuina. Puhdista levyt sekä muut osat ja lisävarus-

teet lämpimällä vedellä ja neutraalilla astiapesu/puh-

distusaineella. Huuhtele huolellisesti puhdistuksen

jälkeen.

Kaltevuuden säätö

• Tarkasta, että paistinpannu on vaakasuorassa.

• Kaltevuutta säädetään sivusuunnassa kahdella kuu-

sioruuvilla. Nämä sijaitsevat paistinpannua kiinnipitä-

• Paistinpannu liitetään verkkoon sälikökeskuksen kaut-

ta.

• Tarkasta, että verkkoa voidaan kuormittaa käytettä-

vällä

virralla ja

että

se on

va rustettu kunnollisella suo-

jamaadoitukseila.

• Verkko-

ja

ohjausvirta

on

suojattava sulakkeilla. Sulak-

keen nimellisvirran on oltava riittävä, jotta paistinpan-

nuun voidaan syöttää tarvittava jännite.

• Paistinpannu on liitettävä sähköverkkoon moninapai-

sen katkaisimen kautta (toimittajan suositus), jolla vir-

ransyöttö paistinpannun ve rkko-ja ohjauskaapeliin

voi

daan katkaista.

• Paistinpannu

on

varustettu

ulkoisella

jännitteentasaus-

ruuvilla, joka on sijoitettu pilarin taakse.

Lisävarusteet

Malli Nimitys

16 78 00 Valukehys malliin 16 80 32

16 78 01 Valukehys malliin 16 80 33, -34, -35

GGS 460 Lattiakaivo kivilattiaan

GGM 460 Lattiakaivo valulattiaan

GGP 460 Lattiakaivo muovimattoon

Käyttöohje

Käyttökohteet

Korkest lämpötilat Termostaatilla paistopinnan lämpö

tilaa voidaan säätää portaattomasti välillä 100-300°G.

Kuumalla paistopinnalla valmistettavaa ruokaa on

käsi-

teltävä paistinlastalla.

Liekit

Alhaisen leimahduspisteen omaavat paistoaineet

saattavat syttyä palamaan. Käytä aina hyväksyttyjä pa-

istoaineita.

Liekit tukahdutetaan sulkemalla kansi. Jos tämä ei riitä

tukahduttamaan liekkejä, paistinpannun virta katkaistaan

ja paistolevyn, kannen ja nokan väliset raot peitetään

palohuovalla. Sammutustyössä on käytettävä pitkävarti-

sia suojakäsineitä.

Huom Sammuttamiseen ei koskaan saa käyttää vettä.

Tekniset tiedot

Pilarin vasempaan alaosaan on sijoitettu paistinpannun

tekniset tiedot sisältävä arvokilpi (kuva 3).

Jos laitetta e i käytetä

Jos laite on pitkään käyttämättömänä, on noudatettava

seuraavia ohjeita:

• Katkaise paistinpannun tehonsyöttö- ja ohjausvirta

päävirtakytkimellä tai laitoksen keskuksesta.

• Puhdista paistinpannu ja kaikki sen lisävarusteet.

• Jätä kansi auki nun, että ilma pääsee kiertämään ti-

lassa ja estämään homeen ja pahan hajun muodos-



Paistinpannu on tarkoitettu ruoanvalmistukseen kaiken-

tyyppisissä suurkeittiölssä. Käyttö muuhun tarkoitukseen

kuin ruoanvalmistukseen on kielletty. Paistinpannua

ei

saa

käyttää rasvakeittimenä.

Tuotekuvaus

Kallistettava paistinpannu on tehokas, työtä säästävä ja

taloudellinen ja sen paistolämpötila

on

tasainen koko pa-

istopinnalla.

Paistinpannu on valmistettu ensiluokkaisesta valuraudas-

ta. Paistinpannun ulkosivut, pilari ja kansi on valmistettu

hiotusta ruostumattomasta levystä. Paistinpannu on

lämpöeristetty huolellisesti. Paistinpannussa

on

avattava

ja hyvin tasapainotettu kansi.

Pöydän

säätölaitteistoon kuuluvat

katkaisin

ja termostaatti

sekä kontaktori. Kontaktori on sijoitettu pilariin.

Merkkivalo syttyy, kun virta on kytkettynä. Termostaatilla

paistopinnan lämpötilaa voidaan säätää portaattomasti

tumisen.

Sisäänpaisto

Kuumenna paistinpannussa ohut kerros ruokaöljyä en

nen ensimmäistä ruoanvalmistuskertaa.

Käyttö (kuva 2)

• Käännä termostaattiväännin (1) haluttuun asentoon.

Merkkivalo (2) syttyy.

• Kokeile pienellä määrällä paistinrasvaa, että paistin

pannun lämpötila

on

oikea. Muuta tarvittaessa termo-

staatin asentoa. Varmista, että paistopinta on vaaka-

suorassa.

• Paistinpannu on käyttövalmis.

• Kaavi paistinpannua tarvittaessa paiston

aikana,

esim.

ennen uutta täyttöä.

• Aseta termostaattiväännin (1) paiston jälkeen asen

toon 0. Merkkivalo (2) sammuu.

vellä tai valkelssa tapauksissa teräskaapimella.

HUOM Vettä ei saa suihkuttaa suoraan käyttöpane-

eliin tai sen läheisyyteen. Vesi aiheuttaa jännitteisiin

osiin päästessään välittömän hengenvaaran. Älä ko-

skaan päästä vettä kuumalle paistolevylle. Vesi voi

aiheuttaa valutavaran halkeamisen ja olkosu lun.

Jos laitoksessa on käytössä useampia paistinpannuja,

llha- ja kalaruoat on valmistettava eri palstinpannuissa

työlään ja alkaavlevän puhdistuksen välttämiseksl. Jos

pöytiä on vain yksi, se on puhdistettava huolelllsesti näl-

den ruokalajien välillä, muussa tapauksessa ruoat volvat

saada makua tolslstaan.

Muut asiakirjat:

Varaosaluettelo (el sisälly toimltukseen)

EY-vakuutus (ei sisälly toimltukseen)

Huolto-ohje

Vika, syy, toimenpide

Epätasainen paisto

1.

Palstlnpannu el ole vaakasuorassa.

• Noudata asennusohjeessa kalllstuksen säädöstä

annettuja ohjeita.

pane se talteen.

7. Eristeen alia on purlstuslevyt, joiden tehtävänä on pl-

tää lämpöelementlt paikallaan.

Irrota sähköjohdot, jotka tulevat puristuslevyn relästä

kytkentäraslan kohdalta. Huom Säästä steatlittihel-

met uusille lämpöelementeille. Nosta pois ja kaavi puh-

taaksl pu ristuslevy (purlstuslevyt).

8. Puristuslevyn alia on keraaminen kuitulevy, jota ei vol

käyttää uudelleen. Puhdista palstlnpannu puhtaaksl

kuitulevystä ja hävitä levy. Toimlttajalta on tllattava

lämpöelementtejä tilattaessa myös uusi eristelevy.

9. Nosta lämpöelementlt pois. Huom Lämpöelemen ttl-

en päähän sljoitetut klillealuslevyt on käytettävä uu

delleen. Puhdista lämpöelementtien urat.

10. Tarkasta, että lämpöelementin jännite on oikea.

Lämpöelementlt asennetaan sijoituskaavion mukaise-

sti. Jolssakin tapauksissa on lämpöelementtejä sää-

dettävä noin +/- kolmella helmellä.

Jos klerukka on liian pitkä, murskataan soplva määrä

helmlä.

Klerukka joustaa silloin

taaksepäln

omasta voi-

mastaan ja lyhenee.

Jos klerukka on liian lyhyt, irrotetaan päätysteatiitti ja

llsätään helmlä vanhasta lämpöelementistä.

Huom Älä unohda klillealuslevyjä.

Lämpöelementin hampaat varustetaan talteen otetu-

lllahelmllläjasov itetaan klinnityspultteihin. Huom Su-

orlta kiristys klinnityspultteihin huolelllsesti.

11.

Takaisinasennus suorltetaan päinvastaisessa jär-



2.

Kilnnipalaneet ruoantähteet

• Katso käyttöohjeen kohta: Puhdistus.

Epätasainen tai heikko lämpö

1.

Vlalliset sulakkeet

2. Vlalliset sähköjohdot

3 Lämpöelementtl el tolml

• Tarkasta, että purlstuslevyt palnuvat lämpöelement-

tejä vasten ja ettelvät ruuvlt ole Irronneet.

4.

Termostaatti ei toimi

• Noudata huolto-ohjelden kohdassa "Lämpöelemen-

tin valhto" annettuja ohjeita.

Huolto-ohjeet

Lämpöelementin vaihto

Ennen lämpöelementin valhtamista ja tilaamlsta lue koh

ta 8.

jestyksessä.

Huom Älä kiristä puristuslevyjä liian tlukalle. Muussa

tapauksessa elementtihelmet saattavat rikkoontua.

Termostaatin vaihto

• Varmista, että palstlnpannu on kytketty tolminnasta.

• Katkaise paistlnpannun tehonsyöttö- ja ohjausvlrta.

• Irrota termostaa ttiväännln ja takana oleva etulevy.

Kierrä termostaatti Irtl. Irrota sähköjohdot ja vedä ter-

mostaattia esiin vain muutaman termostaattikuvun

pituuden

verran.

Katkaise tunnistinlangat m ahdollisim

man läheltä termostaattikoteloa. Kääri, silmukoi ja

teippaa kiinni tunnistinlangat kunnolla uuden termo

staattikuvun ympärille nun, että tunnistinlankoja vol

daan käyttää vetämiseen.

• KIppaa palstlnpannu ääriasentoonsa. Irrota luukku

paistlnpannun pohjalevystä

ja pieni

eristepala nun, että

termostaattikupu tulee näkyviin. Irrota kupu ja vedä

uusi varovasti esiin.

®

Tekniske spesifikasjoner

Modeli

Stekyta (mm)

Stekpannans djup (mm)

Maks. fasestrøm (A)

Effekt (kW)

Vekt (kg)

nikoplingsspenning 1680320801 (V, Hz)

nikoplingsspenning 1680320501 (V, Hz)

Beskyttelsesklasse

168032

500x450

60

10

5,5

165

400 3-50

440 3-60

IPX4

168033

700x560

90

16

10,0

180

168034

1000x560

90

25

14,0

200

168035

700x560

180

16

10,0

190

Generelle anvisninger

Hvis forskriftene i dette og utstyrets øvrige doku-

mentasjon

ikke følges, kan

sikkerheten settes

på

spill

og leverandørens garanti- og produktansvar opp-

høre.

Før montering

Rengjør støperammen for betongrester. Rens

de

fire

skru-

ehullene med en MIO gjengetapp.

Montering

Ta av emballasjen.



• Les nøye forskriftene i dette dokumentet, eftersom

det inneholder viktige sikkerhetsopplysninger ved

rørende installasjon, driftssikkerhet, bruk og vedlike-

hold av produktet. Oppbevar dokumentet slik at det

er tilgjengelig for alle brukere.

• Installasjon og testkjøring må foretas av en tekniker

med relevant opplæring og etter fabrikantens anvis

ninger.

Se nedenfor samt Installasjonsanvisning.

• Installasjon av produktet, samt dets tilkoplinger, skal

utføres ifølge gjeldende normer og forskrifter.

• All service, vedlikehold og reparasjon skal utføres av

en tekniker med relevant

opplæring.

Det må kun be

nyttes originaldeler ved utskiftinger. Se Servicean

visning* og Reservedelkatalog*.

• Betjening

og

s tell skal kun utføres av personale (ope

ratør) med opplæring på dette produktet.

• Før utstyret tas i bruk skal operatøren

Det er viktig med god luftsirkulasjon rundt stekebor

det. Sett stekebordet som vist på Fig. 1.

Sett stekebordet plant.

Monter og trekk til festeskruene som er utstyrt med

skiver.

Løsne den beskyttende plasten forsiktig. Evt. limres

ter fjernes med et passende løsningsmiddel.

Stekehellen er ved leveranse antirustbehandlet m ed

antirustolje. Rengjør stekehellen samt øvrige deler og

tilbehør med varmt vann og et nøytralt oppvask/vas-

kemiddel. Skyll godt.

Justering av heiling

• Kontroller at stekebordet står plant.

• Heiling mot sidene justeres med to sekskantskruer.

De er plassert på undersiden av opphengsbjelken som

holder stekeplaten,

på

hver

side

av opphengsbjelkens

feste i søylen.

Både effekt-

og

merkestrøm

skal

sikres. Sikringen skal

ha høy nok m erkestrøm til å levere nødvendig kraft til

stekebordet.

Stekebordet bør koples til strømnettet over en flerpo-

let bryter (leverandørens anbefaling), som kan bru-

kes for å bryte strømtilførselen til stekebordets ef

fekt- og styreledninger.

Stekebordet er utstyrt med en ytre ekvipotensial jor-

dingsklemme på baksiden av søylen.

Flammer Steketilsetninger med lavt flammepunkt kan

føre til at det oppstår flammer. Bruk alitid godkjente ste

ketilsetninger.

Hvis det skulle oppstå flammer minimerer man lufttilfør

selen ved å lukke lokket. Hvis dette ikke er tilstrekkelig

slår man av stekebordet og dekker åpningene mellom

hellen, lokket

og

helletuten m ed et brannteppe. Ved sluk-

ningsarbeidet skal det brukes egnede vernehansker med

mansjetter.

NB

Ved brann skal m an ALDRI bruke vann.

Tilbehør

Model

Betegnelse

16 78 00 Støperamme til modell 16 80 32

16 78

01

Støperamme til modell 16 80 33, -34, -35

GGS 460 Gulvgrop til stengulv

GGM 460 Gulvgrop til støpt gulv

GGP 460 Gulvgrop til plastmatte

Bruksanvisning

Bruksområde

Stekebordet er beregnet på bruk til matlaging i alle typer

storkjøkken. Andre bruksområder enn matlaging er ikke

tillatt. S tekebordet skal ikke brukes til frityrsteking.

Produktbeskrivelse

Tekniske data

Et dataskilt

med

tekniske detaljer

om

stekebordet er plas

sert nederst til venstre på søylen (Fig. 3).

Hvis utstyret ikke er i bruk

Hvis utstyret ikke skal brukes på lengre tid må følgende

instrukser fø lges:

• Bryt effekt- og styrestrømtilførselen til stekebordet

gjennom hovedstrømbryteren eller i anleggets sen-

tral.

• Rengjør stekebordet og alt tilbehør.

• La lokket stå åpent slik at luft kan sirkulere fritt og

dermed hindre utviklingen av mugg og vond lukt.

Innsteking

Stek inn stekebordet. Bruk et tynt lag matolje.



stekebordet har en jevn temperatur over hele stekeflaten

og stor kapasitet, den er arbeidsbesparende, økonomisk

og kan tippes.

Stekebordet erfremstilt av førsteklasses støpejem. Steke

bordet utside, søyle samt lokk er fremstilt av slipte, rust

frie piater. Stekebordet er omsorgsfullt varmeisolert. Lok

ket kan feiles opp og er godt ba lansert.

Stekebordet reguleres ved hjelp av en kombinert bryter

og termostat i kombinasjpn med en kontaktor. Kontakt-

oren er plassert i søylen.

En signallampe lyser når strømmen er

på.

Med termosta

ten reguleres varmen på stekeflaten trinnløst fra 100 °C

opptil 300 °C.

Foran stekebordet bør det plasseres gulvgrop med rist.

Dybden skal være minst 150

mm

for

å

eliminere faren for

sprut eller overflom ved en rask tømming av stekebordet.

Bruk (Fig. 2)

• Sett termostatbryteren (1) på ønsket innstilling. Sig

nallampen (2) fennes.

• Prøv med en liten mengde stekefett om stekebordet

har riktig temperatur. Ved behov justeres termostatinn-

stillingen.

Påse at stekeflaten alltid er

plan.

• Stekebordet er klart til bruk.

• Skrap av stekebordet under steking ved behov, f.eks,

før ny påfylling.

• Ved avsluttet steking stilles termostatbryteren (1) på

0. Signallampen (2) slukkes.

Beredskapsvarme (Fig. 2)

La termostatbryteren (1) stå på innstilling 5. Stekebordet

kommer da raskt opp i riktig temperatur når det skal

bru

kes.

Hvis kjøkkenet har mer enn ett stekebord til disposisjon

bør disse fordeles på kjøtt og fisk for å unngå arbeidskre-

vende og unødvendig rengjøring. Hvis man bare har et

bord må man foreta en grundig rengjøring m ellom disse

matsortene, ellers kan de ta smak av hverandre.

Øvrige dokumenter:

Reservedelliste (følger ikke med)

EF-forsikring (følger ikke med)

Serviceanvisning

Feil,

årsal(er, utbedring

Ujevn staking

1.

Stekebordet er ikke plant.

• Følg instruksjonene under «Justering av helling» i

installasjonsanvisningen.

2. Fastbrente matrester

• Se under Rengjøring

Ujevn eller svak varme

1.

Defekte sikringer

2. Defekte strømledninger

3. Elementet fungerer ikke

• Kontroller at pressplatene ligger mot elementet og

at skruene ikke har løsnet.

8. Under pressplaten ligger det en kjeramisk fiberplate

som ikke kan brukes på nytt. Rens stekeplaten for

denne og kast den. Ny isolasjonsplate bør bestilles

fra leverandørens reservelager samtidig med

elemen

tet.

9. Løft av elementet. NB Glimmerskivene som er plas-

sert ved avslutningen av elementet skal brukes på

nytt. Børst elementsporene rene.

10. Kontroller at spenningen på det nye elementet stem

mer overens med strømnettet. Elementet monteres

som vist på ileggingsskjemaet. I visse fall må man

justere elementet med (pluss minus) ca. tre perler.

Hvis spiralen er for lang slår man i stykker passe an

tal perler. Spiralen trekker

seg da

tilbake

av egen

kraft

og blir kortere.

Hvis spiralen er for kort, løsner man endesteatitten

og kompletterer med perler fra det gamle elemen tet.

NB Ikke glem glimmersklvene.

Elementendene utstyres med perlene som er til overs

og justeres etter koplingsboltene. NB Vær nøye ved

tiltrekkingen av koplingsboltene.

11.

Montering utføres i omvendt rekkefølge.

NB Ikke trekk til pressplatene for kraftig. Element-

perlene kan sprekke.

Bytte av termostat

• Påse at stekebordet er slått av.

• Bryt effekt- og styreledningene til stekebordet.

•

Løsne

termostatbryteren

og

frontplaten bak

den.

Skru



• Følg serviceinstruksjonene under «Bytte element»

4. Termostaten fungerer ikke

•

Følg

serviceinstruksjonene under «Bytte element»

Servicelnstruksjoner

Bytte element

Ved bytte og bestilling av element, les først punkt 8.

1.

Påse at stekebordet er slått av.

2.

Bryt effekt- og styreledningen til stekebordet.

3. Løsne effekt- og styrekablene som går mellom søy-

lens koplingsboks og stekebordets koplingsboks, fra

kontaktoren og kontakten. T ipp bordet. Løsne spirals

langen i bjelken og trekk ut de allerede løsnede ef

fekt- og styreledningene. Sett bordet tilbake i arbeids-

stilling.

4. Ta bort stekebordslokket og konsollen.

løs termostaten. Ta bort strømledningene og trekk

termostaten noen følerlengder frem. Klipp av føler

ledningen så nær termostathuset som mulig. Føler

tråden skal så vikles, tres inn i og teipes godt fast

rundt føleren på den nye termostaten slik at man kan

trekke i følertråden.

• Tipp stekeplaten maksimalt. Løsne luken i stekebor

dets bunnplate og den lille isolasjonsbiteh, slik at ter

mostatføleren blir synlig. Løsne føleren og trekk for

siktig frem den nye.

• Montering utføres i omvendt rekkefølge.

Generelt

Vær nøye med å sette låseskivene tilbake på riktig plass,

eller bytt dem ut med

nye.

Noen muttere kan ha blitt brent

og nedslitt. Bytt ut disse med nye. Det er også viktig at

alle deler rengjøres godt for fastbrent fett. Der det har

DK

Tekniske specifikationer

Model

Stegeflade (mm)

Stegepandens dybde (mm)

Max. fasestrøm (A)

Effekt (kW)

Vægt (kg)

Tllslutningsspænding 1680320801 (V, Hz) 400 3-50

Tlislutningsspænding 1680320501 (V, Hz) 440 3-60

Kapslingsgrad IPX4

168032

500x450

60

10

5,5

165

168033

700x560

90

16

10,0

180

168034

1000x560

90

25

14,0

200

168035

700x560

180

16

10,0

190

Generelle anvisninger

Hvis forskrifter

i

dette

og

udstyrets øvrige dokumen

ter ikke følges , kan dets sikkerhed sættes over styr

og leverandørens garanti-

og

produktansvar ophører.

• Læs forskrifterne

I

dette dokument omhyggeligt igen

Opstilling

Fjern em ballagen.

En god luftcirkulation er vigtig omkring stegebordet.

Anbring stegebordet som vist i fig . 1.

Anbring stegebordet plant.

Montér

og

spænd fastgørelsesskruerne, der er forsynet med spæ ndeskiver.



da det indeholder vigtige sikkerhedsoplysninger med

hensyn til installationens driftssikkerhed, brug og

vedligeholdelse af produktet. Opbevar vejledningen

således, at den er tilgængelig for alle brugere.

Installation og test skal udføres af specialuddannet-

tekniker og i henhold til producentens instruktioner.

Se nedenfor samt installationsanvisningen.

Installation af produktet skal udføres i henhold til

gældende normer og forskrifter.

Al service, vedligeholdelse samt reparation skal ud

føres af en specialuddannet tekniker.

Kun originalreservedele må benyttes ved udskiftning.

Se Serviceanvisning* og Reservedelskatalog*.

Håndtering og pleje må kun udføres af specialuddan

net personale (operatør).

Inden udstyret tages i brug, skal operatøren

- skaffe sig gode kundskaber i håndtering og pleje.

Fjern forsigtigt beskyttelsesplasten. Eventuelle limres

ter fjernes med et egnet opløsningsmiddel.

Stegepanden

er ved

levering rustbehandlet

med

rust

beskyttelsesol

ie.

Rengør panden samt

de

øvrige dele

og tilbehør med varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske-/

rengøringsmiddel. Skyl derefter alle dele grundigt af.

Justering af hældning

• Kontrollér, at stegebordet står plant.

• Hældning til siden justeres med to insexskruer. Disse

er placeret under ophængningsbjælken, der holder

stegepanden, på hver side af ophængningsbjælkens

fastgørelse i søjlen.

• Hældning fremad eller tilbage justeres som følger:

Fjern venstre sideplade. Stegebordets vandrette po

sition reguleres med stilleskruen ved ophængnings-

bjælken.

• stegebordet bør tilsluttes elnettet via en flerpolet af

bryder (leverandørens anbefaling), hvormed strøm

tilførslen til stegebordets effekt- og styreledning kan

afbrydes.

• Stegebordet er udstyret med en ydre ækvipotential

jordklemme, der er placeret på bagsiden af søjlen.

Tilbehør

Model Benævnelse

16 78 00 Indstøbningsramme til model 16 80 32

16 78 01 Indstøbningsramme til model 16 80 33, -34,

-35

GGS 460 Gulvbrønd til stengulv

GGM 460 Gulvbrønd til støbt gulv

GGP 460 Gulvbrønd til plasttæppe

Brugsanvisning

Anvendelsesområde

Stegebordet er beregnet til brug ved madlavning i storkøk

kener af enfiver art. Andet anvendelsesområde er ikke

tilladt. Stegebordet må ikke anvendes som friturekar.

Produktbeskrivelse

Stegebordet har en jævn stegetemperatur over hele ste

gefladen, stor kapacitet, god økonomi, er arbejdsbespa-

rende og kan vippes. Stegepanden er fremstillet af

før

lukke låget. Er dette ikke tilstrækkeligt, slukker man for

stegebordet og dækker sprækkerne mellem grill, låg og

rør med brandfilt. Ved dette slukningsarbejde skal der

anvendes beskyttelseshandsker med håndledskrave.

OBS

Brug aldrig vand i tilfælde af brand.

Tekniske data

En dataplade med stegebordets tekniske oplysninger er

placeret på søjlens nederste venstre del (fig. 3 ).

Hvis udstyret ikke er i brug

Hvis udstyret ikke skal anvendes i længere tid, skal føl

gende instrukser følges:

• Afbryd effekt- og styrestrømm en til stegebordet på

hovedafbryderen eller

i

anlæggets central.

• Rengør stegebordet og alt tilbehør.

• Lad låget stå åbent, så luften kan cirkulere i rummet

og dermed forhindre dannelse af mug og dårlig lugt.

Før brug

Stegebordet skal steges

til.

Brug et tyndt lag madolie til

dette formål.

Anvendelse (fig. 2)

• Sæt termostatknappen (1) på den ønskede tempera

tur. Signallampen (2) tændes.

• Prøv med en lille mængde stegefedt, at stegebordet

har den rette temperatur. Drej på termostatknappen

efter behov. Sørg for at stegefladen er vandret.



steklasses støbejern. Stegebordets udvendige sider, søj

ler samt låg er fremstillet af slebet rustfri plade. Stege

bordet er omhyggeligt varmeisoleret. Låget kan vippes

op og er godt afbalanceret. Reguleringsudstyret består af

en kombineret afbryder og termostat i kombination med

en kontaktor. Kontaktoren er placeret i søjlen. En signal

lampe viser, når stegebordet tilføres strøm. Med termo

staten reguleres

varmen på

stegefladen trinløst

fra

100°C

op til 300°C.

Foran stegebordet kan der placeres et gulvafløb med rist.

Dybde mindst 150 mm for så vidt muligt at eliminere

risi

koen for stænk og overskylning ved en for hurtig tømning

af stegebordet. Gulvrist med ramme eller gulvafløb kom

plet med ramme, beregnet til indstøbning i gulvet, kan

leveres efter sæ rlig o rdre. R isten er specielt udformet til

at være skridsikker.

• Stegebordet er klar til brug.

• Skrab stegebordet af efter behov under stegningen,

f.eks, før ny påfyldning.

• Efter afslutettet stegning skal termostatknappen (1)

sættes på 0. Signallampen (2) slukker.

Beredskabsvarme (fig. 2)

Lad termostatknappen (1) stå på 5. Stegebordet kan så

hurtigt opvarmes yderligere, når det skal bruges.

R e ngør ing

Udstyret skal være slukket og kølet af, når det rengøres.

Brug varmt vand og et neutralt opvaske/rengøringsmid

del.

B rug ikke ståluld eller rengøringsartikler med slibe

midler ved rengøring af rustfrie overflader. Hvis der er

brugt rengøringsmidler indeholdende klor (f.eks, klorin),

øvrige dokumenter:

Reservedelsliste (medleveres ikke)

EU-forsikring (medleveres ikke)

Serviceanvisning

Fejl, årsager, udbedring

Ujævn stegning

1.

Stegebordet står ikke plant.

• Følg instruktionerne for justering af hældning i in-

stallationsanvisningen.

2. Fastbrændte madrester.

• Se Brugsanvisning: Rengøring.

Ujævn eller svag varme

1.

Defekte sikringer.

2.

Defekte elledninger.

3. Elementet fungerer ikke.

• Kontrollér, at pressepladerne ligger tæt mod ele

mentet, og at skruerne ikke sidder løs.

• Følg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af ele

ment.

Termostaten fungerer ikke.

• Følg serviceinstruktionerne for udskiftning af ele

ment.

4.

9. Løft elementerne af. OBS Glimmerbrikkerne, der er

placeret for enden af elementet, skal bruges

igen.

Børst elementrillerne rene.

10.

Kontrollér, at der tilføres den rette elementspæ nding.

Elementerne monteres ifølge ilægningsskemaet. I

nogle tilfælde er det nødvendigt at justere med ca.

plus/minus 3

perler.

Er spiralen for

lang,

knuser man et passende antal

perler. Spiralen fjedrer så tilbage af egen kraft og

bliver kortere.

Er spiralen for kort, løsner man endesteatitten og

supplerer med perler fra de gamle elementer.

OBS Glem ikke glimmerbrikkerne.

Elementenderne forsynes med de gemte perler og

tilpasses koblingsboltene.

OBS

Vær omhyggelig ved

fastspænding af koblingsboltene.

11.

Delene monteres igen i omvendt rækkefølge.

OBS Spænd ikke pressepladerne for hårdt, da dette

kan få elementperlerne til at revne.

Udsl(iftning af termostat

• Sørg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.

• Afbryd effekt- og styreledningen til stegebordet

• Løsn termostatknappen og den bagved liggende front

plade. Skru termostaten løs. Fjern elledningerne og

træk termostaten en smule frem - kun en kuglelæng

de.

Klip følertråden af så tæt på termostathuset som

muligt. Vikl følertråden om, sæt den i og tape den

godt fast om den nye termostats kugle, så følertrå

den kan anvendes som træktråd.



Serviceinstruktioner

Udskiftning af element

Ved udskiftning og bestilling af element, læs først pkt. 8.

1.

Sørg for at der er slukket for stegebordet.

2. Afbryd effekt- og styreledningen til stegebordet.

3. Løsn effekt- og styrekablerne, der går mellem

søj

lens koblingsdåse og stegebordets koblingsdåse, fra

kontaktoren og klemrækken. V ip bordet. Løsn sp irals

langen i bjælken og træk de allerede løsnede effekt-

og styrekabler ud. Vip bordet tilbage i arbejdsstilling.

4. Fjern stegebordets låg og konsollen.

5. Løsn sidepladerne og de fire skruer på hver side af

søjlen ved ophængningsbjælken. Panden kan nu

løf

tes af

søjlen.

OBS Der skal være 2 personer om det

te løft. Læg panden på et underlag, så grebet kan

bevæge sig frit over gulvet, så hverken gulv eller

pan

• Vip stegepanden så meget som muligt. Løsn lågen i

stegebordets bundplade og det lille isoleringsstykke,

så termostatkuglen bliver

synlig.

Løsn kuglen og træk

forsigtigt den nye frem.

• Montér delene igen i omvendt rækkefølge.

Generelt

Sørg for at sætte låseskiverne tilbage på deres rigtige

pladser eller udskift dem med nye. Nogle møtrikker kan

være blevet brændt og dermed slidt ned. Udskift disse

med nye. Det er også vigtigt at rengøre alle dele om hyg

geligt for fastbrændt fedt. Der hvor der har siddet popnit

ter, kan man sæ tte skruer for at gøre senere indgreb let

tere.

GB]

Technical specifications

Model

Frying area (mm)

Depth of frying pan (mm)

Max. phase load (A)

Output (kW)

Weight (kg)

Supply voltage 1680320801 (V, Hz)

Supply voltage 1680320501 (V, Hz)

Enclosure class

168032

500x450

60

10

5,5

165

400 3-50

440 3-60

IPX4

168033

700x560

90

16

10,0

180

168034

1000x560

90

25

14,0

200

168035

700x560

180

16

10,0

190

General instructions

If the instructions in this and the equipment's other

documents are not followed, its safety could be jeo

pardised, and the supplier's guarantee and product

responsibility will become invalid.

• Read the instructions in this document carefully, as it

Before placement

Remove any concrete

remains from the

frame

in

the floor.

Clean the four screw holes with an MIO screw tap.

Placement

• Remove the packaging.

•

Good

air circulation around the table is important. Pla

ce the table according to

fig.

1.



contains important safety information concerning in

stallation, operational safety, usage and maintenan

ce. Keep it in a place which is accessible to all users.

• Installation and test running must be carried out by a

qualified technician and according to the

manufacturer's instructions. See below as well as in

stallation instructions.

• Installation and connection of the product must be

carried out according to applicable standards and di

rectives.

• All servicing, maintenance and repairs must be car

ried out by qualified technicians. Only original spare

parts may be used. See Servicing Instructions* and

Spare Parts Catalogue*.

• Maintenance and operation may only be carried out

by personnel specially trained for this purpose (ope

rator).

• Make sure the table is perfectly level.

• Fit and tighten the retaining screws with washers.

• Remove the protective plastic carefully. Any traces of

adhesive can be removed using a suitable solvent.

• The cooking surface is protected by anti-corrosive oil.

Clean the surface, the other parts of the unit and ac

cessories using warm water and a neutral detergent.

Rinse thoroughly.

Adjusting the tilt

• Check that the frying table is level.

• Sideways tilt can be adjusted by means of the two

hexagonal screws. These

are

located underneath the

suspension beam which holds the frying pan, on each

side of where the suspension beam is fixed to the

column.

• Fonward or backward tilt can be adjusted as follows:

ve earth.

• Both the power supply and the operating current must

be

fused.

The fuse must have sufficient rated current

to be able to supply the frying table with the necessa

ry power.

• The frying table should be connected to the mains via

a multi-pole safety switch (manufacturer's recommen

dation) which can be used to switch off the electrical

supply to the table.

•

The table is

equipped

with an

outer

equipotential

earth

terminal connection located on the back of the co

lumn.

Accessories

Model Designation

16 78 00 Frame for cementing into the floor. F its mo

del 16 80 32

16 78 01 Frame for cementing into the floor. Fits mo

del 168033, 34, 35

GGS 460 Drain for stone floors

GGM 460 Drain for compound floors

GGP 460 Drain for plastic carpeted floors

Instructions for use

Areas of application

The frying table is intended for food preparation in all ty

High

temperatures The cooking surface of

the

table can

be regulated by means of the thermostat from 100°C up

to 300°C. A spatula must be used when handling food

being cooked at these high temperatures.

Fire

Flavouring ingredients with a low flash-point could

catch fire. Always use approved flavouring ingredients.

If the food does catch

fire,

minimise the oxygen supply by

closing the cover. If this does not extinguish the

fire,

switch

off the frying table and cover the openings between thecooking surface, the cover and the pipe with a fireproof

blanket. Protective gloves

which

cover

the

wrists must be

worn during fire-fighting operations.

N.B. In the above situation: Never use water

Technical data

A rating plate stating the frying table's technical details is

located on the lower left-hand section of the column (fig.

3).

If the equipment is not being used

If the equipment will not be used for a long period of time,

the following instructions must be followed:

• Disconnect the frying table's power supply and ope

rating current by means of the main circuit breaker or

the main distribution box.

• Clean the frying table and all accessories.

• Leave the cover open so that air can circulate, thus

preventing mould and unpleasant smells from deve

loping.



pes of catering kitchens. Use of the table for any other

purpose than food preparation is not permitted. The fry

ing table may not be used as a deep fat fryer.

Product description

The frying table has an even frying temperature over the

entire cooking surface, large capacity, is labour-saving,

economical and can be tilted.

The frying pan is made from top quality cast iron. The

outer sides, column and cover are made from polished

stainless

steel.

The frying table is thoroughly heat insula

ted.

The cover can be lifted up, and is well-balanced.

The controls consist of a combined switch and thermo

stat in combination with a relay, which is located on the

column.

A pilot light indicates when the power is switched on. The

Before use

Before using the frying table, it must be seasoned with a

thin layer of cooking oil.

Use (fig. 2)

• Set the thermostat (1) to the required temperature.

The pilot light (2) w ill light up.

• Check if the correct temperature has been reached

by adding a small amount of fat to the frying pan. If

necessary, alter the thermostat setting. l\/lake certain

that the surface of the pan is horizontal.

• The frying table is ready to use.

• If necessary, scrape the frying surface while frying

e.g.

before adding a new batch of food.

• Twist the thermostat knob (1) to 0 when frying has

severe cases, a steel spatula.

N.B. Water may not be directed towards the control

panel or its vicinity. Water coming into contact with

live

parts carries a

direct safety risk. Never

allow water

to come into contact with the hot cooking surface.

This could lead to cracking, and consequent short

circuiting.

If there is more than one frying table on the premises,

these should be used for frying meat and fish respective

ly, in order to avoid time-consuming cleaning routines. If

there is only one frying table, it must be thoroughly clea

ned between cooking these different types of

food,

or the

tastes could be transferred to one another.

Other documentation

Spare parts list (not supplied)

EU-assurance (not supplied)

Directions for servicing

Problem, cause, what to do

Uneven frying

1. The frying table is not level.

• Follow the instructions for "Adjusting the tilt" in the

installation instructions.

2. Burnt-on remains of food

the pan on a raised base so that

the

knob is well clear

of the floor, and neither the floor nor the pan will be

damaged. By twisting the knob, the suspension beam

can now be placed in a position where it is least in the

way.

6. Remove the bottom

panel.

The hatch in the panel must

be left in place. Carefully remove the insulation lying

on the bottom panel, and save it.

7. The presser plates are located under the insulation.

These are for holding the elements in place. Discon

nect the electrical cables protruding from the holes in

the presser plates, next to the distribution box. N.B.

Save the steatite beads for the new elements. Rem

ove and scrape the presser plate/s clean.

8. Under

the

presser plates, there is a ceramic fibre pla

te which cannot be reused. Remove it from the frying

pan and discard it. A new insulation plate should be

ordered from the suppliers' spare parts division at the

same time as the elements.

9. Remove the elements. N.B. The mica discs located

at the end of the elements are to be reused. Clean

the element recesses with a brush.

10. Check that the voltage for the elements is correct.

The elements are to be installed according to the in

stallation plan. In certain cases the elements could

need adjusting by approximately three beads. If the

spiral is too

long,

break off the appropriate number of

beads. The spiral will then automatically spring back

and become shorter. If the spiral is too short, loosen

the end steatite beads and complement with beads



• See instructions for

use:

Cleaning

Variable or weak heat

1. Defective fuses.

2. Defective electrical connections.

3. The heating elements are not working.

• Check that the presser plates are properly pressed

against the elements, and that the screws are not

loose.

• Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the

ele

ment".

4. The thermostat is not functioning.

• Follow the servicing instructions, "Replacing the

ele-

menf.

Servicing instructions

from the old element. N.B. Do not forget the mica

discs.

Fit the beads saved to the ends of the elements

and adjust to the coupling bolts.

N.B. Be careful when tightening the coupling bolts.

11. Reverse the procedure to reassemble.

N.B. Do not tighten the presser plates top much, as

the element beads cou ld break.

Replacing the thermostat

• Make sure that the frying table is switched off.

• Disconnect the power and operating cables.

• Remove the thermostat knob and the front panel be

hind it. Unscrew the thermostat. Remove the electri

cal cables and pull the thermostat forward by just one

bulb length. Cut off the sensor wire as near to the

thermostat housing as possible.

Bind,

loop and tape

H]

E le ctrolu x Reservdelskatalog

Spare Parts Catalogue

Ersatzteilliste



FP50T, FP70T, FP100T. FP70TD

168032XXXX, 168033XXXX, 168034xxxx, 168035xxxx

168032xxxxS, 168033xxxxS, 168034xxxxS, 168035xxxxS

2M

-117

, 1 0 1

102

- 1 0 3

-104



Stekbord modeil 168032

Illustration 20210

Utgåva Månad År

Edition Month Year

Ausgabe Monat Jahr

3 01 01

Pos.

Antal

Quantity

Anzahl

Art.nr

Art. no

Art. Nr

Benämning

Description

Bezeichnung

Anm.

Notes

Anin.

1 0 1

1 0 2

1 0 3

1 0 4

1 0 5

1 0 6

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

520

41

46-00

520

41

65-00

467 76 54-00

461

45

61-70

520 39 76-00

767 51 12 -09

767 51 11

-09

467 89 02-00

467 88 74-00

467 88 72-00

467 88 73-00

467 89 82-00

467 90 16-02

467 89 03-00

461

44

41-02

520 53 40-00

552 22

21-03

520 49 74-00

Kolviager

Gasfjäder

Axel

Konsol

Anslutnings plint

Kontaktor

Kontaktor

Axel

Draglänk

Axel

Lagring

Hylsa

Ratt

Lagerfäste

Lager

Transformator

Automatsäkring

Lockläsning

Piston bearing

Gas spring

Shaft

Bracket

Ternninal block

Contactor

Contactor

Shaft

Brake rod

Shaft

Bearing

Sleeve

Knob

Bearing holder

Bearing

Transformer

Automatic fuse

Lock for lid

Kolbenlagerung

Gasfeder

Achse

Konsole

Klemmleiste

Kontaktor

Kontaktor

Achse

Zuggelenk

Achse

Lagerung

Hülse

Drehkopf

Lagerbefestigung

Lager

Transformator

Automatsicherung

Marin Schnappschloss

1).

1 ) .

1 ) .

2).





Stekbord modell 168032

Illustration 20211

Utgåva Månad År

Edition Month Year

Ausgabe Monat Jahr

3 01 01

Pos,

Antal

Quantity

Anzahl

Art.nr

Art. no

Art. Nr

Benämning Description

Bezeichnung

Anm.

Notes

Anm.

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

12

2

467 89 98-00

461 45 67-01

477 64 70-00

477 64 96-00

476 09 69-23

476 09 69-25

464 29

61-13

462 41 72-01

467 80 41-00

463 92

69-01

477 64 20-00

467 89 97-00

Look

Axel

Isoierpiatta

Isoierplatta

Element

Element

Vred

Giimlampa

Termostat

Glimmer

Klämma

Handtag

Lid

Shaft

insulation

insulation

Heating element

Heating element

Knob

Glowing lamp

Thermostat

Glimmer

Clamp

Handle

Decl<el

Achse

Isoiierplatte

Isoiierplatte

Heizl<örper

Heizkörper

Drehknopf

Glimmlampe

Thermostat

Glimmer

Klammer

Handgriff





stekbord modell 168033, -34, -35

Illustration 20212

Utgåva Månad År

Edition Montti Year

Ausgabe Monat Jahr

3 01 01

Pos.

Antal

Quantity

Anzahl

Art.nr

Art. no

Art. Nr

Benämning

Description

Bezeichnung

Anm.

Notes

Anm.

[

1 0 1

1 0 2

1 0 3

1 0 4

1 0 5

1 0 6

1 0 7

1 0 8

1 0 9

1 1 0

1 1 1

1 1 2

1 1 3

1 1 4

1 1 5

1 1 6

117

1

1

1

1

1

1

2 2

1 1

2 2 2

467 76 52-00

467 76 51-01

477 77 09-02

477 77 09-00

477 77 09-03

477 77 09-01

467 76 54-00

461 42 68-70

520 39 76-00

767 51

12-09

767 51

11-09

467 89 02-00

467 88 74 01

467 88 74-03

467 88

72-01

467 89 03-00

467 88 73-00

467 89 82-00

467 90 16-02

461 41 62-02

520 53 40-00

5 5 2 2 2 2 1 - 0 3

1 6 8 0 3 3

1 6 8 0 3 4

1 6 8 0 3 5

Koivlager

Gasfjäder

Konsol

Konsol

Konsol

Konsol

Axel

Anslutnings plint

Anslutnings plint

Kontaktor

Kontaktor

Axel

Draglänk

Draglänk

Axel

Faste

Lagring

Hylsa

Ratt

Lager

Transformator

Automatsäkring

Piston bearing

Gas spring

Bracket

Bracket

Bracket

Bracket

Shaft

Terminal block

Terminal block

Contactor

Contactor

Shaft

Brake rod

Brake rod

Shaft

Attachement

Bearing

Sleeve

Knob

Bearing

Transformer

Automatic fuse

Kolbenlagerung

Gasfeder

Konsole

Konsole

Konsole

Konsole

Achse

Klemmleiste

Klemmleiste

Kontaktor

Kontaktor

Achse

Zuggelenk

Zuggelenk

Achse

Befestigung

Lagerung

Hülse

Drehknopf

Lager

Transformator

Automatsicherung



1).



Stekbord modell

168033, -34, -35

Illustration 20213

Utgåva Månad År

Edition Month Year

Ausgabe Monat Jahr

3 01 01

Pos.

Antal

Quantity

Anzahl

Art.nr

Art. no

Art. Nr

Benämning

Description Bezeichnung

Anm.

Notes

Anm.

1 0 1

1 0 2

1 0 3

1 0 4

105

106

107

108

1 0 9

1 1 0

1 1 1

1 1 2

113

114115

[

1 1

1 1

1 1

1 -

2 2 2

2 2 2

1 - 1

- 1 -

2 2 2

24 24 24

1 1 1

461 46 36-71

461 44 20-71

461 45 95-01

461 45 84-01

477 80 93-00

461 45 98-01

461 46 84-01

477 64 68-00

477 64 69-00

477 64 20-00

467 80 41-00

464 29 61-13

462 4 1 72-01

476 09 69-15

476 09 69-19

476 09 69-17

476 09 69-21

467 76 14-00

477 64 77-00

463 92 69-01

467 89 97-00

1 6 8 0 3 3

16 80 34

1 6 8 0 3 5

Locl<

Locl<

Lager

Axel

Distans

Lagring

Gasfjäder

I s o l e r p l a t t a

I s o l e r p l a t t a

Klämma

Termostat

Vred

Glinnlampa

Element

Element

Element

Element

Isolerplatta

Isolerplatta

GlimmerHandtag

Lid

Lid

Bearing

Shaft

Distance

Bearing

Gas

spring

Insulation

Insulation

Clamp

Thermostat

Knob

Glowing lamp

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

Insulation

Insulation

GlimmerHandle

Deckel

Deckel

Lager

Achse

Distanz

Lagerung

Gasfeder

Isolierplatte

Isolierplatte

Klemme

Thermostat

Drehknopf

Glimmlampe

Heizkörper

Heizkörper

Heizkörper

Heizkörper

Isolierplatte

Isolierplatte

GlimmerHandgriff



Dataskylt

Rat ing p late

Kennsch i ld

Produktnummer

Product number c ;^ ^

Produktnummer

r ' J ' l 1 Model:

k ^ \ J 1 Model;

ISer.No.

1

Max phaseload:

V\öter pressure:

1 Prod Nr.

Tot.

Tot.

KW

X M ^

KW

X M K

1 1

Wiring diagram:

1

1

1

KW 1

KW 1

A 1

1

MADE IN

16803xxxxx(S) = Marin utförande / Marine execution / Marine Ausfüiirung



Notes:

Etschema

Sähkökaavio

Elskjema

16 80 32

Ledningsdiagram

Wiring diagram

^ 13 L2 LI

^_ali

r

®Å

[SE]

A. Kontakter

B. Element

C. Termostat

D. Signallampe

E. Transformator

F. Säkring

©

A. Kontaktori

B. Lämpöelementti

C. Termostaatti

D. Merkkivalo

E. Muuntaja

F. Sulake

A. Kontaktor

B. Element

C. Termostat

D. Signallampe

E. Transformator

F. Sikring



16 80 33

16 80 34

16 80 35

^ G L2 11

A. Kontaktor

B. Varmeelement

C. Termostat

O. Signallampe

E. Transformator

F. Sikring

A. Contactor

B. Heating element

C. Thermostat

D. Signal lamp

E. Transformer

c

=

A

c

=

A

=

A

.

=

A

-

^

^

=

A

.

•

*

^

t

«É

M

å



2

,

—

f

-S

O

,

—

A

m

H Electrolux

Refrigerators,

E R25M /45M /55M /75M

' • • • ^ ^

M odel ER25M - interior

• DOMESTIC

TYPE

REFRIGERATOR

• CFC-FREE REFRIGERATION

SYSTEM AND

INSULATION

• 5, 7, 9 A N D 13 L FREEZER

COM P ART M EN T

• M ANUAL DEFROSTIN G

(ER25M/45M/55M)

• PUSH-B UTTON DEFROST

THERMOSTAT (ER75M)

• ADJUSTABLE IN TE RIOR SHELVES

• LAMINATED WORK TOP



• FOUR M OD E LS- FOUR SIZES

These free standi ng refrigerators are suitable

for all fresh and frozen food prod ucts in all

shipboard installations.

All

models are

sup

plied with deck bearer fittings and door

catches.

Th e refrigerators have white enamelled h ous

ing and the top is provided with a laminated

table top giving an extra working space.

Interior is equ ipped w ith storage shelves and

egg tr ay. M odels E R45M , ER55M and

E R75M are also equip ped with salad drawer

and internal light.

RE F RIG E RA TO RS E R2 5M , E R4 5M , E R5 5M , E R7 5M

Scale

1:20

Dimensions mm

R

1. Rear deck bearer

2.

Front deck bearer

3.

Elear ic cord



Specification - dimensions

M o d e l /Ty pe

E R 2 5 M

E R 4 5 M

E R 5 5 M

E R 7 5 M

D ime n sio n e r mm

W

5 0 0

5 3 0

D

5 1 5

5 9 0

6 3 0

H

636

8 5 0

1 2 3 0

A

457

533.5

E

135

1 5 0

I N S T A L L A T I O N

Electrical

T h e u n i t is delivered with al .S mlo ng ear thed 3-wire cord

provided with

an

European (Schuko) plug.

General

T h i s is a dom estic type refrigerator.

In

many cases the unit

can be left freestanding

and

be secured from moving ace.

to

the

i n s t r u a i o n

for

shipboard installation.

Specification

Operation and

IVIaintenance for

Technical Appliances

ER-series



12024 lss .2 Nov'01

CONTENTS

BEFORE STARTING

POSITIONING

INSTALLATION

OPERATION

BEFORE SWITCHING ON

STARTING

CLEANING YOUR APPLIANCE

STORAGE

DOORS

USEFUL HINTS

WALL MOUNTING

OPTIONAL EXTRAS

DATA LOGGER

CHART RECORDER

MAINS FAILURE ALARM

SAFETY AND SERVICING

ELECTRIC PLUG WIRING (UK ONLY)

EUROPEAN VARIANTS

SAFETY NOTES

HANDLING

AF ER SALES SERVICE

BEFORE SERVICING

DISPOSAL

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

J\BORATORY REFRIGERATORS

. R202LR502LR902LR1602

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

DEFROSTING

-ABORATORY FREEZERS

SU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1605 ISF15

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

DEFROSTING

-ABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS

SR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55

TEMPERATURE CONTROL

DEFROSTING

.OW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS

.F l 21 LS381 LC200LX200

OPERATION 6

TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LF12 1 LS381 LC200) 6

TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX2 00) 7

DEFROSTING 7

VIARINE REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS

^25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(t)M(E) R75(+)M(E) U25(t)M(E)

ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)

EU25(t)M(E)

FITTING THE DECK BEARERS 8



TEMPERATURE CONTROL 8

DEFROSTING 8

DOOR ORIENTATION 8

BEFORE STARTING STARTING

Please read these instructions thoroughly before operating

your cabinet.

POSITIONING

When unpacking and cleaning is complete allow the cabinet to

stand for 2 hours for the refrigerant to settle. Plug the mains

lead of your appliance into a suitable earthed socket and

switch on.

In order to ensure optimum performance, do not put your

appliance near a source of heat, such as a cooker, boiler or

radiator. Also try to avoid locations where the sun shining

through glass can raise the room tem perature.

A cold location is undesirable as it may cause slow defrosting.

INSTALLATION

It is important to install your appliance w ith a minimum 50mm

clearance at the sides and the top and 75mm clearance at the

back to allow free circulation of air. A spacer for the

recommended gap at the back is provided with these

instructions and is fitt ed as shown in the diagram. Remove the

electrical plug at the rear of your cabinet from part 'A' and

slide on part 'B'.

~£J

1

|i

When using for the first time, run the appliance for 24 hours

before loading with products to make sure it is operating

correctly.

CLEANING

YOUR

APPLIANCE

Your cabinet is easy to keep clean. Regular cleaning is

important for health reasons.

Exterior:

Use a good wax polish which will clean and polish the cabinet

in one easy application. Do not use an aerosol polish as the

spray may damage plastic parts.

Interior:

Before using for the first time, and after defrosting, the interior

of your appliance should be cleaned. Switch off and unplug

from the mains supply. Remove all the shelves and baskets.

Wipe the inside with a soft cloth dampened with a weak

solution of washing-up liquid, one without a fragrance is

recommended. Rinse with clean warm water and dry

thoroughly. Avoid water getting into any electrical fittings,

switches, lights etc. as this may cause serious electrical

damage.

Do not use detergents to clean the magnetic door seal, this



The above spacer instructions do not apply to the 1602 size of

cabinets and the low tem perature laboratory freezers. The

1602's have an integral spacer fitted while the hinges of the

low temperature laboratory freezers ensure the necessary

spacing.

Stand the appliance on a hard smooth surface (not on carpet)

in order to maintain the necessary ventilation under and

around the cabinet. Your appliance should stand level or w ith a

slight tilt backwards. If it tilts forwards it could stop the door

closing and sealing properly. On front opening cabinets there is

one (or on larger models two) adjustable feet underneath the

front corners which you can adjust until your appliance stands

may be cleaned using warm soapy water and then dried

thoroughly.

Do not use wire woo l, scouring powders or disinfectants of any

kind.

STORAGE

A wide variety of products can be stored but you must take

care to store them correctly. Air has to circulate freely around

the interior of the cabinet, so shelves must not be covered with

paper. Wherever possible leave spaces between packages and

containers. Warm products must be allowed to cool before

storing in the refrigerator and to prevent transfer of odours

and drying out, items should be separately packaged or

Remove shelves and containers from within the cabinet.

Carefully lay the cabinet onto its back, preferably onto

something soft such as a dust sheet, to prevent scratching to

the floor and the cabinet.

Unscrew the adjustable foot (if applicable). Remove the two

screws from the lower front hinge and the front foot or the

adjustable fo ot plate. Remove the lower hinge from the door.

Slide the door towards the base of the cabinet, thus

disengaging the top hinge pin from the location hole in the top

of the door.

If the cabinet has a door handle, unscrew the two screws

holding it in place. Locate the two hole blanking screws on the

other side of the door and remove. Re-attach the handle and

the hole blanking screws in the ir new positions.

Unscrew the two screws holding the top hinge bracket, swap

the position of the bracket to the other side of the cabinet and

re-attach (on some models the upper hinge pin simply pushes

into a hole in the front fascia).

Slide the door onto the top hinge pin. Insert the lower hinge pin

into the door. Screw the hinge in place together with the front

hinge foot (if applicable) which should be fixed so that the

screw is towards the back of the cabinet. Attach the front feet

or the adjustable foot plates and adjustable feet. Stand the

cabinet upright and check that the door is correctly aligned

and that the magnetic seals fit snugly all round and that there

are no gaps. If adjustments are necessary, lay the cabinet onto

its back and alter the position of the lower hinge.

When the standard mains lead is used, the bottom of the

cabinet should not be more than 1 m above the electrical

supply socket.

Mark out and drill the wall according to the dimensions given

in the following diagram. Insert the rawl plugs. Align the

cabinet mounting holes to the rawl plugs and hold the cabinet

in position e.g. by standing it on a table. Screw in the four

screws to fix the cabinet

513 mm

OPTIONAL EXTRAS

DATA LOGGER

If a data logger is fitted, instructions for its use and

maintenance is supplied in a separate leaflet.



To close the door apply a gentle pressure until the magnetic

door gasket seals against the cabinet face. Do not "slam close".

Check periodically to see that there are no gaps between the

gasket and the cabinet face.

USEFUL HINTS

If your appliance is to be out of service for any length of time

ensure that the interior is carefully cleaned and dried. Leave

the door open and disconnect the plug fro m the mains socket.

Carry out regular cleaning according to ins tructions.

See that vibration noises are not caused by objects in contact

with your appliance and each other.

CHART RECORDER

Instructions fo r the use and maintenance of th e chart recorder,

if fitted, are supplied in a separate leaflet. A rechargeable NiCd

AA size battery is fitted to the recorder. The door is closed w ith

a key and a note should be made of its number, in case it is

lost.

MAINS

FAILURE

ALARM

The alarm circuit is powered by a 12Vdc rechargeable battery,

it is continuously recharged when the cabinet is in operation

and is maintenance free.

To activate the alarm circuit, operate the orange push button

switch located on the control panel which w ill illum inate. The

SAFETY

AND

SERVICING

EUROPEAN

VARIANTS

THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED

If this appliance is fitted with a non-rewirable plug for which

your socket is unsuitable the plug should be cut off and an

appropriate plug fitted. The removed plug must be disposed of

as insertion of the plug into an electrical socket is likely to be

dangerous.

ELECTRIC

PLUG

WIRING (UK ONLY)

The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with

the following code:

GREEN AND YELLOW - EARTH

BLUE - NEUTRAL

BROWN - LIVE

QREEN YELLOW

13AMP

FUSE

BROWN

BLUE

CORD

CLAMP

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of your appliance

may not correspond with the coloured marking identif/ing the

terminals in your

plug,

proceed

as

follows:

CONNECT GREEN & YELLOW coloured wire to plug terminal

If the model code ends with an 'E' (e.g. ER452ME instead of

ER452M) the cabinet will have been built for the continental

european m arket and wil l have a european plug fitte d.

SAFETY NOTES

Ensure tha t th e appliance is earthed.

Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains

supply before attempting to remove light covers (if fitted).

Ensure that the appliance is disconnected from the mains

supply before cleaning internally or defrosting.

Do not store flammable or explosive substances in the

appliance.

HANDLING

Your appliance may use isobutane (R600a) gas as its

refrigerant. This gas has a high environmental compatibility

but it is also combustible. When transporting, installing or

disposing of the appliance, care should be taken that no parts

of the refrigerating circuit are damaged. In order to avoid

hazardous mixtures of gas and air in the event of a refrigerant

gas leak, the appliance should be sited in a room having a

minimum volume of 1m^ for every 8 grams of R600a, a room

measuring 4m long x 3m wide x 3m high will have a volume of

36ml

If the appliance contains R600a it will be stated on the 'DATA

PLATE'

label along with the quantity used.



marked 'E' or earth symbol 4^ or coloured green or green and

yellow.

CONNECT BLUE coloured wire to plug terminal marked 'N' or

coloured black.

CONNECT BROWN coloured w ire to plug te rmina l marked 1 ' or

coloured red.

Do not push excess mains lead into the compressor

compartment.

If it is necessary to change the fuse in a m oulded plug and the

fuse cover is detachable, it must be refitted after the fuse has

been changed. If the fuse cover is lost or damaged the plug

must not be used unt il a replacement is gbtained.

It is important that the colour of the replacement fuse cover

corresponds with the coloured insert or as indicated in

AFTER SALES SERVICE

If service should be required please contact the retailer who

supplied the appliance. Give them the date of purchase, the

model and serial number (found on the 'FOR SERVICE QUOTE' or

'DATA PLATE' label) and state the nature of the fault.

BEFORE

SERVICING

If something appears to be wrong, before calling the Service

Engineer, which could be expensive, check the followin g:-

• The plug on the mains lead fits securely into the electrical

socket.

• Check tha t the fuse is intact.

LABORATORY REFRIGERATORS

LR202 LR502 LR902LR1602

TEMPERATURE

CONTROL

The temperature control thermostat may be found under the

front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. On the model

LR1602 the temperature control is located in the lower front

panel.

These are fully adjustable, with position 1 being the

warmest and position 6 being the coldest. A djust the

thermostat to your required temperature in conjunction with a

thermometer.

The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory

products is considered to be +2°C to +10°C

Prolonged use of the coldest setting may freeze some products

stored inside the refrigerator. Location, room temperature, the

number of times you open and close the door and the

frequency of defrosting will all effect the temperature in your

refrigerator. The control setting may have to be varied to allow

for these.

A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will

shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost

when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight

are completely defrosted.

On certain models a defrost tray is provided, with the small

basket removed, this should be slid into position under the

bottom freezing shelf. A suitable container should then be

placed under the hole in the shelf to collect the defrost water.

Defrosting should be carried out as quickly as possible and can

be assisted by placing a bowl of hot water in your appliance

and closing the door

as

far

as

possible.

NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air

blowers.

When defrosting is complete, wipe the inside of the cabinet

with a weak solution of washing up liquid, one without a

fragrance is recommended. Dry the cabinet and replace shelves

and baskets.

Restart the appliance. Don't replace frozen items until the

appliance has reached its operating temperature.

DEFROSTING

The appliance has an autom atic defrost system which requires

no special operation on the part of the user. When the cold

control has been correctly set the appliance will periodically

switch off. It will not switch on again until all the frost that

has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge compartment,

has melted. The defrost water will fall into the trough

underneath the bottom edge of the cold plate and run down

the drain into the plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitting

LABORATORY REFRIGERATOR / FREEZERS

ISR25 ISR55 IST45 IST55

TEMPERATURE CONTROL


front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully

adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6

being the coldest.

The recommended storage temperature for general laboratory



on top of the compressor.

It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the

drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft

wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes

are chargeable.

products is considered to be +2°Cto +10°C in the refrigerated

compartment, -IS 'C in the freezer.

DEFROSTING

MODEL ISR25 and ISR55

LABORATORY FREEZERS

ISU25 ISU55 ISU95 ISU1602 ISF5

TEMPERATÜRE CONTROL


front fascia at the top of the refrigerator. This is fully

adjustable, with position 1 being the warmest and position 6

These models are supplied with a drip tray which is located on

runners immediately below the freezing compartment. Its

function is to collect water during defrosting.

On the ISR 55 a baffle plate is provided at the rear of the tray

and this should be positioned as follows:

a) In the extended position, i.e. sloping outward and backward

for normal refrigeration use and during defrosting.

MODEL IST45 and IST55

There is a defrost tray stored on the top shelf of the freezer

compartment. Remove this tray and place it on the runner

where the freezer basket is normally stored. A suitable

container should be placed under the hole in the tray to collect

the defrost water. Any loose frost or defrost water wil l fall onto

the tray and when defrosting is complete the tray can be

removed and the contents thrown away.

When defrosting is complete, replace the tray and basket and

restart the appliance. When the freezer has reached its

operating temperature, replace the frozen items.

The fridge compartment has an automatic defrost system

which requires no special operation on the part of the user.

When the cold control has been correctly set the appliance will

periodically switch off. It wil l not switch on again until all the

frost that has accumulated on the cold plate in the fridge

compartment, has melted.

The defrost water wil l fall into the trough underneath the

bottom edge of the cold plate and run down the drain into the

plastic defrost water evaporation tray sitt ing on top of the

compressor.

It is important that the drain does not become blocked. If the

drain does become blocked it can be cleared with a piece of soft

wire such as a pipe cleaner. Service calls to unblock drain holes

are chargeable.

LOW TEMPERATURE LABORATORY FREEZERS

LF121 LS381 LC200LX200

To display the temperature set point press the SET key, the

value will be displayed for 5 seconds. The temperature set point

is modified as follows:

• Press and hold the SET key for a t least 2 seconds. The set

point will be displayed and the LEDs of the first and digits

wi l l f lash.

• Use the @ and S rocker key to alter the set point.

• Store the new value by pressing SET key or by wai tin g fo r

15 seconds.

LED

*

#

LED2

m

MODE

ON

FLASHING

FLASHING

ON

FUNCTION

Compressor running

- Programming phase

(flashing with LED2)

- Anti-short cycle delay

enabled

- Programming phase

(f lashing with ^ )

Alarm signal

- In Pr2 indicates the

parameter is also

present in Pri

Function and Parameters Menu

Alterations to parameters should only be done by qualif ied

personnel.

To access the function menu press the SET and ra keys for

3 seconds, the label of the first fun ctio n is displayed. The ö

and @ are used to scroll through the menu. By pressing the

SET key the currently displayed function is enabled.



OPERATION

The recommended operating temperature of the cabinets is as

fol lows:

LF121: -20°Cto-40°C.

LS381: is -20°Cto-35°C.

LC200:

is -20°C to

-50X.

LX200:

is -50°C to -80°C.

In order to achieve these low temperatures the cabinet should

be sited in such a way that it has at least 150mm clearance all

round to allow for adequate ventilation and the ambient

temperature should not exceed 25°C.

List of Functions

Pri includes all user accessible param eters.

Pr2 includes all instru me nt parameters (at installer level). It

can be accessed through a security code. It is possible to

modify all parameters and to add or remove parameters

from Pri by pressing SET + @. W hen a param eter is

enabled at user level LED UM is on.

LOC Keyboard lock. When enabled the 'POP flashing message

is displayed for a few seconds and then the keys are

locked.

Only the set point display is enabled. The key board

is unlocked by pressing the @ and @ keys together.

Out exits the menu.

ALC (alarm configu ration) O

(O

= related to set point

1 = fixed to absolute value)

ALU (alarm band upper) 10

(O

to 50°C degrees above set point)

ALL (alarm band lower) 10

(0 to 50°C degrees below set po int)

Aid (alarm delay) 5

(0 to 120min. between alarm

condition and alarm signalling)

The factory settings for non-user accessible parameters (Pr2)

are:

LS

US

AC

dAO

OdS

Ot

minimum set point) -57

- 57°C... SET)

maximum set point) -20

SET... + 99°C)

anti-s hort cycle delay) 1

p... 30 min.)

alarm delay at start-up) 120

0... 720 min.)

outputs delay at start-up) 1

0 ... 120 min.)

probe calibration offset) 0

-12to+12°C)

TEMPERATURE CONTROL (LX200)

These cabinets are supplied with

CAL

9900 PID temperature

controllers.

The controller is located on the front of the cabinet along with

a green power light and a red alarm switch. Full details of its

operation and setting can be found in the manufacturers

leaflet. The set point of the controller is facto ry set at -80°C.

During the initial pull-down the cabinet temperature is likely to

be in alarm condition and will remain so until the freezer

temperature is with in the designated alarm band.

To mute the alarm, press the red alarm switch. The alarm will

be muted but will remain illuminated until the freezer is down

to temperature. Upon reaching the set point temperature the

alarm light will go out and the audible alarm will recommence

to sound. De-activate the alarm switch to return to the normal

monitoring mode of the controller.

DEFROSTING

Before defrosting, remove al

another freezer.

items and transfer them to

Carefully scrape off any frost build-up with the plastic scraper

provided or with a wooden or plastic spatula. Collect the

removed frost in a clean dustpan and throw it away. Do not use

sharp instruments to remove frost, they may cause damage.

If a more thorough defrost is required, switch off and unplug

the appliance, proceed as above and when the loose frost has

been cleared, place a bowl o f hot water inside the freezer and

close the lid. Any remaining ice will melt and the water should

be removed with a sponge or something similar. When



CF

COn

COF

measurement unit) 0

0 = Celsius, 1 = Fahrenheit)

freezer on with faulty probe) 45

0...

120 min.)

^freezer off with faulty probe) 15

0... 120 min.)

The controller is fitted with an audible alarm and remote alarm

outputs. These can be muted by pressing any of the keys

although LED So will remain on until the alarm condition is

rectified

defrosting is complete, clean and dry the inside as described in

'Cleaning Your Appliance' and sw itch on. When the freezer has

reached its operating temperature, replace the items previously

removed.

A rise in temperature of frozen items during defrosting will

shorten the storage life. It is best to carry out a full defrost

when stocks are at their lowest. Ensure that areas out of sight

are completely defrosted.

NEVER use electrical heaters such as hair driers, fires or hot air

blowers.

MAR INE REFRIGERATORS

R25(t)M(E) R45(t)M(E) R55(+)M(E) R75(t)M(E) U25(t)M(E)

ER25(t)M(E) ER45(t)M(E) ER55(t)M(E) ER75(t)M(E)

EU25(t)M(E)

Where (t) represents 1, 2, 3 or 4:

1 110 -1 1 5 V, 50/6 0 Hz, r ight hand hung door.

2 220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, r ight hand hung door.

3 110 -1 1 5 V, 50/6 0 Hz, lef t hand hung door.

4 220 - 240 V. 50 Hz, lef t hand hung door.

Where (E) represents a european model.

Fi niN G THE DECK BEARERS

The cabinets are supplied with deck bearers whose function is

to prevent movement of the cabinet.

They are f i t ted as fol lows:

Attach the rear deck bearer to the deck as shown in f igs.1 and

2.

Posit ion the cabinet to the rear deck bearer so that the deck

bearer is against the compressor mounting plate as f igs.2 and

4.

onyeeiONA'SSTBtiiBi

S7iTini

MINIMUM

Fig.4 DECK BEARER FIXING

Fix the fron t deck bearer to the deck.

The distances of the deck f ixing holes indicated in Fig.4 are

shown in Table 1.

MODEL

R&ER25C)

R & E R 4 5 n

R&ER55(*)

R&ER75(*)

OVERALL

DEPTH

515m m

590m m

6 3 0 m m

DIMENSION 'A'

457m m

534m m

573m m

Where (*) denotes 1, 2,3 or 4

TEMPERATURE CONTROL



280inmCRS.

Fig.1 REAR VIEW SHOWING DECK BEARER FIX

B7tnin

MINMUM

The temperature control thermostat may be found on the

underside of the f ro nt fas cia, jus t above the do or. This is ful ly

adjustable, wi th posi t ion 1 being the warmest and posi t ion 6

being the coldest. The recommended storage temperature for

refrigera tors +0°C to +5°C and fo r freezers is -18°C.

Prolonged use of the coldest sett ing may freeze some products

stored inside the refr igerator. Locat ion, room temperature, the

number of t imes you open and close the door and the

frequency of defrost ing wi l l al l ef fect the temperature in your

appliance. The control sett ing might have to be varied to allow

for these.

SPARES MANUAL ER452yE

Reffigeration pic

lustrat ion No. Description Part No

A 4536

EV 14740

S 1049

A 4460

A 2677

A 2675

A 2683

A 4379

E2735

A 4389

E 1426

E767

A 4388

91235

D348

91234

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

WORKTOP FRONT COVER

DOOR ASSEMBLY

HINGE

PIN

DAIRY DOOR

DAIRY SHELF

PACKAGE SHELF

EGG TRAY

BOHLE SHELF

LIGHT SWITCH

LIGHT HOUSING

LIGHT BULB HOLDER

LIGHT BULB

LIGHT COVER

EVAPORATOR DOOR

EVAPORATOR DOOR HINGE

PIN

EVAPORATOR SHROU D



A 988

D345

EL 263 5

A4 1 3 8

7962

91023

91306

91305

103013

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

EVAPORATOR SHROUD FIXING RIVET

EVAPORATOR DOOR SPRING

EVAPORATOR

ICE

TRAY

THERMOSTAT PHIAL RETAINING CLIP

CONVECTION BAFFLE PLATE

DRIP TRAY

DRIP TRAY PANEL

SHELF

1

Reffigeraticrs p i

i l lustration No

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

SPåRES MANUAL

PåRISUSI

r

. Description

RELAYP.T.C. 103N0016

TERMINAL BLOCK COVER

COMPRESSOR, DANFOSS TL4G, 220-240V, 50/60Hz

COMPRESSOR MOUNTING RUBBER

COMPRESSOR SECURING BOLT, M6 x 25

PLAIN WASHER, M6 x 20mm O.D.

MOUNTING SLEEVE

SPRING WASHER, M6

NUT, M6

MAINS LEAD

UNIT BEARER

CONDENSER

DRIER lOg

WALL SPACER

WALL SPACER CARRIER

REAR DECK BEARER

ER452ME

MARINE Refriger-stor

Part No

E2625

E 1645

C1016

19296

B 1104

B 1106

19297

B 1107

B1105

E2504

41479

N 1202

N 1184

S 843

S 842

EV 14 666



51

52

53

FRONT DECK BEARER

FRONT DECK BEARER SECURING SCREW, M5 x 16

SERRATED WASHER, M5

EV 146 65

B 1076

B1077

Mw:må

iWåmImlA

y A l t e e f n a e r s t e r



Ref r igera t i on pic

;PARES MANUåL

måwmGS

ER452ME

MARINE Refr igerator

SCHBMTIC WIRINQ DIAQRAM

OHK COUXJR

B BIAOC

BL BUIE

B R B R O W N

9ff ORSlANDYHlflW

LIQHT SWITCH

BR

< r ^

BR

BL

m .

BR

THEHMOSIAT

1EW

UUMP

COMFKESSOR

ON SO

N L

8/Y

BL

BR BL

•B

)

C

BR

sumy

L N E

9 9 9

BR\

BL

7



aRCUIT DIAGRAM

LIGHT SWITCH

< r ^

tew LAMP

SUPPLY

L N E

9 9 9

0

=

V

c

c

=

A

O

l

^

•

*

^

^

^

«

W

L



^

—

r

J

k

C

c

=

&

S] Electrolux

Was her-extractors EW402E60, EW 1030F;

Washer-dryer EW 1289W

M odel EW 402F.60

• - » . .

• STAIN LESS STEEL DRUM

• ZINC COATED STEEL CABINET

• EASILY OPERATE D CON TROLS

• N O-SPIN BUTTON FOR DELICATE

C O T T ON O R LIN E N IT E M S

• REDUCED COM S UM P T I ON OF

WATER, ENERGY AN D DE TERGEN T

• BUILT IN WATER DRAIN FILTER

The washer-extractors EW 402F.60, EW

1030F and washer-dryer EW 1289W are

domesdc type machines for reliable light duty

washing on board.

On m odels E W 40 2F . 60 and E W 1 0 30 F is

the program selected by a p rogram selector



I " ,

Model EW 1289W

dial, located on the control panel. Th e control

panel is also provided with a temperature

selector dial, an ON /O FF butto n, several

options button s and pilot lamp. The deter

gent dispenser

drawer,

located in the front of

the machine, has different com partmen ts for

pre-wash, m ain wash, softener and bleaching

agent.

On model E W 10 30F are the program, tem

perature and special program selected by one

selector dial located on the con trol panel. T he

control panel is also provided with several

options button s and pilot lamps. Th e deter

WASHER-EXTRACTORS EW 402E6O AND EW 1030F, WASHER-DRYER EW 1289W

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm

* • *

1. Water inlet hose 1.3 m with 3/4" gas

thread spout

2 . Electrical cord 1.3 m with earthed plug

3 .

Water drain hose 1.75 m (int. diameter

16.5 mm, ext. diameter 21.5 mm)

S pe c i f i c a t i on -

M odel/Type

E W 4 0 2 R 6 0

E W 1 0 3 0 F

E W 1 2 8 9 W

dimensions in m m

W

6 0 0

D

5 4 0

6 2 0

H

8 5 0

a

4 0 8

4 1 5

b

50

75

C

523

552

d

38.5

2 4

e

552

5 2 0

f

2 4

4 0

S pe c i f i c a t i on

M a x ra te d

M ax rated



M odel/Type

E W 4 0 2 F . 6 0

E W 1 0 3 0 F

E W 1 2 8 9 W

D r u m

volume, Itrs

4 2

4 6

54

Spin

rpm

4 0 0

7 0 0 - 1 0 0 0

1 2 0 0

washing

capacity/load

kgs

4 - 5

7

drying

capacity/load

kgs

-

3.5

Voltage V

2 3 0 1 - 6 0

2 3 0

1-50

2 3 0 1 - 6 0

Loading

kW

2.2

2.1

Fuse A

10

Weight kgs

ne t

66

68

81

g r o s s

70

7 2

84

Sh ip p in g

v o l iu n e

mä

0.380

0.420

Installation

The washer-extractor is delivered with adjustable metallic feet covered with rubber. The feet are fixed in brackets.

To remove feet during installation the brackets around the feet must be unscrewed also.

For keeping it posit ioned and secured use Deck mounting kit STO 02 69 (available as optional accessories).

WASHING MACHtNE

I N S T R U C T I O N B O O K L E T



£W 402 F

YOUR NEW WASHING MACHINE

This new washing machine m eets all

requirements for a modern washing of laundry

with reduced consumption of

water,

energy and

detergent.

• The temperature selector dial allows you to

choose personally the suitable washing

temperature for your laundry.

• The automatic cooling

of the washing water

from 95°C to 60°C before draining w ill

prevent plastic pipes of your drainage system

from being deformed.

A Ecological hints

In order to obtain water

and

energy savings and

to protect the environment, we advice you to

follow these instructions:

• Whenever possible, wash the maximum load

for the selected programme, w ithout

overloading the drum.

• Use a programme with prewash only for

heavy soiled items.

• Measure out detergent according to the water

hardness, degree of soiling and quantity of

laundry being washed.

• With adequate pre-treatment, stains and

v

Environment protection

• Packaging recycling

Materials marked with the t^) symbol are

recyclable. To enable them to be recycled, they

must be placed in the appropriate collection

areas (or containers). Check with your local

authorities.

>PE<= polyethylene

>PS<= polystyrene

>PP<= polypropylene

• Washing machine scrapping

When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off

the power supply cable and make the door

closing device inoperative to avoid it becoming a

death trap for a

child.

Use authorised disposal sites for your old

appliance.

Help to keep your country tidy



limited soiling can be removed; the laundry

can then be washed at a lower temperature.

• Select "Quick

wash"

for lightly soiled laundry.

The symbols you will see on som e paragraphs of this booklet have the following meaning:

CONTENTS

Important information 4

Description of the appliance 5

• Detergent dispenser drawer

and programme chart 5

Technical spec ifications 5

Installation 6

• Unpacking 6

• Positioning 6

• Water inlet 7

• Water drainage 7

• Electrical connection 7

Use 8

• Control panel 8

• Washing hints .9

Sorting the laundry 9

Temperatures 9

Before loading the laundry 9

Maximum loads 9

Maintenance 16

• Bodywork 16

• Detergent dispenser drawer 16

• Water inlet filter 16

• Drain filter 17

• Emergency emptying out 17

• The dangers of freezing 17

Som ething not wo rking 18-19



Laundry weights 9

Removing stains 9

Detergents and additives 10

Quantity of detergent to be used 10

• International wash code symbols 11

• Washing programmes 12-13

• Operating sequence 14-15

A

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

It

is important

that

this instruction book be

kept

with the appliance

fo r

future

referenc e. If you sell

or

give

the appliance away, make sure

that

the book is passed to the

new

owners

so that

they can

familiarise themselves with

its

operation

and

relevant

warnings.

The following warnings are provided in the interests

o f

overall

safety.

You must read them carefully

before installing

or

using the

appliance.

Installation

• When unpacking the appliance, check that it

is not damaged. If in doubt, do not use it and

contact the Service Centre.

• All internal packing must be removed before

using the appliance. Serious damage may be

caused to the machine or adjacent furniture if

the protective transit devices are not

removed or are not completely removed.

Refer to the relevant paragraph in the

instruction book.

• Any electrical work required to install this

appliance must be carried out by a qualified

electrician.

• Any plumbing work required to install this

appliance must be carried out by a qualified

plumber.

• After having installed the machine, check that

it is not standing on its electrical supply cable.

• Use only the recommended quantities of

fabric softener. An excessive amount could

damage the laundry.

• Leave the porthole door slightly ajar when

the appliance is not in use. This preserves

the door seal and prevents the formation of

musty smells.

• Always check that water has emptied out

before opening the door. If not, drain the

water following the instructions in the

instruction book.

• Always unplug the appliance and shut the

water tap after use.

Service/repair

• In the event of a fault, do not attempt to

repair the appliance yourself. Repairs carried

out by inexperienced persons may cause

damage.



• If the appliance is placed on a carpeted

floor,

ensure that air can circulate freely between

the adjustable feet and the

floor.

• If repairs are needed, contact an authorised

service centre and ask for genuine spare

parts.

Use

This appliance is designed for domestic use.

It must not be used for purposes other than

those for which it was designed.

Do not overload the appliance. Follow the

instructions in the instruction book.

Only wash fabrics which are designed to be

Safety

• This appliance is designed to be used by

adults. Children must not be allowed to touch

the controls or play with the p roduct.

• During high temperature wash cycles the

glass door becomes very hot. Do not touch it.

• Pets sometimes climb into washing

DESCRIPTION OF THE APPLIANCE

1 Detergent dispenser drawer

2 Programme chart

3 Control panel

4 Door handle

5 Drain filter

6 Adjustable feet

1 3

Detergent dispenser drawer and

programme chart

Symbols

I I I Prewash

1111 Main wash

Fabric softener

There is a programme guide in the interior part

««n

|Mj m L ^

V

^* *^?^<^

1 \ ' 7

^



of the detergent dispenser drawer.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS Height

Width

Depth

85 cm

60 cm

54 cm

INSTALLATION

Unpacking

A

All transit bolts and packing must beremoved before using the appliance.

You are advised to keep all transit devices so

that they can be refitted if the machine ever has

to be transported again.

1.

Using a spanner, unscrew and remove the

rear right-hand bolt and lay the machine on

its back, taking care not to squash the hoses.This can be avoided by placing one of the

corner packing pieces between the machine

and the

floor.

Remove the polystyrene blocks from thebottom of the machine and release the two

plastic bags.

Carefully remove the right-hand bag (1) then

the left-hand bag (2) by pulling them towards

the centre of the machine.



4. Set the machine upright and remove the two

remaining bolts from the back.

5. Pull out the three plastic spacers from the

holes into which the bolts were fitted.

6. Plug the open holes with the plugs which you

will find at the back of the appliance.

/^

:2

^ A

Tojll

^

W j

Water inlet

Connect the water inlet hose to a tap with a 3/4"

thread after having inserted the small filter "A"

supplied with the machine.

The other end of the inlet hose which connects

to the machine can be turned in any direction.

Simply loosen the fitting, rotate the hose and

retighten the fitting, making sure there are no

water leaks.

The inlet hose must not be lengthened. If it is

too short and you do not wish to move the tap,

you will have to purchase a new, longer hose

specially designed for this type of use.

Water drainage

The end of the d rain hose can be positioned in

three ways:

Hooked over the edge of a sink using the

plastic hose guide supplied with the

machine.

In this case, make sure the end

cannot come unhooked when the machine is

emptying.

This could be done by tying it to the tap with a

piece of string or attaching it to the

wall.

In a sink drain pipe branch. This branch must

be above the trap so that the bend is at least



60 cm above the ground.

Directly into a drain pipe at a height

of not

less than 60 cm and not more than 90 cm.

The end of the d rain hose must always be

ventilated, i.e. the inside diameter of the drain

pipe must be larger than the outside diameter of

the drain hose.

The drain hose must not be kinked. Run it along

the

floor;

only the part near the drainage point

must be raised.

USE

Control panel

iS(

l<^ ts) 0

o o o o

rr rr

2 3 4 5 6

1 Programme chart

It will help you to choose the most suitable

washing programme for your laundry.

2 Spin suppression button 1^

Depress this button when you have to wash

particularly delicate cotton or linen items in order

to exclude all the spinning phases.

3 Half load button iV3)

5 ON/OFF button ©

Depress this button to start the programme.

Depress it again to stop the programme or to

switch the machine off.

Before selecting or changing an ongoing

programme the machine must be switched off.

6 Operating pilot light

This light is on whilst the machine is operating

and goes out at the end of the programme.



Select this button to reduce water consumption

on the rinse cycle when washing a half load of

cottons or linens.

4 Intensive rinse button ^

By depressing this button on programmes for

cotton and linen the machine will perform the

rinses w ith high water level.

To be used in areas where the water is very soft

or for people allergic to detergents or who have

very delicate skin.

7 Temperature selector dial #

Turn this dial to select the washing temperature.

Position -)f= cold wash.

8 Programme selector dial

To select the required programme, turn this dial

cloclowise

until the programme letter is exactly

opposite the pointer.

(3 Washing hints

Sorting the laundry

Follow the wash code symbols on each garment

label and the manufacturer's washing

instructions.

Sort the laundry as follows:

whites, coloureds, synthetics, delicates, woollens.

Temperatures

95=

60°

-)f (cold)

30°-40°

for normally soiled white cottons and

linen (e.g. tea cloths, towels,

tablecloths, sheets...)

for normally

soiled,

colour fast

garments

(e.g.

sh irts, night dresses,

pyjamas....) in linen, cotton or

synthetic fibres and for lightly soiled

white cotton (e.g. undenwear).

for delicate items

(e.g.

net curtains),mixed laundry including synthetic

fibres and woollens bearing the label

«pure new wool, machine washable,

non-shrink»

delicate fabrics and woollens: drum no more

than one third full.

Washing a maximum load makes the most

efficient use of water and energy.

For heavily soiled laundry, reduce the load size.

Laundry weights

The following weights are

bathrobe

napkin

quilt cover

sheet

pillow case

tablecloth

towell ing towel

tea cloth

night dress

ladies' briefs

man's work s hirt

man's shirt

man's pyjamasblouse

men's underpants

indicative

1200 g

100 g

700 g

500 g

200 g

250 g

200 g

100 g

200 g

100 g

600 g

200 g

500 g100 g

100 g

Removing stains

Stubborn stains may not be removed by just



Before loading the laundry

Never wash whites and coloureds together.

Whites may lose their "whiteness" in the wash.

New coloured items may run in the first wash;

they should therefore be washed separately the

first time .

Make sure that no metal objects are left in

the laundry (e .g. hair clips, safety p ins, pins).

Button up pillowcases, close zip fasteners,

hooks and poppers. Tie any belts or long tapes.

water and detergent. It is therefore advisable to

treat them prior to washing.

Blood:

treat fresh stains with cold water. For

dried stains, soak overnight in water with a

special detergent then rub in the soap and

water.

Oil based paint: moisten with benzine stain

remover, lay the garment on a soft cloth and dab

the

stain;

treat several times.

Dried grease stains: moisten with turpentine,

lay the garment on a soft surface and dab the

Lipstick: m oisten with acetone as above, then

treat stains with methylated spirits. Remove any

residual m arks from white fabrics with bleach.

Red wine: soak in water and detergent, rinse

and treat with acetic or citric

acid,

then rinse.

Treat any residual marks with bleach.

Ink: depending on the type of ink, moisten the

fabric first with acetone (*), then with acetic acid;

treat any residual marks on white fabrics with

bleach and then rinse thoroughly.

Tar

stains: first treat w ith stain remover,

methylated spirits or benzine, then rub with

detergent paste.

(*) do not use acetone on artificial silk

Detergents and additives

Good washing results also depend on the choice

of detergent and use of the correct quantities to

avoid waste and protect the environment.

Although biodegradable, detergents contain

substances which, in large quantities, can upset

the delicate balance of nature.

The choice of detergent will depend on the type

of fabric (delicates, woollens, cottons, etc.), the

coour,

washing temperature and degree of

soiling.

All commonly available washing machine

detergents may be used in this appliance:

Quantity of detergent to be used

The type and quantity of detergent will depend

on the type of fabric, load size, degree of soiling

and hardness of the water used.

Water hardness is classified in so-called

"degrees" of hardness. Information on hardness

of the water in your area can be obtained from

the relevant water supply company, or from your

local authority.

Follow the product manufacturers' instructions

on quantities to use.

Use less detergent if:

- you are washing a small load

- the laundry is lightly soiled

- large amounts of foam form during washing.

Degrees of water hardness

Level

1

2

3

4

Characteristic

soft

medium

hard

very hard

Degrees

German

°dH

0- 7

8-14

15-21

more than 21

French

°T.H.

0-15

16-25

26-37

more than 37



- powder detergents for all types of fabric,

- powder detergents for delicate fabrics (BO C

max) and woollens,

- liquid detergents, preferably for low

temperature wash programmes {60°C max)

for all types of fabric, or special for woollens

only

The detergent and any additives must be placed

in the appropriate compartments of the

dispenser drawer before starting the wash

programme.

S) International wash code symbols

These synnbols appear on fabric labels, in order to help you choose the best way to treat your laundry

Energetic wash

Delicate wash

X a s 7

Max. wash

temperature

95°C

K m

Max. wash

temperature

60°C

\g7

\327

Max. wash

temperature

40°C

X^^MJ

w

Max. wash

temperature

30°C

\ 3 0 /

^

Hand wash

l ^

Do

not

wash

at

all

A

Bleaching

A

Bleach In cold water Do not bleach



a

Ironing

Hot iron

max 200°C

Warm iron

max 150°C

Lukewarm iron

max 110°C

Do not iron

Energetic programmes for cotton and linen

Maximum load: 5 kg

Progr.

A

B

A

B

Temp.

60°-95°

60°-95°

40°-60°

40°-60°

Type

of

laundry

Whites

with prewash

(heavy soiled)

Whites

without prewash

(normally soiled)

Coloureds

with prewash

(heavy soiled)

Coloureds

without prewash

(normally soiled)

Quick wash

Cycle desc ription

Prewash

Wash

at

60°-95°C

4 rinses

Long spin

Wash at 60°-95°C

4 rinses

Long spin

Prewash

Wash

at

40°-60°C

4 rinses

Long spin

Wash at 40°-60°C

4 rinses

Long spin

Wash at 30°-40 °C

Possible

options

W W



C

D

F

30°-40°

l ightly soiled laundry

Rinses

Short spin

4 rinses

Long spin

4 rinses with liquid

additives,

if

required

Long spin

Drain and short spin

m m

1^

Gentle programmes for synthetics, mixed fabrics, delicates and wool

Maximum load: 2 kg, wool: 1 kg

Progr.

G

H

J

K

Temp.

40°-60°

40°-60°

30''-40°

30°-40°

Type of laundry

Synthetics

with prewash

(heavy soiled)

Synthetics

without prewash

(normally soiled)

Delicates

W o o l ^

Cycle description

Prewash

Wash at 4 0°-60 °C

3 rinses

Water left

in tub

Wash

at

40°-60 °C

3 rinses

Water left in tub

Wash at 3 0°-40 °C

3 rinses

Water left in tub

Wash at 3 0°-40 °C

3 rinses

Water left

in tub

3 rinses with fabric softener

Possible

options



L

M

Rinses

Drain

Water left in tub

Draining

of

water

The temperatures indicated are the optimum temperatures for each programme and depend on the

CD Operating sequence

Before washing your first ioad of

iaundry,

we

recommend

tfiatyou

run

a

cotton cycle

at

60°C,

with the machine

empty,

in

order to remove any

manufacturing residue from ttie drum and

tub.

Pour lialf a measure o f detergent into the main

wash compartment and start up the machine.

1. Place the laundry In the drum

Open the door.

Place the laundry in the

drum,

one item at a

time,

shaking them out as much as possible.

Close the door.

2. Meas ure out the de tergent

Pull out the dispenser drawer until it stops.

Measure out the amount of detergent

recommended by the manufacturer in a

graduated cup and pour it into the main wash

compartment

LOJ.

If you wish to carry out a

prewash,

pour detergent into the appropriate

compartment marked |_ J.

RiH? \

1



3. Meas ure out the additive

if requ ired, pour fabric softener into the

compartment marked ® without exceeding the

«MAX» mark.

4. Select the des ired o ption

Depress SPIN-SUPPRESSION 18 and/or HALF

LOAD IV2) and/or INTENSIVE RINSE

W

button,

J S l

IV2)

t ^

6. Select the programm e and start it

Turn the programme selector dial clockwise to

the required wash programme and depress the

ON/OFF button: the operating pilot light comes

on and the machine starts to operate.

7. At the end of the programm e

The machine stops automatically, the operating

pilot light goes out.

If you have selected a gen tle programme which

ends with water in tub, drain the water before

opening the door.

It is normal to have to wait for about 2 minutes

before being able to open the door to allow the

safety lock to release.

Depress the ON/OFF button again to switch the

machine off.

Remove the laundry.

Turn the drum by hand to make sure it is

completely empty, so as to avoid any forgotten

items being damaged in a subsequent wash

(e.g.

shrinking) or their colour running into a

load of whites.

M 0 0 4 3 ^ _

' ^

B ~ ~ ~ -

'flj

-—-*"*- -_

) )



Release any button which has been depressed.

Turn the water tap off and unplug the machine.

Leave the door ajar to air the machine.

MAINTENANCE

1. Bodywork

Clean the outside of the machine with warm

water and a neutral, non-abrasive household

detergent. Rinse with clean water and dry w ith a

soft cloth.

Important:

do not use methylated spirits,

solvents or similar products to clean the

bodywork.

2. Detergent dispenser drawer

After a

while,

detergents and fabric softeners

leave deposits in the drawer.

Clean the drawer from time to time by rinsing it

under a running tap. To remove the drawer from

the machine, press the button in the rear left-

hand corner.

To facilitate cleaning, the top part of the additive

compartments can be removed.

Detergent can also eventually accumulate inside

the drawer recess: clean it with an old

toothbrush. Refit the drawer after cleaning.



»»»

3. Water inlet filter

If you notice that the machine is taking longer to

fill,

check that the filter in the water inlet hose is

not blocked.

Turn off the water tap.

Unscrew the hose from the tap and remove the

filter.

4. Drain filter

The drain filter collects threads and small

objects inadvertently left in the laundry. Check

regularly that the filter is clean.

Open the filter door.

Place a container under the filter and unscrew it.

Pull out the filter.

Clean the filter under a running tap, then refit it,

screwing it fully in.

P0133

y

5. Emergency emptying out

If the water is not discharged (drain pump is

blocked, filter or drain hose are clogged),

proceed as follows to empty out the machine:

• pull out the plug from the power socket;

• close the water tap;

6. The dangers of freezing

If the machine is exposed to temperatures below

0°C, certain precautions should be taken.

• Turn off the water tap.

• Unscrew the inlet hose.

• Unhook the drain hose from the rear support



• if necessary, wait until the water has cooled

down;

• place a bowl on the floor;

• put the drain hose end into the bowl and let

the water come out.

Should it not be possible to have access to the

drain hose because, for example, the appliance

is built in the kitchen furniture, slightly loosen the

drain filter a fter p lacing a bowl on the floor, to let

the water come out slowly.

and position the end of this hose and that of

the inlet hose in a bow l. Run the draining

programme until the selector d ial is in the

"Stop" position.

• Switch the machine off.

• Screw the inlet hose and reposition the drain

hose.

• When you intend to start the machine up

again, make sure that the room temperature

is above 0°C.

SOMETHING NOT WORKING

Problems which

you

can resolve yourself

m

Problem

• The machine does not start up:

• The machine does not

fill:

• The m achine fills then empties

immediately:

• The machine does not emp ty

and/or does not spin:

. Possible cause

• Check that the door is firmly closed.

• Check that the machine is plugged in and

that there is power at the socket.

• Check that the main fuse has not blown.

• Check that the programme selector dial is

positioned correctly and the O N/OFF button

depressed.

• Check that the water tap is open.

• Check that water is coming out of the tap.

• Check that the inlet hose is not squashed or

kinked.

• Check that the filter in the inlet hose is not

blocked.

• Check that the door is closed.

• The end of the drain hose is too low. Refer to

relevant paragraph in "water drainage"

section.

• Check that the drain hose is not squashed or

kinked.

• The drain filter is blocked. Clean it.

• A gentle programm awhich ends with water in

the drum or option ® has been selected.



• The re is water on the floor:

• Too much detergent or unsuitable detergent

(creates too much foam) has been used.

• Check whether there are any leaks from one

of the inlet hose fittings. It is not always easy

to see this as the water runs down the hose;

check to see if it is damp.

• Check that the drain hose is not damaged.

• Check that the drain filter has been refitted

• Problem

• The m achine vibrates or is noisy:

• Th e door will not op en :

• Water is not visible in the

machine:

. Possible cause

• Check that all the transit bolts and packing

have been removed.

• Check that the machine is not resting against

anything.

• Check that the support feet are resting firmly

on the ground.

• Check that the laundry is evenly distributed in

the drum.

• Maybe there is very little laundry in the drum.

• The programme is still running.

• The door lock has not yet been released.

• There is water in the drum.

• The machine, which is the result of modern

technology, runs in a very econom ical way

with low water consumption. Performance is

nevertheless excellent.

If you are unable to identify or solve the

problem, contact our service centre. Before

telephoning, make a note of the model, serial

number and purchase date of your machine: the

Service Centre will require this information.

rV



Sööiä

Mod.

Prod .

No.



i i s i f i i p å i f s V ^

SPARE PARTS LIST

Household washing m achines

2520

PNC Brand Model Market

A 914789667 Electrolux EW 402F SG



300A

530



Exploded view

no.

:P09143003528

PNC

914789667

Model

EW402F

Pos

300

300A

303

308

310

312

323

323A

330

514

521

523

530

586

597

597A

999

Part No.

50262 08 000 / 0

1246 80 518 /6

1 24 8 8 7 5 3 0 /2

1240 13 600 /0

1242 75 801 11

1240 20 801 /5

1240 12 213 /3

1242 06 110 /7

50226 26 200 / 9

1247 84 200 /6

1246 44 500 /9

1 24 6 5 8 6 0 4 /2

50252 03 500 / 6

1 24 0 0 0 7 0 0 / 3

1247 12 100 /5

1247 12 110 /4

1 24 9 7 2 5 7 0 /4

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

kit,cabinet,front,P61/5/S V/B

cabinet,back,wl i i te,P62/3/5/ Z-V/B

stand, P65

Hinge,bull 's eye

sieve flap

glass,porthole

FRAME FLAP-,INNER

Frame,in front

kit,Foot,ferrule

locking bush,Foot,back

Bung,clamp,cabinet

Bracket, Hose,electr ic cable,JS/WD

kit,Handle,porthole

Fixing angle,foot,in front

lock,Foot,front

lock.

Foot, back

user's guide,(en)





Exploded view no.:P09143004106

PNC

914789667

Model

EW402F

Pos

001

003

004

005

006

007

010

O i l

012

013

013A

019

037

110

125B

130

531C

540

550

Part No.

1243 09 600 /3

1 24 5 8 0 7 3 0 /8

1 24 6 3 0 3 0 0 / 0

50234 43 800 / 5

1242 52 800 /6

50226 73 500 / 4

1247 26 500 /0

1240 34 400 /0

1247 32 790 /9

1249 27 100 /6

1249 27 110 /5

50228 67 600 / 8

1240 20 900 /5

1240 83 400 /0

50221 74 700 / 4

1240 15 203 /1

1 24 0 2 2 2 0 0 / 8

1240 39 400 /5

1 24 0 0 7 5 0 8 /3

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

t imer,(F50/1J)RID. ELBI

adjustable thermostat

main motor,2/12 400 SO LE

Valve,enema

PUMP.DRAIN

kit,delayer,porthole

heater

CAPACITOR

Pressure switch,2-Niveau,certainity

Calipers

Key board

Signall ing lamp.green

Connection block

Hose,pressure switch

locking ring,o-ring,pump,(29,82)

gasket.Thermostat, Probe

Screw, main motor, bob

clamp

Protection,delayer.Door



550A

597

999

1245 89 500 /6

1 24 0 0 6 2 0 0 /8

1241 34 201 / I

1243 36 950 /9

A

A

A

A

guard,drain pump

stopper, Capacitor,cable

Harness, 124.13420/

harness,main

p

5



6

9


PNC

914789667

Model

EW402F

Pos

115

125

125A

130

130X

150

150A

250

251A

253

255X

257

257A

260

260B

262

264

531

531B

Part No.

1240 16 740 /1

50068 76 300 / 7

50097 07 200 / 8

1240 15 903 /6

50063 24 800 / 4

1245 11 001 /8

1246 71 1 1 0 / 3

1240 29 008 /8

1 2 4 0 1 7 2 1 0 / 4

1240

21

1 0 0 / 1

50061 78 200 / 4

1240 18

201

/ 2

1 24 0 2 9 9 4 0 /2

1240 19 501 /4

1247 82 500 /1

50252 27 100 /7

1 24 0 2 1 4 0 0 /5

1240 21 810 /5

1242 72 500 /8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

rubber bellow

connection ring,rubber be low,tub

lock ring,rubber bellow,cabinet

gasket,tub

GASKET

Trog,in front

DRUM,OUTER,REAR

Drum,complete

Shock absorber

drive belt, 1217J4

BEARING

Ballast,

rear,

bob,f ront ,13,5Kg Gl8/19

Spring,suspension,tub

retaining spring,heater

kit,drum paddle,45L

Pulley

Screw,clamp,pul ley,M8X24

Screw,lock,tub



531C

531D

563

591

999

1240 22 300 /6

1 24 9 2 7 3 0 0 / 2

1240 04 121 /8

50097 58 600 / 7

1240 22 000 /2

1 24 0 2 5 7 0 0 /4

A

A

A

A

A

A

Screw

Screw,bob,front

bolt,cushion

lock washer.pulley

Screw.bearing spider

CROSS PIECE DRUN

111




PNC

914789667

Model

EW402F

Pos

106

109

110

110A

H O B

H O C

H O G

111

112

114

118

120

130

130F

140

143

145

148

260

Part No.

1246 23 110 /2

1246 24 600 /1

1240 83 103 /0

1240 16 020 /8

1 2 4 0 1 6 2 1 0 / 5

1 24 6 6 0 4 1 2 /6

1247 34 230 /4

1245 07 840 /5

1240 88 110 /0

1240 83 233 /5

1246 24 510 /2

1 24 0 0 8 8 0 2 /9

1240 14 900 /3

1240 15 100 /9

1246 23 311 /6

1240 10 100 /4

1248 47 960 /0

1246 24 200 /0

1240 14 800 /5

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

jet,solenoid valve

conveyor.Container cup.detergent

drain hose,tub,manifold

Pipe

Breather hose

Pipe

Pipe,l=230mm

inlet hose,water

Draining hose

air chambe r.air

water distributor

Fluff strainer

sieve seal

sealing

Container cup,detergent

adjuster,distributor, water

Filter case

syphon

Spring,distributor,Container cup



307

338

509

509A

521

540C

541

541A

563

1246 24 310 /7

1 24 2 9 1 6 0 0 /3

1 24 7 4 2 8 0 0 /4

1 24 0 0 4 4 0 0 /6

1 24 0 0 8 6 1 0 /6

1246 64 600 /2

1 24 6 0 8 6 0 8 /4

1247 34 103 /3

1240 04 200 /0

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

detergent drawer,3SC/RID

end piece. Drainage hose

lever,water distributor

Cam lever

stopper,closure,fluff filter

Tube clip

Holder.piple

Holder,solenoid

bolt,distributor

520

SUPPLIED TOGETHER

LIVRES ENSEMBLE

ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT

FORNITI INSIEME



^ ^ 5 0 0 *

500A*


PNC

9 1 4 7 8 9 6 6 7

Model

EW402F

Pos

042

313

500

500A

502

510

51OA

519

520

523

525

525B

Part No.

1247 63 510 /3

50237 27 100 /7

1249 25 760 /9

1249 25 810 /2

1247 36 800 /2

1243 09 370 /3

1248 21 640 /8

1247 10 001 n

1240 37 003 /9

1 24 6 0 3 5 5 6 / 0

1247 36 000 /9

1247 98 403 /0

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

Lampholder.complete.green

TOP

Knob.timer

KNOB THERMOSTAT

Toggle bottom piece,(timer)

control panel.complete.silkscreened

programme card.(en)

cam,brown

Flange.bracket.thermostat

Bracket.command

Push button.keyboard

Push button.white.ON/OFF



Motor

H

CL

cn

—

d

rrr B>'

B l u e

Blue

Pressure swi tch

( A i r chamber

o n t u b )

Light-b lue

H h i l e

Blue

Brown

Bloct

Pink

I ight-b lue

V i o l e t

Oronge

1 2 4 , 3 3 6 9 5 /

^ ^

124 871833b

D o o r s a f e t y

i n t e r l o c k

White

V i o l e t

V i o l e t

D ra i n pump

3

Pilot lamp

11 )

Adjus tab le

t t iernos tot

-OFF button



Orange

C o p a c i

t o r

0:

Wtiile

B r o m

Brown

J u n c t i on box

, a

Blue

•

S u p e r r i n s i n g b u t t o n

3 l a c k

"srar

?BtACK:

P00ZP300000844

Adjustable thermostat

Air chamber on tub

Capacitor

Cold water inlet valve

Door safety interlok

Drain pump

Earth

Heating element earth

Heating elements (washing)



Air chamber on tub

Capacitor



Drain pump

Earth


Half load button

Junction box

Motor

Motor earth

No-spin button

ON/OFF button

Pilot lamp

Pressure switch

Super rinsing button

Timer motor

Tub earth

Violet

White

Red

Pink

Orange

Light-blue

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black

Half load button

Junction box

Motor

Motor earth

No-spin button

ON/OFF button

Pilot lamp

Pressure switch


Timer motor

Tub earth

Violet

White

Red

Pink

Orange

Light-blue

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black



O

N

/

O

F

F

b

u

t

t

o

n

^

^

H

e

a

t

e

l

e

m

e

n

t

s

(

w

a

s

h

n

g

'



,U

.Sd

„C

„

,

.e

.

.

.e

,

,Z

.

.

.

.

.

,

.

,

,

.

.

.

.

.

,

.Sd

(2

,J

.

.

a

l

N

d

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

C

z

o

1—

u

z

U

Q

3

Q

3

0

3

a

3

0

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

(

Q

3

3

z

S

1

m

oO

1O

0

0O

0O

0

o

0

0

0

0

0

OO

OO

OO

U

1

U

a

E

L

1

C

H

1

j

^

iN

i

z

L

o

6

8

U

9

9

n

e

Z

V

6

8

L

9

9

H

E

Z

L

O

6

L

9

9

»

£

I

\

e

O

U

I—

(

Gn

BA3

BQ

Q

O

m

<

u

4

n

E

T

i

-

i

i

1

I

1

1

I

1

C

1

-

i

1

I

i

I

1

i

I

I

1

1

I

I

1

I

1

C

C

e

C

o

•

m

S

m

£

æ

Ö

11

1

1

C

•

T

e

C

C

c

c

O

=

«

[

[

Y

[

[

T

[J

[

11

1

1

1

9

9

•

3

r

'C

;

M

1

1

I

1

1

1

.

>

-

3

;

:

:

.

>

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

(

i

O

C

O

0

(

—

k

C—

§

C

1

.

-

1

.

-

1

.

1

^

U

e

L

(

_

o

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

i

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

t

t

L

s

C

C

-

C

C

C

f

c

L

-

C

C

-

I

1

1

1

1

1

t

C

C

U

L

S

9

t

1

1

1

i

1

1

1

__

.

cQ

<

C

C

U

T

u

C

^

c

e

s

»

o

C

1

t

.w

1

1

1

1w

t

1

U

l

-

•

9

^

u

T

C

1

i

1

J

-

3

5

5

s

s

^

r

1



.

.

.

.

(

.

.

.

„C

N

3

3

3

3

(

a

3

n

o

0O

0

0

s

1

a

m

e

8

L

9

9

*

£

-

I

o

u

I

1

I

I

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

¥

\

1

1111

C

•

C

C

C

C

C

t

C

L

C

C

C

1

I

•

1

*

1

1

¥

¥

¥

•

1

1

Motor

=

Blue

B l a c I :

Pink

L igh l - b lue

V i o l e t

Orange

D U

3lue

Blue

Pr es su r e sw i t c t i

( A i r chamber

o n t u b )

T E

t i q t i l - b l u e

Vfliile

124 .33695 /

5 ^ ^

Blank

1 2 4 8 7 1 8 3 3 b

Door sofet

i n te r lock

W T F

V i o l e t

V i o l e t

Drain pump

3

Pilot lamp

31 )

A d j u s t a b l e

t h e r m o s t a t

«a

«a

O F F b u t t o n



Orange

Capoci t o r

0:

W h i t e

Junc t i o n box

B l u e


Black

"¥rar

2 B I A C K :

P00ZP300000844


Air chamber on tub

Capacitor



Drain pump

Earth





Air chamber on tub

Capacitor



Drain pump

Earth


Half load button

Junction box

Motor

Motor earth

No-spin button

ON/OFF button

Pilot lamp

Pressure switch


Timer motor

Tub earth

Violet

White

Red

Pink

Orange

Light-blue

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black

Half load button

Junction box

Motor

Motor earth

No-spin button

ON/OFF button

Pilot lamp

Pressure switch


Timer motor

Tub earth

Violet

White

Red

Pink

Orange

Light-blue

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black



O

O

b

o

H

n

e

e

m

e

s

I

w

n



a»

o

O)

a ™ _

B ^ = ^

S

A -a ^

E

E E æ

1 H S E

•= = a <=>

2 2 ? =

= a

0»

=

Q

» = „

^

a LU 3 OL

Program start

Rinse hold

Recirculation pump

:4:

Drain (half load)

Direct timer (esding

Healing

Motor (wasli)

Drain pump

1sl-2nd level

Cooling

*

Super rinse

-i-

2nd level

Motor (spin)

Motor (wash)

Motor (spin)

Reversing

Reversing

Capacitor (spin)

Spin

*NotforF50andF51

TliViE

(minutes)

FUNCTIONS

TUMBLING

TEMPERATURE

WATER

2

LEVEL

0

STEPS

A1-A2

13-T

B3-B4

12-T

B3-B5

12B

B3-B2

11-T

B3-B1

11-B

C4-C5

8-B

C2-C3

7-T

C1-C3

7-B

D3-D4

6-T

D3-D5

6-B

D3-D2

5-T

D3-D1

5-B

E3E4

4-T

E3E5

4-B

F1F2

36T

F1F3

36-B

F3F4

37-T

F3F5

37 B

D3-D1

38-B

1 1 i ii ii

ills

S S a l s S S S i S S S S S S S S i S o S o S o S o S o =

11 uumuuu

\

L I

M

M ™ ^ r

\ / \ n n /

I

__

A

1

^

J

i

•

•

•

H

B

2

•

-

—

_

•

•

•

•

H

3

~

—

5 sec

B

m

m

•

•

H

4

—

—

—

m

m

•

•

•

H

5

—

—

—

m

m

•

•

•

H i

6

•

—

—

4

•

•

•

•

IB

7

-

—

—

•

•

•

•

• 1

•

8

m

m

—

m

m

•

•

•

H

9

-

—

—

•

•

•

•

• 1

H

10

•

—

—

—

•

•

•

•

11

s

•

—

•

•

•

•

•

H

12

—

—

1

C

1

•

• i

•

•

IB

13

-

—

—

•

•

• •

•

•

H

14

—

—

—

E

m

•

•

•

H

15

—

—

—

•

•

•

•

• 1

H

16

^

—

—

—

m

m

• i

•

H

17

—

—

•

_

•

•

•

•

H

18

I

H

m

—

Ü

•

•

19

—

üi

•

_

•

•

•

•

•

•

IP

20

—

5

•

•

•

•

H

21

•

m

•

D_

•

•

•

• 1

•

B

22

5

1

—.

•

•

•

•

H

23

•

—

m

S

•

m

-

d

24

•

—

m

—

m

m

•

•

•

B

25

—

i"

_

m

m

•

•

n

~

26

•

—

—

E

H

-

•

• i

27

=

—

•

•

•

H

B

28

«J

'

S

•

•

•

H

29

—

—

—

m

•

•

•

•

30

—

—

—

E

•

•

•

• 1

[H

31

H

—

—

•

—

•

H

•

H

B

32

•

• 1

—

•

H

•

-

m

33

—

m

•

E_

E

•

•

•

m

34

•

•

—

•

H

35

•

E

m

300 se

''

låmnihinhhhii

1

1 1 1 1 III

1

i l l 1

UU

n

[

_ r T t n " 7 — : 1

[

o

U - U - L J

-Y_-_

S K S S § 5 5 S ? S ? S 5 § 5 S 5 a 5 S S S S S S §

G

36

—

E

•

d

^_

^^

H

37

—

m

m

H

•

•

•

•

•

—

^^

H

38

•

-

m

•

—

E

m

•

•

^_

^^

H

39

•

-

• 1

—

•

• 1

•

•

•

^_

^^

H

40

•

—

E

m

—

E

m

•

•

^

^

n

41

—

i i

•

J-

•

•

•

•

• 1

^_

^^

^

42

-

—

• 1

—

•

•

•

B

^_

^^

B

43

5

m

•

K

•

•

•

^_

B

B

44

•

m

•

—

E

m

•

^_

^*

H

45

—

E

m

—

E

m

•

^M

^^

45

•

—

m

m

—

E

m

•

•

^_

^*

•

47

•

-

5

•1

—

•

•

•

•

•

^_

^^

H

48

I

—

E

m

E

m

m

^_

^^

H

49

—

•

•

—

•

•

•

•

^^

^*

a i

50

5

i i

•

—

E

m

m

^_

^ *

H

51

5

i i

•

k

E

m

•

•

^_

^ *

62

n

•

—

•

H

•

^^

^^

•

53

—

fi

•

—

E

m

•

•

^_

^^

H

54

•

—

•

•

—

E

m

m

^—

^

H

55

•

—

E

1

—

E

m

•

•

"

^M

^*

•

56

I

A

m

—

•

•

•

^_

^^

•

57

s

—

—

•

58

5

r

M

•

•

H

59

L

—

E

H

60

—

—

124 309600C.EN

'•

"

4 -

•-l



=

J

V

c

=

A

c

.

^

ø

o

m

c

=

A

c

V

,

—

l

y

^

c

4

^



r

^

c

B] Electrolux

Tumble dryers,

E DE 425 M .60 , E DE 41 IM

• TWO TEM PERATURE SETTINGS,

COTTON AND SYNTHETIC

• ZIN C COATED STEEL CABINE T

• LARGE CAPACITY DRUM IN

STAINLESS STEE L

• EASILY OPERATED CON TROLS

• FILTEREASYTO REM OVE FOR



CLEANING

T h e E D E 4 2 5 M . 6 0 a nd E D E 4 1 I M a re

domestic type tumble dryers.

The machines are of simple and reliable

construti on a nd are easy to operate.

The drying tim e is selected by a time selector

T U M B L E D RY E RS, E D E 4 2 5 M .6 0 , E D E

41

I M

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm

1

1 = M I

c

-^

oo

' X

( 1 ) )

I

H -

45.

80

-440-

•510 H

600

1 7 0

570

4^

5 1 0 -

850

1. Rear exhaust 0 10 0 mm

2. Alternative exhaust - left or right side

3. E lectrical cord 1.6 m with earthed plug

Specification

M o d e l

16 70 49

E D E 4 1 1 M

Type

E D E 4 2 5 M . 6 0

E D E 4 1 1 M

M ax rated

capacity/load

kgs

5

Voltage V

2 3 0 1 - 6 0

2 3 0 1 - 5 0

Loading

k W

2.2

Fuse A

10

Weight kgs

net

28

gross

32

Sh ip p in g

volume

m3

0.400



Optional extras:

M o d e l

S T 0 0 2 7 0

Description

Stacking kit for mounting on top of washer extractor EW 401F or EW 643F

(separate instruaion delivered with machine)

Stacking ki t ST00270:

Bracket (2 pes.)

/ Round bar 0 6 (4x)

TUMBLE DRYER

INSTRUCTION BOOKLET



EDE 425

YOUR NEW TUMBLE DRYER

This tumble dryer will give your wash that soft, relaxed feel whatever the weather.

Extremely high quality standards both during development and manufacturing guarantee a long

service life for your appliance.

Maximum economy in the operation of your dryer is achieved through very frugal electricity

consumption and short drying times.

Energy saving tips

To save energy we recommend that you follow

these hints:

• Try to load the maximum capacity of the

machine as small loads are

uneconomical.

• Always load well spun laundry. The higher the

spin speed , the lower the electricity

consumption and the shorter the drying times.

• Do not over-dry laundry, this avoids creasing

and saves energy.

• Clean the filter regularly to avoid excessive

drying times and high electricity consum ption.

• Ventilate the room well. The room temperature

should not exceed +35°C during drying.

^ In the interest of tlie

environment

Materials marked with the symbol O are

recyclable.

Check with your local Council or

Environmental Health Office to see if there

are facilities in your area for re-cycling this

appliance.

When the appliance is to be scrapped, cut off

the power supply cable and make the door

closing device unusable to prevent young

children from being trapped inside.

Help to keep your country tidy - use

authorised disposal sites for your old

appliance.

How do we help to protect the environment?

We use recycled paper



Guide to use the Instruction Book

The following symbols will be found in the text to guide you throughout the instructions:

Safety instructions

LL I Hints and tips

CONTENTS

Warnings

Page

4

Descr ipt ion of t l ie appl iance Page 5

Installation Page 6

• Positioning Page

6

• Fitting the vent iios e Page

6-7

• Door reversal Page 8

• Electrical connection Page 8

• Stack ing kit (optional acce ssory ) Page

8

U s e Page

9

• Control panel Page 9

• Use of controls Page

9

• Drying Times Page 10

• Drying sequence Page 11

• Useful hints Page

12

Maintenance

Page

i3

• External cleaning Page

13

• Cleaning the door Page

13

• Clean ing the filter Page 13

Servicing Page 14



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A

WARNINGS

It is most important that this instruction book

should be retained with the appliance for

future reference. Should the appliance be

sold or transferred to another owner, or

should you move house and leave the

appliance, always ensure that the book is

supplied w ith the appliance in order that the

new owner can get to know the functioning of

the appliance and the relevant warnings.

• These warnings have been provided in the

interest of safety. You MUST read them

carefully before installing or using the

appliance.

INSTALLATION

• Any electrical work required to install this

appliance should be carried out by a qualified

electrician or competent person.

• Make sure that the appliance does not stand

on its electrical supply cable.

• If the machine is situated on a carpeted

floor,

please adjust the feet in order to a llow a ir to

circulate freely.

• This tumble dryer is designed to be vented

through to the open air. It should have its own

ventilation system which should not be joined

with any other ventilation system connected to

any other appliance.

• Do not operate the appliance with a damaged

filter as this may cause a fire.

• Do not overload the appliance.

• Do not allow fluff to accumulate around the

dryer.

SERVICE/REPAIR

• Under no circumstances should you attempt to

repair the machine yourself. Repairs carried

out by inexperienced persons may cause

injury or serious malfunctioning. Refer to your

local Electrolux Service Centre. Always insist

on genuine Electrolux spare parts.

GENERAL SAFETY

• It is dangerous to modify or try to modify the

specifications of this appliance in any way.

• This appliance is designed to be used by

adults. Children should not be allowed to

touch the controls or play with the product.

• Pets and small children may climb into tumble

dryers. Check your appliance each time before

use.

• Keep all packaging well away from children.

USE



Always unplug the appliance after use.

Clothes which are dripping wet should not be

placed in the

dryer.

Never tumble dry items that have been in

contact with chemicals such as dry

cleaning fluid. These are of a vo latile

nature and could cause an explosion.

DESCRiPTiON OF THE APPLIANCE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Worktop

Programme chart

Low Temperature Button

Cool Tumbling Button

Drying Time Selector D ial

IVIains-On Light

Rating Plate

Door Handle

Fluff filter

Adjustable feet

11 Side vent outlets

12 Ringnut

13 Rear vent outlet



INSTALLATION

Positioning

It is recommended that, for your convenience, the

machine is positioned close to your washing

machine.

Whilst drying, the tumble dryer w ill expel a certain

amount of warm, very moist air, and this should

be removed from the room as quickly as possible

to prevent condensation. In an extremely well

ventilated room or close to an open window, this

may occur naturally.

However, in general, it is better to carry the

dryer's exhaust outside via the 100 mm diameter

flexible hose supplied w ith the app liance; ending

either temporarily at an open window, orpermanently at a fixed ventilation grille, fitted to

an exterior wall or window.

The tumble dryer must be installed in a clean

place,

where dirt does not build up.

Make sure there are no obstructing items or

material near the air-intake louvres provided at

the back

(e.g.

paper, rags etc.).

To keep vibration and noise to a minimum when

the dryer is in use, it should be placed on a

firm,

level surface.

Once in its permanent operating position, check

that the dryer is absolutely level with the aid of a

spirit level. If it is not, raise or lower the two

adjustable feet at the front of the machine until it

is.

The feet must never be removed.

Do not restrict the floor clearance through

deep-pile carpets, strips of wood or similar.

This might cause heat build-up which would



interfere with the operation of the appliance.

Important

When operating the tumble dryer, the room

temperature must not exceed 35°C, as it may

Advice:

If the hose is long and the room

temperature low, the moisture might condense to

water inside the hose. This is an unavoidable

natural phenomenon.

To prevent this water from

lying in the hose or flowing back into the tumble

dryer,

it is advisable to drill a small hole (dia.

3 mm) in the lowest point of the hose and to

place a small container below it.(See picture,

point A).

Once connected to the

dryer,

run the vent hose to

the desired outlet point, ensuring that the run's

overall length is less than 2 m, and that it

contains no more than two bends. As to the outlet

itself,

if you have decided on a fixed wall/window

grille,

a good local builder's merchant should be

able to supply you with the necessary fittings and

installation advice.

Ä

It is important not to connect the

vent hose to, for example, a cooker

hood, or a chimney or flue pipe

designed to carry the exhaust froma fuel burning appliance.

Note that to avoid condensation problems, it is

essential that the dryer be fitted with the flexible

hose to carry its "exhaust" at least beyond the

kitchen units; preferable outside the kitchen.

In order to prevent the appliance from



overheating, it is important that the steam

exhaust is unobstructed.

Therefore, in case of a permanent hose fitted to

an exterior wall or ceiling, it must be ensured an

exhaust capacity of at least 150 m /h.

Door reversal

To make it easier to load or unload the laundry

the door can be reversed.

This operation m ust be carried out by

qualified personnel.

Operate as follows:

- Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws

(1) fastening the hinge to the cabinet

(Fig.

A).

- Remove the safety catch (2) and the plug (3) by

bending the two fastening tags (Fig. A).

- Refit the safety catch (2) and plug (3) on the

door by reversing their positions

(Fig.

B).

- Remove the plastic plate (4) by unscrewing the

two fastening screws (Fig. A).

- Refit the plastic plate (4) on the opposite side

(Fig.

B).

- Refit the door by screwing in the two screws (1)

which fasten the door to the cabinet

(Fig.

B).

mm

f P

\ *

K 3 J

\ / ' ^ C 3 ^ \ , ^

[ill r>i

r ^

™ 4

A

M? »

y-'"^ CD ^ \ y

''"ini ^/fv^V

/ 2 \ \ \

Electrical connection

This machine is designed to operate on a 220-

230 V, single-phase, 60 Hz supply.

Check that your domestic electrical installation

can take the maximum load required (2.2 kW),

also taking into account any other appliances in

use.

Stacking kit

A special stacking kit is available through your

dealer,

to enable the m ounting of the dryer on

top of your washing machine.



Connect the machine to an earthed socket, in

accordance with current wiring regulations.

Important

If the socket in your house is not earthed, you

have to do a separate earth connection using the

special green and yellow ground wire which you

USE

Control panel

ir

j]

s Electrolux

OO (

f°=^>v o /

) ) 1

2 3 4 5

1 Programme Chart

This will help you to select the correct time for

drying.

2 Low Temperature Button

V '

Press this button to reduce the temperature when

drying particularly delicate cotton or linen items.

In this case you should select a longer drying

time.

On the programmes for synthetics the

temperature is automatically reduced.

Therefore it is not necessary to depress this

button.

3 Cool Tumbling Button

%,

By depressing this button the heat is cut off. This

4 Drying Time Selector Dial

The selector dial incorporates two drying cycles,

one of up to 120 minutes at a high temperature

for cotton and linen, and one of up to 80 m inutes

at a low temperature for synthetic fabrics.

To set the machine to the selected time, turn the

dial clockwise until the time you want coincides

exactly with the pointer.

NEVER attempt to turn the dial in an

anticlockwise direction.

When selecting the drying time, you should

remember that it includes a 8 minute cooling

phase (position ^ on the dial).

This phase should not be sho rtened, stopped or

avoided,

as this could cause skin burns or

damages to the laundry.



is particularly useful to freshen the laundry (e.g.

to remove a persistent odour of moth-balls).

Additional drying

If at the end of the programme the laundry is still

too damp, set the dial for a further period of

drying (remembering to take into account the

cooling period).

Drying Times

Cottons

Selector

dial:

up to 120 minutes

Degree of drying required

Store dry

Iron dry

Synthetics

Selector dial: up to 80 m inutes

Degree of drying required

Store dry

Degree of

rpm

800-1000

1200

800-1000

1200

Degree of

rpm

650

spin given

spin given

Quantity

kg

5

2.5

5

2.5

5

2.5

5

2.5

Quantity

kg

2.5

1

Drying times

mins

85-105

60-75

80-100

55-70

75-95

40-55

70-90

35-50

Drying times

mins

50-60

30-35



Iron dry

650

0.5

2.5

25-30

40-50

T] Drying sequence

Before starting up for the first time it is advisable

lo load a few moist cloths into the dryer and to let

it run for about 20 minutes. This ensures that no

dust and dirt is left in the drum.

1.

Load the laundry

Open the door by pulling the catch fonwards.

Load the items one at a

time,

shaking them out

loosely and close the door.

Please check the laundry does not get caught

between the door and filter.

2. Select the required option

Depress Cool Tumbling or Low

Temp.

Buttton, if

desired.

3. Select the d rying time

Turn the selector dial clockwise to the desired

time,

in the high or low temperature section,

depending on the laundry: the mains-on light

illuminates and the machine starts operating.



4. Wh en drying is co mpleted

The machine stops automatically, the mains-on

light goes out.

I

Useful hints

Try to load to the maximum capacity of the

machine as small loads are uneconomical.

For information, here is a list of the average

weights of some common laundry items.

Sheet

Tablecloth

Kitchen towel

Table napkin

Towell ing ha nd towel

Bathrobe

Man's shirt

Pil lowcase

Man's pyjamas

Ladies' nightdress

7 0 0 -1 0 0 0 g

400 - 500 g

7 0 - 1 2 0 g

5 0 - 1 0 0 g

1 5 0 -2 5 0 g

1 0 0 0 -1 5 0 0 g

200 - 300 g

1 0 0 -2 0 0 g

400 - 500 g

200 - 250 g

Never tumble dry the following:

Particularly delicate items such as net curtains,

woollen, si lk, fabrics with metal

tr im,

nylon

tights, bulky materials such as an oraks,

blankets, eiderdowns, sleeping b ags, feather

quilts and any items containing rubber foam or

materials similar to rubber foam.

Always follow the instructions on garm ent

labels.

O norma l drying (high temperature)

O delicate drying (low temperature)

^ do not tumble dry

Knitted textiles (knitted undenwear) may shrink

a little during drying. Please do no t overdry

items of this type. It is advisable to allow for

shrinkage when choosing the size of new

purchases.

You can also put starched items into your

dryer. However, to achieve the desired

starched effect, choose the programm e "iron

dry". To remove any starch residues, wipe out

the internal drum after drying with a m oist cloth

and then rub it dry.

To avoid a static charge when drying is

comp leted, use either a fabric softener w hen

you are washing the laundry or a fabric

conditioner specifically for tumble dryers.

Remove the laundry when the dryer has

finished drying.

If individual items are still damp after drying,

set a brief post-drying time, but

at least 20

minutes. This will be necessary particularly for

multilayered items (e.g. collars, pockets, etc.).



Close pil lowcases and covers with fasteners to

prevent small laundry items getting tangled

inside them . Close press studs, zips and hooks

and tie belts and apron strings.

Sort laundry ac cording to type an d degree of

MAINTENANCE

You must disconnect the appliance from

the

electricity supply, before

you

can

carry

out any

cleaning

or

maintenance

work.

External cleaning

Use only soap and water and then dry

thoroughly

From time to

time,

apply a little wax furniture

cream with a soft cloth.

Important:

do not use methylated spirit, diluents

or similar products.

Cleaning the door

Clean periodically the interior part of the door to

remove any fluff.

Accurate cleaning ensures correct drying.

Cleaning th e filter

Your dryer will only function well if the filter is

clean.

The filter collects all the «fluff» which

accumulates during drying and it must therefore

be cleaned at the end of each programme w ith a

damp cloth.



The filter cannot be removed.

Do not be alarmed by the amount of fluff. It is not

due to excessive wear caused by the dryer. All

fabric loses fluff when drying but it goes un

noticed in the air. In a tumble dryer it simply

SERVICING

Before contacting your local Electrolux Service Centre, please make the following

checks:

Problem

The dryer does not start up

The dryer does not dry properly

Possible cause

•

The door is open.

• The plug is not fitted into the wall socket.

• There is no electricity supply from the wall

socket.

• The time selector dial is not set correctly.

• The filter is clogged.

• Insufficient drying time.

• The selected cycle is not suitable for the

laundry.

• Excessive laundry load.

• The dryer is not correctly installed.

If, after the above checks, there is s till a

fault,

call

your local Electrolux Service Centre.

Please make sure you give the model and serial

number of the appliance.

This information can be found on the rating plate

(see picture).

f\

b

0307/

Mcjd.,.,

Prod.

No

»

Ser. No

'•





æ

I ST R I

SERVICE MANUAL

TUMBLE-DRYERS



INDEX

Operating principle page

Constructional features page

Cabinet page

Drum page

Main electronic parts page

Heating unit page

Themnostats page

Timer page

Fan motor unit page

Accessibility & serviceability page

Worktop page

Timer page

Indicator light page

Door microsw itch page

Control panel page

Controls support page

Cabinet side page

Motor page

Capacitor page

Thermostat page

Back panel cover page

Heating element page

Rear drum support page

Back panel page

Drum page

Sealing felt ring page

Door page

Filter page

Door reversal page

5

5

5

7

7

7

8

8

9

9

9

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

12

12

12

13

13

13



OPERATING PRINCIPLE

1 - Heating unit

2 - Drum

3 - Door

4 - Filter



5- Fan

6 - Exhaust duct

CABINET

1 - Base

2 - Flexible hose

3 - Ring nut

4-Cap

5 - Back panel cover

6 - Back panel

7 - Side panels

8 - Cross piece

9 - Duct

10 - Front p anel

11 -Joint

12 - F ilter

Cabinet/Side panel/Back panel/I 1-

Parts made of painted sheet metal fastened together by means of self-threading screws and hooked to the

base.

The base is made of Carboran material.

DRUM



1 - Front flange

Air t ightness at the b acli

1 - Felt ring

2 - Drum

3 - Back panel

3—

Drum back support

4 - Antifrictior) washer

5 - "Benzing" ring

6 - Back panel

7 - Drum shaft

8 - Support provided with

a bushing fitted on the back panel

Front support and drum seal

9 - Supporting flange

10 - Felt ring

11 -Drum

Drum drive system



^

i

%

MAIN ELECTRICAL PARTS

HEATING UNIT

1 - Filament heating element

2 - Safety thermostat

3 - Manually resettable thermostat

4 - Ceramic boards

5 - Casing

Double-filament heating element provided with ceramic boards and galvanised sheet iron frame. The heating

element power can be, according to the models, 1400 + 600 or 1400 + 1000 W.

Two overheat protection thermostats are fastened to the casing.

Safety thermostat

Two thermostats are used to cut out the heating elements in case of ventilation failure.

Safety thermostat cut-out in case of ventilation failure (automatically resettable)

Safety thennostat cut-out In case of ventilation failure (manually resettable) by depressing the button

CYCLING THERMOSTAT



TIMER

- Electromechanical timer Including two timing sections for the drying time.

The first from 0 to 120 min. for drying fast fabrics.

The second from 0 to 80 min. for drying delicate fabrics. When the delicate fabrics section is selected one of

the heater branches is excluded.

It also includes fast cams for drum tumbling reversal and to exclude the heating function.

Manual rotation must always be clockwise.

FAN MOTOR UNIT



ACCESSIBILITY & SERVICEABILITY

FROM THE WORKTOP

- Disassemble the worktop by unscrewing the two back screws and sliding it out towards the back of the

machine

1 - Timer

2 - Indicator liglit

3 - Door microsw itcli

TIMER

Remove the knob (see figure), remove the knob flange (see figure);

undo the two fastening screws. On some models remove the control

panel before removing the knob.

INDICATOR LIGHT

Widen out the conveyor's back tags and

slide out the lamp.

DOOR MICROSWITCH

Disconnect leads from the microswitch, widen fastening tags and

slide it out upwards an d then inwards



CONTROL PANEL

Disengage it from the controls support interior (fastening teeth)

FROM THE RIGHT HAND SIDE

- Disassemble the worlctop

- Disassemble the right hand side by unscrewing the two top screws fastening it to the front panel and to the

back panel and then slide it out upwards and then outwards.

4 - Motor/fan unit

5 - Capacitor

6 - Tension spring

7 - Cycling thermostat

MOTOR

Disengage the tension spring, remove the belt from the pulley, disconnect the leads from the tenninal board

and from the condenser, disengage the tags fastening the front and back motor supports and rotate them

outwards until they slide out of their seatings.



CAPACITOR

FROM THE BACK PANEL COVER

Undo the screws fastening the back panel

9 - Heating element

10 - Back drum support

HEATING ELEMENT

Remove the two screws fastening it to the back panel, disconnect wiring.

SSAFETY THERMOSTATS



In case of failure, replace the whole heating unit.

FROM THE BACK PANEL

After having removed the back panel cover, remove the worktop, undo the screws provided at the top and

fastening the back panel to the cross bar and to the sides, and at the back undo the screws fastening the

back panel to the base, disengage the tags provided on the base and slide out the back panel.

3 - Door microswitch

4 - Motor

5 - Capacitor

7 - Cycling thermostat

14 - Front sealing felt ring

DRUM AND DRIVE BELT

They may be removed after having removed the back panel.

FRONT SEALING FELT RING

It may be removed after having removed the back panel.

BACK SEALING FELT RING

Widen out the back panel tags and slide out the back sealing felt ring



WARNINGI

ACCESS FROM THE DOOR

DOOR

To accede to the door undo the screws fastening the hinge

FILTER

To replace the filter screen, without disassembling the

front panel and the duct, operate as follows:

- take out the filter screen by means of pliers as shown

in figure. Make sure that the plastic supports are not

being damaged.

- fit the new filter

.-^-'^k.t..

Q

DOOR REVERSAL

On some models it is possible to reverse the door

opening.

Operate as follows:

1

Remove the door by unscrewing the two screws

fastening the hinge to the cabinet

2 - Remove the safety catch and the plug by

bending the two fastening tags by means of a

¥'y.

x?^-

k#'%

v ^^--4

r T - . - - -

—

- 4



screwdriver

3 - Remove the plug with a screwdriver by bending

the two fastening tags

s E l e c t r o l u x

Å

D I S T R I P Ä R T S 0 ^

SPARE PARTS LIST

Household drying equipment

4545

PNC

Brand Model Market

A 916092013 03 Electrolux EDE425M K R -P H



255A

^^ I12OB

20J

120A'1

523

A J

120c

130



Exploded view

no .

:P09163005230

PNC

916092013 0 3

Model

EDE425M

Pos

120

120A

120B

120C

130

130A

250

253

255A

262

520

520A

523

523A

538

550

Part

No.

1253 00 501 /9

1253 00

401 12

1253 06 101 1 2

1253

01

301 /3

1250 02

805/5

1250 12 920/0

1255 12 101

1 2

1255 02 810 /0

125013411

/ 9

1255 12710/0

1254 03 401 / 8

1250 23

203/8

1253 06 001 /4

1253 00 801 /3

50099 25 000 / 8

1255 06 107 /7

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

Filter.upper

Flter,

lower

Assembly,filter,upper

Assembly,filter,bottom

Sealing,drum,in front

Gasket.back,

basket

Storage basket,complete,inox,ZK SM/DOOR

NEX1 (3R)

Drive belts, 1=1884

Bearing,back,complete

Drum paddle

Flange,

reinforcement, bearing

Assembly,flange,bolt

Bracket,filter,upper

Carrier,filter,bottom

Spacer washer

Coat, bolt, basket



-309




PNC

9 1 6 0 9 2 0 1 3 0 3

Model

EDE425M

Pos

110

130

130A

135

260

260A

303

308

309

312

322

323

324

325

326

330

334

520

520A

521

521A

523

527

530

Part No.

1250 22 010 /8

1250 00 1 0 3 /7

1250 97 810 /1

1254 02 209 /6

1240 13 900 /4

1 25 0 2 0 2 0 0 /7

1254 27 120 /6

1250 07 800 /1

1254 00 300 /5

1 25 0 0 6 7 0 0 /4

1250 09 304 /2

1250 24 910 /7

1254 02 1 1 0 /6

1250 07 000 /8

1254 26 402 /9

1 25 4 2 6 4 1 2 /8

1250 11 902 /9

1254 26 512 /5

1250 03 901 /1

1250 06 800 /2

1 25 0 0 7 2 0 0 /4

1250 09 000 /6

1254 16 000 /3

1250 09 100 /4

1242 06 000 /0

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

Steam exhaust hose,flexible,2.5 m.

Sealing

Sealing,conductor

Channel drainage,SOFT

Spring,Catch,porthole

Spring

Stand,NX1

Hinge,buirs eye

Cover,Back panel.NEXUS 1/4

Bull's eye

Cross girder,upper

Frame,bull 's eye

Front panel.white.

Hook,bull 's eye

Side panel,left,Z V/B NEXU S4 VENT.

Side panel,r ight,Z V/B N EXUS VENT .

Foot

Back panel,NEXUS4

Flange,Catch

Flange.buH's eye,behind

Feed plunger

Lid

Bracket,Harness,NEX/4 COND.

Ferrule,DX 0502B

Handle,porthole



550A

563A

563C

1254 30 405 /6

1240 13 800 /6

1250 07 1 0 0 /6

A

A

A

Coat,Back panei.NXI

Bolt, Catch, porthole

Peg,mikroswitch

SUPPLIED TOGETHER

LIVRES ENSEMBLE

ZUSAMMEN GELIEFERT

FORNITI INSIEME

502

5 1 0 *




PNC

916092013 03

Model

EDE425M

Pos

042

313

500

502

510

51OA

523

525

Part No.

1 24 7 6 3 4 1 0 /6

1 25 0 3 4 4 0 0 /7

1254 11 311 / 9

1254 02 901 /8

1254 11 170 /9

1254 16 302 /3

1254 02 013 /2

1247 36 000 /9

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

Lampholder,assy,green

Table top, P5 IS ALFA

Dial,si ikscreened

Toggle bottom piece

Control panel,complete,silk-screened

Programme plate,(en)

Bracket,command,SOFT

Push button,keyboard



523A



Exploded view no . :P09163005233

PNC

916092013 03

Model

EDE425M

Pos

Part

No.

001

003A

004

010

Oil

013

016

019A

037

159

260A

523

523A

999

1251 10 621 /5

1250 02 420/3

1252 05 707/8

1254 36 500/8

1250 02 032/6

1249 27 100/6

50220 74 700 / 5

50252 51 500/7

1254 22 720/8

1250 01 911/2

1250 01 500/3

1250 36 200/9

1254 03

503/1

1254 37 000/8

1254 37 100/6

3792 81 700 / 3

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

Description

Timer.RID

150

ELBI

TB

Thermostat,54°c

Assembly,main motor,+RIDUTT.SOLE 60HZ

Heater,230/1400+600

I

RCA

Interference capacitor,8MF DUCATI

Keyboard, I D

ROLD

Switch,bull 's eye

Pilot light

Connection box,ITW

Fan wheel

Spring

Assembly,motor holder,front

Assembly,motor holder

Harness

Harness

Supply cable,3X1 X I6 0 0



Product specification 91609201303 EDE425M

General data

Power supply:

Dinnensions (H xW xD):

Cavity volume:

Rotary speed:

Absorbed

power:

General features

Timer

Type:

Cycling thermostat

Temperature:

Heating element

Absorbed power:

Resistance:

Absorbed power:

Resistance:

Heating thermostat:

Safety thermostat:

Main motor

Insulating class:

Absorbed

power:

220 / 60 V/Hz

85x60x57 cm.

108 dm3

55 g/m

2200 W

125 110621

54 °C

1 4 0 0 W

33,5 Ohm

600 W

78 Ohm

92 °C

160 °C

F

140 W



Rotary speed:

Absorbed current:

2600 g/m

1,2 A

(/i

z

Q C 5 C 5 Ü I O C 3 0 0 O C 3 C J C 5 C J C 3 0 Ü J C C 3 O

1— Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z

Q. L D m m u J L U u J i J U u j m L O m u J i i j m L u a l m m L i J L i j m L D m L D m i i J u j m O

Heating B3-B2(b4)

Heating C4-C1(b2)

Line A1-A2(t5)

Motor D4-D1(t32)

Motor D4-D2(b32)

Heating element D4 -DS (b3 1)

125 110621

1

M

^

1 1

300sec ^

125 110621 .EN



125 433600b

M o t o r c a p a c i

t o r

hieat i n g element

Motor

nMJl

Junction box +

A n t i - i n t e r f e r e n c e

f i

I ter

T T



P0PLY300000042

Anti-interference filter Anti-interference filter

Cool button Cool button

Door switch Door switch

Earth Earth

Heating elements Heating elements

Junction box Junction box

Low temperature button Low temperature button

Mains-on light Mains-on light

Motor Motor

Motor capacitor Motor capacitor

Overheat protection thermostat

Overheat protection thermostat

Thermostat

Timer motor

Violet

Transparent

Red

Green-yellow

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black

Thermostat

Timer motor

Violet

Transparent

Red

Green-yellow

Grey

Brown

Blue

Black



125 433600c

Q.

3

— o —

o—o-

A-1

o

A n t i i n t e r f e r e n c e

^ • • [ e r

^ 1

N

E o r t t i

d e a r t h

o n l

M o i n s o n I i g h t

A 2

— < ?

D o o r s w i t e

T i m e r m o t o r

M

.

—

.

T i i e rmos ta t

3-4

Motor copocitor

D-4

i

D-5

CD

I B - 4 ( C 4 )

C-1

. B - 3

^•6-2

Cool but ton

:i \i

O v e r h e a t p r o t e c t i o n

t h e r m o s t a t s

I l ü 0 0 6 0 0 « h

i 1400 W H

T h e r m o s t a t

3.



D o o r s w i I c h

]

» K O M M 1 —



m

=

^

c

=

A

=

A

^

y

=

A

=

^

e

r

^



LOiPART

Washer extractor, W455H

j j ) f fg ig-gBaipw gr '" i fe

^yöseoSy

" • ^ ^

"•"»«fiiHIIIIHIIIIHIIIÜH.

, t«9s»., . j iMt/

• COM PASS CON TROL

MICROPROCESSOR

• AWS SYSTEM FOR PRECISE WATER

DOSAGE

• HIGH EXTRACTION FORCE

• STAINLESS AN D GALVANIZED

STEEL IN ALL VITAL PARTS

• POWDER PAINTE D CABINE T

• ENAM ELLED FRONT PANEL

• SLIP-LOCK DOO R HAN DLE

• WATER-OPERATED DRAIN

VALVE

Washer extractor W455H with Compass

Control microprocessor offers fast efficient

wash programs for normal textiles, mixed

fabrics and wool. Th e start and programs are

selected by a control knob fitted on the

control pane l together with a large and clear

display. Th e display presents the available

washing programs, options and addiuonal

functions. The machine is fitted with two

Qui ck Start button s for choosing

two

preset

washing programs.

Thanks to the Automatic Weighing System

(AWS) the machine works with precise water

dosage. T he high extraction force guarantees

an efficient dewatering. The machine is

equipped with front moim ted four com part

men t

soap

box.

Th e door is wi th gasket and strong hinges is

built for heavy duty operatio n and provi ded



wi th slip-lock handle for easy operation and

WASHER EXTRACTOR W455H

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm

g i = ] 0

5 9 5 -

1. Control panel

2.

Three compartment soap box

3.

Door opening 0 255 mm

4. Cold water conn eaio n R 3/4" (DN 20) , rec. water pressure 200-500 kPa

5. Hot water connea ion R 3/4" (DN 20 ) , rec. water pressure 200-50 0 kPa

6. Drain outlet 0 50 mm ext., capacity 160 1/min.

7. Elearical connection, cable 1.5 m

Drain hose, dimensions:

4 8 0 -

(Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain

outlet and install so it empties min 25 mm

above the floor drain or waste water channel.)

Posit ioning of machines:

20

- 5 9 5 -

20

min. 20*

6 8 0

* rec. 500

M arine installation:

M 10

M arin e installation (see below):

N O T E

The maxim tmi value for rolling is ± 1 5 ° and for

stamping ±8°.

The m achine should be bolted to the founda

tion ace. to instructions in Installation m an

ual, M arine installation.

Specification

M o d e l /Ty p e

Capacity,

filling factor

In n e r d ru m

*

Voltage V

Total rating

kW

Fuse A

Weight kgs

Sh ip p in g

volume m^



1:10 kgs

volume litres

d ia me te r mm

d e p th mm net gross

Installation manual

W450H, W455H

438 9067-51

0 5 . 0 3



Contents

Contents

Technical data 3

Installation 7

Siting 7

Mountings 8

Mechanical installation 9

Water supply 10

Drain 11

Electrical installation 12

Machine connection options 13

Connection of external liquid supplies 14

Function checks 17

Marine installation 18

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design, material and/or

specifications without notice.

\ Safety /\

This machine can only be used with water. Never use dry cleaning

agents.



Technical data

Technical data

Innerdrum, volume

diameter

depth

Drum speed

wash

extraction

Heating

electricity

steam

hot water

G-factor

Weight, net

litres

mm

mm

rpm

kg

W450H

53

452

332

35/54

1100

4.4

X

305

102

W455H

53

452

332

35/54

1300

4.4

X

425

102

Connections

Water valves connection

BSP

DN20

3/4"

Capacity at 300 kPa

l/min

1 7

Drain valve outer 0 mm

50

Draining capacity l/min

1 6 0



Technical data

1

2

3

4

5

e

7

8

Control panel

Soap box

Door opening ø255

Cold water

Hot water

Drain,

valve

Drain, pump

Electrical connection

A

595

B

680

C

850/875*

&

3 0 5

E

660

F

8 0

Gi

1 9 5

U

60

«

9 0

K

80

L

6 5 0

' Adjustable height, 25 mm

H-H=^

/

\

\

c

F



; r^

Technical data

A = Standard

B = With insulation

* = Wash/extraction

Frequency of the

dynamic force Hz

Max floor load

at extraction kN

Sound leve ls

Solid sound level in dB (A)

re 10-3 mm/sec (44-707 Hz)

Airborne sound level

dB (A) re 2x105 Pa

Vibration level

(m/sec^)

Vibration speed

(mm/sec)

20

1.2±0.3

A

76

51/71*

0.36

57

B

62

45/59*

0.66

83



Installation

Installation

Leave the machine on the pallet on which it was

delivered until the installation site has been

prepared to receive it.

r(^

Siting

Fig.

©

Install the machine close to a floor drain or open

waste water channel.

The following clearances are recommended for

easier installation and servicing:

• at least 500 mm between the machine and the

wall behind it.

• at least 50 mm on each side of the machine,

whether it is next to a wall or to other

machines.

A clearance of 70 mm may be required

between the machine and the 130-litre tumble

dryer depending on which way the dryer's door

opens.

Rec.

500 mm



Installation

Mountings

In transit the m achine's drum is locked in place

by three locking devices between chassis and

drum.

Instructions for installing machine and removing

transit locking devices, step by step:

• Remove the packaging.

• Remove the components shipped inside the

drum.

Remove the front panel by undoing the two

screws on its bottom edge.

Remove the rear panel by undoing the

screws.

Remove the three transport securities, one at

the front and two at the back. Save the

transport securities if the machine needs to be

moved sometime in the future.

The machine can be lifted in bottom frame.

Fig.

©

Fig.

©

r<^



Installation

Mechanical installation

• Mark and drill 2 holes (0 8 mm) about 40 mm

deep in the positions shown.

A

530

B

490

C

35

D

125

E

290

F

150

G

40

H

50

• = position of feet

O = drilling points for expander bolts

• The machine shall be lifted in the bottom

frame.

• Place the machine over the two drilled holes.

• Check that the machine is placed in level.

Adjust with the feet.

I

I

It is of utmost importance that the machine

is placed in leve l, from s ide to side as well

as front to rear. If the machine is not

properly leveled, It may result in out-of-

balance without a real out of balance in the

drum.

Insert the expansion bolts supplied in the

holes drilled in the floor. Fit the washers and



10

Installation

Water supply

X T )

Each water supply line to the machine should be

fitted with a manual shut-off valve and debris filter

to facilitate servicing. Check the local regulations

to determine whether non-return valves are

required.

Connection hoses should be of the quality

required according to regulations in the country of

use.

Water pressures:

minimum:

60 kPa (0.5 kp/cm2)

maximum: 0.5 MPa (5 kp/cm2)

recommended: 0.2-0.5 MPa (2-5 kp/cm2)

Hoses and pipes should be flushed through

before being connected to the machine. Make

sure the hoses have no sharp bends or angles.

The machine can have one or two supply hoses,

DN 20 (R 3/4").

Fig.

©

Fig.

©

Fig.

©

r<2>

Machine with cold water intake only.

Machine with hot and cold water intake.

Machine w ith hot and cold water intake, but

plumbed for cold only because hot not available.

Both valves must be connected even if there is

only one water supply present.

r(2>



Installation

11

Drain

Direct discharge

Fig- Attach the drain hose to the machine's drain

(T ) outlet and install so it empties (min 25 mm)

above the floor drain or waste water channel.

Pump drain

F'9- Position the h ighest part of the drain hose

(2 ) 650±50 mm above the lowest part of the

machine.

Make sure that there are no kinks in the hose.

r

r<^

650

I +50 mm



12

Installation

Electrical installation

A

ås

Electrical installation m ust be carried out by an authorised electrician.

Fig.

©

• Install a multi-pole switch for the machine's electrical supply.

• Connect the machine's cable to the switch.

•

Checl<

that the earth has been connected in the correct way.

Fuse ratings are given in the table.

For the rating of the supply cable, check the local regulations.

Min.

outer diameter for supply cable 0IO mm.

r<^

Heating type

type

Voltage

type

Total rating

kW

El.

4.4 kW 400-415V 3NAC 50 Hz

El.

4.4 kW 230V 3AC 50/60 Hz

El.

4.4 kW 230-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz

El.

2,2 kW 208-230V 1 AC 50 Hz

El.

3.0 kW 380V 3AC T 50/60 Hz

El.

3.3 kW 400V 3AC T 50/60 Hz

EI. 3-3 kW 200V 3AC 50/60 Hz

EL 4.0 kW 44QV 3AC T 50/60

H z

El.

2,2 kW

208-240V1 AC

50/60 Hz

Non heated 208-240V 1 AC 50/60 Hz

200V 1AC 50/60 Hz

Fuse

A

4.7

4.8

4.8

2.7

3.5

aa

as

4.5

2.7

0.9

1.1

10

20

25

16

10

10

16

10

16

10

10



Installation

13

Machine connection options

Æ

A

witchover or reconnection of the machine

may on ly be performed by qualified,

authorised personnel.

Til is macli ine can be switched/reconnected

foilowing the options set out below.

I I

The machine cannot be switched from

50 Hz to 60 Hz or vice versa.

1

f

Reconnection/switchover of this type

cannot be performed on machines fitted

with a transformer.

Fig.

0 Connection option 400 V 3NA C 4.4 kW

Fig.

© Connection option 230 V 3AC 4.4 kW

Fig.

0 Connection option 230 V 1 AC 4.4 kW

Fig.

0 Connection option 230 V

1

AC 2.7 kW

I f

In cases where the machine data plate

Xi>

301 302 L 303

r

4AI<W

r-



14

Installation

Connection of external liquid

supplies

Machines fitted with connectors.

• Connect the pump equipment to connections

Fig.

A and B on the washing machine.

(T ) Connect the signal cable to B and the power

supply to A.

l\/lachines without co nnectors.

• Connect the external pump equipment for

liquid washing detergent to the 1/0 board,

which is located to the right of the incoming

power supply.

The I/O card has edge connectors for

connecting external pumps.

r

r^

J

Ö

O



Installation

15

Fig-

©

Fig.

©

Outputs

• Connect external power supply (e.g. 24V DC)

for pumps to 9 and 10. If an internal power

supply (from the washing machine) is being

used, it can be taken from 1 (N) and connec

ted to 9 and from 2 (L) and connected to 10.

Connection 11 is neutral. Max load on the

outputs 0.5 A .

• Signals for pumps

1 -4

are connected to 12-15

where connector

12

13

14

15

Inputs

Washing detergent signal 1




The signal level can be 5-24V DC/AC or 100-

240V

AC.

For

5-24V,

the signal reference is

connected to 3 and for 100-240V to 4.

Potentials on the inputs cannot be mixed.

NB

The I/O board will be damaged if the

voltage on connection 3 is too high, >24V.

Connection 8 can be connected if the washing

program is to pause, e.g. while washing

detergent is being dosed.

r (3>

si

n S -

-Q-

«O-tJ

N Q

II

« Q lopte Inp-I—

« S l0PI0 lw>4-

m Q iontotnp-t-

Opto iflp*r

«0^

C M Q -

Coni»44ACn>C

Com 1(I0-240AC

Input 1

Input 2

Inputs

Input 4

it1

Output2

Outputs

Output4

Outputs

r<^

Dosing system

OV o_

Pause s ignal

; :§^

-\\-

n Q lOpto lnp.h

^ Q lOpto Inp-h

Com 100-24 .^.

Input 1

Input 2



16

Installation

r - (§>

Detergent tank

1 1

\

]

1 7

~

Ö 1

Ö 2

e

Ö 4

y '

©

e

e

e

e

e

e

Interiock out

«O 0 lOpto lnp.h

C M Q -

Co m 5-24AC/DC

Com 100-240AC

Input

1

Input 2

Inputs

Input 4

Fig.

©

Fig

Connection 7. If this is connected, an error

message w ill be displayed

if

any of thechemical tanks are empty. The washing

program will continue, however.

Fit the connecting unions provided and

connect the hoses to the unions.

r(I>



Installation

17

Function checks

Perform the following checks once the machine is

installed:

r<J>

Fig

©

Fig

©

• Open the manual water valves.

• Turn on the power at the external switch.

• Put detergent into compartment 2 (Main wash).

• Select a 60° program with the control knob (1).

• Press the knob.

Check:

• that the drum rotates normally and that there

are no unusual noises.

• that there are no leaks in water supply/drain

connections.

• that water passes through the detergent

compartment and fabric conditioner

compartments.

• that the door cannot be opened during a

program.

@

6217,6179,6182

r<iy



18

Installation

Marine installation

This machine can be installed in marine

installation.

r<^

I I

The maximum value for rolling is ± 15° and

for stamping ±8°.

Fig

©

Fig

©

Fig

©

Fig

©

The machine shall be placed as shown in fig.

Mark the two holes (A) on the floor plate on the

site of machine installation.

Drill the two holes with ø 8.5 mm.

Thread the holes with M 10.

r

r®-

* D



Installation

19

Fig

©

Fig

®

Fig

®

Thread up the four feet of the machine as

much as possible.

Place the machine at its site.

Place the spacers (B) between machine and

floor.

Tighten the machine to the floor with the two

bolts.

Adjust the feet of the machine to the floor and

lock them with the nuts.

r<5>

S "

^





Operating Manual

W450H, W455H

xxxxxxx-xx

04.50



Contents

Contents

General 1

Control Panel 1

Control knob 1

Display 2

Preset buttons 2

Washing Program 3

Start Menu 4

Start 4

Options 4

Delayed start 7

Info 7

Auto restart 7

Go back 7

Washing Functions 8

Start 8

Rapid advance 8

Pause 8

Changing washing program after starting 8

Detergent Drawer 9

Display Information 10

Handling 11

Starting With Preset Button 11

Starting With Control Knob 11

Error Messages 13

Maintenance 15

The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design and

material specifications.

A Safety / ^



General

Control Panel

F'9- The control panel is used to choose the washing program with options and

1) to start and stop the machine. The panel houses a control knob and a display.

Some machines also have two preset buttons.

r

Preset buttons

Display

Control knob

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Control knob

r<iy

Fig.

©

Fig.

©

The control knob is used to select washing

program,

options and any other available

functions.

Turn the knob until the required option is shown

on the display.

Confirm your choice by pushing in the knob.

Repeat this procedure until all the required

options have been chosen.

V^

r®-

6180



General

Display

Fic|. The display presents the available washing

(T) programs, options and additional functions. The

up and down arrows on the right-hand side of the

display indicate that there are more options ava il

able in the current menu.

While in operation, the display also shows other

information intended for the

user;

refer to the

heading "Display Information".

Note

If there is not enough room to show all the

text on the display, the first part will be dis

played briefly before the text scrolls to the

side to display the second part. This sequen

ce will be repeated as long the text in ques

tion is activated.

r®-

s

reset buttons

Fig- The machine can be fitted with two buttons for

choosing two preset washing programs.

Pushing one of these buttons will activate the

corresponding washing program directly and the

machine will start automatically.

Refer to the section "Programming the Preset

Buttons" in the programming manual for how to

program the preset buttons alternative 2.

NORMAL

r(5>

Alternative 1 Alternative 2

O

1-

e



General

Fi(

Washing Program

On delivery, the machine is programmed with

a washing program family

(e.g.

Economy,

Sport, etc.) con taining up to 8 different washing

programs adapted to the range of uses to which

the machine is intended. The washing programs

differ depending on the family to which they

belong.

The following washing programs can be

available:

7 ) Washing program Normal, max 95°C.

Washing program Normal, max 60°C.

8} Washing program Normal, max 40°C.

Washing program Perma-Press, max 60°C.

Half

load.

Washing program Perma-Press, max 40°C.

Half

load.

Washing program Delicate, max 30°C.

Half

load.

S

Fig.

Fig.

3 )

Ä Washing program Handwash,

^ max

30°C.

Half

load.

r^Sh

r^zh:

r<iy-.

r<Ih:

r ^

NORMAL 90

60

NORMAI. 60

HO

NORMAI. 40

FP 60

HO

PP 40

6183



General

Start Menu

^ A start menu will appear on the display once a

@ washing program has been selected. Here, you

can complement the selected washing program

with up to two options (on certain machines),

sel-ect how the machine is to start and obtain

information on the selected washing program.

Refer to the respective headings for more

information.

Start

The washing program starts immediately after

pressing the control knob.

Options

Fig.

Before starting, the selected washing program

(u ) can be complemented with up to two options.

The activated option is indicated on the display

under the name of the washing program as

"Option

1",

"Option 2", etc. The following options

can be available:

"PRERINSES"

S

The selected washing program is complemented

with two prerinses of 2 m inutes each.

"PREWASH"

Rg. Alt. 1: The selected washing program is comple-

@ mented with a cold prewash for 6 minutes.

Alt. 2: The selected washing program is comple

mented with a 40° prewash for 5 minutes.

"HEAVY SOILED"

Alt. 1

The selected washing program is comple

START

OPTION

DELAY START

INFO

AUTO RESTART

GO BACK

HS>-

IH3N0RMAL 60

OPnoNi •

{OPTION

Activated

option

6210^

r©-

SELECT OPTION

PRERINSES

r^

SELECT OPTION

t

PREWASH

4



General


mented with a 30° prewash for 6 minutes,

main wash extended 4 m inutes.


mented with a 30° prewash for 5 minutes,

the main wash is extended for 4 minutes

and at temperatures above 40°, the tem

perature is increased by 5°.

"NO PREWASH"

Ra Prewash will be excluded from the selected

@ washing program.

"LIGHT SOILED"

Fjg- The temperature is lowered 5° and the main

(}y wash shortened by 4 minutes.

"QUICK WA SH"

Ficj.

The machine excludes the selected washing

(20) program's prewash and shortens spin drying

by 2 m inutes.

"HIGHER LEVEL"

Fig. All the levels for the selected washing program

@

are increased by 5 units.

"RINSE S TOP"

Fi^

The selected washing program stops before the

(22) final rinse. To fill with water and continue with

the washing program, the control knob must be

pressed in.

r ^

r^

r^

r^

r^

SELECT OPTION

t

NO PREWASH

SELECT OPTION

t

LIGHT SOILED

SELECT OPTION

t

QUICK WASH

SELECT OPTION

t

HIGHER LEVEL

SELECT OPTION

t

RINSE STOP

i

_ /

"N

„y

• >



General

"GENTLE EXTRACTION"

3)

Alt. 1: Spin drying in the selected washing pro

gram is excluded between rinses and the

final spin dry is 20 seconds.

Alt. 2: Spin drying in the selected washing pro

gram is excluded between rinses and the

final spin dry is 2 m inutes.

"SHORT EXTRACTION"

Fig. Final spin dry in selected washing program is

(25) shortened by 4 minutes.

"EXTRA EXTRACTION"

^

Final spin dry in selected washing program is

extended by

2 m inutes.

"EXTRACTION (TIME)."

Fig-

The duration of the final spin dry in the selected

@ washing program can be set to 10 seconds, 15

seconds, 30 seconds or 4 minutes.

r^

r^

r^

SELECT OPTION

f

GENTLE

i

SELECT OPTION

t

SHORT

SELECT OPTION

i

EXTRA

i

Hg^.

SELECT OPTION

t

EXTRACTION



General

S )

Delayed start

In this m enu, you can set a delay of up to 99

hours and 59 minutes before the machine starts

the selected washing program.

The arrow in the menu indicates the column

being adjusted. Turn the l<nob clocl<wise to set

the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise

to move to the next

column.

Press the knob to

confirm after completing the settings.

The time left to start starts when the setting has

been confirmed.

It will be indicated on the d isplay if the selected

washing program does not allow this function.

Info

This menu presents information on the selected

washing program.

Auto restart

Fi(

^ 1

S )

In this menu, you can set the number of times

the machine will automatically restart the

selected washing program, up to 999 times.

The arrow in the menu indicates the column

being adjusted. Turn the knob clockwise to set

the desired number. Turn the knob anticlockwise

to move to the next column. Press the knob to

confirm after completing the settings.

The machine will start straight away once the

number has been confirmed.

The auto restart function will be zeroed after

using the rapid advance function in the selected

washing program.

It will be indicated on the display if the selected

r ^

imNQRHAL

6D

DELAYED START

HOURtHIITOTES

0 0 : 0 0

r ^

NOT

ALLOWED

FUNCTION

r@"

xxxx

r^

IffiJNORHAL 6D

AUTO RESTARTS

0000

i



General

Washing Functions

START

pS :

Turn the control knob to the START row. Press

(32) the knob to start the selected program.

F15- On machines equipped with preset buttons, the

(33) preset washing program can be started with the

respective button.

RAPID ADVANCE

Turn the control knob while the washing program

is in progress.

The different steps of the washing program will

be shown on the display. Turn the knob to the

desired program step and press. The m achine

will now jump to the selected step and continue

the program from there.

PAUSE

3)

Press the control knob to turn on the pause

function.

Restart the washing program by

pressing the control knob again.

Note

The door will be locked and the drain valve

closed during the pause.

Changing wa shing program after starting

p9:

Press the control knob to start the pause

(^ function. Turn the control knob to the new

program and press.

The water will be emptied from the machine, after

which it will start from the beginning of the new

washing program.

Activated

option

LBSüNORMAL 6G

OPHDNl

•START

r@>-

Alternative

r ^

r@"

RAPID ADU.

HAINW AS H 1

HAINH&SH 3

DRAIN 1

EXTRACTION 1

r®-



General

Detergent Drawer

( M ^

\ I / Pi'ewash, powder or liquid detergent

\ 11 / Main

wash.

Two compartments, one for

»— ' powder detergent and one for liquid.

Fabric softener, liquid



10

General

Display Information

Fig- During the

wash,

the remaining time for the

selected washing program will be shown at the

bottom of the display. The time is given in minutes.

To calculate the remaining time , the machine uses

a model calculation based on average times.

r®-

liSUNORNAL Sn

MAINUA5H1

TIME LEFT

2G



IHandling

Starting With Preset Button

• Empty any pockets.

S

ä)

r

Add the correct amount of detergent and

softener.

Note

Refer to the dosages on the detergent

packaging. Do not overdose.

Press the preset button for the desired

program.

If the machine has a slot meter, insert the

correct money/tokens.

Note

Pushing one of these buttons w ill activate

the correspondlngwashing program

directly and the machine will start

automatically.

\ii ® vlly

6250

r^



Handling

Start ing With Control K nob

Fi(

S

?^

Select the desired washing program with the

control knob and confirm by pressing the

knob.

Add any options to the selected washing

program. Select from the list with the control

knob and confirm by pressing the knob.

Note

Max two options can be chosen for

eachwashing program

If the machine has a slot meter, insert the

correct money/tokens.

Add the correct amount of detergent and

softener.

Note

Refer to the dosages on the detergent

packaging. Do not overdose.

Select START with the con trol knob and press

the knob.

r

r<£>

60

IKINORMAL

6U

D P nO N l

t OPTION

r®-

l ^NORMAL 6Ü

DPnONl

• START

6179/6180



Error codes

Error Messages

Fig. A fault in the program or in the machine is

(T ) indicated by an error message comprising

an error code and a descriptive text.

The washing program and the error code can

be reset before restarting by holding in the

START button/knob for at least 10 seconds

or turning off the power to the machine.

r<^

CodeText Cause/Action

001 NO WATER

002 DOOR OPEN

003 DOOR LOCK FAIL

007 OVERFILLED

010 WATER LEFT

Water level acknowledgement not received in time.

IVIake sure the water cocks are open.

Door position acknowledgement not received during

program.

Open and close the

door.

Door lock acknowledgement not received in time. Open

and close the

door.

Water level above established safety limits during

program. Try to restart the machine.

Water above established level after

drain.

Make sure

the drain is not blocked by lint or

foam.

Try to restart the

machine.

Contact service personnel for other error messages.



Maintenance

Maintenance

Daily

• Clean the door seal from detergent residue.

• Make sure the door is not leaking.

• Clean the detergent drawer and wipe off the machine with a damp rag.

• Make sure the drain valve is not leaking.

• Start the machine and make sure the door is locked during the program.

Rapid advance the program to stop and make sure the door cannot be

opened until after the program is complete.

Monthly

• Check that valves, hoses and connections are not leaking.

• Remove any lint from the drain connection, joints in the drain pipe, etc.

Every three months

When chem icals have collected on the edges of the panels:

• Unplug the power cable.

• Turn off the water supply and release the pressure from the inlet hoses.

• Remove the water inlet hoses from the back of the machine and clean or

change the inlet filter.

• Clean the detergent drawer thoroughly.

• Take off the top and front machine panels.

• Wash away detergent and other chemicals from the panels to stop them

rusting.

• Make sure there are no leaks inside the machine. Repair as necessary.

• Clean the seal around the door.

• Refit the top and front panels.





H]

Electrolux

E L E C T R O L U X L A U N D R Y S Y S T E M S


Reservdelskatalog

W450 H, W455H



List of issues

W450H,W455H

Group

Grupp

Illustration

1007 9 7

1007 9 9

1 0 1 1 7 8

1 0 1 9 0 6

102234

102235

102 2 3 6

102237

102238

102239

102 2 4 0

102 2 4 1

102 2 4 2

102 2 4 3

102247

102248

102249

102 2 5 0

Page

37

39

29

31

9

11

13

19

41

7

17

15

21

25

23

33

35

27

Table of contents

Inlet valve 3/4", 3-way


Electr ic drain valve

Electrical drain valve

Panels

Door and door lock

Control panel

Electr ic components connect ion


Frame

Program mechanism

Outer and inner drum

M otor control

Water connect ions

Hoses

Detergent container

Liquid detergent

Drain valve



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

5

W450H,W455H

Table of contents

Frame

Panels

Door and door lock

Control panel


Program mechanism

Electric components connection

M otor control

Hoses

Water coimections

Drain valve

Electric drain valve


Detergent container

Liquid detergent

Inlet valve 3/4",

3-way


Inlet valve 3/4",

4-way

Innehållsfbrteckning

Stativ

Plåtar

Lucka och lucklås

M anöverpanel

Ytter- och innertrumma

Programverk

Eldetaljer anslutning

M otorstymrng

Slangar

Vattenanslutningar

Avloppsventil

E l.

avloppsventil

Elektrisk avloppsventil

Tvättmedelsläda

Flytande tvättmedel

Tilloppsventil 3/4",3-vägs

Tilloppsventil 3/4",l-vägs

Tilloppsventil

3/4",4-vägs

P a g e / S i d a

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

33

35

37

39

41





Group

Grapp

Page

Sida

7

W450H,W455H

Frame

Stativ

Item

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1 1

1 2

13

14

15

16

1 7

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

* 28

29

30

* 31

32

33

34

Quantity

Antal

W 450 H

1

1

1

RQ

4

1

2

1

4

1

1

8

8

12

8

1

3

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

W 4 5 5 H

1

1

1

RQ

4

1

2

1

4

1

1

8

8

12

8

472 9901-81

438 5143-01

438 5143-03

471 7864-02

471 8194-01

472 9901-26

438 0027-01

471 8305-04

471 7807-02

732 2118-01

472 9901-25

471 8149-11

471 8149-01

471 8502-25

732 2118-01

471 9746-01

471 9740-53

438 5123-01

438 5124-01

438 5124-02

471 8356-01

725 2461-51

471 8502-14

732 2118-01

438 5146-01

736 2840-51

438 5020-02

438 5175-01

438 5197-01

438 5478-03

438 5478-11

438 5021-01

B ottom plate

•Bottom plate

Bottom plate

Clip

Foot

Frame

Tensioner

Screw

Tension plate

Locking nut

Spring strut

•Rubber buffer

•Rubber buffer

•Washer

Locking nut

M otor

•Sensor

•Bushing

•Spacer tube

•Spacer tube

Screw

Screw

Washer

Locking nut

Cover

Drain valve

Hose clamp

Distance piece

Pump

Bracket

Rubber buffer

Cover

Transformer

Transformer

Connection

Benämning

Bottenplatta

•Bottenplatta

Bottenplatta

Clips

Fot

Ram

Spänne

Skruv

Spärmbricka

Låsmutter

Fjäderben

•Gummibufifert

•Gummibuffert

•Bricka

Låsmutter

M otor

•Sensor

•Bussning

•Distansrör

•Distansrör

Skruv

Skruv

Bricka

Låsmutter

Skydd

Avloppsventil

Slangklämma

M ellanstycke

Pump

Hållare

Gummibuffert

Skydd

Transformator

Transformator

Anslutning

Illustration Issue M onth Year

Illustration Utgåva M ånad År

102239/1 1 8 2004

Info

Info

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

1

1

3

3

1,2

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

3

Notes

Ainnärkning

Incl. insulation

E l.

drain valve

M 5

Complete

M 8X60

18x8,4x2

M 8

Set of 4

M 8

SOLE

N ot used

L= 1 87,5

L=22,5

M8X220

M 8X50

B RB 8,4X17

M 8

See illustr. 1 010 82

0 50 - 63

See illustr. 102247

See illustr. 102247

100-120-200V/230V

380-400-440-480V/230V

N ot used





Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

9

W450H,W455H

Panels

Plåtar

Item

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

Quantity

Antal

W4 5 0H

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

4

4

2

4

1

2

1

1

2

1

1

7

1

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

W4 5 5 H

1

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

4

4

2

4

1

2

1

1

2

1

1

7

1

438 5079-21

438 5079-30

438 5079-70

432 6307-01

471 8196-01

438 5081-16

438 5114-01

471 8341-24

432 6328-01

471 8454-07

438 5109-02

438 5086-03

438 5086-07

471 8196-01

438 5101-01

438 5101-11

471 8196-01

432 6309-02

432 6309-01

432 6314-02

432 6314-01

438 5335-01

432 6311-01

471 2437-15

432 6320-01

432 6310-01

Front panel

Front panel

Front panel

•Strip

•Plug

•Door

•Hinged joint

Screw

Panel plate

Rivet

Guide pin

Panel

Side panel

Side panel

Plug

Rear panel

Rear panel

Plug

Brace bracket

B race bracket

Top panel

Top panel

Guide

Brace

Plug

Clamp

Door

Benämning

Frontplåt

Frontplåt

Frontplåt

•List

•Plugg

•Lucka

•Gångled

Skniv

Panelplåt

Nit

Styrpiime

Panel

Sidoplåt

Sidoplåt

Plugg

Bakstycke

Bakstycke

Plugg

Stagplåt

Stagplåt

Topplock

Topplock

Styming

Stag

Propp

Klamma

Lucka

Illustration Issue M onth

Illustration Utgåva M ånad

102234/1 1 11

Info

Info

1

1

1

3

3

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Notes

Anmäikning

White

Grey

Grey, with pump

Grey

M5X12

Seeillustr. 10 2236

White

Grey

White

Grey

White

Grey

White

Grey

Year

År

2004



©



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

11

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

Door and door lock

Lucka och lucklas



10 2235/1 1 8 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nT

Description Benämning

Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

432 7112-01

472 9904-91

432 1955-01

472 9913-01

725 2366-61

432 1956-01

432 2620-09

432 6332-01

Door

Door

Door

Glass

•Gasket

•Knob

Knob

Bushing

Ball

•Spring

•Screw

Kit, lock shaft

•Lock shaft

•Washer

Bushing

•Torsion spring

Screw

Cover washer

Logotype

Trim panel

Lucka

•Lucka

••Lucka

••Glas

"Packning

•Vred

••Vred

••Bussning

••Kula

••Fjäder

••Skruv

•Kit, låsaxel

••Låsaxel

••Bricka

••Bussning

••Vrid^äder

•Skruv

•Täckbricka

Logotype

Dekorplåt

Complete

Complete

1,2

M 6SF 6X12





Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

13

W450H,W455H

Control panel

M anöverpanel


Illustration Utgåva M änad År

10 2236/1 1 8 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant

Art.No

Arl.iir


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

432 6329-01

432 6328-01

472 5783-02

432 2615-01

471 7781-03

432 6320-01

Panel

Panel plate

Panel sign

Type plate

Sign

Clamp

Panel

Panelplåt

Panelskylt

Typskylt

Skylt

Klamma

W455H

NEUTRAL

See illustr. 102240





Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

15

W450H,W455H


Ytter- och innertrumma

Item

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

Qua.

Ant.

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

3

6

1

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

6

1

6

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

1

1

2

1

Arl.No

Art.Tir

438 5058-01

471 9222-59

471 8502-14

732 2118-01

472 9903-78

438 5119-02

472 9901^2

471 8317-06

438 5137-06

438 5115-01

438 5127-01

731 2316-42

438 5117-02

472 9904-83

471 8357-01

438 5061-01

438 5118-01

471 8524-01

471 8358-02

471 8502-26

438 5176-01

471 7700-12

471 9813-01

471 9813-02

471 4494-01

472 9913-22

471 8192-01

471 8502-05

413 2960-01

Description

End piece

Tension strap

Screw

Washer

Locking nut

Drum

•Inner drum

••Lifter

•••Lifter

•••Screw

•Outer drum

•Bracket

•Gasket

•Nut

•Back plate

•Repair kit

••Seal

"Ball bearing

••Ball bearing

••Screw

••Shaft

••Screw

••Gasket

•Pulley

•Spring washer

•Screw

•Washer

Bushing

V-belt

Heating element

Heating element

Blind flange

Sensor

•Bushing

Washer

Cable set



102241/1 1 11

Benänming

Gavel

Spännband

Skruv

Bricka

Låsmutter

Trumma

•Innertrumma

••Valk

•••Valk

•••Skruv

•Yttertrumma

•Hallare

•Packning

•M utter

•Bakgavel

•Renoverings sats

••Tätning

••Kullager

••Kullager

••Skruv

••Axel

••Skruv

••Packning

•Remskiva

•Fjäderbricka

•Skruv

•Bricka

Bussning

Kilrem

Element

Element

Blindfläns

Givare

•Bussning

Bricka

Ledningssats

Info

Info

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

1

1,2

3

1

1

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

1,2

3

1,2

1,2

3

3

Notes

Anmärkning

M 8X1 40

B RB

8,4X17

M S

Complete

Kit

E l.

heated

M 6

2,2kW

230V

2,2kW

240V

Complete

N B 6x22

Heating

2004





Gr oup

Gr app

P age

Sida

1 7

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

Program mechanism

Programverk



102240/1 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant,

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

432 6802-01

432

8701-01

432

8702-01

472 9904-92

471 7848-01

432 6342-01

438 9659-01

432 6341-01

432 6342-01

471 8346-02

413 3280-01

413 3274-20

432 6325-01

432 6324-01

471 4673-95

413 2901-01

413 3274-02413 3084-03

413 3274-10

413 3275-01

432 6326-01

Program mechanism

•Printed circuit board

•Display

•Program selector

••Knob

••Rubber cushion

Spring

••Sleeve

••Cover

••Program selector

••Spring

••Screw

•Cover

Bracket

Screw

•Cable set

•Cable set

•Cover

•Cover

Sign

Cable set

Cable setCable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cover

Programverk

•Kretskort

•Display

•Programväljare

••Vred

"Gimimibricka

Fjäder

••Hylsa

••Lock

••Programväljare

••Fjäder

••Skruv

•Lock

Hållare

Skruv

•Ledningssats

•Ledningssats

•Kåpa

•Kåpa

Skylt

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Skydd

3

L2

1,2

1,2

3

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

3

Complete

CPU

Complete

Complete

Not used

20-pole

4-pole

Front

Rear

Door lock

4-pole D-bus

4-pole P-bus

4-pole M-com

5-pole

Level control





Group

Gni pp

P age

Sida

1 9

W450H,W455H

Electric components connection

Eldetaljer anslutning

Item

Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

*

*

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Qua

Anl.

1

1

2

Alt.No

Art.nr

423 6308-01

432 6805-01

471 8750-14

413 3082-01

413 3084-02

413 3084-01

413 3274-02

413 3274-01

413 3084-03

413 3182-01

413 2902-01

413 2903-01

413 3182-02

413 3088-01

413 3086-01

413 3082-01

471 8759-01

471 8759-51

438 9636-22

438 9636-23

413 2950-01

471 7859-12

471 7859-16

432 6320-01

438 8720-01

471 7977-03

471 8861-01

471 8863-01

413 3275-01

432 6803-01

432 6323-01

413 3086-02

413 3086-03

432 6830-01

Description

Component panel

Power supply

•Fuse

Fuse

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Block

Cover

Contactor

Contactor

Cable set

Clamp

Clamp

Clamp

Grommet

Cover plug

Level guard

Level guard

Cable set

Printed circuit board

Cover

Cable set

Cable set



Illustration Utgåva M ånad Ar

10 2237/1 1 8 2004

Benämning

Komponentplåt

Strömfbrsörjning

•Säkring

Säkring

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Plint

Kåpa

Kontaktor

Kontaktor

Ledningssats

Klämma

Klämma

Klamma

Genomfbring

Täckpropp

Nivåvakt

Nivåvakt

Ledningssats

Kretskort

Skydd

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Kretskort

Info

Info

3

1

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

3

3

Notes

Anmärknmg

5A slow

2-pole

4-pole P-bus

4-pole P-bus

4-pole D-bus

4-pole D-bus

4-pole

P-bus

2-pole

Drain

2-pole

E l-drain

2-pole

Pump-drain

Heating

8-pole Cold w ater

6-pole

Cold water

2-pole Cold water

50Hz

60Hz

Heating

Lower part

Upper part

See illustr. 102247

See illustr. 10 2247

5-pole

Level control

1/0-card

6-pole

Hot water

2-pole

Hot water

1/O-card





Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

21

W450H,W455H

M otor control

M otorstyrning



102242/1 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Quantity

Antal

Art.No

Art.nr

Description Benämning Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

W 4 5 0 H

W4 5 5 H

1

1

2

2

I

1

1

1

471 9785-01

432 6313-01

471 8196-01

432 6320-01

413 2990-01

438 5233-01

413 3274-10

413 3084-01

432 6312-01

M otor control

M ounting plate

Plug

Clamp

Cable set

Clamp

Cable set

Cable set

Cover

M otors tyming

Fästplat

Plugg

Klamma

Ledningssats

Bygel

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Skydd

Complete

4-pole M-com

4-pole P-bus





Group

Gmpp

Page

Sida

23

W450H,W455H

Hoses

Slan

Item

Pos.

1

* 2

*

*

3

4

5

* 6

7

8

9

* 10

11

12

13

14

* IS

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

gar

Qua

Ant.

RQ

RQ

RQ

Art.No

Art.nr

438 5018-01

471 8269-11

471 8269-12

471 8269-13

471 7871-07

736 2837-51

471 6858-85

471 7873-01

471 6858-86

438 5032-01

736 2819-51

471 7871-08

471 6858-82

736 2825-51

438 5022-01

736 2840-51

438 5174-03

438 5025-01

471 8139-03

471 8688-13

438 5026-01

438 5039-01

736 2828-51

471 7871-06

438 5034-01

471 7872-02

471 8139-09

472 9903-72

438 5024-01

438 5023-01

471 2401-52

471 8142-03

471 2265-69

471 2440-36

471 2442-41

471 8861-01

471 8863-01

877 5211-08

736 2816-51

Description

Hose

Pump

Pump

Pump

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Hose

Cable tie

Plug

Hose

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Drain hose

Hose clamp

Discharge

Hose clamp

Cover

Hose

Hose

Nipple

Hood

Hose

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Cover

Clamp

Hose

Pressure chamber

•Pressure cham ber

•Pipe

•Nipple

Hose sleeve

T-pipe

Hose

Hose

Level guard

Level gimrd

Hose

Hose clamp



102247/1 1 11

Benämning

Slang

Pump

Pump

Pump

Slangklämma

Slangklämma

Slang

Buntband

Plugg

Slang

Slangklämma

Slangklämma

Avloppsslang

Slangklämma

Avlastning

Slangklämma

Skydd

Slang

Slang

Nippel

Huv

Slang

Slangklämma

Slangklämma

Skydd

Klamma

Slang

Tryckkammare

•Tryckkammare

•Rör

•Nippel

Slanghylsa

T-rör

Slang

Slang

Nivåvakt

Nivåvakt

Slang

Slangklämma

Info

Info

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

3

3

1

3

3

1

3

3

1

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

3

Notes

Anmärkning

Drum-pump

50Hz

60Hz

DE

048-54

Circulation

Pump-drain

0 3 2

0 50 - 63

Drum-Drain

1/8"

L=1650

Complete

L=250

L=90

L=70

Per

1

m

0 1 3- 1 9

2004



Group

Page



Grupp Sida

25

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

W ater connections

Vattenanslutningar



102243/1 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua,

Anl.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

RQ

RQ

RQ

3

RQ

RQ

I

1

1

1

RQ

471 8199-01

438 0056-03

471 8688-13

471 8693-21

471 8243-07

471 8243-08

471 8688-12

877 5211-08

736 2816-51

471 8139-01

471 8102-07

471 8139-12

471 4792-01

472 6761-01

Valve

Valve

Valve

Gasket

Nipple

Nipple

Filter

Solenoid valve

Solenoid valve

Nipple

Hose

Hose clamp

Hose

Hose

Hose

Tool

Cover washer

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Packning

Nippel

Nippel

Filter

M agnetventil

M agnetventil

Nippel

Slang

Slangklämma

Slang

Slang

Slang

Verktyg

Täckbricka

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

3

1

3

1

1

1

3

3

1-way See illustr. 10 0799

3-way

See illustr. 102245,

102246

4-way

See illustr. 102244,

102245

B lack, 3/4"

1/8"

230V 50Hz

208-240V 60Hz

1/4"

Per

1

m

0 1 3- 1 9

L=330

L=1250

L=1350



©

Group

Page



Grapp

Sida

27

W450H W455H

Drain valve

Avloppsventil

Illustration Issue Month Year

Illustration Utgåva Månad Ar

102250/1

1 11

2004

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Amnärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

438 0093-02

438 00 51-01

471 8195-01

438 0054-01

438 0053-01

43 8 0055-01

43 8 0052-01

471 7801-07

43 2 6300-01

471 7871-02

471 8688-13

Drain valve

•Lower frame

•Diaphragm

•Piston

•Housing

•Gland

•Cover

•Spring

•Hose

Hose clamp

Nipple

Avloppsventil

•Underdel

•Membran

•Kolv

•Hus

•Gland

•Lock

•Fjäder

•Slang

Slangklärmna

Nippel

1,2

1

1

3

3

3

3

1

1

3

1

Complete

1/8"



Group Page



Grupp Sida

2 9

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

E lectric drain valve

E l. avloppsventil



1 0 1 1 78 1 6 O

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

472 8754-21

725 2327-61

735 2146-01

438 5177-01

471 7871-08

471 7871-07

438 5184-01

736 2840-51

736 2837-51

Drain valve

Screw

Washer

Hose

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Hose

Hose clamp

Hose clamp

Avloppsventil

Skruv

Bricka

Slang

Slangklämma

Slangklämma

Slang

Slangklämma

Slangklämma

1,2

3

3

1

3

3

1

3

3

See illustr. 101 906

M6SF 5X12

M 5

05 0-6 3

048-54



Group

Page



Gr app Sida

31

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H


E lektrisk avloppsventil


Illustration Utgiv a M ånad Å r

101906/1 1 6 2000

Item

Pos.

Qua,

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

Benämning

Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

472 8754-21

438 5181-02

471 9727-01

471 8341-24

735 2146-01

471 8341-19

731 2312-01

472 6016-00

7211252-35

472 6017-00

471 7804-01

438 5182-02

471 8340-12

472 6015-00

472 6013-00

736 2849-51

472 6012-00

438 5189-01

471 8341-24

471 7864-02

438 5020-02

736 2840-51

762 3131-01

471 7691-01

471 8341-24

732 2114-01

438 5199-01

Drain valve

Bracket

M otor

Screw

Washer

Screw

• N u t

Piston

Pin

Shaft

Torsion spring

Cover

Screw

Piston

Hose

Hose clamp

Rubber ring

Hose connection

Screw

Clip

Distance piece

Hose clamp

Insulator

Sign

Screw

Locking nut

Washer

Avloppsventil

•Konsol

•M otor

•Skruv

•Bricka

•Skruv

•M utter

•Kolvstång

•Pinne

•Axel

•Vridfjäder

•Skydd

•Skruv

•Kolv

•Slang

•Slangklämma

•M anschett

•Slanganslutning

•Skruv

•Clips

•M ellatistycke

•Slangklämma

•Isolator

•Skylt

•Skruv

•Låsmutter

M ellanlägg

1,2

3

1,2

3

3

3

3

1

3

3

1

3

31

1

3

1,2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

220V 50/60HZ

M 5X1 2

M 5

M 4X40

M 4

RT S

3,5X9,5

077-93

M 5X1 2

M 5

0 50 - 63

M 5X1 2

M 5



0

Group

Gnipp

Page

Sida



33

W450H W455H

Detergent container

Tvättmedelslada


Illustration Utgåva Månad

År

102248 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

4326361-01

432

6363-01

432

6364-01

438 5082-01

Detergent container

•Box

•Siphon

•Handle

Sign

Tvättmedelsbehallare

• L a d a

•Hävert

•Handtag

Skylt

Complete



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida



35

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

Liquid detergent

Flytande tvättmedel


Illustration Utgäva M ånad År

102249 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

Rq

1

Rq

Rq

4326361-01

471 8144-11

438 4265-01

471 8682-02

471 8682-03

Detergent container

Hose

Bracket

Hose nipple

Hose nipple

Tvättmedelsbehällare

Slang

Vridskydd

Slangnippel

Slangnippel

See illustr. 102248

L=360



®

G r o u p

G r u p p

P a g e

S i d a



3 7

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H


Tilloppsventil 3/4",3-vägs

I l lust rat ion Issue M onth Year

I l lust rat ion Utgåva M ånad År

100 797/1 1 6 2000

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Art.No

Art.iir

Description

Benämning

Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

471 8236-52

471 8236-56

471 8236-60

471 8236-62

471 8236-64

471 8236-57

471 8236-68

471 8236-66

471 8236-65

471 8236-73

471 8236-76

471 6860-15

471 6860-16

471 6860-17

471 6860-18

471 6860-19

471 6860-20

471 8234-98

471 8234-92

471 8234-94

471 8234-95

471 8234-96

471 4792-01

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Diaphragm

•Diaphragm

•Filter

•Restrictor

•Restrictor

Tool

Vent i l

Vent i l

Vent i l

Vent i l

Vent i l

Vent i l

Vent i l

Ventil

Vent i l

Vent i l

Ventil

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

• M e m b r an

• M e m b r a n

•Filter

•Strypbricka

•Strypbricka

Verktyg

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1

3

3

3

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

2 0 8 - 2 4 0 V

E P D M 2 , 1 2 0 V 6 0 H z

3-way

E P D M 2 , 2 4 0 V 6 0 H z 3-way

3-way

120V Green

1 2 0 V O r a n g e

1 2 0 V W h i t e

Green

Orange

White

N I T R I L

E P D M U S A

2,51/min

5,51/min



®

Group

Grupp

Page

Sida



39

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H


Tilloppsventü 3/4",l-vägs

Illustration Issue M onth

Illustration Utgåva M ånad

100799/1 1 6

Year

År

2000

Item

Pos.

Qua.

Ant.

Alt.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

471 8234-51

471 8234-52

471 8234-53

471 8234-56

471 8234-58

471 8234-61

471 8234-62

471 8234-63

471 6860-15

471 6860-16

471 6860-17

471 6860-18

471 6860-19

471 6860-20

471 8234-98

471 8234-92

471 8234-94

471 8234-95

471 8234-96

471 4792-01

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

Valve

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil•Coil

•Diaphragm

•Diaphragm

•Filter

•Restrictor

•Restrictor

Tool

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

Ventil

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•M embran

•M embran

•Filter

•Strypbricka

•Strypbricka

Verktyg

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1

3

3

3

208-240V

50Hz/60Hz

120V 60Hz

208-240V

208-240V

120V Green

120V Orange

120 V W hite

Green

Orange

White

NITRIL

E P D M

2,51/min

5,51/min



Gr oup

Grupp

Page

Sida



41

W 4 5 0 H , W 4 5 5 H

Inlet valve 3/4",

4-way

Tilloppsventil

3/4",4-vägs



102238/1 1 11 2004

Item

Pos.

Qua,

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

471 8240-71

471 8240-72

471 6860-18

471 6860-19

471 6860-20

471 8240-91

471 8234-92

471 8234-94

471 8234-95

471 8234-96

471 8234-97

471 4792-01

Valve

Valve

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Coil

•Diaphragm

•Filter

•Restrictor

•Restrictor

•Restrictor

Tool

Ventil

Ventil

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•Spole

•M embran

•Filter

•Strypbricka

•Strypbricka

•Strypbricka

Verktyg

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1

1

1

1

1

4-way

Complete

4-way Complete

Green

Orange

White

Grey

E P D M

2,51/min

5,51/min

1 Ol/min



t

o

o

-

J

o

t

o

o

(

O

o

o

o

o

t

t o

-

l

O

0

0

o

o

1

^

t

o

0

0

o

o

t

0

0

o

o

t 0

0

O

t

o

o

O

J

O

J

U

)

U

>

U

J

U

J

U

>

U

J

U

)

L

»

J

L

*

U

J

U

)

U

3

U

J

O

J

U

>

L

»

J

L

*

U

J

L

*

U

J

O

J

L

»

J

U

)

U

J

U

J

O

J

L

*

L

*

h

J

i

—

I

—

—

—

P

a

^

a

^

4

^

4

^

u

J

^

J

S

i

t

o

^

J

K

»

^

o

^

J

t

o

^

o

^

o

s

3

^

-

-

H

-

H

-

H

-

H

-

H

-

o

o

o

o

^

J

^

(

-

/

1

^

-

n

o

o

o

^

^

-

J

^

^

^



^

\

0

^

o

(

o

o

0

o

t

I

>

o

o

o

o

I

4

4

^

4

O

J

O

J

L

O

O

^

o

o

o

^

a

^

-

4

U

J

-

^

O

o

^

L

U

)

l

)

O

O

0

^

^

I

)

U

>

K

)

^

-

L

L

0

^

^

^

4

U

)

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

t

^

l

f

t

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

4U

>

O

J

O

J

U

)

L

»

^

L

*

J

U

1

L

^

U

J

U

>

U

>

L

*

J

U

>

U

)

U

)

U

)

L

*

J

U

J

O

J

U

:

>

U

J

O

J

U

J

U

)

L

»

J

U

J

U

J

U

>

U

)

o L

L

^

^

^

U

y



—

'

—

'

—

p

—

*

0

O

N

J

«

—

'

^

O

N

L

f

t

^

O

N

U

)

U

J

^

-

-

J

4

^

-

F

a

.

U

>

v

O

O

O

-

J

'

^

4

^

v

C

i

^

^

O

N

a

N

K

)

^

v

O

v

o

v

o

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

O

O

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

H

^

Ö

Ö

Ö

Ö

^

^

-

L

I

Ö

J

N

J

^

4

4

4

U

J

U

L

U

0

0

o

0

<

L

U

U

o

o

o

o

o

<

»

u

^

o

V

^

4

4

4

U

J

U

U

U

o

0

0

0

^

L

U

L

o

o

o

o

L

o

o

o

t

o

O

U

L

4

4

4

^

U

U

U

U

U

0

o

o

o

o

L

L

<

^

o

o

o

o

o

t

o

o

o

o

o

4

O

o

—

'

o

4

4

4

^

4

4

U

U

L

U

O

>

o

0

o

o

o

o

L

^

4

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

S

O

^

L

L

o

o

L

L

O

U

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

'

4

4

^

4

4

4

L

L

O

U

U

L

0

0

o

0

O

o

o

o

o

o

o

s

o

o

o

o

o

s

L

L

L

L

o

2

4

U

o

—

^

I

i

O

O

O

O

O

2

^

—

t

O

U

t

O

U

i

O

S

L

U

J

O

^

t

o

H

-

H

-

H

-

—

^

L

^

-

a

-

O

t

O

^

L

A

L

A

^

^

J

^

L

A

L

A

L

A

L

A

^

V

O

^

'

O

V

O

^

O

U

J

^

V

O

^

^

L

A

L

A

O

J

L

*

J

^

o

o

o

o

o

l

o

o

o

U

t

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

u

L

t

J

L

t

J

^

U

J

L

^

J

L

^

J

^

J

'

—

'

^

U

J

L

A

^

L

A

-

^

^

J

^

J

^

J

^

-

-

J

L

A

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

-

J

^

^

^

l

^

^

^

^

-

O

^

^

-

O

-

O

^

^

-

^

^

^

i

_

»

i

_

»

K

-

*

>

-

'

h

-

H

-

^

-

H

-

^

H

-

^

-

^

\

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

*

j

5

v

o

v

O

^

0

^

0

4

^

-

P

^

4

i

^

4

^

L

*

J

U

J

L

»

J

L

»

J

O

-

0

0

0

-

J

-

^

^

-

0

^

^

-

0

-

0

a

N

a

s

L

A

L

A

-

^

O

O

N

O

N

L

A

4

^

t

O

V

0

^

4

^

t

O

'

0

^

^

^

t

O

^

^

J

L

^

t

O

>

-

-

i

—

*

>

—

'

—

'

—

'

—

'

4

ä

-

4

i

^

^

^

O

O

-

^

^

^

O

N

O

N

O

N

a

N

a

N

O

\

O

N

O

N

O

N

O

N

O

O

N

a

N

O

N

O

N

a

N

O

N

4

^

^

»

o

o

o

o

o

o

0

0

0

0

-

^

J

O

N

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

-

-

0

^

-

O

N

-

-

-

4

i

^

4

i

»

.

O

O

\

O

N

O

O

0

0

O

^

0

^

0

N

a

^

a

^

a

^

0

^

O

^

O

^

0

^

0

N

a

^

0

^

O

^

a

N

0

^

L

A

L

A

L

A

^

£

)

^

^

£

)

^

O

-

0

^

-

t

>

-

P

k

L

^

J

O

0

N

L

A

L

^

J

4

i

.

^

H

-

o

—

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

t

O

t

O

t

O

t

O

L

»

J

4

^

t

O

O

<

l

H

-

L

A

^

a

N

1

(

1

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1

I

I

I

I

I

I

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

^

O

O

-

P

^

U

J

^

-

L

A

O

N

O

t

O

i

4

4

^

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

^

^

4

4

4

4

4

»

^

4

4

4

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

N

O

N

O

N

a

\

O

N

O

N

L

A

L

A

L

A

L

A

L

A

L

A

4

^

L

»

J

L

»

J

O

J

U

>

L

»

J

U

J

L

*

L

»

J

L

.

J

L

.

J

t

O

t

O

t

O

t

O

I

O

S

J

S

)

O

t

O

t

O

t

O

t

O

t

0

1

s

J

S

)

O

t

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

t

O

O

O

O

O

O

^

.

<

-

^

t

4

^

4

^

-

4

i

^

4

^

^

-

O

O

N

O

N

a

N

-

4

i

4

i

4

i

^

4

^

U

>

L

»

J

U

>

L

»

J

L

»

J

L

»

J

U

J

U

J

U

J

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

t

O

t

0

4

i

>

t

O

t

O

t

O

I

O

t

0

4

i

^

O

O

-

^

O

N

a

\

-

^

^

0

-

O

L

A

V

O

v

O

^

O

L

O

L

O

O

O

O

a

N

O

N

O

N

a

N

O

N

O

N

a

N

O

N

O

N

4

:

4

^

4

^

4

i

4

Ä

.

4

i

4

^

4

^

-

F

^

4

^

^

-

4

^

4

i

4

^

4

i

P

^

-

4

i

4

i

>

.

4

:

>

.

4

^

4

^

^

o

~

o

o

^

o

o

o

a

^

^

o

o

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

i

o

S

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

O

—

L

*

>

U

J

L

^

^

^

»

J

L

O

U

J

U

J

W

U

J

L

t

J

L

O

L

>

>

>

L

i

>

>

U

J

O

J

U

J

L

»

J

L

»

J

L

h

}

L

^

O

O

J

U

J

V

O

o

N

4

F

4

2

o

c

<

—

'

O

J

O

J

>

i

—

'

t

O

S

>

I

O

I

O

t

0

4

^

4

^

4

^

L

^

L

O

L

O

L

O

L

O

L

O

L

»

J

U

)

U

>

O

J

L

*

L

*

L

*

4

^

4

^

U

J

U

J

.

F

^

L

»

J

L

t

J

4

^

L

*

L

*

4

^

L

O

U

J

L

»

J

U

J

U

^

L

*

L

U

O

J

L

a

^

-

O

i

—

'

L

A

-

L

h

i

L

^

L

f

>

L

A

L

A

i

—

-

0

-

0

^

-

0

^

-

0

-

-

J

-

0

^

-

-

0

^

^

-

0

'

—

'

1

-

-

^

^

'

—

'

^

O

^

i

—

'

'

s

D

-

O

i

—

'

^

-

O

^

O

^

^

^

^

V

O

^

^

L

A

Page

Sida

2



Numerical index/Nummerregister

Art.No/Art.iir

471 8693-21

471 8750-14

471 8759-01

471 8759-51

471 8861-01

471 8861-01

471 8863-01

471 8863-01

471 9222-59

471 9727-01

471 9740-53

471 9746-01

471 9785-01

471 9813-01

471 9813-02

472 5783-02

472 6012-00

472 6013-00

472 6015-00

472 6016-00

472 6017-00

472 6761-01

472 8754-21

472 8754-21

472 9901-25

472 9901-26

472 9901-42

472 9901-81

472 9903-72

472 9903-78

472 9904-83

472 9904-91

472 9904-92

472 9913-01

472 9913-22

721 1252-35

725 2327-61

725 2366-61

725 2461-51

7312312-01

7312316-42

732 2114-01

732 2118-01

732 2118-01

735 2146-01

735 2146-01

736 2816-51

Page/Sida

25

19

19

19

19

23

19

23

15

31

7

7

21

15

15

13

31

31

31

31

31

25

29

31

7

7

15

7

23

15

15

11

17

11

15

31

29

11

7

31

15

31

7

15

29

31

23

Page/Sida Art.No/Art.nT

Page/Sida Art.N o/Art.nr Page/Sida

http://art.no/Art.iir

http://art.no/Art.iir



• . »

#

• •

Power bus (P-bus)

N interlock

L interlock

N

L

1

2

3

4

Data bus (D-bus)

Data

1



CLK

GND

+9VDC

2

3

4

L_'' :M

o

Date

User

Format

2005-09-28

Iy9chg

A4

ELS

SE-341

8 0

LJUNGBY SWEDEN

Electric Documentation

WASHER EXTRACTORS

Principle schematic

Page

1

of

5

43232002616

A1

n a II

Q. CL 0. 0.

PB1

ä

i i i i h a 11

'J'

I



W o a d * * * *

n .03

/ Data bus .

^ ^

- RS JS T ^

4^ M

FreewT T Coin I

m

TT

UevelT

_». Data bus / /3.03 54 ' - f j " ^ ,

r

L

JtiL

1.03/L (fuse)

/1 .03 /N( fuse)_^

A5

Inpl

PSU board

Serv

Emerg

D-bus

D-bus

uMr%m

-¥^-

+9VDC

^\-

T

^

12

Temp

82

Date

User

Format

2005-09-28

lyQchg

A4

ELS

SE-341 80 LJUNGBY SWEDEN

Elofitric Documentation

^

WASHER EXTRACTORS

^'rinciple schematic

Page 2

of 5

432320 0 261 6

• • #

m

. •

A1



" 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5

å i d i ^

TY Ifct

W

l^ f j få^H-f f i^mi 'y t f f l '^

Éif Sti

T T

Con 14

Con 16

Con I7T T

/1.07 / Power bus.

P-busr

-¥///-

12.061

Data bus _ ^

_^ Power bus. /

_^ Data bus. /

X

ICX.

1 P-bus r T ~ r 1 R S23 2, . . . D-bus r- r' TT, D - b u s l l l J P - l o a d . . . . ^

A11

"5 :

J

T

Ü U U

?J

0^ 4=

7~T i I i i ^ ^ j j i i i i i i i i I I i

/1.03/HEAT N ,

/1.03/HEAT L,

" ^

U )

a

J

Y24

å

J

Y22I A Y20

^

J

] [

Y13

J J

13 A Y12 A YI II v^

5 7 s

J H

l

n ;i IL

Serv

XI932

A8

wm

Program

selector

A7

A9

Quick

Wash

Switches

PfelP^

* 1 ^ <*» I *« » " •

M^lel

"cfiTfi

*? •

r^ i

OT 1

Wi

wTJ:

Display

A101

Date

User

2005-09-28

Iy9chg

A4

ELS



WASHER EXTRACTORS

Principle schematic

Page 3

of 5

4 3 2 3 2 0 0 2 6 1 6

ID.

A I

A5

A7

A8

A9

A11

A101

A104

A106

B1

B2

B3

84

E1

B e s k r i v n i n g

Elektroniskt programverk

Power Supply Unit

Elektroniskt proaramverk disolav

Programvä l ja re

Panelskylt

l/O-kort 1

Manöverpanelmodul

Bakre elmodul

Värmemodu l

Tempera tu rg ivare

Nivåvakt

Rotationsaivare

Nivågivare tvättprogram

Varmee lement

Descr ip t ion

Electronic timer

Electronic timer, disolav

Program selector

Panel sign

I/O card

1

Control panel module

Rear electrical module

Heatina module

Tempera tu re sensor

Level switch

Rotation sensor

Level transmitter wash program

Heating element

Beschreibung

Elektronisches Programmwerk

Elektronisches Proarammwerk. Disolav

Panelschild

I/O-Karte

1

Steuerfeldmodul

Hinteres Elektromodul

Heizmodul

Tempera tu rênsor

Niveauschalter

Rotationssensor

Niveaugeber Waschprogramm

Heizelement

Description

Minuterie électn>nique

Minuterie électroniaue. écran

Symbole panneau de commande

Carte

E/S 1

Module panneau

de

commande

Module électrique amére

Module chauffaae

Capteur

de

temperature

Intemipteur de niveau

Caoteur de rotation

In temjp teur

de

niveau programme

de

lavage

Element chauffant



E2

F l

F2

F13

K21

M1

S3

S4

T2

U1

Y1

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y20

Y22

Y24

Y80

varmee lement

Säkring manöver 5AT

Säkring manöver 5AT

Säkrina Trafo sekundär

Vämiekon lakto r

Motor

Gränsläaesbrvtare stänad lucka

Gränslägesbrytare låst lucka

Transformator motorstyming

Motorstvrnina

Ventil aviopp

Ventil inlopp kallt fack 1

Ventil inlopp kallt fack

2

Ventil inlopp kallt fack 3

Ventil inlopp varmt trumma

Inlet valve hot. soap box

2

Ventil inlopp varmt fack

4

Lucklåsspole

Heatina element

Fuse control system

5AT

Fuse control system

5AT

Fuse transfomier secondary

Heating contactor

Motor

Limit switch door closed

Limit switch door locked

Transformer motor controller

Motor controller

Drain valve

Inlet valve cold, soap box 1

Inlet valve

cold,

soao box

2

Inlet valve cold, soap box 3

Inlet valve hot, drum

Inlet valve cold, soao box

4

Inlet valve hot, soap box

4

Coil door lock

Heizelement

Sicherung Steuersystem

5AT

Sicherung Steuersystem 5AT

_

Sicheruna

Heizkontaktgeber

Motor

Grenzpositionsschalter aeschlossene

Tür

Grenzpositionsschalter verriegelte Tür

Transfo rmator Motorsteuemng

Motorsteueruna

Ventil Abfluss

Ventil Einlauf Kalt Fach 1

Ventil Einlauf Kalt Fach

2

Ventil Einlauf Kalt Fach 3

Ventil Einlauf Warm Trommel

Ventil Einlauf Warm Fach

2

Ventil Einlauf Warm Fach

4

Spule Türverriegelung

Element chauffant

Fusib le commande

5AT

Fusib le com mande

5AT

Fusible

Contacteur chauffage

Moteur

Contact fin

de

course porte fem ée

Contact fin

de

course porte verrouillée

Transfo rmator Motorsteuemng

Contröleur du moteur

Vanne

de

vidange

Vanne d 'admission ,

froid,

bolte

å

produits

1

Vanne d 'admission .

froid.

botte

å

oroduits

2

Vanne d 'admission ,

froid,

boite

å

produits

3

Vanne d'admission, chaud, tambour

Vanne d'admission. chaud. boTte

å

produits

2

Vanne d'admission, chaud, boite

å

produits

4

Bobine verrouillage porte

Date

User

Format

2005-09-28

Iy9chg

A4

ELS

SE-341

80

LJUNGBY SWEDEN


^

WASHER EXTRACTORS

^Component list

Page

4

of 5

4 3 2 3 2 0 0 2 6 1 6

Rear view

A9



S3 S4a

S4b Y80

T2

O

Date

2005-09-28

User Iv9chg

Format A4

ELS



WASHER EXTRACTORS

Component place list

Page 5

of 5

43232002616

1

/

; / .



I

4

I

I

r

•

*2

I

1

1

LOiPAüT



Tumble dryer, T4130

«^w^r-**

f *T" nMlllillB

• COMPASS CONTROL

MICROPROCESSOR

• RESIDUAL MOISTURE CONTROL

• TEMPERATURE AND TIME

SELECTION

• STAINLESS STEEL REVERSING

DRUM

• LOW ENERGY CONSUMPTION

• ANTI-CREASE CYCLE

• REVERSIBLE DOOR

• SERVICE PROGRAM

• STACKABLEONTOPOFW455H

The tumble dryer T4130 with Compass

Control microprocessor works with RMC

(Residual Moisture Control) for an accurate

drying result and a low energy consumption.

The start and programs are selected by a

control knob fitted on the control panel

together with a large and clear display.

The dryer

has

a reversing drum for

less

tan

gling of arge items.

Anti-crease cycle in the end ofprogram means

that the drum rotates a few seconds every

minute untU the garment

is

removed.

T U M B L E D R Y E R , T 4 1 3 0

Scale 1:20

Dimensions mm



78

78 -tr

&

197

1 0 0

1.

Door opening 0 370 mm

2.

Elear ical conneaion

3.

E x h a us t c o n n e a i o n 0 1 0 0 m m

Specification

M o d e l /Ty p e

T 4 1 3 0

Capacity, kg

filling factor

1:24

5.5

filling factor

1:22

6.0

In n e rd ru m

volume litres

1 3 0

d ia me te r mm

575

: 4 (

Voltage V

4 0 0 3 - 5 0

4 4 0 3 - 6 0

Loading

k W

5.3

Fuse

A

1 0

Weight kgs

net

60

gross

67

Sh ip p in g

volume m3

0.520

* other voltages available on request

Specification

Type

T 4 1 3 0

Total time

fiiU load*

34 min

Energy

c o n su mp t io n

kWh/load*

2.75

Evaporation

g/min

81

Energy

kWh/litre

water

evaporated

0.93

H e a t in g

electricity

k W

5.1

Air outlet

mm

0 1 0 0

Evacuated air

m ' / h

2 6 0

Pressure drop

max Pa

60

Sound level

dB(A)

<70

* At rated capacity 100% cotton load at 50% init ial moisture dryed to 0%.

Installation:

The tum ble dryer

is

to be secured. The m achine

is delivered with faaory mounted f itt ings for

attachment to the ship deck by means of 4 M 8

bolts.

Posit ioning of machines:

300*



Installation manual

T4130

487 03 32 61.00

EN-

Safety instructions



Safety instructions

1

This m achine is only intended for drying wa ter-washed

garments.

Clothes that have been cleaned with chemicals/inflammable

liquids, must NOT be dried in the machine.

Remo ve clothes from the tumble dryer as soon a s they are dry.

This prevents them from becoming creased, and reduces the

risk of spontaneous ignition.

The m achine m ust not be used for drying foam rubber or

foamlike m aterials.

The m achine m ust not be used for drying floor m ops*.

The machine must not be used by minors.

The m achine m ust not be hosed down with water.

Mechanical, electrical and gas installations must only be

carried out by authorised personnel.

If the machine has a fault, this must be reported as soon as

possible to the person in charge. This is important for your

own safety and for the safety of others.

Gas dryers only:

The machine is not to be installed In rooms containing cleaning

machines with perchloroethylene, TRICHLOROETHYLENE or

CHLOROFLUOROCONTAINING HYDROCARBONS as cleaning

agents.

Wha t to do if you sm ell gas:

Do not try to light any appliance.

Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in

Contents



Contents

Technical data 6

Dimension sketch 7

Unpacking 8

Positioning 8

Mec hanical installation 8

Floor mounting 8

Door reversal 9

Installation on board a ship 10

Washing column 11

Conden sate dryer 12

Installation of ventilating syste m 12

Electric installation 13

Evacuation system 14

Air principle 14

Freshair 14

Exhaust duct 15

Electric installation 17

Function check 18

The manufacturer reserves the right to modify design and

material specifications without notice.

Technical data



Technical data - T4130/4130C

Drum volume

Weight:

Drum:

Capacity:

Heat effect:

Motor:

Netto

Diameter

Depth

Revolutions

G-factor

Effect

Revolutions 50 Hz

Revolutions

60 Hz

Air consumption:

Piping:

Evacuation

Condensation water

Pressure drop:

Sound pressure level:

Standard

130 liter

48

kg

57 5 mm

50 0

mm

53

rpm

0.9

5,5 kg

dryer

5 ,1 / 3 ,2 k W

0,13 kW

2800 rpm

3360 rpm

Condens

130 liter

52

kg

57 5 mm

50 0

mm

53

rpm

0.9

5,5 kg

3,0

kW

0,20 kW

2800 rpm

3360 rpm

0 100

260 m3/h

1/2" hose to drain

Evacuation 50/60 Hz max. 60 Pa

< 70 dB (A) < 70 dB (A)

Teclinical data



Dimension sketcii

595 735

A97_.

_|T1

^ 1

510

C M

O

t

'-

- 1 -

,44

49

Unpacking



Unpacking

Unpacl< the dryer from the pacl<aging.

There are no transportation fittings. Release

the dryer from the pallet by cutting the plastic

ribbon.

Positioning

^

©

Place the dryer in such a way that work can

be done as easily as possible by the user as

well as the service technician. The door is

reversible.

The distance to the wall or other equipment

behind the dryer should be m in. 300 mm and

the distance to the sides min. 70 mm (if the

dryer is to be equipped with a coin box the

width of the coin box must also be added).

However, for the purpose of servicing the dryer

there should be free access to the bacl< of it.

The dryer can be positioned on a 55-litre

washing machine to form a washing column.

IVIeclianical installation

Fig

Adjust the dryer to ensure that it is horizontal

^2 ) and stands firmly on all 4 feet.

The max, height adjustment is 14 mm.

Floor mounting

Fig

The dryer can be installed directly on the floor

(^ and fastened by means of the accompanying

Fasten the cups by means of the

screws.

• ^ .

A drilling plan is given in fig. 3

in the form of alternative 1 (from

42,5

510 42 ,5 Al t .1

Door



Door reversal

1.

Disconnect the power supply to the dryer.

2. Loosen the hinge mounting and push it down to

allow the door to be lifted off. See step 4.

Unscrew the hinge mounting.

N B Hold the door securely while loosening the

screws.

3. Unscrew the

cover screws at the

opposite side and

loosely attach the

hinge mounting.

Screw in the cover

screws where the

hinge was

previously

mounted.

Upper pivot

TOP

4. Dismount the handle.

Place the door on a non-abrasive base.

5. Remove all screws (A=14 pes.) from the edges.

6. Remove the upper and lower pivots.

7. Release the

locking plates by

loosening the barb

with a screwdriver.

8. Lift off the back

panel . Press the

locking plates out,

swap them over and

press into position.

Lower pivot

TOP

r

9. Turn the back panel 180° (half a turn) as shown.

10 . Assemble the door. Tighten the screws along the

edges. Fit the upper and lower pivots.

10

Installation on board a ship



Installation on board a ship

if the dryer is intended for installation on

board a ship, fittings are mounted from factory

(instead of ifeet) on the dryer for attachment to

the ship floor by means of 4 M8 bolts.

Drilling plan, see fig. 1.

^

12,5 573 12,5

Front

Washing column

11



Washing column

The dryer can be installed on top of a 55-litre

washing machine WE455H or on a 130-litre

dryer T4130(C).

The lower machine must be levelled and rest

on all four feet.

©

ig

• Place the frame on the top plate of the

' ^ lower machine, ensuring that the holes for the

fastening bracket A are at the rear.

• Screw the dryer feet of the upper machine all

the way home to ensure that they do not touch

the top plate of the lower machine.

• Lift the dryer into position, thereby making

sure that the machine fronts flush.

Fig

©

• As a protection against tilting, the two

accompanying plate screws are to be inserted

in either side in holes B.

If holes B are not provided in the side plates,

drill them w ith a 3.3 mm

drill.

Note

If it is hard to read the display adjust

the contrast in the service menu (see the

programming manual supplied the dryer).

12

Condens ate dryer



Conde nsat e dryer

Kondenstumbleren har ikke aftræk

(evakuering) til det fri.

The air is circulated in a closed system

between the dryer and condensing unit.

The water in the garments condenses in the

condensing unit.

All the energy (3,4/2,4 kW) used for drying

the garments ends up in the room in the

form of heat.

During operation, the room experiences

a temperature increase, which results in

a need for ventilation.

The m oisture ends up as water in the

drains.

Fig Note The hose must be "sloping"

i^ towards the drain and not form a water

trap.

Installation of ventilating system

For

ventilation,

a thermostatically

controlled fan , type EQ 250, is

used.

It can be ordered as item

988 80 20 43.

Fig

®

r

no

The fan is to be placed on a

wall facing the outside behind

the condensate dryer, while the

thermostat is placed further into

the room in an accessible place.

The fresh air intake must end

in the room in front of the dryer,

4 . • : x : : • ^ 1 1 I ifm^ r jfzrv

<:•:>{•

» • • # . • « v C * « u C X r . . ^ 4 K 4 M > i i n ' >-vii-

' -.W

. . jf r j - ' W ^ y ^ W f r

Y

Condensate dryers

1 3



Ways to change over condensate dryers

ås

o be carried out by qualified personnel

A

3 X 400/415V + N 3,4kW

B1

3 X 200/230/240V 3,4kW

1

X

230/240V 3,4kW

Applies to all dryer types

U1

14

Installation



Evacuation system

(does nsi apply to condensate dryers)

Air principle

The ventilator creates low pressure in the

dryer, drawing air into the drum via the heating

unit.

The heated air passes through the garments

and the holes of the coarse filter.

Then the air flows through a lint screen

positioned in the door. After this, the air is

evacuated through the fan and the evacuation

system.

It is very important that the dryer gets enough

fresh air, see next section.

Fresh air

©

For the machine to w ork optimally w ith the

shortest possible drying time, it is important

for the air input to the room to come from an

aperture from outside through w hich the same

amount of air is taken into the room as is

blown out. To avoid a draught in the room, the

air inlet should preferably be placed behind the

dryer.

The free area* of the air inlet aperture must

be five times the area of the exhaust duct.

The resistance in the grating/slats should not

exceed 10 Pa

(0.1

mbar).

The air consumption is approx. 260 m^/h.

Note

that grates/slatted openings often block

half the total area of the fresh air intake.

Remember to make allowance for this fact

Installation

15



Exhaust duct

• The exhaust duct must be smooth on the

inside (low

air

resistance).

• The exhaust duct must lead to the outdoors.

• The exhaust duct must lead clear of the

building as condensation may cause frost

damage

to

the bu ilding.

• The exhaust duct must be protected against

rain and foreign objects.

Fig

• The exhaust duct must have gentle bends.

• The exhaust duct must not be a shared duct

between dryers and appliances using gas or

other fuels as their energy source.

When several dryers share an exhaust duct

Fig • The exhaust duct diameter must increase after

' ^ each dryer.

The table below shows the exhaust duct

diameter and the necessary fresh-air inlet area.

Note It is recommended that each dryer is

connected to a separate exhaust duct.

©

®

The exhaust duct

f

\

diameter must not

be reduced.

**

If the exhaust duct lenght exceeds 6 m the diameter must be increased.

No. of

dryers

Exhaust

m3/h

d

m m

Fresh

air

inlet

cm2

Exhaust duct

lenght 0-6m d

**Exhaust duct

lenght 6-50m d

16

Installation



Evacuation system

Gentle bends

Several dryers share an exhaust duct

1-

Installation

17



Electric installation

Æ

To be carried out by qualified personnel

The dryer must be given a fuse group of its

own and switch in accordance with IEC 60947.

For each

dryer,

a multi-pole permanent switch

is to be placed in the permanent installation. It

must be easily accessible, but there must be

no mistaking it for the operating switch for the

dryer.

The motor features an integrated thermal fuse,

which is why motor protection in the installation

is unnecessary.

Remove the top plate of the dryer to connect

the cab le. Install the dryer as a permanent

installation.

See dimensions in the table.

Function check, see next page.

The dryer must be equipped with

supplementary protection in accordance w ith

current regulations.

Æ

External fan

A connection terminal is available for

controlling an external fan.

Cable dimensioning table

0'

s

© '

Connection

of external

contactor

X2 1 -^

Ext. connection

Max. 1,25A

(Does not apply for marine models)

Voltage Power- Heating Fuse

18

Function check



Funktion clieck

Æ

To be carried out by qualified personnel

Check whether the drum is empty and the door

has been closed.

Start the dryer

Check whether the door lock is working:

The drum must stop if the loading door is

opened.

Fig

The dryer has a one-phased motor, which

r^ is why the direction of rotation (clockwise) is

^ ^ always correct.

Marine version

For dryers on board a ship (3-phase motor) the

direction of rotation must be checked.

If the direction of rotation is not correct, swop

two phases on the connection terminal.

Final test

Let the dryer work for 5 minutes on a program

that requires heat.

Then check whether the heating is working by

opening the front door and feel the heat.

If the above tests-points are in order, the dryer

is ready for use.

Service organisation/dealer

If deficiencies or errors are detected, pleasecontact your local service organisation/dealer.

Æ

W/^yyyy///y^^///y///^y^yyy/yy//y^yyyy/y





Operating Manual

T4130

487033231.00

EN

Contents



Contents

Safety instructions 4

General 5

Con trol Panel 5

Control knob 5

Display 6

Drying Program 7

Drying Functions 9

Start 9

Stop 9

Cha nging drying program after starting 9

Handling 11

Starting With Control Knob 17

Error Messages 13

Maintenance 15

The m anufacturer reserves the right to make changes to design and

material specifications.

Safety instructions



\ Safety

This machine is only intended for drying water-washed garments.

Clothes that have been cleaned w ith chemicals/inflammable liquids,

must NOT be dried in the machine.

Remove clothes from the tumble dryer as soon as they are dry. This

prevents them from becoming creased, and reduces the risk of sponta

neous ignition.

The machine must not be used for drying foam rubber or foamlike

materials.

The machine must not be used for drying floor mops*.

The machine must not be used by children.

The machine must not be hosed down w ith water.

Mechanical, electrical installation MUST only be carried out by qualified

personnel

Report machine faults and refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

This is important for your own safety and for the safety of other users.

*Applies only to floor mops containing polyproylene.

Textiles as silk and wool must not be overdried

to avoid the risk of wrinkage.

General



Control Panel

Fig.

The control panel is used to choose the drying program with options and

( j } to start and stop the machine. The panel houses a control knob and a display.

r^

Display

Control knob

Control knob

r<^

Fig.

@

Fig.

©

The control knob is used to select drying program

and any other available functions.

Turn the knob until the required program is

shown on the display.

Confirm your choice by pushing in the knob.

Repeat this procedure until all the required

functions have been chosen.

r<^

6180

General



Display

The display presents the drying programs and

ig.

®

additional functions. The up and down arrows on

the right-hand side of the display indicate that

there are more options available in the current

menu. Turn the l<nob for next program.

Note

If there is not enough room to show all the

text on the display, the first part will be dis

played briefly before the text scrolls to the

side to display the second part. This sequen

ce will be repeated as long the text in ques

tion is activated.

General

Drying Program



Tiie maciiine is programmed w itli a number of

programs adapted to tiie range of uses to wliic li

tiie machine is intended.

Tiie following drying programs can be available:

^ Drying program EXTRA DRY.*

0

^ Drying program DRY.*

®

Fjg- Drying program iRON DRY 5 %.*

®

* Automatic program controlled by Residual

Moisture Control (RMC) to the specified dryness.

Fjg- Time program X yiN UT ES program. Duration

( l ) depends on the selected time, up to 90 minutes.

r

IRON DRY 5%

15 MINUTES

r

t

t

General

Drying Functions



START

Fjg- Turn the control knob to the START row. Press

Cl) the knob to start the selected program.

STOP

^ Press the control knob to stop the program.

Ci) Restart the drying program by pressing the

control knob again.

Changing drying program after starting

Fig. Press the control knob to stop the program. Turn

(3 ) the control knob to the new program and press.

r

EXTRA DRY

HIGH TEMP

START

CHANGE TEMPERATURE

r(I>

r

DRY

IRON DRY 5%

t

Handling

11

Starting with control knob



Fig. • Select ti ie desired drying program with the

(T ) control knob and confirm by pressing the

knob.

Fig. • Turn knob clockwise to change drying

(2 )

temperature.

Fig.

• Press knob and select desired tempe rature:

(t) HIGH (70 °C), ME DIU M (60 °C) or LOW (50

°C).

• Press knob to start.

On coin-operated machines the duration of the

program is controlled by the coin/token inserted

• Pay for the desired time.

• Select tempe rature and confirm by pressing

the knob.

• Press knob to start.

Note

The programm es EX TRA DRY, DRY and IRON

DRY 5% are not available on machines where

payment is done before the dryer is started.

r<T>

EXTRA DRY

DRY

t

r<?>

EXTRA DRY

HIGH TEMP ^

CHANGE TEMPERA

EXIT I

r

SELECT TEMP

HI GH T E M PE R A

MEDIDM TEMPERATURE I

Error messages

13

Error Messages



Fig. A fault in the program or in the machine is

(T ) indicated by an error message comprising

an error code and a descriptive text.

The washing program and the error code can

be reset before restarting by holding in the knob

for at least 10 seconds or turning off the power to

the machine.

r< >

CodeText Cause/Action

E10 INCORRECT PROGRAMMING Program ming error/incorrect or missing param eter(s).

E l l DRYING ERROR WITH RMC PROGRAM

Maximum allowable RIVIC time exceeded (non-coin

operated m odels only).

E l2 DRYING ERROR WITH AUTOSTOP PROGRAM

E15 NO VACUÜ1V1 DETECTED

Maximum allowable Autostop time exceeded (non-

coin operated models only).

The vacuum switch/pressostat does not shut within 12

seconds after the dryer is started.

For other error messages or repeated error messages, contact service p ersonnel.

Maintenance

15

Maintenance



The following should be carried out at regular

intervals, depending on the frequency of use.

Daily

Fig.

©

Fig.

©

Check that the dnjm stops when the door is

opened.

Check that the l int screen in the door has

been cleaned . The l int screen m ust be

removed for cleaning. U se a soft brush or your

hand. R emem ber to re-install the l int screen.

Check that the gaskets around the coarse

fi lter/air condenser and the door gasket have

been cleaned . Clean with a moist cloth.

Chec k that the l int screen is unbroken.

Check that the m achine wil l not start unti l the

start button has been activated.

r^

Picture of removing the

lint screen from the door is

missing.

r^

Pscture of cleaning the iint

screeer) using a soft brush is

missing.

Qua r te r ly /Se m i -a nnua l ly

• Che ck that the fresh-a ir intake at the rear of

the machine is not clogged by lint or blocked

in any other way.

• Chec k that the evacuation system is tight and

that the ducts are not clogged by lint or dust or

blocked in any other way.

• W ipe off/clean drum and lifters with citric acid

(Acidum citricum). If soap/softener residue

remains, it is recomm ended also to use a

coarse sponge.

The frequency of cleaning should depend on

the operating frequency - with a minimum of

once a quarter.

16 Maintenance

Annually



Checl< that the fresh-air intal<e to the room and

the vent ducts/pipes in and from the room are not

clogged by lint/dust or in any other

way.

Clean

as required, depending on the frequency of use.

Minimum once a year.

At least once a year the inside wearing parts of

the machine should be checked by a service

person and cleaned of lint.

H] Electrolux

E L E C T R O L U X L A U N D R Y S Y S T E M S


Reservdelskatalog



T 41 3 0 , T 41 3 0 C

Tumble dryer

Group

Grupp

List of issues

T4130,T4130C

Illustration Page Table of contents



200231

200234

200235

200236

200237

200238

200239

200240

200241

200242

200243

200244

200245

31

11

23

29

15

17

7

9

13

19

21

25

27

Control unit

Control panel with Compa ss C ontrol

Motor alternative

Transformer, marine/ condensation

Drum, compl.

Drum,

condensation

Cabinet

Cabinet, condensation

Door complete

Rear panel, complete

Rear panel, condensation

Heater unit, el

Condenser unit

Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

5

T4130,T4130C

Table of contents

Innehållsforteckning

Page/Sida



Cabinet


Control panel with Compass Control

Door complete

*Drum,

compl.

'Drum, condensation

*Rear panel, complete

*Rear panel, condensation

Motor a lternative

Heater un it, el

*Condenserunit

'Transformer, marine/ condensation

'Control unit

Kabinett

Kabinet, kondens

Manöver panel med Compass Control

Lucka komplett

Trumma kompl.

Trumma, kondens

Bakstycke, komplett

Bakstycke, kondens

Motoralternativ

Uppvärmningsenhet, el

Kondensenhet

Transformator, marine/ kondens

Automatenhet

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

7

T4130

Cabinet

Kab nett



200239/1

1 6

2005



Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant

Att.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

487 1760-29

124 0459-01

487 1699-01

125

8323-00

487 1668-55

487 1668-96

488 0383-10

487 1959-10

487 1818-18

487 1670-40

4871671-40

487 1880-56

487 1749-89

125 8138-02

487 1760-31

125 8120-21

487 1973-24

487 1749-07

487 1749-06

725 2501-51

487 1749-05

732 2120-01

Hinge

Plug

Plug

Reinforcement

Bracket

Guiding element

Screw

Sealing strip

Top

panel

Spacer element

Cabinet

Hinge plate

Foot

Screen

Screw

Grid

Assembly set

Disc

Spacer element

Screw

Fitting

Locking nut

Gangjärn

Plugg

Plugg

Förstärkning

Hållare

Gland

Skruv

Tätningslist

Topplåt

Distansstycke

Kabinett

Gångjamsplåt

Fot

Luftgaller

Skmv

Galler

Monteringssats

•Skiva

•Distansstycke

•Skruv

•Beslag

•Låsmutter

White

M4X10

Stainless

Grey

Grey

M5X12

Black

Marine

M10X50

M10



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

9

T4130C


Kabinet,

kondens



Ar

200240/1 1 6 2005



Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

487

124

487

125

487

487

487

488

487

487

487

487

487

487

487

125

125

1760-29

0459-01

1699-01

8323-00

1668-55

1880-56

1668-96

0383-10

1959-10

1818-18

1668-35

1670-40

1671-40

1749-89

1760-31

8090-32

8120-21

Hinge

Plug

Plug

Reinforcement

Bracket

Hinge plate

Guiding element

Screw

Sealing strip

Top panel

Guide pin

Spacer element

Cabinet

Foot

Screw

Condensing unit

Grid

Gangjärn

Plugg

Plugg

Förstärkning

Hållare

Gångjarnsplåt

Gland

Sknjv

Tätningslist

Topplåt

Styrtapp

Distansstycke

Kabinett

Fot

Skruv

Kondensaggregat

Galler

White

M4X10

Stainless

Grey

Grey

M5X12

Black



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

11

T4130,T4130C

Control panel with Compass Control

Manöver panel med Compass Control



200234/1 1 6 2005



Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant,

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

Benämning

Info

Info

Notes

Anmäri<ning

487 2434-07

487 2434-00

432 6344-01

472 5788-01

487 2293-06

487 2293-07

487 2293-04

Compas Control

Control panel

Locking ring

Panel signType plade

Type plade

Instruction plate

Compas Control

Manöverpanel

Låsring

Panelskylt

Typskylt

Typskylt

Instruktionsskylt

1,2

3

1,2

3

3

3

3

T4130

T4130C



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

13

T4130,T4130C

Door complete

Lucka komplett



200241/1 1 6 2005



Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art. No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

16

432

487

487

487

487

488

487

487

647

125

487

487

125

125

125

487

487

2620-09

1975-53

1920-83

2232-40

1760-32

0349-13

1880-10

1699-29

1253-01

8381-03

1668-54

1698-98

8398-04

8396-04

8598-00

1699-27

1749-80

Sign

Front door complete

•Door handle

•Front door

•Lock pin

•Screw

•Insert

•Inner door

•Rubber bushing

•Seal

•Bracket

•Snap catch

•Filter

•Lint screen

•Cover

Door gasket

Pin

Skylt

Frontlucka komplett

•Luckhandtag

•Frontlucka

•Låstapp

•Skruv

•Kuts

•Innerdörr

•Gummibussning

•Tätning

•Hållare

•Snaplås

•Filter

•Luddfilter

•Avskärmning

Luckpackning

Stift

Electrolux

Grey

Silvergrey

Grey

K40X12

Stainless



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

15

T4130

Drum,

compl.

Trumma kompl.



200237/2 2 8 2005

Description Benämning Notes



item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art. No

Art.nr

Info

Info

AnmärknIng

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

487

128

647

036

125

125

128

125

487

125

128

487

487

487

471

487

487

489

732

487

487

0285-32

0024-30

1219-60

6160-01

8496-03

8384-09

0000-70

8692-01

1699-24

8388-23

0000-60

1760-35

0412-64

1749-12

1764-17

1880-07

0105-19

0112-57

2112-01

1699-84

1749-15

Flange

•Sealing ring

•Lock

•Switch•Stop

•Flange

•Seal

•Angular slide componenet

•Cover

•Cover

•Felt sealing

•Microswitch

•Cable

set

•Support roller

Drum

•Lifter

Drive belt

Bearing housing

•Locking

nut

•Bearing house with bearing

•Flange

Flans

•Tätningsring

•Lås

•Brytare

•Stopp

•Fläns

•Tätning

•Glidvinkel

•Avskärmning

•Huv

•Filttätning

•Mikrobrytare

•Ledningssats

•Stödrulle

Trumma

•Valk

Drivrem

Lagerhus

•Låsmutter

•Lagerhus

med

lagring

•Fläns

Complete

Complete

Complete

Complete

Grey

Complete

M4



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

1 7

T4130C

Drum, condensation

Trumma, kondens


Illustration Utgåva Månad År

200238/2 2 8 2005

Item

Qua

Art.No

Description Benamning

Info

Notes



Pos.

Ant.

Art.nr

Info

Anmärkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

487

128

647

036

125

125

128

125

487

487

128

487

487

487

125

125

125

487

471

487

487

489

732

487

487

0285-33

0024-30

1219-60

6160-01

8496-03

8384-09

0000-70

8692-01

0281-64

2434-04

0000-60

1760-35

0412-62

1749-12

8742-03

8391-10

4041-00

2434-08

1764-17

1880-07

0105-19

0112-57

2112-01

1699-84

1749-15

Flange

•Sealing ring

•Lock

•Switch

•Stop

•Flange

•Seal

•Angular slide componenet

•Thermostat

•Bracket

•Felt sealing

•Microswitch

•Cable

set

•Support roller

•Ring

•Seal

•Temperature sensor

•Bracket

Drum

•Litter

Drive belt

Bearing housing

•Locking

nut

•Bearing house with bearing

•Flange

Flans

•Tätningsring

•Lås

•Brytare

•Stopp

•Fläns

•Tätning

•Glidvinkel

•Termostat

•Hållare

•Filttätning

•Mikrobrytare

•Ledningssats

•Stodrulle

•Ring

•Tätning

•Termogivare

•Hållare

Trumma

•Valk

Drivrem

Lagerhus

•Låsmutter

•Lagerhus med lagring

•Fläns

Complete

OHS

Complete

Complete

NTC

N T C

Complete

Grey

Complete

M4



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

19

T4130

Rear panel, complete

Bakstycke, kom plett



200242/2 2 8 2005

Item Qua Art.No

Description Benännning

Info

Notes



Pos.

Ant.

Art.nr

Info Anmårkning

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

* 12

487 1747-29

487 1749-59

487 2434-05

647 1209-42

487 0289-09

647 1209-44

125 8112-15

487 1699-18

487 0289-01

487 1747-31

125 8148-00

725 2327-51

Rear panel

Sensor

Cover plate

Sealing strip

Lock-nut

Sealing strip

Air channel

Casing

Cable glands

Air reducing plate

Felt sealing

Screw

Bakre plat

Sensor

Tackplåt

Tätningslist

Kontramutter

Tätningslist

Luftkanal

Kåpa

Kabelavlastare

Damperplåt

Filttätning

Skmv

Complete

M20

8x3x300

M20

M5X12



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

21

T4130C

Rear panel, condensation

Bakstycke, kondens

Item

Qua

Art.No Description Benämning



200243/2 2 8 2005

Info Notes



Pos.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

* 13

*

14

* 15

* 16

* 17

*

18

* 19

* 20

*21

»22

*23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

• 3 1

Ant.

2

3

Art.nr

487 1699-19

724 1297-01

487 1699-05

731 2312-01

487 1699-06

487 1699-49

125 8147-00

488 0383-10

487 1749-59

487 1668-66

487 0289-01

487 1747-62

647 1209-42

487 2434-05

487 0289-09

647 1209-44

471 6859-83

487 1747-32

125 8139-00

487 1699-18

487 1935-48

487 2434-12

487 2434-13

487 1973-25

487 1973-26

487 1973-27

487 1973-28

487 1973-29

487 1973-30

487 1697-05

487 1697-06

487 1747-85

487 1760-11

487 1747-63

487 1975-49

487 0412-63

Hose

Screw

Fitting

Nut

Connection branch

Drain hose

Seal

Screw

Sensor

Rear panel

Cable glands

Guiding plate

Sealing strip

Cover plate

Lock-nut

Sealing strip

Membrane

Air channel

Cover

Casing

Button

Rail

Rail

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

Heating element

•Thermostat

•Thermostat

•Cover

Membrane

Guiding plate

Fan motor

Cable set

Slang

Skruv

Beslag

Mutter

Anslutning

Avioppsslang

Tätning

Skruv

Sensor

Bakre plat

Kabelavlastare

Ledplåt

Tätningslist

Täckplat

Kontramutter

Tätningslist

Membran

Luftkanal

Avskärmning

Kåpa

Knopp

Skena

Skena

Varmeelement

Varmeelement

Varmeelement

Varmeelement

Varmeelement

Varmeelement

•Termostat

•Termostat

•Avskärmning

Membran

Ledplåt

Fläktmotor

Ledningssats

Info

3

3

3

3

1

1,2

3

3

3

1

3

3

1

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

1,2

3

3

3

1,2

3

Annnärkning

M4X25

M4

M4X10

Complete

M20

M20

8x3x300

Reset

200V 1000/2000W Complete






130°C

180°C

07,3

230-240V



G r o u p

G r u p p

P a g e

S i da

2 3

T4130,T4130C

Motor alternative

Motora ternativ

i l lustration Issue Mon th Year

Il lustration Utgåva Månad Ar

200235/1 1 6 2005

Item

Pos.

Qua

AnI

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

Benämning Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning



487 0285-30

487 0285-31

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

487

487

128

128

487

487

487

487

735

487

487

487

487

735

487

487

125

034

679

487

488

1714-18

1714-19

0033-50

0006-70

0127-20

1714-30

1714-31

0105-18

3114-00

2233-85

2233-87

2233-89

0105-18

3114-00

2233-96

1921-02

8168-21

4741-31

0010-70

0105-14

0386-13

Motor

Motor

Motor

Motor

•Fan wheel

•Air cover

•Pressure spring

•Motor

•Motor

•Washer

•C-clamp

•Pulley

•Pulley

••Locking ring

• •Washer

••C-clamp

•Belt

•Spring

•Motor bracket

•Rubber buf fer

•Screw

•Fitt ing

•Screw

Motor

Motor

Motor

Motor

•Flakhjul

•Lufthölje

• T r y c k p d e r

•Motor

•Motor

•Bricka

•Segersäkring

•Mellanhjul

•Mel lanhjul

••Låsring

••Bricka

••Segersäkring

•Rem

•Fjäder

•Motorkonsol

•Gummidämpare

•Skruv

•Beslag

•Skruv

Complete 200-240V 1-3AC/400-

415 3NAC50HZ

Complete 200-240V 1-3AC/400-

4 1 5 V 3 N A C 6 0 H Z

Complete 400-480V 3AC 50Hz

Complete 400-480V 3AC 60Hz

1AC 50/60HZ

3AC 50/60HZ

D12

50Hz Complete

60Hz Complete

0 9

D12

50/60HZ

M5X12



C

2

i

n

Q

C

C

Q

Q

D

Q

S

S

m<

.

X

S

c

c

o

C

S

S

l

i

«

Z

i

3

3

—

~

0

«

1

S

1

5

«

H

I

UooC

r

>

^

(

M

OOC

^

a

>

C0(

0

O

_'

c

E

:

a

>oo

3

1

s

s

f

g

1

c

<

.

1

a

1

O

Z

"

<

I

E

^

O

)

_'

c

CE

<£

c

c

•

<

"

<

«

o

Ü

"

(

D

O

)

-

J

J

5

5

t

o

Ü

O

Z

O

)

C

0

O

C

O

C

M

C

S

I

C

M

C

N

'

cc

J

S

.

D

—

.

E

^

S

s

2

1

1

2

-

Q

(

D

S

^

•

Q

.

c

i

_

i

_

(

n

c

c

E

^

5

§

S

g

D

2

.

5

,

S

?

C

E

:

c

n

£

c

ü

m

<

v

:

T

C

«

D

^

M

O

^

O

O

o

o

o

•

•

•

•

•

•

o

o

o

i

n

m

o

^

i

>

-

o

o

o

M

C

M

C

M

i

>

c

N

c

c

o

t

M

O

O

o

o

o

c

i

n

s

s

m

h

<

(

N

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

I

O

O

G

p

O

T

c

o

«

o



^

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

2

g

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

S

t

t

5

M

o

O

O

O

-

^

O

O

O

O

O

r

f

O

O

T

T

L

D

^

<

C

N

C

N

C

V

J

M

C

V

J

N

C

M

C

N

t

N

C

N

O

O

^

S

C

>

C

0

0

O

C

M

C

N

0

C

V

J

M

C

M

C

M

C

g

M

r

M

C

O

C

s

C

N

C

0

C

O

C

O

T

-

c

'

C

«

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

i

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

p

^

„

^

-J

—

(

n

D

D

D

D

D

D

>

D

a

o

(

D

_

^

£

1

^

^

É

É

EE

E

É

E

E

E

E

1

E

E

1

E

E

c

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

-

v

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

X

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

^

Q

(

D

<

D

a

>

(

D

(

D

a

j

a

)

u

a

)

U

-

5

-

5

;

-

^

—

"m

^

5

>

=

£

E

E

E

E

E

g

c

c

E

E

E

§

e

c

<

D

.

£

t

o

a

3

a

3

<

D

a

3

<

u

a

)

<

u

a

)

<

D

0

o

^

^

.

2

u

^

a

j

E

(

D

O

<

D

Q

O

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

O

I

-

I

-

Q

Z

I

-

I

-

U

.

W

O

T

O

O

J

O

T

N

^

O

J

O

h

O

O

C

T

d

O

T

T

O

I

O

l

O

M

o

~

h

^

^

M

o

0

v

•

•

•

•

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

o

>

h

-

e

M

i

n

i

n

u

)

n

i

n

m

u

>

m

i

n

i

n

h

-

h

>

i

«

o

c

M

h

-

h

-

h

-

e

«

h

^

~

~

^

>

«

~

»

«

D

O

M

h

o

«

c

s

^

^

^

^

^

^

»

-

»

-

»

-

T

-

^

^

o

c

n

T

-

^

«

^

^

>

>

>

N

.

o

~

^

K

h

h

h

<

>

h

o

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Q

O

O

O

f

O

G

O

O

O

O

O

^

M

e

^

m

(

o

^

O

T

N

•

^

T

-

»

-

T

»

«

T

T

^

M



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

27

T4130C

Condenser unit

Kondensenhet



Ar

200245/2 2 8 2005

Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art. No

Art.nr


Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

128 0012-60

64 7 1209-30

125 8132-05

64 7 1226-10

125 8135-24

64 7 1218-51

64 7 1201-75

487 0412-61

487 1760-04

64 7 1228-00

487 1669-30

64 7 1202-40

487 1668-94

125 8131-53

125 8098-06

Fan blade

Shock absorber

mat

Condenser housing

Float

Casing

Microswitch

Capacitor

Cable set

Pump

Hose

Bracket

Seal

Pipe

Condenser housing

Buttom plate

Fläktblad

Dämpmatta

Kondensorhus

Flottör

Kåpa

Mikrobrytare

Kondensator

Ledningssats

Pump

Slang

Hållare

Tätning

Rör

Kondensorhus

Bottenplåt

Upper

Complete

2MF

400-480V 3AC

Lower



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

29

T4130C

Transformer, marine/ condensation

Transformator, marine/ kondens

Illustration Issue Month Y ear


200236/2 2 8 2005

Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art. No

Art.nr


info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning



487 2434-06

487 0281-51

Assembly plate

Transformer

Monteringsplåt

Transformator



Group

Grupp

Page

Sida

31

T4130,T4130C

Control unit

Automatenhet

Item

Pos.

Qua

Ant.

Art.No

Art.nr

Description

Benämning



200231/2 2 8 2005

Info

Info

Notes

Anmärkning



1

* 2

*

* 3

*

*

*

* 4

*

* 5

* 6

* 7

* 8

* 9

* 10

*

*

*

11

12

*

*

*13

*

* 14

* 15

* 16

* 17

*

*

*

2

3

1

487 2434-02

487 0412-51

487 0412-51

487 0412-50

487 0412-57

487 0412-60

487 0412-61

487 1600-16

487 2100-81

487 0281-16

487 2307-53

487 2307-33

487 0279-51

487 2434-03

487 1686-72

4871535-76

4871535-65

438 9636-12

438 9636-13

438 9636-11

487 0281-50

487 0289-46

487 1535-79

487 0281-04

487 0274-14

488 7307-04

487 1897-95

Component plate

Cable

Cable

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set

Cable set



•Spacer sleeve

•Spacer

Spacer plate

Relay

Fitting

Capacitor

Capacitor

Catch

Relay

Relay

Relay

Transformer

Transformer

Capacitor

Connection clamp

Fuse holder

Precision fuse

Precision fuse

Komponentplåt

Ledninger

Ledninger

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Ledningssats

Kretskort

Kretskort

•Distanshylla

•Distans

Distansplåt

Relä

Beslag

Kondensator

Kondensator

Spärr

Relä

Relä

Relä

Transformator

Transformator

Kondensator

Anslutningsklämma

Säkringshallare

Finsäkring

Finsäkring

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1,2

1,2

3

3

3

1,2

3

1,2

1,2

3

1,2

1,2

1.2

1,2

1,2

1,2

3

3

1,2

1,2

200-240V 1/3AC

230-240V 1AC Condensing

Condensing

400-480V 3AC

400-480V 3AC Condensing

Selecta II Sweden

Selecta II

Plastic

Plastic

24V DC

Selecta II

8pF 230-240V 1AC/230-480V

3AC

lOpF 200V 3AC Japan

230-240V 1AC/230-240V

3AC/400-415V3NAC

200V 3AC

400-480V 3AC

400-480V 3AC

5-poe

2,5AT

230-240V 1AC/400-415V

3AC

0,5A 400-480V 3AC

Condensing

a

^

t

o

3

C

W

C

•

g

W

3a<

a

C

C

—

C

C

<

T

-T

-

T

-

O

T

-

T

-

T

-

K

'

T

C

O

C

O

C

M

T

C

O

C

O

T

•

.

o

C

M

C

<

<

m

C

D

'

g

C

D

t

^

O

C

O

'

^

O

C

M

C

O

-

m

m

c

O

t

o

o

c

n

o

o

o

c

o

m

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

c

c

c

c

c

t

^

i

^

t

^

'

^

t

*

*

^

'

C

<

C

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

O

C

O

C

O

'

^

'

C

o

0

•

D

C

O

5

O

)

C

D

i

n

n

n

o

o

n

n

o

n

>

n

T

n

C

4

<

^

w

E

C

t

^

C

O

C

J

)

0

-

>

-

C

M

C

O

C

O

-

^

C

M

m

(

3

5

-

<

-

C

M

t

^

^

^

O

C

C

C

C

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

i

n

n

o

m

i

3

o

M

t

^

^

^

^

^

T

T

T

T

T

^

C

*

d

*

*

T

^

*

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

K

t

>

^

^

^

^

^

T

-

T

-

^

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

^

.

^

cr

^

o

n

^

n

æ

T

T

T

T

T

•

<

C

C

C

-

^

C

'

>

C

i

C

C

C

C

C

0

E

E

z

0

•

a

_

•

0

o

'

o

E3

C

Q

.

o

z

t

<

C

D

•

g

C

O

"

S

D

)

C

Q

•

^

O

O

T

C

M

C

O

'

>

<

^

3

3

D

O

T

C

D

•

^

-

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

(

0

0

0

0

0

•

^

l

n

^

n

l

O

C

i

i

i

i

i

i

t

i

i

i

l

T

i

i

i

T

O

n

n

n

n

n

C

C

C

X

5

O

C

O

C

O

O

O

O

O

C

O

O

O

O

O

C

O

O

O

T

-

<

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

-

>

0

0

0

0

O

O

O

0

0

O

0

O

O

0

O

0

0

0

0

0

0

-

<

-

T

oc

o

^

C

U

^

c

^

C

M

'

«

T

C

M

C

M

v

C

<

<

C

o

•

^

C

o

a

o

r

D

o

n

t

^

^

T

T

T

•

^

D

D

o

•

D

D

C

O

O

O

M

M

o

o

o

<

T

O

C

M

C

O

C

D

m

'

<

-

<

-

c

n

O

C

0

O

O

-

i

-

C

M

C

M

1

0

O

•

•

•

•

•

»

•

•

•

•

O

O

O

O

O

C

M

O

O

-

<

-

C

M

1

0

•

<

C

C

C

C

C

C

O

O

O

O

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

•

C

»

O

O

O

O

C

O

C

O

O

O

O

O

C

i

n

o

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

o

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

•

^

T

-

-

<

-

T

-

-

^

T

-

-

^

T

-

T

-

T



N

T

^

R

o

c

T

c

O

T

m

t

^

^

v

^

T

c

m

t

^

m

i

N

-

<

T

C

S

I

C

M

C

N

C

\

J

<

C

M

(

N

C

O

T

-

c

>

J

C

M

C

M

-

C

M

T

-

p

g

C

\

J

C

M

i

i

^

^

C

C

^

<

M

C

C

T

C

C

<

T

T

-

m

O

I

^

^

C

C

C

<

1

C

^

O

O

C

M

C

O

o

o

T

-

^

^

'

*

*

^

«

-

^

'

^

O

l

0

C

0

O

O

O

C

0

^

~

0

O

O

C

M

C

M

-

L

O

O

O

O

T

O

'

<

<

^

<

T

T

O

•

<

o

<

<

T

T

T

o

m

m

t

^

*

c

O

T

-

*

*

d

*

m

c

D

T

o

^

r

n

t

l

i

i

l

l

i

i

i

l

i

T

i

T

T

T

T

i

i

i

l

i

i

i

i

l

i

i

i

l

i

i

i

i

t

^

O

a

)

C

O

c

O

C

O

C

D

I

^

C

M

C

M

T

-

C

M

C

n

c

n

c

3

5

C

n

O

>

C

J

)

C

O

<

3

5

0

)

<

D

O

O

C

O

O

r

^

t

^

-

>

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

O

'

t

n

C

M

'

O

O

O

O

C

O

C

O

O

'

<

-

T

-

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

T

-

T

-

<

-

C

M

C

M

i

n

-

^

C

J

>

C

M

O

-

T

-

T

-

C

M

T

-

O

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

T

-

1

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

v

j

C

M

C

M

O

C

M

C

O

m

c

O

C

O

v

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

r

^

O

O

O

O

O

O

t

^

O

O

T

T

T

^

T

T

^

T

T

O

T

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

0

t

^

C

^

~

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

3

O

T

C

C

O

0

O

C

O

C

O

0

O

C

0

O

C

O

C

0

O

'

^

<

^

M

C

M

C

M

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

•

«

r

«

J

-

<

t

«

t

<

t

^

C

D

t

D

(

D

C

O

C

D

<

D

C

O

C

O

C

D

(

D

<

D

C

D

C

O

C

D

C

D

t

^

t

^

r

~

t

^

t

^

r

^

t

^

r

^

t

^

<

T

^

^

^

n

^

n

^

>

c

^

^

r

^

>

^

n

^

n

^

^

^

<

^

^

T

>

T

r

c

O

<

n

T

T

T

T

^

M

-

C

M

C

M

T

^

T

-

T

-

C

O

T

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

T

-

C

O

C

M

T

-

C

S

I

C

M

T

-

C

M

C

O

i

n

m

c

D

I

C

M

C

M

l

O

l

O

a

)

C

3

>

O

C

J

>

C

n

'

<

-

C

J

>

C

3

)

T

-

T

-

C

M

l

O

l

O

C

O

C

O

t

^

t

^

O

C

D

C

D

m

c

O

C

M

O

O

O

O

'<

t

m

c

D

t

^

C

O

C

J

5

0

<

J

)

C

O

-

<

-

<

-

O

m

i

^

O

<

T

0

n

O

C

C

C

O

n

O

3

C

O

<

<

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

0

O

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1

I

I

I

I

I

I

^

^

>

c

>

C

>

5

C

C

0

^

<

m

c

D

>

n

n

M

c

^

«

*

*

*

*

*

*

^

*

*

*

D

T

O

C

O

C

W

n

^

^

^

~

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

X

C

J

C

3

C

J

^

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

^

.

^

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

<

-

<

-

<

-

<

-

T

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

N

I

C

M

»

o

^

^

O

<

T

3

^

^

^

n

^

^

>

c

>

o

w

>

T

c

^

n

<

<

<

«

<

o

n

n

^

n

n

n

C

C

C

-

C

-

c

O

C

C

C

•

<

C

C

C

O

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

T

-

C

M

C

M

'

<

-

C

M

C

M

->

-

<

-

<

-

C

M

C

M

'

<

-

T

-

C

\

1

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

^

O

-

^

C

M

C

O

'

n

D

C

3

D

i

n

n

D

'

C

D

(

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

C

M

'

<

C

M

1

D

O

O

T

n

C

}

J

^

J

0

O

O

C

3

<

^

O

C

O

O

t

D

(

D

C

D

C

D

(

0

(

D

^

~

t

^

T

-

c

O

t

0

^

n

l

n

c

D

C

J

>

C

n

C

J

)

C

3

5

C

O

•

^

t

T

l

^

O

O

O

O

C

3

5

0

0

0

0

•

^

•

<

-

T

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

O

•

^

C

O

<

n

T

-

c

O

C

O

I

^

^

^

t

^

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

T

T

l

l

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

T

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

i

O

n

O

<

C

^

^

^

^

O

3

a

C

a

U

n

X

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

c

O

C

O

C

O

O

C

O

t

D

<

O

C

D

C

O

C

D

(

D

C

O

C

D

t

D

I

^

K

t

^

l

^

C

O

C

J

C

>

>

C

J

C

3

C

3

C

5

S

<

:

5

3

æ

C

J

C

J

t

3

<

J

C

J

C

J

C

J

C

J

:

>

-

<

-

>

-

T

-

T

-

<

-

d

-

<

l

m

m

m

C

D

t

O

(

D

C

O

t

O

<

D

C

D

C

D

C

D

C

D

t

D

<

D

C

D

C

D

<

D

e

D

e

O

(

D

C

D

C

D

C

O

C

D

C

D

<

D

C

O

C

£

J

C

D

C

D

C

D

C

O

C

D

C

D

(

D

C

O

C

D

t

^

l

^

l

^

t

^

t

^

t

^

t

^

-

r

-

T

-

<

-

-

<

-

-

r

-

-

t

-

T

-

-

<

-

-

<

-

-

,

-

r

-

<

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

-

.

-

T

-

T

-

-

,

-

T

-

<

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

-

<

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

-

.

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

<

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

»

^

^

T

3

^

n

^

^

^

n

^

^

0

^

o

^

^

T

T

T

o

^

T

c

n

c

<

^

T

T

c

C

C

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

C

T

T

x

T

C

C

T

T

C

f

T

C

T

C

'

^

C

C

r

T

C

C

C

'

^

C

M

O

O

O

T

-

O

O

C

O

C

:

>

C

J

C

O

O

'

^

'

C

O

C

O

O

-

<

-

>

-

C

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

(

3

<

-

C

M

C

O

I

^

t

~

C

O

C

M

O

O

O

O

C

M

O

O

O

O

O

C

M

'

«

-

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

C

0

C

0

t

^

t

^

t

^

C

D

C

0

C

0

i

n

O

O

-

<

-

.

T

a

O

T

T

T

<

•

-

o

-

-

T

c

M

T

e

n

m

i

n

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

«

•

l

l

i

i

l

l

i

i

a

i

l

l

l

i

l

l

i

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

l

C

»

C

3

5

t

^

O

O

<

X

J

C

O

C

O

'

O

O

T

-

C

O

O

O

C

D

C

O

C

O

C

M

C

M

C

M

O

O

O

O

O

C

D

C

M

-

<

t

C

O

O

T

l

C

D

C

D

C

D

-

T

l

3

5

0

0

m

U

5

m

i

n

i

^

'

C

:

5

'

<

-

>

-

T

-

T

-

C

C

C

'

T

C

C

O

O

O

O

O

O

t

3

C

^

D

O

O

O

O

i

C

C

C

C

'

^

C

C

«

o

O

O

O

O

C

r

>

^

O

O

O

O

O

O

C

-

<

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

C

O

'

O

C

D

C

D

h

-

h

-

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

C

D

C

O

C

D

C

D

C

D

t

^

^

}

O

h

-

^

-

T

-

<

T

-

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

C

M

O

C

»

O

O

O

O

C

O

C

X

5

}

O

C

O

C

O

O

O

C

O

O

O

C

O

C

X

5

X

3

»

O

<

5

»

O

C

O

C

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

C

M

C

D

(

3

3

n

T

C

O

i

n

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

n

U

x

n

n

«

n

n

o

n

n

n

n

n

r

U

n

M

C

M

o

^

r

c

M

t

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

^

^

^

^

O

-

'

I

-

T

-

T

-

-

r

-

r

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

T

-

-

1

^

T

-

T

-

r

-

.

,

-

'

,

-

'

^

-

^

,

-

,

-

-

r

-

T

-

T

-

'

,

-

T

-

'

.

-

'

,

^

'

,

-

'

,

-

'

^

-

^

-

^

T

t

'

5

r

'

*

'

*

T

t

-

«

t

'

*

'

*

'

*

'

*

-

*

'

*

'

*

'

*

'

«

t

-

<

*

-

'

*

'

*

T

t

'

*

Art.No/Art.nr

Numerical index/Numm erregister

Page/Sida Art.No/Art.nr Page/Sida Art.No/Art.nr Page/Sida Art.No/Art.nr

Page

Sida

2

Page/Sida





>

o

0

Öo

C

C

f

^

Z

C

r

^

Z

C

X

^

T

c

a

J

E

r

E

a

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

I

^

^

/

^

w

r

^

H

z

I

C



C

i

n

C

ah

>

o

^

Q1

O

0

C

C

t

>

o

l

O

?

1

(

C

»

>

3

I

r

a

O

S

X

2

:

«

^

r

^

S

9

A

t

A

2

A

1

H

C

_

o

^

Ic

Ö

^

o

/

5

^

D

C(

T

•

L

O

t

^

CCi

n

C0•rC

m

>oC

O

Too

C M S :

Coin Meter Single

CMSNB:

Coin Meter Single No Box.

C o i n m e t e r

1

3

FÛ

1

1

; ; j - coini sv

Brown

o coini Green

" ~ ~ " C o in l GND W h i t e

^ ^ C oi n 2 5V

^

cam

^ ^ C o ln 2

GND

•

•

•

•

0

1 CM

o CM

2 a.

3

2

2

CM

3 0-

1

electa II

Machine Access

C M D :

Coin Meter Double

CMDNB:

Coin Meter Double No Box.

C o i n m e t e r 1

1

t'^

Coin meter

2

1

1 i

L

::;;r" -•"'"' - B™™

o coinl Green

WhiteJ

^ - r „ , . , ,v

B'«

^ coinj Green

JI^HT", . , . , „ , „ Wh ite

•

•

0

1

CM

3

'

CO

2

CM

3 °-

H

^ H Selecta

C P :

E S S :

Electrolux Single System

PCR:

Prepared for Card Reader

M u -

1

1

1

1

1

^ ^ Co i nl 5V

O c o i n l P22-2

' Coinl GND P2 2- 3

0

1

CM

0

CM

3

1

Selecta II

P 9 .

1 -

p ~

1 —

•PTC

•;;;qpii^

P i i -3

L



Central Payment

RU N

( N C )

(NO)

Brown

D1

White I [Brown

+/- 24V

OV

CP/CALCAD/FLEX

487 19 24 55

P22-0

P22-2

C o i n l

GND

P22-3

^ C 0 i n 2

^ M C o l n Z

GND

I

0

1

CM

2 s

3

1

2

CM

Selecta I

P9

1

PT

P7

•PTTC

• ; ; ; ^ p i i ^ i

P11-3

I

^ ^ ^ " ' C oi nl 5V

^ c o i n l

^ ^ • " ^ C o i nl

GND

^ ^ ^ C o in 2 5V

^ O c o i n 2

^ ^ Co i n2

GND

1

^^^^H

^ ^ H

'

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

0

1

CM

O CM

2 D.

3

2

2

CM

3 ^

Selecta II

P 9 .

1

—

P T Z ;

• GND V Z

i RX «

s TX —

i3 24V —

n . _ . .. «

IF H

I I H

v i w f ^JL'

«*

Z

" S I

CM p m

UJ

Payment Sysem - Selecta verson 2

Page

4/4

DRAWING NO.

487 19 52 87

REV.NO.

01

H

\

é

>

M

l

o

O

5

9

e

8

U

e

A

e

s

q

e

e

Q

Z

G

L

U

ß

w

u

u

o

s

e

e

M

z

*

Z

Æ

S

Z

a

z

a

e

Z

r

u

Z

O

l

O

Q

I

U

O

Ü

O

c

C

U

h

-

H

o

^

o

o

o

'

o

o

o

o

n

o

Q

http://rev.no/

http://rev.no/



J

3

O

z

O

l

O

o

Q

9

000000

00

u0000

0000

000

y

-

^n

>

O

m

n

0

z

0Ü

^

o

000

00000000

u00

0

0

000

z

r

0

^

000

0000

0

[

o

g

o

J

T

o

o

o

[

o

£

i

p

w

e

s

a

1

1

«

o

2

C

>

(

O

ø[

Ö

<o>I

X

I

£

1

O

I

<

l

:

d

3

h

^

1

1

>

S

•

i

i

-

-

^

-

=

—

r

q

—

v

H

d

:

z

s

K

.

0z025

S

Q

0e(

S

C

0NCCt

n

O0

•

^

^

?

r'

o

o

r

^

^

L

+

Q

&

H

^

—

f

z

0

0

H

S

1

V

•

a

§

^

^

0

•

0_

k

—

3

o

oc

(

O

2

H

L

U



Ô

•

A

O

9

Z

9

—

?

Q

E

—

CC

Z

-

<

o

D

^

—

l

=

z

w

Z

C

i

S

l

l

6

Z

6

Z

S

r

2

•

c

N

XOC>o0

to

o

X

0

C

0

o

I

E

o

>

>

6

a

Documents

H12vxcvxcv